JP2009178336A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can eliminate monotonousness in the process up to the winning of lottery. <P>SOLUTION: In a Pachinko game machine 1, game balls are shot out toward a playfield 20 as operated with a handle unit 318 and when the game balls win the start pocket provided in the playfield 20, an internal lottery processing is conducted. Then, the jackpot game by the open/close operation of a jackpot pocket is carried out only when a win is earned as the result of lottery by the internal lottery processing, and game balls are awarded as the first game value. Also provided is an article housing unit capable of housing an article different from the game balls and the given article is awarded as the second game value according to the progress of games. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2009,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

Conventionally, when a launched game ball wins a winning opening, an internal lottery is performed, and when a big win is won by the lottery, the opening / closing winning opening repeatedly opens and closes as a big win game, and a lot of games There is a gaming machine to which a ball can be given. Since this type of gaming machine is not given a large amount of gaming machines unless the lottery is won, the game in the process until the lottery is won is monotonous and the interest is reduced (for example, see Patent Document 1).

In recent years, a gaming machine provided with a small role game (generally called per 2R) has been proposed.
This small role game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing prize winning opening is performed less than before.
In this type of gaming machine, even if a large number of game balls are not given as in the big hit game, a chance change game with a winning probability is given as a game value different from the game ball is triggered by the small role game.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-168619

However, in addition to the jackpot game to which a large amount of game balls can be granted, even if a small role game to which a probability variation game can be granted is newly provided, the small role game is not granted unless the lottery is won. The fundamental problem that the process until winning is monotonous has not been solved.

An object of the present invention is to suppress a decrease in interest by eliminating the monotony of a game in the process until winning a lottery.

A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming board provided with a gaming area, a lower component part that is disposed at a lower part on the front side than the gaming board and has an overhanging part projecting forward so as to face the player. , Provided in the lower component part, a launch instruction means capable of advancing the game by instructing the launch of a game ball toward the game area from the outside, and a predetermined instruction by an instruction from the outside via the launch instruction means A launching means capable of launching a game ball from the launch position toward the game area, a reception port provided in the game area and capable of receiving a game ball launched by the launching means, and a game to the reception opening An acceptance detecting means for detecting acceptance of a ball, a rejected ball mode provided in the game area and incapable of winning a game ball launched by the launching means, and an allowed ball mode in which a winning of a game ball is allowed Opening and closing prize that can be displaced between And an open / close winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game ball to the open / close winning opening, and provided in the lower component part so that the game ball can be stored and the stored game ball can be guided to the launch position A storage guide means, a payout control means for controlling the payout of the game ball toward the storage guide means based on at least the detection by the open / close prize detection means, and When the lottery means that can perform the lottery process based on the acceptance detection, the result teaching display means that teaches and displays the result of the lottery process by the lottery means, and the result of the lottery process by the lottery means as long as,
A first game value giving means capable of giving a game ball as a first game value by displacing the open / close winning opening from the rejected ball mode to the allowed ball mode, and for the progress of the game Accordingly, a second game value giving means that can give an item different from the game ball as a second game value and a part of the lower component part can be given by the second game value giving means. An item storage means having a storage portion capable of storing the product, wherein the product storage means is in front of the firing instruction means and the storage guide means and is closest to the player. The gaming machine is characterized in that the housing portion is provided in the vicinity of the foremost position of the overhanging portion so as to be visible to the player.

In the above gaming machine, a lower component is disposed at the lower part of the front side of the game board, and this lower component is provided with at least firing instruction means and storage guide means. Based on the acceptance of the game ball at the entrance, a lottery process related to the payout of the game ball is performed with a predetermined winning probability, and the winning of the game ball to the open / close prize opening is allowed according to the result of the lottery process Is done.
This open / close prize opening is in a rejected ball mode (for example, the open / close prize opening is closed) in which game balls cannot always be won, and only when the result of the lottery process is a win, It shifts to a permitted ball mode (for example, a mode in which an open / close winning port is opened) in which a winning is permitted, and a game ball as a first game value can be given by the first game value giving means. Specifically, the game ball as the first game value is paid out toward the storage guide means in accordance with the winning of the game ball at the opening / closing prize opening. In addition, if the open / close winning opening is repeatedly displaced over a plurality of rounds between the reject ball mode and the permitted ball mode, or if the open / close winning port is held in the permitted ball mode to such an extent that a large amount of game balls can be won, the game area A large amount of game balls are paid out with respect to the number of game balls fired toward. Here, “only when the result of the lottery process is a win” means not only a win involving the operation of the condition device but also a win not involving the operation of the condition device (generally referred to as “small win”). ) Is also included.

In this way, when the open / close winning opening is displaced from the rejected ball mode to the permitted ball mode, the payout rate as a ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout control means to the number of game balls launched toward the game area Will temporarily improve (rise). “Temporary” means that, for example, when a jackpot game is being executed, the opening / closing winning opening is maintained in the rejecting ball only for a specific period in which the opening / closing winning opening is displaced from the rejecting ball mode to the permitting ball mode. This is because the payout rate increases as compared with a predetermined period when the player is in the game (for example, in the normal gaming state). Although not described in the above means, the normal game state is a game state in which a lottery process is performed with a predetermined probability by the lottery means based on the detection of the reception of the game ball by the acceptance detection means (a big hit game is executed) When there is a lottery process based on the detection of the reception of the game ball by the reception detection means). Note that there are a gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the lottery process by the lottery means is performed with a normal probability and a gaming state (probability variation gaming state) in which the lottery processing is performed with a higher probability of winning than the normal probability. Although there is a certain gaming machine, when the jackpot game is executed, the payout rate increases as compared with both the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state.

In the above means, in such a gaming machine, the game machine further includes a second game value imparting unit capable of imparting an item different from the game ball, and an item accommodating unit having an accommodating part capable of accommodating the item. . The second game value giving means is not able to give a game ball only when the result of the lottery process is a win as in the first game value giving means, and is based on the assumption that a game has been performed. Goods can be granted by opportunity. In this way, by allowing a predetermined item different from the game ball to be given as the second game value, the predetermined item can be changed according to the progress of the game without affecting the payout rate. It can be granted at any time. In other words, even if a predetermined product is given, it does not affect the payout rate, so that the condition for giving the product can be arbitrarily set as necessary (that is, in a flexible manner). In other words, regardless of whether lottery processing has been performed or not, it is possible to easily give a predetermined item when it is desired to give the item. This makes it possible to acquire items with a higher possibility in addition to the gameability aimed only at acquiring game balls as in conventional gaming machines, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. A specific example of “as needed” is 30 minutes after the power is turned on (that is, when the hall has just been opened) or when a predetermined number of game balls are fired (that is, a predetermined amount of game) And the like are exemplified.

In recent years, there are many gaming machines with a low probability of winning in the lottery process, and in order to acquire a large amount of game balls, it takes a certain amount of time and investment, so a large amount of game balls can be acquired. The possibility of acquiring an item different from the game ball can be obtained at least, thereby suppressing a decrease in game motivation. Here, as goods, the numbered ticket which a hall issues, a coffee service ticket, a parking lot service ticket (a parking lot may be charged in a downtown area), etc. are illustrated.

Unlike the case where it is easy to acquire a game ball simply because an item that does not affect the payout rate can be given, the hole does not suffer a unilateral loss. Not only that, you can also enjoy the effect of increasing the effect of attracting customers.

By the way, the lower component part is formed with an overhanging portion that protrudes forward so as to face the player, and the article storage means is ahead of the firing instruction means and the storage guide means (that is, on the player side). More specifically, it is provided in the vicinity of the foremost position of the overhanging portion closest to the player so that the inside of the accommodating portion can be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, the player can grasp the state in which the item is stored in the item storing means, and the game motivation can be stimulated.

Here, the configuration of the product storage means will be described in detail. The product storage means is provided with respect to a main body having a mounting member formed with a recess having a predetermined depth capable of storing the product, and a recess of the mounting member. A door portion that opens and closes and a door opening and closing mechanism that can open and close the door portion. When the door is closed with respect to the recess of the mounting member, it is impossible to take in and out the product from the main body, and when the door is open with respect to the concave of the mounting member, the product is removed from the main body. It becomes possible. In addition, as an aspect in which the housing portion can be visually recognized from the player, the door portion is formed of, for example, a transparent resin, and the main body portion and thus the mounting member so that the bottom surface of the recess can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine Is inclined toward the front (that is, the player side). Moreover, it is preferable that the item storage means is disposed so as to be tilted so that the player can visually recognize the storage portion without facing the player in front of the gaming machine. The “accommodating portion” is exemplified by an area in which an article formed by the door portion and the placing member can be accommodated when the door portion is in the closed position.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, the monotony of the game in the process until winning the lottery is eliminated, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the whole pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG.
It is a perspective view which shows the state which closed the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a perspective view seen from the front of the pachinko machine.
FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view of the pachinko machine.

1 and 2, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a game frame 409 that includes an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown), and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A main body frame 3 on which the unit 4 can be mounted, and a door frame 5 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed are configured. The locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 are both performed by the locking device 60. The outer frame 2 according to this embodiment is
It is formed with a vertically long rectangular shape having a lateral width of approximately 52 cm, a height of approximately 81 cm, and a depth of approximately 7 cm.

In addition, the game production unit 4 (specifically, the game panel 409) includes a launching device 57 described later.
A game area 20 is formed in which a game ball driven from (see FIG. 4) can flow down, and the door frame 5 is a glass unit 1 as a transparent plate unit that allows the player to visually recognize the game area 20.
90 and a dish unit 300 disposed below the glass unit 190. The dish unit 300 is configured to be able to store a game ball to be supplied to the launching device 57, and a game ball (so-called prize ball) as an award that can be given to the player as a result of the game is also stored in the dish unit. To be paid out. Hereinafter, in this specification, the side on which the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 (left side in FIG. 13) is referred to as a pivotal support side, and the opposite side of the pivotal support side (to the outer frame 2). On the other hand, the side on which the main body frame 3 is opened and the right side in FIG.

A lower decorative plate 6 whose surface is covered with a decorative cover plate 6a is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side. Although the details will be described later, the outer frame 2 is a connection for connecting upper and lower wooden upper and lower frame plates and left and right light alloy (aluminum) side frame plates at their respective ends. It is assembled in a square shape by connecting with members. The upper support bracket 47 and the lower support bracket 8 provided on the upper surface of the lower decorative plate 6 on the upper side of the upper frame 7 and the lower support plate 8 provided on the upper side of the outer frame 2, respectively, By engaging the shaft support bracket 48, the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

As described above, the game effect unit 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 4, a prize ball tank 50 for delivering a prize ball to the back surface thereof, a tank rail Member (tank rail) 51, ball passage unit 52, and ball dispensing device (ball dispensing unit) 5
3 is attached, and a substrate unit 54 is attached to the lower part of the back surface thereof. The board unit 54 includes a door frame 5 excluding the launching device 57 and the game effect unit 4.
And various control boards and power supply boards 395 (for controlling electrical components provided in the main body frame 3)
Etc.) are provided together. Further, the body frame 3 has a rear opening 70 (FIG. 13).
And a back cover 58 covering the rear opening 70 is detachably provided.

In addition, the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the game panel 409) is provided with a guide rail 482 that partitions the game area 20 and guides the game ball into the game area 20 on the left edge of the game area 20. ing. The guide rail 482 includes an outer rail unit 472 and an inner rail unit 462. Further, the upper end portion of the inner rail unit 462 has a backflow prevention member 463 that prevents the hit ball once shot and taken into the game area 20 from flowing back to the outer rail unit 472 again. On the other hand, the game area 20 in front view
In the upper right edge portion, there is a stop portion 476 that repels the hit ball hitting the inside of the game area 20 when the hit ball that has slid through the outer rail unit 472 collides vigorously. The stopper 476 is made of an elastic body made of rubber or synthetic resin.

Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle unit 318 in the above-described dish unit 300. Here, the number of the dish units 300 provided in the door frame 5 is one, and the handle unit 318 conventionally provided in the main body frame 3 is provided in the dish unit 300 on the door frame 5 side. Moreover, since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 cannot be visually recognized from the front.

[Outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. FIG. 8 is a front view of the outer frame.
FIG. 9 is a rear view of the outer frame. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 8 (A) and C in FIG.
-C sectional view (B), DD sectional view (C) in FIG. 10 (A), EE sectional view in FIG. 10 (A) (
D).

6 and 7, the outer frame 2 connects the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 with connecting members 14 for connecting the respective end portions. By this, it is assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape. The “side frame plates 12 and 13” correspond to the “vertical frame (vertical plate)” of the present invention.

Specifically, the connecting member 14 is formed in a podium shape having a step in the center and the left and right.
The protruding central portion is fitted into engagement notches 10B and 11B formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. Then, the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions of the connecting member 14 that are lowered by one step, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are disposed on one side of the left and right portions that are lowered by one step. The inner surface of the is in contact. In this state, the insertion holes 10C and 11C formed on both sides of the engagement notch 10B of the upper frame plate 10 and both sides of the engagement notch 11B of the lower frame plate 11, respectively, A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 16 (the upper frame plate 10 in FIG. 7 and the side frame plate 1 on the shaft support side) formed in the planes of the left and right portions that are lowered.
2 are connected to each other, but are also present on the other connecting members 14), and are fastened by a plurality (two in the illustrated case) of connecting screws 16 </ b> B from above or below. ing.

Furthermore, a plurality (two in the illustrated case) of mounting holes 1 formed in the upper and lower end portions of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are provided.
2B, 13B, and a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting holes 15 (in the illustrated case, the upper frame plate 10 and the open side frame plate 13) Is connected to the connecting member 14 to be connected, but is also present in the other connecting member 14), and is fixed by a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting screws 15 </ b> B from the lateral outer side, The upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 are firmly connected and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 15B, one connecting screw 15B does not connect the side frame plates 12, 13 and the connecting member 14, but the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the connecting member 14. Are directly connected from the side.

Of the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 of the short side are made of the same wood as the conventional one, and the long side frame The plates 12 and 13 are made of an extruded plate of a light metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. That is, the outer frame 2 is composed of two wooden short plates and two light metal long plates. Upper frame plate 10 and lower frame plate 1
The reason why 1 is made of the same wood as before is to make it easier to hit nails when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island. More specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are nailed to the island. Therefore, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as the conventional one so that nails can be easily nailed to the island.

On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. When the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 is reduced, the peripheral wall 2 of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13.
90 to 293 (see FIG. 13) can be widened in the left-right width in front view (that is, the width in the left-right direction between the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the shaft support side and the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the open side) As a result, it is possible to mount the large game production unit 4 in the left-right direction on the main body frame 3. As a result, the game area 20 can be formed larger as a result, and the effect display device 115 can be enlarged while securing the area where the game ball flows down.

As shown in FIG. 10C, in order to reduce the thickness while maintaining the strength as compared with wooden, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side (the side frame plate 13 on the open side is the side frame plate). 12 is a space portion 12G (the space portion 1 of the side frame plate 13 on the open side) whose rear portion is opened by a rib inside the rear portion of the left and right aspects).
3G is formed in FIG. 9, and is formed by drawing so that the thickness h2 of the rear portion is increased. Of course, the thickness h2 is the same as or slightly thinner than the conventional wooden thickness (that is, it is preferably 19 mm or less in relation to a game effect unit installation recess 30 described later). Further, by forming the space portion 12G in this way, the thickness h2 of the rear portion can be reduced compared to the case where the rib is simply bent from the rear portion of the side frame plates 12 and 13. it can. Note that such pultrusion molding cannot be performed with wood. Therefore, by making the side frame plates 12 and 13 made of metal that can be pultruded,
The strength can be maintained as compared with the conventional wood while reducing the wall thickness. Moreover, if the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a light metal such as an aluminum alloy, the weight of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10B and 10D, one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 14 lowered by one step is fitted in front of the space portion 12G of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side. Groove 12F (
A groove portion 13F of the side frame plate 13 on the open side is formed in FIG. Side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side
From the groove 12F to the front end, as shown in FIGS. 10 (B) to 10 (D), the inner surface of the groove 12F has a flat plate shape that comes into contact with the other of the left and right portions where the connecting member 14 is lowered by one step. There are
A shallow recess for reducing material is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove portion 12F is formed, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 10B, a recess 12H (open side) into which the hanging piece portion 7E of the upper support fitting 7 is inserted. A recess 13H of the side frame plate 13 is formed in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 7, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above includes:
In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 14, a mounting hole 12 </ b> C for fixing the hanging piece 7 </ b> E of the upper support fitting 7 to the outside of the side frame plate 12 on the shaft support side is formed in the upper part thereof. Has been. Further, a mounting hole 12D is formed in the lower portion of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side so as to be fixed with a mounting screw 18 so as to coincide with the mounting hole 8C formed in the side bent portion of the lower support fitting 8. Has been. Furthermore, the lower part of the mounting hole 12D and the front part of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side are provided with the side frame plate 1 on the pivot support side.
A mounting hole 12E is formed for fastening 2 and the lower decorative plate 6 with fastening screws 6E.

On the other hand, in addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 14, the open side frame plate 13 is provided with an attachment hole 13 </ b> C for attaching the closing projection 22 with the attachment screw 22 </ b> B. Further, an attachment hole 13C for attaching the closing projection 23 with the attachment screw 23B is formed in the lower part of the side frame portion 13C. Further, at the lowermost part of the open side frame 13, the side frame 13
A mounting hole 13D is formed for fastening the lower decorative plate 6 and the lower decorative plate 6 with fastening screws 6E. The closing protrusions 22 and 23 are hook portions (details will be described later) of the locking device 60 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. To engage. Then, as will be described later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 868 of the locking device 60 and rotating it to one side, the hook portion of the locking device 60 and the closing projections 22 and 23 are disengaged, and the main body frame 3 is removed. The outer frame 2 can be opened.

Also, the lower decorative plate 6 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13.
The main body frame 3 is placed on the upper surface when closed. The front and side surfaces of the lower decorative plate 6 are covered with a decorative cover plate 6a, but a fastening protrusion 6C (see FIG. 9) in which an elastic claw is formed at the rear end of the decorative cover plate 6a projects. Has been established. And this decoration protrusion board 6a is attached to the lower decoration board 6 by making this fixation protrusion 6C penetrate the fixation hole 6D which penetrates the lower decoration board 6. FIG. A guide plate 6F for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer cover 2 on the decorative cover plate 6a.

By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 1 on the pivotal support side.
The main frame 3 is provided with an upper support fitting 7 that also functions as a connecting member 2 and a lower support fitting 8 attached along one upper surface of the lower decorative plate 6.

The upper support fitting 7 is formed with a support hole 19A formed by bending the support protrusion piece 19 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 19 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin (see FIG. 13) of the upper shaft support 47 of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the flange hole 19A.

Further, the lower support fitting 8 is also formed in a shape protruding forward, and a support projection 21 is projected upward on the protruding portion, and the lower shaft support bracket of the main body frame 3 is projected on the support projection 21. 48
A support hole formed in (see FIG. 13) is inserted. Therefore, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, the support protrusion 21 of the lower support bracket 8 is engaged with the support hole formed in the lower shaft support bracket 48 of the main body frame 3, and then the main body frame 3. The shaft can be supported in a freely openable / closable manner by hooking the shaft support pin of the upper shaft support metal 47 into the support hole 19A.

[About the body frame]
Next, the launching device 57, the ball dispensing device 53, the locking device 60, the substrate unit 54, and the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 4, FIG. 5, and FIG. 4 and 5 are as described above, and FIG. 11 is a front view of a front component member and a main body frame of a game effect unit described later. FIG. 12 is a side view of the main body frame before the parts are attached. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a main body frame to which components are attached as viewed from the front. FIG. 14 is a rear view of the main body frame to which components are attached. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back side.

First, the structure of the main body frame 3 to which the game effect unit 4 is attached will be described. The main body frame 3 is integrally formed of synthetic resin. An upper shaft support bracket 47 and a lower shaft support bracket 48 are attached to the outer frame 2 to support the opening and closing shaft. By engaging the upper shaft support bracket 47 and the lower shaft support bracket 48 with the upper support bracket 7 and the lower support bracket 8 attached to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Can be pivotally supported. As described above, the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so that the door frame 5 can be opened and closed. .

By the way, as shown in FIG. 11 and FIG.
It is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and about 3/4 of its upper part has a thin-walled (for example, 1 to 3.5 mm thick) circumference extending so as to stand from the front to the rear. It has face walls (2 mm in this embodiment) 290 to 293. Further, the peripheral wall 290 to 293
It has the game production | presentation unit installation recessed part (large accommodation part, large accommodation space) 30 which is the space area | region formed by being surrounded by. As will be described later, the peripheral walls 290 to 293 according to this embodiment are positioned 13 cm or more behind the front surface of the outer frame 2 beyond the rear surface (positions spaced 6 cm or more from the rear surface of the outer frame 2). 1st main body frame side wall provided to cover the game effect unit installation recess 30 from the side frame plate 13 side, and the game effect unit installation recess 30. And a second main body frame side wall provided so as to cover from the side frame plate 12 side, and a main body frame upper wall provided so as to cover the game effect unit installation recess 30 from above. .

Here, as shown in FIG. 13, various parameters for determining the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30 are as follows.
The maximum width of the front receiving opening 30a of the game production unit installation recess 30 (the distance between the front end portion (peripheral wall 290) of the first main body frame side wall and the front end portion (peripheral wall 290) of the second main body frame side wall) )
L1 is approximately 49 cm.
The depth width (depth width on the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 290 to 293) L2 of the game rendering unit installation recess 30 is approximately 14 cm.
-From the inner wall of the part (the last end of the peripheral wall 293 on the side frame plate 13 side) of the first body frame side wall part, the part of the second body frame side wall part (the last end) The peripheral wall 2 on the side frame plate 12 side
93 (the rearmost end of 93) to the inner wall (maximum lateral width on the back side) L3 is approximately 44 cm.
The height (front height) L4 of the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 290 on the side frame plate 13 side is approximately 54 cm (equivalent to the inner wall side height of the peripheral wall 290 on the side frame plate 12 side).
The height (rear side height) L5 of the peripheral wall 293 on the side frame plate 13 side is approximately 46 cm (smaller than the height on the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 293 on the side frame plate 12 side).

According to such a configuration, even if the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30 is estimated to be small,
Volume = “maximum width L1 of the front receiving port 30a” × “front side height L4” × “depth width of the peripheral wall 290” + “maximum side width L3” × “rear side height L5” × “around” Depth width of face walls 291-293 "
Based on such a calculation formula, “31259” cubic centimeters can be calculated. Of the depth width L2 on the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 290 to 293, the depth width of the peripheral wall 290 is approximately 4.2 cm, and the depth width of the peripheral walls 291 to 293 is approximately 9.3 cm.

That is, conventionally, the main body frame 3 is provided with a payout device for paying out game balls and a payout passage for guiding the game balls to the payout device, but the game board is designed so as not to interfere with the payout device and the payout passage. It was common to do this, and this limited the space behind the game board. In this respect, according to such a configuration, the maximum lateral width L1 of the front receiving port 30a is approximately 49 cm, the depth width L2 on the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is approximately 14 cm, and further “31259”.
"A very large storage space such as a cubic centimeter (game production unit installation recess 30
) Is secured in advance, it becomes possible to improve the degree of freedom in how to design the game area, the effect area, and the control area. In addition, since such a game effect unit installation recess 30 is formed so as to be covered by the peripheral wall 290 to 293, members (game area, effect area, and control area) accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30 are formed. It is possible to suitably suppress fraudulent acts on (part).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a large game board member in which a game area 20 (see FIG. 1) is mainly formed with a maximum lateral width of approximately 49 cm, and a substantially entire back surface side of the large game board member. A game effect control unit 99 configured to have a large-scale back member in which an effect area and a control area are formed is designed as a member accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30. That is, as will be described later, this game effect control unit 9
9, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 55,
A frame-shaped front component member (game region partition frame member) 680 that partitions and forms the outer periphery of the game region 20 (see FIG. 1).
A transparent plate-like gaming panel 409 arranged to close the gaming area 20 (see FIG. 1) on the rear side of the front component 680.
A fitting step portion (holding step portion) 540a that covers the outer periphery of the gaming panel 409 and holds the gaming panel 409 detachably from the front side, and is formed inside the fitting step portion 540a and the gaming area 20 (FIG. 1)) and has a through-hole 540b penetrating in the front-rear direction with a size substantially corresponding to
A frame-shaped panel holder 540 attached to the rear side of the front component member 680.
For large game board members composed of parts such as
A back box 514 attached to the rear side of the panel holder 540 and having a predetermined depth with the front side open and having an opening on the rear wall, and a game on the outer periphery of the opening in the back box 514 A back unit 510 having at least a light-like decorative body 520 disposed including a portion overlapping with the game area 20 (see FIG. 1) when viewed from the person side.
An effect display device 115 arranged so as to close the opening of the back unit 510 from the rear side and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image.
An inner peripheral board that is attached to the back of the effect display device 115 and controls the effect display device 115, and is attached to the back of the light-like decorative body 520 and the light-like decorative body 520.
A control device (not shown) in which a plurality of control boards including the outer peripheral board for performing the control are stacked in the depth direction.
A large-scale back member composed of parts and the like is attached with a depth width of approximately 8 to 13 cm over substantially the entire back side of the large game board member, and both the large game board member and the large-scale back member The game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 can be accommodated only from the front accommodation opening 30a.

In such a game effect control unit 99, as will be described later, a transparent plate-like game panel 409, a back unit 510 and the like are provided, so that a new effect different from the conventional effect can be performed. become. However, when the transparent panel-like game panel 409 and the back unit 510 are provided in this way, the game area and the effect area are completely separated in the depth direction. In addition, in this embodiment, an effect display device 115 disposed so as to close the opening of the back unit 510 from the rear side and a light-like decorative body 520 disposed on the outer periphery of the opening of the back unit 510 are provided. Therefore, a control device associated therewith is further provided over substantially the entire back surface of the back unit 510. For this reason, the game effect control unit 99 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape having a depth width of approximately 12 cm on the entire surface, but according to the game effect unit installation recess 30 described above, Even such a game effect control unit 99 can be stored, thereby improving the interest of the game.

A plate portion 32 is formed below the game effect unit installation recess 30. Also,
On the front side surrounding the game production unit installation recess 30, door hook holes 352 are formed in the upper, middle and lower portions of the front right side which is the open side. The door hook hole 352 is provided to penetrate the door frame hook portion 973 provided in the locking device 60 (details will be described later) attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 so as to protrude forward. . Further, a unit positioning protrusion 37 for engaging with a positioning recess 466 formed in the game panel 409 is provided on the inner side surface of the left side portion of the front surface that is the shaft support side.

By the way, conventionally, it was fundamentally impossible to form the game production unit installation recess 30 having the volume as described above. That is, in a general pachinko machine, the maximum width of the outer frame 2 is set to approximately 520 mm in consideration of island facilities installed in the hall. However, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the thickness of the outer frame is set to approximately 20 mm, the thickness of the vertical frame provided on the left and right (about 40 mm in total), and further, the body frame relative to the outer frame Considering the arrangement space such as a sliding rod that can be slid in the vertical direction so as to restrict the opening, it is impossible even to make the width of the member in which the game area into which the game ball is to be formed be 480 mm or more. It was. In such a background, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the maximum lateral width L of the front receiving port 30a is ensured while ensuring the minimum strength as the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3.
1 is approximately 49 cm, and the depth width L2 on the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is approximately 14c.
m, and “31259” cubic centimeter, an extremely large accommodation space (game production unit installation recess 30) is secured in advance.

Hereinafter, various new configurations capable of securing such a large accommodation space (game production unit installation recess 30) will be described in order.

First, the board part 32 provided below the game effect unit installation recessed part 30 is demonstrated with reference to FIG. The plate portion 32 is configured on the front side of the main body frame 3.

As shown in FIG. 11, the firing rail 38 is screwed to the plate portion 32 from the center portion of the front surface toward the open end portion. A rail connection member 44 projects from the front surface of the plate portion 32 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 38 (so-called M-shaped rail) on the shaft support side. When the game effect unit 4 is installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30, the rail connection member 44 is adjacent to the connection passage portion 477 that is the downstream end of the outer rail unit 472. At the side position of the rail connection member 44 on the shaft support side (position opposite to the firing rail 38),
An elliptical game effect unit fixture 46 for fixing the lower portion of the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the game panel 409) is rotatably attached. The game effect unit fixing tool 46 rotates clockwise with the game effect unit 4 placed in the game effect unit installation recess 30, and presses the game effect unit fixing tool 46 against the front surface of the game panel 409. And
The entire game effect unit 4 including the game panel 409 is fixed to the main body frame 3. On the other hand, when removing the game effect unit 4, the lower part of the game panel 409 can be easily released by turning the game effect unit fixture 46 counterclockwise.

Further, in the present embodiment, one plate unit 3 is provided without providing a so-called lower plate as in the prior art.
Only 00 is provided. The reason why the lower plate is not provided is to increase the vertical length of the game effect unit 4 in order to enlarge the game area 20. The handle unit 31
8, the launch mechanism composed of the launch rail 38, the rail connection member 44, and the like is disposed on the plate portion 32. Since this plate portion 32 is on the front side and below the game effect unit installation recess 30, the game The region 20 can be enlarged in the vertical direction (the height direction seen from the player). Since there is no conventional lower plate, the plate portion 32 and thus the firing mechanism are located generally below the conventional gaming machine.

By the way, in the position where the rail connection member 44 protrudes, a so-called foul port is formed in the conventional pachinko machine. This foul mouth played a role of accepting a game ball (so-called foul ball) that flowed back without being driven into the game area 20 despite being launched, and returning the foul ball to the lower plate. The foul port was provided at this position because when the game effect unit is mounted on the main body frame, the rail provided on the game effect unit and the launch rail provided on the main body frame come into contact with each other. This is because there is a risk of damage. Therefore, by providing a gap between the rail on the game effect unit side and the launch rail on the main body frame side, the launch on the game effect unit side rail and the main body frame side that may occur when the game effect unit is mounted on the main body frame. It prevented contact with the rail.

However, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is not provided with a lower plate. Therefore, the foul port 489 (see FIG. 23) is connected to the front structural member 680 (more specifically, the connection passage portion 47).
7, the foul ball is returned to the storage portion 361 of the dish unit 300 by being formed on the upstream side (axial support side) and between the connection passage portion 477 and the guide rail 482 (outer rail unit 472). It becomes possible. Since the storage unit 361 is below the placement surface on which the game effect unit 4 is placed (the surface of the main body frame 3 on which the game effect unit 4 is placed), the foul port 489 (see FIG. 23) is used for the game effect. By forming the unit 4 on the front component member 680 side, the foul ball can be returned to the storage portion 361.

With the above configuration, the foul ball can be returned to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 while increasing the vertical length of the game effect unit 4 without providing the lower dish, and the game frame 3 can be It is possible to prevent contact between the connection passage portion 477 on the game panel 409 side and the firing rail 38 on the main body frame 3 side, which may occur when the effect unit 4 is mounted.

Further, a prize ball payout stopper mechanism 39 is provided on the side of the axial support side of the game effect unit fixture 46.
Is provided. This prize ball payout stopper mechanism 39 has a ball payout device 53 (see FIG. 13).
Is provided in the middle of the award ball passage for paying out the award ball to the tray unit 300 on the door frame 5 side, and automatically closes the award ball passage when the door frame 5 is opened. While preventing the ball from spilling out from the passage, when the door frame 5 is closed, the prize ball passage is automatically communicated to pay out the prize balls paid out from the ball dispensing device 53 to the dish unit 300. is there. The plate portion 32 above the launch position of the launch rail 38 has a fastening portion 4 formed in the game effect unit 4.
A fastening hole 41 for fastening with 69 and a fastener (not shown) is formed.

In addition, a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 40 is formed on the lower portion of the open side of the plate portion 32 so as to bulge out toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). 57 is fixed to the launcher mounting portion 40 from the back surface of the main body frame 3. A handle connection window 40 a is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 40. A slide engagement / disengagement piece 231 (see FIG. 1) of the slide unit 230 attached to the back side of the door frame 5 is inserted into the handle connection window 40a. When the door frame 5 is closed, a slide engagement / disengagement piece 231 described later is inserted into the handle connection window 40a, and the handle unit 31 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 is inserted.
8 and the launching device 57 are linked. In addition, the launching device 57 can adjust the resilience of the game ball with a strength corresponding to the amount of turning operation of the handle unit 318, so that it is at the firing position of the launch rail 38. The game ball can be ejected and launched at a desired position in the game area 20.

The front structure of the main body frame 3 is generally as described above. Next, the back side structure of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 4 and 14. As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG.
A prize ball tank 50 for storing a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball or a rental ball is detachably mounted on the upper back surface (the upper surface of the upper wall portion of the main body frame). Further, below the prize ball tank 50, a tank rail member 51 for guiding the balls from the prize ball tank 50 in a laterally inclined manner is disposed.
Further, a ball passage unit 52 and a ball dispensing device 53 are provided downward from the lower end of the tank rail member 51.

That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
93 has a rear wall portion (second rear wall portion) extending inward (downward in FIG. 4) from the rear end portion (circumferential wall 293). The second body frame side wall of the peripheral walls 290 to 293 has a rear wall (third) extending from the rear end portion (peripheral wall 293) inward (to the left in FIG. 4). Rear wall portion). Of these, the tank rail member 51 is attached to the rear wall portion of the main body frame upper wall portion, and the ball passage unit 52 and the ball dispensing device 53 are attached to the rear wall portion of the second main body frame side wall portion. in this way,
The rear end portion of the peripheral wall 293 is purposely bent so as to provide a rear wall portion, so that the tank does not press the depth width as the game effect unit installation recess 30 in which the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated. The rail member 51, the ball passage unit 52, and the ball dispensing device 53 can be attached to the rear wall portion.

Here, the tank rail member 51 is attached to the outer surface of the rear wall portion of the main body frame upper wall portion.
Receives the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 50 from the side of the first main body frame side wall (left side in FIG. 4) and receives the side of the second main body frame side wall (right side in FIG. 4). ) Is adopted to flow down horizontally. Further, the tank rail member 51 has two passages (not shown) through which game balls flow down in two rows. Thereby, the tank rail member 51 is thereby obtained.
It becomes possible to secure a large number of game balls in itself, so that the game balls can be paid out smoothly to the player. The prize ball tank 50 and the tank rail member 51 may be integrally formed. However, considering that the degree of freedom in designing these members is increased, it is practically desirable to provide them as separate members.

On the other hand, the ball passage unit 52 attached to the outer surface of the rear wall portion of the second main body frame side wall portion is separated from the tank rail member 51 in order to secure a depth width as the game effect unit installation recess 30. The game balls are provided with a single passage (not shown) through which the game balls flow down. However, in this case, the game balls that have flowed down in two rows in the tank rail member 51 collide with each other when they reach the ball path unit 52 and become one row, and the payout of the game balls may be delayed. There is a concern that game balls may be clogged.

Therefore, the tank rail member 51 according to this embodiment includes an order supply device 51a that alternately supplies the game balls that have flowed down in two rows through the two passages to the ball passage unit 52. . Accordingly, it is possible to ensure the depth width as the game effect unit installation recess 30 while preferably avoiding the slow payout of the game ball and the occurrence of the clogging of the game ball.

In addition, as such an order supply device 51a, for example, a gear device provided with two gears that rotate while stocking one game ball between teeth protruding from the rotating body is adopted. Can do. That is, in such a gear device, the two gears are disposed separately from the two passages in a state in which the positions of the teeth of each other are formed so as to deviate from the radius of the game ball. Yes. A game ball that has passed through one of the two gears is supplied to a single passage of the ball passage unit 521. In such a configuration, the game balls flowing down in two rows by the two passages of the tank rail member 51 are sequentially supplied to the one passage one by one by the order supply device 51a. Become.

And the game ball led to the ball path unit 52 from such an order supply device 51a is:
The single path is dropped and further guided to the ball dispensing device 53. A game ball guided to the ball payout device 53 is a predetermined number of prize balls according to a payout control program executed by a payout control board 720 (see FIG. 64) housed in a payout control board box 55 described later. Or as a rental ball, it is paid out to the dish unit 300 provided on the front side of the door frame 5. In addition,
As will be described later, the ball payout device 53 is provided with a payout motor and a rotary payout member that is rotationally driven by the payout motor and pays out the balls one by one.

Furthermore, the back surface of the main body frame 3 (a surface bent inward from a later-described fourth peripheral wall 293)
The board unit 54 is attached so as to be positioned below the lower end of the game effect unit 4. The board unit 54 is a unit in which a plurality of board boxes for storing various control boards are integrated as a unit. The plurality of board boxes include a payout control board box 55, a terminal board box 56, a power board box 62, and the like. These various board boxes are stacked by disposing a payout control board box 55 and a terminal board box 56 behind the power board box 62. The payout control board box 55, the terminal board box 56, the power board box 62, and the like do not need to be replaced when the game effect unit 4 is replaced. Therefore, these control board boxes are integrated as a board unit 54 separated from the game effect unit 4 and arranged on the back surface of the main body frame 3. Therefore, since the space in the depth direction of the game effect unit 4 is not obstructed by the plurality of board boxes, the game effect unit 4 can be enlarged in the depth direction. In addition to this, the game effect unit 4 and the board unit 54 can be efficiently arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so that the appearance is organized. If the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually troublesome, even if an illegal board such as a hanging board is attached, it becomes difficult for hall personnel to notice it. In this respect, if the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually arranged, it is easy to detect even if there is an illegal act as described above, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the illegal act.

As will be described later, when the game effect unit 4 is stored and installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30, the main control board provided on the game effect unit 4 side and the board provided on the board unit 54, the main control board. Electrical connection with a board that needs to be connected to the board is automatically performed by a drawer connector described later. Thereby, after the game effect unit 4 is stored and installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30, it is not necessary to perform an electrical connection work from behind the pachinko machine 1, and work efficiency is improved.

Also, the launcher mounting portion 40 (see FIG. 11) located below the substrate unit 54 described above.
Is mounted with a unitized launcher 57. Further, a back cover 58 is provided at the rear opening 70 formed along the rear end of the aforementioned peripheral wall 290 to 293 of the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. The back cover (transparent cover body) 58 is a transparent back cover that covers the game effect control unit 99 housed in the game effect unit installation recess 30 so as to be visible from behind. As a result, the hall clerk can easily see the electrical connection state,
Even if the game effect control unit 99 is cheated, it can be easily detected. In the state where the back cover 58 is attached and the rear opening 70 is closed, as shown in FIG.
It becomes substantially the same vertical plane as the rear end portion of the tank rail member 51 that protrudes most rearward of the pachinko machine 1.

That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
93, the first main body frame side wall portion is inward from the rear end portion (circumferential wall 293) (see FIG. 4).
It has a rear wall portion (first rear wall portion) extending in the middle and right directions. A back cover support cylinder portion 280 for pivotally supporting the back cover 58 so as to be openable and closable is provided on the outer surface (rear surface) of the rear wall portion of the first main body frame side wall portion. In this way, the rear end portion of the peripheral wall 293 is purposely bent to provide the rear wall portion, thereby pressing the depth width as the game effect unit installation recess 30 in which the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated. Without back cover 5
8 can be attached to the rear wall. In addition, by providing the support cylinder portion 280 on the rear surface of the rear wall portion of the first main body frame side wall portion, the first main body frame side wall portion can be brought close to the inner wall of the side frame plate 13, It is possible to increase the width in the left-right direction.

A locking device 60 is fixed to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3. This locking device 60
Is a so-called W lock that locks both the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 with respect to the outer frame 2. A plurality (three in this embodiment) of door frame hooks 973 and cylinder locks 868 are directed from the locking device 60 toward the front of the main body frame 3.
(Both see FIG. 1) are provided so as to protrude, and details will be described later. The “cylinder lock 868” corresponds to the “operation unit” of the present invention.

That is, as shown in FIG. 15, the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment has the following assembly structure as a whole. That is, a tank mounting groove 202 is formed on a vertical surface connecting the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291 on the back side of the main body frame 3.
02, the prize ball tank 50 is attached above the game effect unit installation recess 30. A rail locking groove 203 is formed along the opening edge of the rear opening 70, and the tank rail member 51 is attached along the upper rear wall 295 by the rail locking groove 203. Also,
The ball passage unit 52 is attached to the lower side of the tank rail member 51 by the passage unit attachment boss 204 formed on the back side of the shaft support side rear wall 296. In addition, in a ball dispenser installation area 205 formed below the tank rail member 51, a ball dispenser 53 is installed adjacent to the shaft support side of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, a ball payout passage 59 is attached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to the ball payout passage installation portion 206 corresponding to the bottom wall on the pivot support side of the game effect unit installation recess 30.

Further, the launching device 57 is attached to the inside of the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 40 by the launching device mounting boss 208 projecting rearwardly at the lower part of the rear side of the open side of the main body frame 3. Further, the board unit 54 in which the payout control board box 55, the terminal board box 56, the power board box 62, the board tray 64, and the like are integrated into a single unit is attached to the mounting holes 207 provided on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 160. And fastened from the back side. A back cover support cylinder 280 is formed on the back side of the open side rear wall 294, and the back cover 58 is pivotally supported by the back cover support cylinder 280 so that the rear opening 70 can be closed. .

As shown in the figure, in the main body frame 3 having such a structure, the game effect unit installation recess 30 is formed as a large-capacity space, and the bottom wall portion of the game effect unit installation recess 30 is substantially flush. Therefore, it is easy to install the game effect unit 4 having a box-like appearance with a large depth in the game effect unit installation recess 30 as will be described later. Furthermore, since the game effect unit 4 having a box-like appearance substantially the same as the space shape of the game effect unit installation recess 30 can be closely installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30 with no gap, Wobble and fraud are appropriately prevented. Below, the various members assembled | attached to the main body frame 3 are demonstrated in detail separately.

<Tank rail material>
The tank rail member 51 disposed below the prize ball tank 50 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank, tank rail member, ball path unit, ball payout device, and ball payout path as seen from the back side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 17 is a perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine showing the relationship among the prize ball tank, tank rail member, ball path unit, ball payout device, and ball payout path.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the tank rail member 51 is formed in the shape of an inclined bowl having an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 1404 of the prize ball tank 50, and the lower surface of the downstream end is detailed later. It faces the ball passage unit 52 to be described. The inside of the tank rail member 51 is
The partition walls form two-way passages 1412 in which game balls flow down in two rows. Note that the bottom surface of the passage 1412 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign substances that roll together with the game ball fall downward from the narrow groove.

In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 1413 having a weight on the middle downstream side of the tank rail member 51 is provided to be swingable. The ball leveling member 1413 hangs down into the two passages 1412 of the tank rail member 51, and when the game balls flowing down the passages 1412 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction, the ball leveling member 1413 The rectification is as follows. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 51 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 1413 is covered with a ball pressing plate 1414. The ball holding plate 1414 is a ball leveling member 141.
3 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the game ball that has not become one stage by 3 is forced to one stage.

Further, a pair of alignment gears 1416 (corresponding to the above-described order supply device 51a) are rotatably supported by shaft pins 1417 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 51 so as to face the respective passages 1412. The alignment gear 1416 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 1417 so that the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 1416 are shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the game balls flowing down the passages 1412 of the tank rail member 51 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 1416, the game balls of the two rows of passages 1412 are alternately sent one by one. Will be. The alignment gear 1416 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 1415 on its upper surface.

<Ball passage unit>
A ball path unit 52 for guiding the game balls dropped from the tank rail member 51 in a line to the ball payout device 53 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a front sectional view of the ball passage unit.

As shown in FIG. 18, the ball passage unit 52 is provided along the vertical direction (height direction) so as to bypass the accommodation space of the game effect unit 4 formed in the main body frame 3 on the back surface. The spherical passage unit 52 has a back surface (a surface seen from the back surface) of a substantially rectangular plate material.
) To form a ball dropping passage (height direction passage) 1422. The ball drop passage 1422 has a front / rear bent passage portion 1422a bent upstream in the front / rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back), and a left / right direction (left / right direction seen from the rear) connected to the front / rear bent passage portion 1422a. The left and right bent passage portions 1422b are bent to the left and right and the right and left bent passage portions 1422b are connected to the right and left bent passage portions 1422b, and the vertical passage portions 1422c are substantially vertical. Further, a notch 1423 is formed in one bent passage wall 1421 constituting the vertical passage portion 1422c.
A ball breakage detecting piece 1424 whose upper end is pivotally supported by a support shaft 1425 is swingably attached to the notch 1423. A ball break switch 1426 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 1424, and an actuator 1427 for the ball break switch 1426.
Is in contact with the ball breakage detecting piece 1424.

Thus, when a game ball is present in the vertical passage portion 1422c, the vertical passage portion 142 is provided.
The ball breakage detecting piece 1424 is pressed by the game ball existing in 2c, and the actuator 14
27 is pressed to turn on the ball break switch 1426. On the other hand, when there is no game ball in the vertical passage portion 1422c due to clogging or lack of balls, the ball breakage detection piece 1424 is moved to the vertical passage portion 14.
The actuator 1427 turns off the ball break switch 1426 because it swings toward 22c. When the ball cut switch 1426 is turned OFF, the rotation of a payout motor of a ball payout device 53, which will be described later, is stopped and the payout of the winning ball is stopped.

A stopper protrusion 1428 is formed at the lower end of the notch portion 1423 to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detecting piece 1424 to the opposite side of the passage portion. Insertion groove 14 for clogging a ball in the vertical passage portion 1422c corresponding to the piece detection piece 1424
29 is formed. This ball clogging insertion groove 1429 is a ball clogging detection piece 1 due to a ball clogging or the like.
When the swinging operation of 424 is difficult to be performed, a pin is inserted from the rear side of the ball dispensing device 53 to eliminate the clogging of the ball breakage detection piece 1424. Further, the other bent passage wall 1421 facing the broken piece detection piece 1424 is slightly broken.
It is formed in a bulging shape toward the side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 1422c, the ball break detection piece 1424 is surely pressed to turn on the ball break switch 1426.

<Ball dispenser>
Next, the ball dispensing device 53 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball passage unit 52 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back side of the ball dispensing device. FIG. 20 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as the payout member.

The ball dispensing device 53 includes a unit base body 1451 in which a bent passage 1453 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 1452, a unit sub plate 1475 that covers the rear surface of the unit base body 1451, and an upper surface of the unit sub plate 1475 ( A relay board 1480 attached to the rear surface side, and a gear cover 1510 covering the gear groups 1493, 1494, 1497 and the detection disk 1500 provided in a substantially central surface region (rear surface side region) of the unit sub-plate 1475.
It consists of and. Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

The unit base body 1451 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 1475 side. A bent passage 1453 is formed by the wall 1452. Bent passage wall 1452
Is projected at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere from the upper center of the unit base body 1451 to the middle of the downstream side. The unit base body 1451 also serves as side walls on both sides. Also, the middle bent passage wall 1
A portion where 452 is largely divided into left and right forms a sorting space 1455 in which a sprocket 1457 as a sorting member is disposed. A passage partition wall 1459 is formed to project from the lower portion of the distribution space 1455 to the left and right ends of the unit base body 1451 so as to form a pair of left and right bent passage walls 1452. That is, the left and right bent passage walls 14 on the downstream side from the middle.
52 and the passage partition wall 1459 form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 1455, one passage constitutes a prize ball passage 1460, and the other passage constitutes a ball removal passage 1461. . The passage partition wall 1459 is also largely divided on the left and right sides, and a motor storage space 1464 for storing the payout motor 1465 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 1459.

Further, in the distribution space 1455, a sprocket 1457 as a payout member in which a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits is formed is rotatably disposed. Bearing cylinder 145 that pivotally supports the other end of rotating shaft 1458 to which 1457 is fixed.
6 is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 1455. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 1459 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 1455 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 1457, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 1460 formed on one side thereof , Dispensing ball detection sensor 14
62 is detachably mounted. The payout ball detection sensor 1462 is composed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which a sphere passes at the tip, and an attachment portion that matches the shape of the rear end is formed by a bent passage wall 1452. Thus, it can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the payout ball detection sensor 1462 is connected to a relay board 1480 described later.

In addition, a prize ball passage 1460 and a ball removal passage 1461 below the unit base body 1451.
Between the two, a circular motor storage space 1464 for storing the payout motor 1465 is formed. The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 1465 is stored in the motor storage space 1464. Then, in a state where the payout motor 1465 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 1491 of the unit sub-plate 1475, the motor shaft 1468 of the payout motor 1465 passes through the shaft insertion hole formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 1491 and passes through the first gear. 1493 is fixed. Further, the unit base body 1451 is provided with a guide protrusion 1469 for guiding the game ball, which has been extracted at the lowermost end of the ball extraction path 1461, to the back side of the ball dispensing device 53, and is guided to the guide protrusion 1469. The spheres thus guided are guided to a ball outlet connecting passage 415 described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a recovery basket provided below the island platform).

Further, the unit sub-plate 1475 has a payout motor 1465 attached to a synthetic resin plate covering the bent passage 1453 portion, the distribution space 1455 portion, and the prize ball passage 1460 portion of the unit base body 1451, and the ball passage 1461. Aluminum heat sink 14 covering the downstream part
It is comprised by attaching 91. A relay board region 147 for attaching the relay board 1480 to the front side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 1475.
6 is formed in the upper part, and a plurality of gears 1493, 1494, 1497 and a detection disk 1 are formed below the upper part.
A gear region 1490 to which 500 is attached is formed.

Further, the relay board 1480 relays the wiring from the payout ball detection sensor 1462, the payout motor 1465, and the sensor 1505 described later, and the wiring from the payout control board 720 (see FIG. 64) described later. Therefore, the relay board 1480 includes a plurality of connectors 148.
1 is provided and covered by a substrate cover 1485.

The board cover 1485 is formed in a box shape with a substantially square front side open, and a button opening 1488 and a connection opening 148 are formed on the square vertical surface of the board cover 1485.
9 is formed. When the substrate cover 1485 is covered, the attach / detach button 147 is used.
Two heads are slightly exposed to the outside through the button opening 1488. In addition, the wiring connected to the relay substrate 1480 is drawn out from the connection opening 1489 to the outside.

Next, the gears 1493, 1494, 1497 provided in the gear region 1490 and the detection disk 1500 will be described. As described above, the motor shaft 1468 of the dispensing motor 1465
The 1st gear 1493 is being fixed to the front-end | tip. Above the first gear 1493, a second gear 1494 that meshes with the first gear 1493 is rotatably provided on the shaft 1495. A third gear 1497 that meshes with the second gear 1494 is disposed above the second gear 1494.
98 is rotatably provided. Further, above the third gear 1497, the third gear 14
A detection disk 1500 having a gear portion 1502 that meshes with 97 is rotatably provided on a rotating shaft 1458 that supports a sprocket 1457. The sprocket 1457 and the detection disk 1500 are configured to rotate integrally around the rotation shaft 1458.
Accordingly, when the payout motor 1465 is driven to rotate, the rotation thereof is changed to the first gear 1493, the second gear.
The sprocket 1457 is transmitted to rotate through the gear 1494, the third gear 1497, and the gear portion 1502 of the detection disk 1500.

The outer circumference of the detection disk 1500 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear part 1502,
The same number (three in the illustrated example) of detection notches 1501 as the concave portions of the sprocket 1457 are formed on the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 1502. This detection notch 1501 is detected by a light emitting / receiving sensor 1505 provided on a sensor substrate 1504 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 1507 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 1475. The sensor 1505 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 1457 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 1501 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If an abnormal rotation is detected by the sensor 1505 (mostly, a ball-engaged state by the sprocket 1457), the abnormal state (for example, the ball-engaged state) is resolved by rotating the sprocket 1457 forward and backward a predetermined number of times. It is. Note that the number of game balls actually paid out is detected by the payout ball detection sensor 1462 provided in the prize ball passage 1460 and used for counting.

Although the configuration of the ball payout device 53 has been described above, in the state where the unit base body 1451, the unit sub-plate 1475, the relay board 1480, the board cover 1485, and the gear cover 1510 are assembled, a game ball to be paid out is guided. A cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 1465 is positioned below the bent passage 1453 so as to be accommodated. Moreover, the payout motor 1465 and the sprocket 1457 are connected to a plurality of gears 1493, 1494, 1497, 1500 (15) provided in the gear region 1490 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 1475.
02) are coupled so as to be rotationally driven. Therefore, the ball dispensing device 53
Unlike the conventional one in which the depth width dimension from the upper side to the lower side of the ball dispensing device is made substantially constant and the dispensing motor projects to the front side, rear surface side or side side of the ball dispensing device as in the prior art, any part of the ball dispensing device 53 Furthermore, it can be set as the structure which does not protrude toward back.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, a seal 53 a is affixed to the back surface of the payout device 53 so as to conceal the screw fixing portion of the screw used for assembling the payout device 53. In recent years, a gaming machine has a complicated back surface structure due to an increase in the size of a liquid crystal display or the like, and it is necessary to consider the maintainability of workers such as hall personnel. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, maintainability is improved by arranging a series of payout passages on the back of the gaming machine. However, when the maintainability is improved, troubles such as disassembling precision parts unintentionally by the operator are likely to occur. For this reason, in this embodiment, the dispensing device 5
In order to prevent such troubles in FIG. 3, the screw used for assembling the dispensing device 53 is concealed by a seal 53a so that the dispensing device 53 cannot be disassembled unless the seal 53a is peeled off. That is, by providing the seal 53a, the operator's intention to work is clearly confirmed, and unintentional removal and disassembly are preferably prevented. Further, by printing the characters “disassembly prohibited” on the seal 53a, the operator's attention can be urged and the intention of the operation can be confirmed more clearly. In addition, as long as it confirms the work intention, it is possible to provide not only the seal 53a but also a cover member that covers the screw. It is also effective to color the seal 53a with yellow and black, which are generally known as colors that call attention.

<Ball delivery passage>
A ball payout passage (depth direction passage) 59 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball payout device 53 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing the flow of game balls in the ball payout passage. FIG. 22 is a plan view for explaining the operation of the full tank rocking plate.

The ball payout passage 59 has a box main body 1521 formed in a box shape having an upper surface opened and extending in a substantially horizontal direction with a thickness of one game ball, and a lid body 1 covering the upper surface of the box main body 1521.
541 and has a flat shape as a whole. The ball payout passage 59 is provided below the game effect unit 4 and the main body frame 3 along the depth direction of the game effect unit 4 when the game effect unit 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The box main body 1521 has a degree to which the game ball flowing in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 1460 is guided in a zigzag manner and discharged from the ball outlet 1536 (that is, the storage portion 36 of the dish unit 300).
1) to have a substantially horizontal slope. For this reason, a side guide passage 1522 that guides the game ball that has flowed in from the prize ball entrance 1542 formed in the lid 1541 to the side from one end toward the other end is formed by the partition wall 1526 in the upstream portion. . A side guide receiving portion 1523 formed in a concave arc shape is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 1522 immediately below the prize ball entrance 1542 so as to guide the game ball toward the side. A buffer member 1524 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of the passage 1522 to receive the impact of the game ball flowing through the side guide passage 1522 and guide it to the downstream side.

In addition, the game ball that collides with the buffer member 1524 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 1522 is changed in direction to the downstream side, and then the side wall of the side guide passage 1522 is formed by the inclined side wall 1527 formed on the downstream side. It is induced to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the sphere. That is, the partition wall 152
6 and the inclined side wall 1527 form a reverse side guide passage 1525. The game ball that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 1525 is then guided to the front guide passage 1535 that is formed forward, and the above-described dish unit 300 is introduced from the ball outlet 1536 that is formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 1535. To the storage section 361.

Incidentally, a switch housing space 1528 is formed at one end portion of the reverse side guide passage 1525 on the downstream side of the buffer member 1524 so as to protrude outward. This switch storage space 15
A full tank swing plate 1531 through which a support shaft pin 1529 is inserted is swingably provided at a lower front position of 28. The full tank swinging plate 1531 is formed in a plate shape so as to form one end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 1525, a shaft hole is formed in the lower end of the plate shape, and a detection piece 1532 is integrally formed on the back surface thereof. Is formed. The detection piece 1532 is formed by vertically projecting the rear end portion of the fan-like coupling plate connected to the back surface of the full tank swinging plate 1531, and the projected detection piece 1532 projects the projection described in detail later. The full tank switch 730 is turned ON / OFF by shielding or conducting between the projector and the light receiver of the light receiving type full tank switch 730.
Is supposed to be detected. The lid 1541 has a position corresponding to the switch storage space 528 at a position 15 corresponding to the switch mounting portion 15 for mounting the full-light switch 730 of the light emitting / receiving type.
43 is formed.

A shaft spring 1530 is also inserted into the support pin 1529, one end of the shaft spring 1530 is locked to the back surface of the full tank swing plate 1531, and the other end is erected rearward of the support pin 1529. By being locked by the spring locking pin 1549, the upper end portion of the full rocking plate 1531 is always urged toward the reverse side guide passage 1525. However, switch storage space 1
Two stopper pieces 1534 are formed in the upper part of 528 at the downstream extension position of the other end side wall of the side guide passage 1522 and the rear position thereof. Therefore, the upper end portion of the full tank swing plate 1531 only swings around the support shaft pin 1529 between the two stopper pieces 1534. Note that a wiring drawing recess 1547 for drawing the wiring from the full switch 730 to the outside is formed in the rear portion of the upper side wall of the switch storage space 1528.

Further, a foul ball passage 1537 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 1525. In the foul ball passage 1537, a foul ball inlet 1538 on the upstream side thereof communicates with a communication port 473 (foul ball guide passage 473a) which will be described later, and a downstream side thereof is a front guide passage 1535.
Is bent so as to communicate with the upstream side. For this reason, the foul mouth 483 (FIG. 2)
3), the foul ball that has entered the communication port 473 is the foul ball entrance 1538.
Then, the bent ball path 1537 is led to the front guide path 1535, and further returned to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 through the ball outlet 1536.

In the ball payout passage 59 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 21, the game balls paid out from the prize ball passage 1460 of the ball payout device 53 are transferred from the prize ball entrance 1542 to the side guide passage 1.
It enters the upstream side of 522, is guided toward the side different from the direction of the ball outlet 1536 by the side guide receiving portion 1523, and collides with the buffer member 1524. The game ball that has collided with the buffer member 1524 hits the inclined side wall 1527 as it is toward the downstream side with its momentum weakened, and is guided in the reverse side guide passage 1525 in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 1522. The dish unit 3 is guided to the front guide passage 1535 and from the ball outlet 1536 of the front guide passage 1535.
00 storage unit 361. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul sphere entrance 1538 is also weakened by the bent foul sphere passage 1537 and joined to the front guide passage 1535, and from the ball outlet 1536 of the front guide passage 1535, the storage portion 361 of the dish unit 300. Led to.

As described above, when the game ball naturally flows in the ball payout passage 59, FIG.
When the game ball moves from the side guide passage 1522 to the reverse side guide passage 1525, the ball hits the buffer member 1524 and is reflected toward the substantially central position of the inclined side wall 1527. There is almost no contact with the swing plate 1531. Therefore, the upper end of the full rocking plate 1531 is moved forward by the stopper piece 153 by the urging force of the shaft spring 1530.
4, the detection piece 1532 is in a full light switch 73 of the light emitting / receiving type.
It is in a state (OFF) where the switch does not conduct because it enters between the zero projector and the light receiver.
On the other hand, when the prize ball is stored in the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 and the game ball is filled in the ball payout passage 59, as shown in FIG. Due to the pressure of the game ball stored in the direction guide passage 1525, the full swinging plate 1531 swings in the clockwise direction against the urging force of the shaft spring 1530 and is in contact with the subsequent stopper piece 1534. Become. In this state, the detection piece 1532 is a full tank switch 73 of the light projecting / receiving type.
The switch is turned off (ON) from between the zero projector and the light receiver. When the full tank switch 730 is turned ON, the rotational driving of the payout motor 1465 of the ball payout device 53 stops (if an ON signal is derived while paying out a predetermined number of prize balls, the predetermined number of prize balls Will be stopped after paying out). Even when game balls are stored in the front guide passage 1535 and the reverse side guide passage 1525, the bottom of the foul ball passage 1537 has a very strong inclination, so the stored game balls are stored in the foul ball passage 1537. , And does not flow backward from the foul bulb inlet 1538.

As described above, since the ball payout passage 59 according to the present embodiment is detachably attached to the ball payout passage setting portion 206 of the main body frame 3, the ball payout passage is formed in the main body frame as in the prior art. It is not necessary to form a sphere supply passage in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the payout passage.

In addition, since the ball dispensing device 53 is provided immediately upstream of the ball supply passage 59, the ball supply passage 59 is provided.
The game ball can be paid out at an appropriate payout speed by the flat ball supply passage 59. Further, by providing the ball payout device 53 immediately upstream of the ball supply passage 59, the supply of the game ball to the ball supply passage 59 can be realized in a form that weakens the momentum of the game ball as much as possible.

In addition, since the ball supply passage 59 is formed in a box shape extending in a substantially horizontal direction, the game balls sent to the ball payout passage 59 are scattered in the ball payout passage 59 and paid out to the storage unit 361. Can do. In other words, the conventional gaming machine has paid out a large amount of game balls in a straight line, but in this embodiment, the speed of the balls is reduced in the ball payout passage 59 so that the payout speed is slow. At the same time, the game balls are paid out so as to be scattered including the collision of the game balls in the ball payout passage 59. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a feeling of pitching or a feeling of paying out according to such a payout mode, thereby giving a sense of bliss when winning a winning ball at the time of a big hit. In addition, the game ball paid out from the prize ball passage 1460 of the ball payout device 53 is guided to a side different from the direction of the ball exit 1536 by the side guide receiving portion 1523, and once to the buffer member 1524. Since the collision is made, the speed of the game ball after the collision with the buffer member 1524 can be controlled to a substantially constant speed by the natural drop force. Further, by making the inside of the ball payout passage 59 into a zigzag passage, the dish unit 30 while weakening the momentum of the game balls paid out from the prize ball passage 1460 of the ball payout device 53.
It can be guided to 0, and the paid-out prize ball does not jump out of the storage unit 361.
In addition, since the full rocking plate 1531 for operating the full tank switch 730 is provided at a position below the flow lower end of the side guide passage 1522 that is not affected by the flow of the normal game ball, The award ball payout is not stopped due to a full tank, and the award ball payout can be reliably stopped only when the tank is full.
Further, the ball payout passage 59 according to the present embodiment is a foul ball passage 1537 for guiding a foul ball.
However, the foul balls can be joined without impeding the flow of the prize balls, because the momentum of the balls is weakened and joined in the middle of the front guide passage 1535 for delivering the prize balls.

<Mechanism for foul ball discharge>
Here, the mechanism relating to foul ball discharge in the main body frame 3 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is an enlarged front view centering on the joint portion of the main body frame and the game effect unit, and FIG. 23A is a view showing an injection mode of the game ball in the ball guide path, and FIG.
FIG. 3 is a view showing a backflow mode of a game ball in a ball guide passage.

First, as a premise, a mode in which a game ball ejected by the launching device 57 is guided toward the game area 20 by the launch guide path 29 will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, the game effect unit 4 includes an inner rail unit 462 and an outer rail unit 472 that constitute a guide rail 482.
A launch guide path 29 that is a flow path of a game ball that communicates with the game area 20 is formed in the gap. In addition, the upper end of the launch guide path 29 is provided in the upper part of the game area 20 (where the backflow prevention member 463 is installed), and functions as a ball insertion port 28 for throwing a game ball into the game area 20.

Then, as shown in FIG. 23, according to the operation of the handle unit 318 by the player,
The game ball supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 38 is ejected toward the launch guide path 29 by the reciprocating motion of the hit ball 57a of the launch device 57. When this game ball is guided by the launch guide path 29 and reaches the game area 20, the game ball is thrown from the ball insertion slot 28 and the game area 2.
It is comprised so that 0 may flow down.

First, as shown in FIG. 23A, the game ball ejected by the launching device 57 slides on the launch rail 38 by its urging force, and the launch guide path 29 starts from the upper end of the launch rail 38.
Radiated in. Here, the launch rail 38 is slightly curved upward so that the inclination gradually increases from the opening side of the pachinko machine 1 toward the shaft support side. Further, the pachinko machine is configured such that the launch rail 38 and the connection passage portion 477 are connected by the rail connection member 44 to the upper surface portion 44a of the rail connection member 44 that closes the gap between the launch rail 38 and the connection passage portion 477. 1 is provided with a gradually rising gradient from the open side to the shaft support side. And this rail connection member 4
4, the portion connected to the firing rail 38 is lower than the upper end of the firing rail 38.

With such a structure, the game ball released from the upper end of the launch rail 38 does not contact the rail connection member 44 and the connection passage portion 477, and the inner side surface (rail surface 472a) of the outer rail unit 472 in the launch guide path 29. ) Directly reachable. Then, the game ball that has reached the outer rail unit 472 further passes through the rail surface 472 of the outer rail unit 472
Flowing so as to ascend in the launch guide path 29 while being guided by a. On the other hand, since the urging force with respect to the game ball is small, the game ball may fall before reaching the outer rail unit 472 and the game ball may fall on the connection passage portion 477. In this case, the rail connection member 44 prevents the game ball from spilling downward from the gap between the connection passage portion 477 and the launch rail 38,
As will be described later, the game ball is returned to the launch position of the launch rail 38.

In the game effect unit 4, the gap between the outer rail unit 472 and the connection passage portion 477 functions as an opening (a foul port 489) through which the game ball can enter by communicating with the communication port 473. Then, the foul ball that has been discharged from the upper end of the firing rail 38 and flows backward into the foul port 489 enters the communication port 473 and is discharged to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 as described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23B, the game ball ejected by the launching device 57 stalls before reaching the game area 20 and flows backward in the launch guide path 29 (ie, flows downward). ) At this time, the game ball flowing backward in the launch guide path 29 is
It flows downward while being guided by the second rail surface 472a, and falls (falls) into the foul port 489 when it reaches the lower end 472b of the outer rail unit 472. And this foul mouth 4
The game ball that has fallen into 89 enters toward the communication port 473, or a stop wall portion 477b that is provided continuously from the upper end of the connection passage portion 477 to the inside of the foul port 489 (ie, below).
To the communication port 473.

Here, the communication port 473 is formed with a foul ball guiding path 473a which is a flow path of a game ball formed so as to penetrate the game effect unit 4 in the front-rear direction along the lower edge of the communication port 473. Yes. The foul ball guiding path 473a is inclined downward from the front to the rear of the game effect unit 4, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 1538 of the ball payout passage 59 on the most downstream side in the flow direction of the game ball. ing. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the communication port 473 rolls on the foul ball guiding path 473a and is guided to the back side of the game effect unit 4, and further rolls in the ball payout passage 59 to store the dish unit 300. It is discharged to the part 361.

On the other hand, when the momentum of the game ball flowing backward through the launch guide path 29 is large, the game ball may jump over the foul port 489 and reach the upper surface 477a of the connection passage portion 477. At this time, the game ball rolls further toward the open side while being guided by the upper surface 477a of the connection passage portion 477 inclined downward toward the open side. Then, after rolling while decelerating on the upper surface portion 44a of the rail connection member 44 having a gentle inclination, the firing rail 38 is flowed back to return to the firing position.

In the state where the game effect unit 4 is installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the player opens the communication port 473.
It can be visually recognized through. Therefore, the game ball that flows backward in the launch guide path 29 is connected to the communication port 473.
The player can visually check the mode of entering the game.

By the way, conventionally, the foul mouth is provided in the main body frame below the game board, and almost all of the foul balls are collected from the foul mouth. In other words, even a foul ball that has failed to reach the outer rail is recovered from the foul mouth. For this reason, a foul ball that reaches the outer rail and is not visually recognized by the player does not know what happens from the player side, and there is a risk that launch adjustment may be difficult. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the foul ball on the upper surface 477a of the connection passage portion 477 is returned to the firing rail 38 side. In other words, the foul ball that has failed to reach the outer rail unit 472 is returned to the firing position. As a result, the time required for re-strike can be reduced, and launch adjustment is easier than before.

Further, the foul mouth 489 is the game effect unit 4 (in detail, the front component member 680 described later).
Therefore, it is possible to quickly collect game balls that run backward on the outer rail unit 472. In addition, the foul ball flowing down from the lower end portion 472 b of the outer rail unit 472 is dropped into the foul port 489 by the stop wall portion 477 b of the connection passage portion 477. This
The game balls that run backward on the outer rail unit 472 can be reliably collected.

A communication port 473 (foul ball guiding path 473a) is provided for discharging the foul ball dropped into the foul port 489 to the back side of the game effect unit 4 (specifically, a front constituent member 680 described later). In this way, the communication port 473 (foul ball guiding path 473a) is connected to the game effect unit 4 (
Specifically, since it is provided on the front constituent member 680) described later, the foul ball is discharged at a relatively high position, and for example, the foul ball can be easily returned to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 on the front side. .

Conventionally, in a configuration having two upper and lower storage dishes on the front side, game balls collected from the foul mouth are returned to the lower storage dish (lower dish). In this case, it is necessary for the player himself to return the foul ball of the lower plate to the upper storage plate (upper plate), and the number of foul balls increases particularly at the time of launch adjustment, which may cause a decrease in interest. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the foul balls discharged from the foul ball guiding path 473a are joined to a ball payout passage 59 that is a flow path of a prize ball to be paid out from the payout device 53. That is, the foul ball is returned to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 from which the game ball at the time of winning a prize is paid out. This eliminates the need for the player himself to return the foul ball to the upper plate, and can reduce the decrease in interest caused by the foul ball during launch adjustment.

In particular, since the communication port 473 (foul ball guiding path 473a) is formed above the ball payout passage 59 provided in the lower part of the main body frame 3, the game effect unit 4 (details will be described in the front component described later) 680), the foul balls discharged to the back side are guided to the ball payout passage 59 without any delay. Thereby, the time required for the foul ball to return to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 is relatively short.

Further, the inner rail unit 462 is arranged in parallel with the outer rail unit 472, and a launch guide path 29 reaching the ball insertion port 28 is formed. As a result, the foul sphere that does not reach the ball insertion port 28 flows downward along the launch guide path 29, so that the trajectory of the foul sphere flowing down from the lower end portion 472b of the outer rail unit 472 can be stabilized, and the connection path Part 47
7, the foul ball can be almost surely dropped into the foul mouth 489.

Here, in the present embodiment, almost the entire area of the launch guide path 29 is visible from the front side through the game window 101 (see FIG. 36). Therefore, the behavior of the foul ball that does not reach the ball insertion port 28 is known, and launch adjustment is further facilitated. Here, conventionally, in the configuration in which the main body frame is provided with the foul port, the foul ball that does not reach the ball insertion port is received and collected by the foul port. Therefore, if the number of foul balls increases at the time of launch adjustment, the number of game balls returned to the storage tray increases, and there is a problem that launch adjustment is difficult. In this regard, in this embodiment, the foul sphere that has passed the foul port 489 to the launch guide path 29 is received by the foul port 489, while the foul sphere that has not passed the foul port 489 and has not reached the launch guide path 29 is , Returned to the launch position. That is, only the visually recognized foul sphere is received and collected by the foul mouth 489, and the foul sphere not visually recognized is returned to the firing position. In this way, even if the number of foul balls increases during launch adjustment, the number of game balls returned to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 can be relatively small. In addition, a foul ball that is not visually recognized can be re-shot from the launch position, so that launch adjustment is relatively easy.

By the way, a foul port 489 is provided in the game effect unit 4 (specifically, a front constituent member 680 described later) adjacent to the lower end portion 472b of the outer rail unit 472. on the other hand,
The firing rail 38 is provided on the main body frame 3. Therefore, if the launch rail 38 is made long enough to reach the game effect unit 4, the game effect unit 4 housed in the main body frame 3 (the front component member 680 that is a part of the game effect unit 4) may be interfered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, an “alignment portion” composed of the rail connection member 44 and the connection passage portion 477 is provided. This “alignment portion” is interposed between the foul port 489 and the firing rail 38 to form a series from the outer rail unit 472 to the firing rail 38. If such a “matching portion” (rail connection member 44 and connection passage portion 477) is interposed, it is not necessary to lengthen the launch rail 38, and the launch rail 38 and the game effect unit 4 (the front component member 680) The problem of interference can be solved. This makes the foul mouth 4
Even if it is the structure which provides 89 in the game production | presentation unit 4 (front structural member 680), the launch rail 3
8 can be easily attached.

And the upper surface part of the above-mentioned "matching part" is comprised by the inclined surface which inclines to the firing rail 38 side,
The foul ball of the inclined surface is returned to the firing rail 38 side. That is, the foul ball is returned to the predetermined launch position by the upper surface portion of the “alignment portion”. As a result, the time required for re-strike can be reduced, and launch adjustment is easier than before.

Here, in the configuration in which the foul ball of the “alignment portion” is returned to the firing rail 38 side, the upper surface of the end portion on the firing rail 38 side of the “alignment portion” is flush with the end rail surface of the firing rail 38. Arrangement is also possible. However, for example, due to mounting errors of the launch rail 38,
The upper surface of the end portion of the “alignment portion” may be higher than the end rail surface of the firing rail 38. If the upper surface of the end portion of the “alignment portion” becomes slightly high, the launched game ball comes into contact with the “alignment portion”. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the upper end surface of the upper surface portion of the “alignment portion” that is close to the firing rail 38 side is disposed below the end rail surface of the firing rail 38. Even if there is an installation error,
The upper surface of the end portion of the “alignment portion” does not become higher than the end rail surface of the firing rail 38. That is, the launched game ball is prevented from coming into contact with the rail connection member 44.

In addition, the above-described “matching portion” is a connection passage portion 477 (corresponding to a guide portion) of the game effect unit 4.
And the rail connection member 44 (corresponding to the stepped portion) of the main body frame 3, the game effect unit 4
In the structure in which the main body frame 3 is accommodated, it is only necessary to consider the alignment between the connection passage portion 477 and the rail connection member 44, and interference of the rail portions (the launch rail 38 and the outer rail unit 472) can be avoided. In particular, since the rail connection member 44 is integrally formed on the front surface portion of the main body frame 3, unlike the structure in which the rail connection member 44 is mounted separately, no mounting error of the rail connection member 44 itself occurs. Yes. Further, the firing rail 38 is attached to the main body frame 3 so as to maintain a predetermined positional relationship with the rail connection member 44. Rail connection member 44
Since it is integrally formed on the front surface of the main body frame 3 as described above, the firing rail 38 can be appropriately attached to the main body frame 3.

In the configuration in which the foul ball of the “alignment portion” is returned to the rail connection member 44 side, the upper end surface of the connection passage portion 477 on the rail connection member 44 side is flush with the upper end surface of the rail connection member 44. It is also possible to arrange it above. However, the upper surface of the end portion of the rail connection member 44 may be higher than the upper surface of the end portion of the connection passage portion 477 due to, for example, an accommodation error of the game effect unit 4. And if the end part upper surface of the rail connection member 44 becomes high, it will become difficult to return a foul ball | bowl from the connection channel | path part 477 to the firing rail 38 side.
In this regard, in the present embodiment, in the state where the game effect unit 4 is housed in the main body frame 3, the upper end surface of the upper surface of the rail connection member 44 that is close to the connection passage portion 477 side is the connection passage portion 477. It is arrange | positioned below the edge part upper surface of the upper surface part. Thereby, for example, even if there is an accommodation error of the game effect unit 4, the upper end surface of the rail connection member 44 does not become higher than the upper end surface of the connection passage portion 477. The foul ball quickly returns to the firing position via the rail connection member 44.

By the way, in recent years, game areas tend to be expanded with the increase in size of liquid crystal displays and the like. Accordingly, the guide path of the game ball from the launching device to the ball slot in the game area is also long.
This guide path is composed of a rail member. However, if the rail member becomes longer, the frictional force received from the rail member becomes larger, and the disturbance factor becomes larger. There is.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, a connection passage portion 477 that forms a foul port 489 is provided between the lower end portion 472b of the outer rail unit 472.
Furthermore, a rail connection member 44 interposed between the connection passage portion 477 and the firing rail 38 is provided in the main body frame 3. Then, the game ball launched from the launch position and guided to the launch rail 38 directly reaches the outer rail unit 472 through the connection passage portion 477 and the rail connection member 44. That is, it is guided to the ball insertion port 28 only by the launch rail 38 and the outer rail unit 472. By providing such a rail connection member 44, the launch rail 38 can be further shortened, the frictional force generated in the game ball can be further suppressed, and the disturbance factor is also relatively small, so that the ball Flying can be stabilized.

And the upper surface part 44a of the rail connection member 44 is also comprised by the inclined surface which inclines to the firing rail 38 side, and the foul ball | bowl of the said inclined surface is returned to the firing rail 38 side. That is, the foul ball is returned to the predetermined launch position by the upper surface portion 44a of the rail connection member 44.
As a result, the time required for re-strike can be reduced, and launch adjustment is easier than before.

By the way, the foul port 489 is formed not in the main body frame 3 side but in the game effect unit 4, so that the main body frame 3 can be prevented from being damaged or broken due to the discharge of the foul ball. Even if the game effect unit 4 is damaged or broken due to the discharge of the foul ball, the foul ball can be appropriately discharged by replacing only the game effect unit 4, so the pachinko machine 1 or the game There is an advantage that recycling and maintenance of the production unit 4 is easy.

Further, as described above, both the foul ball and the prize ball are one path, the ball payout passage 59.
Is discharged to the storage section 361 of the common dish unit 300. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide a return path for foul balls and a payout path for prize balls as in the prior art, and the structure of the main body frame 3 is simplified. And since the discharge path of the foul ball and prize ball provided in the main body frame 3 is made common, it is possible to secure the game effect unit installation recess 30 as a large accommodation space without narrowing the game effect unit installation recess 30. Is possible.

<Game production unit installation recess>
Next, the structure of the game effect unit installation recessed part 30 is further demonstrated with reference to FIG. 12 and FIG. As shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, the game effect unit installation recess 30 has a front-facing saddle face portion that does not accommodate the game effect unit 4 in a part on the upper side and the open side. Nothing is formed on the surface portion, but the door hook holes 352 through which the door frame hook portion 973 of the locking device 60 penetrates are opened in the upper, middle and lower three portions on the open side surface portion. Yes. That is, the locking device 60 is fixed to the back surface of the open side ridge portion (see FIG. 4).

Thus, as described above, the game effect unit installation recess 30 includes the first peripheral wall 290, the second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 293, so that the left and right sides of the main body frame 3 It is formed in a concave shape in which the rear part of the side and the upper side is surrounded. Here, the first circumferential surface wall 290 surrounds the game effect unit installation concave portion 30 from the inner side surface on the pivot support side, the upper side surface portion, the open side surface portion and the lower side surface toward the rear side. It is arranged so that. The second peripheral wall 291 extends rearward from the first peripheral wall 290, and the third peripheral wall 292
Is extended rearward from the second peripheral wall 291, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 is the third peripheral wall 292.
It extends from the rear to the rear. Thus, the main body frame 3 is integrally formed in a square cylinder shape. However, only the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291 are extended from the inner surface of the lower side portion, and the substrate unit 54 is disposed in the vicinity of the rear of the second peripheral wall 291. .

The first peripheral wall 290 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 are formed to extend straight from the upper side (main body frame upper wall part) and the side on the pivotal support side (second main body frame side wall part) to the rear with a step. On the other hand, the side on the open side (first body frame side wall) is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 5) that inclines inwardly from the first peripheral wall 290 toward the fourth peripheral wall 293. Has been. In addition, the inwardly inclined shape from the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side toward the fourth peripheral wall 293 can be smoothly opened when the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. It is to make it. That is, when the first peripheral wall 290 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 on the open side are formed to extend straight rearward, the fourth peripheral wall 293 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. In order to avoid this, there is a possibility that the rearmost end portion of the frame abuts against the inner surface of the side frame plate of the outer frame 2 and cannot be opened smoothly. In addition, the locking device 60 is attached along the first circumferential wall 290 on the open side. The locking device 60 is attached to a lock mounting hole provided on the rear end side of the first circumferential wall 290 (
Therefore, it is preferable to form the fourth peripheral wall 293 from the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side in an inclined step shape in order to form the lock mounting hole (not illustrated). Furthermore,
Since the inner peripheral surface of the first peripheral wall 290 and the outer peripheral surface of the game effect unit 4 must be brought into contact with each other, the step between the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291 is formed with a somewhat large step. The dimension of the step between the second peripheral wall 291 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 is an extremely small step.

However, if the first main body frame side wall portion is unnecessarily large and inclined toward the fourth peripheral wall 293 from the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side, the game effect unit installation recess 30 described above is used.
It is difficult to secure a distance of approximately 44 cm as the volume, particularly the maximum lateral width L3 on the back side. Therefore, in this embodiment, the main body frame 3 is located on the front side of the outer frame 2.
Is the opening / closing axis O, the first body frame side wall portion has the opening / closing axis O.
It was decided to be provided so as to extend rearward while being bent stepwise along an imaginary circle arc C drawn on a horizontal plane with the axis point at the center. That is, in this case, the first main body frame side wall is inclined inward toward the inside by a minimum width so as not to adversely affect the opening operation of the main body frame 3 by colliding with the outer frame 2. As a result, it is possible to secure a distance of approximately 44 cm as the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30, particularly the maximum lateral width L 3 on the back side.

In addition, since the first main body frame side wall portion is provided so as to extend rearward while being bent stepwise, the strength of the main body frame 3 as a constituent component is simpler than when it is simply formed linearly in the inner direction. Can be suitably secured. Moreover, the second main body frame side wall and the main body frame upper wall formed integrally with the first main body frame side wall are also the first.
Each time the main body frame side wall portion is bent, it is provided so as to extend rearward while being bent inward by its own thickness, so that the strength as the thin peripheral wall 290 to 293 can be efficiently ensured. It becomes like this. Further, since the second main body frame side wall portion and the main body frame upper wall portion are bent inward only by their substantially wall thickness, the game effect unit installation concave portion 30 becomes uselessly small. There is no end to it.

In this embodiment, the first main body frame side wall is approximately 0.98 times the distance L11 (see FIG. 62) from the axial point of the opening / closing axis O to the front surface of the side frame plate 13. It is provided so as to extend rearward while being bent stepwise along a circular arc of a virtual circle having a radial distance. However, as will be described later, in this embodiment, at the rear end portion of the side frame plate 13,
A thick portion 13b having a thickness of approximately 19 mm is formed. For this reason, the first main body frame side wall portion has a rear end portion (thickness portion 13 b) that is particularly at the rear end portion than the front end portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. Colliding with each other can adversely affect its opening action. Therefore, in this embodiment, the first main body frame side wall is provided with the opening / closing axis O.
It is provided so as to extend rearward while being bent stepwise along a virtual circular arc having a radial distance of approximately 0.99 times the distance L12 (see FIG. 62) from the axial point to the thickness portion 13b. ing. In this way, the first main body extends along an arc of a virtual circle having a radial distance sufficient to increase the magnification with respect to the distance from the axial point of the opening / closing axis O to the rear end portion of the side frame plate 13. By providing the frame side wall portion, the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30, particularly the maximum lateral width L3 on the back side, is approximately 44c compared to the conventional case where the radial distance is adjusted to the front end portion.
A distance such as m can be secured. That is, on the contrary, the above-mentioned approximately 1
Since the thickness portion 13b having a thickness of 9 mm is provided not at the front end portion of the side frame plate 13 but at the rear end portion thereof, the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30, particularly the maximum lateral width on the back side A distance of approximately 44 cm can be secured as L3.

Then, the peripheral walls 290 to 293 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively, as shown in FIG. 12, and in the case of this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d.
3 + d4 = about 135 mm. In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first peripheral wall 290 corresponds to a thickness that can cover the side portion of the game panel 409, and is formed by the remaining second peripheral wall 291, third peripheral wall 292, and fourth peripheral wall 293. The rearward projecting portions of various game devices as the game effect unit 4 are accommodated in the space to be played. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, as will be described below, the second peripheral wall 29 reaches a position corresponding to the outer periphery of the game panel 409.
The size of the space formed by the first, third peripheral wall 292, and fourth peripheral wall 293 is secured. Thereby, for example, even when an effect display device 115 or the like that occupies most of the game panel 409 as a game board is attached, the display device control board box 119 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 115. The rearward projecting portion according to (see FIG. 54) can be easily stored. In addition, the peripheral wall 290-293 concerning this embodiment is formed so that it may extend from the rear surface of the said outer frame 2 to about 63 mm back.

Further, from the rear end side of the fourth peripheral wall 293, specifically, from the open side, the upper side, and the side of the shaft support side, the open side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the shaft support side rear wall 296 are respectively provided. It extends toward the inside. The “open side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and / or the pivot support side rear wall 296” corresponds to the “rear wall portion” of the present invention.

The shaft support side rear surface wall 296 has a flat front surface, and the rear surface has a spherical passage unit 5.
2 and the ball payout device 53 are detachably attached along the shaft support side rear wall 296. Therefore, the projecting width to the inner side of the shaft support side rear wall 296 is determined by the ball passage unit 52.
And the ball payout device 53 need only be wide enough.

The upper rear wall 295 has a flat front surface, and the tank rail member 51 is attached to the rear surface. The tank rail member 51 is inclined so that a game ball can flow down, and the lower end side of the upper rear wall 295 is formed in an inclined shape along the tank rail member 51. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 295 to have a height width dimension of the tank rail member 51 attached in an inclined manner.

Further, the front surface of the open-side rear wall 294 has a flat plate shape, and a back cover support cylinder portion (attachment member) 280 that pivotally supports the back cover 58 is formed on the open end side of the rear surface.
Accordingly, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the open-side rear wall 294 to have a width dimension that forms the back cover support cylinder 280. The back cover support cylinder 280 is not limited to being pivotally supported on the open side (the side on which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2), and is not limited to the pivotal support side (the outer frame 2). The main frame 3 may be pivotally supported on the side).

As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the pivot-side rear wall 296 that protrude inward from the rear edge of the fourth peripheral wall 293 are formed in a flat plate shape. .
Further, as described above, the second peripheral wall 291 is moved to a position corresponding to the outer periphery of the game panel 409.
The size of the space formed by the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293 is ensured. Therefore, for example, even when the effect display device 115 or the like that occupies most of the game panel 409 as a game board is attached, the display device control board box 119 ( The rear projecting portion according to FIG. 54) can be easily stored. A rear opening 70 is formed inside the open-side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the pivot support-side rear wall 296 so that the display device control board box 119 and the like face each other. Work can be done easily. Further, the rear opening 70 is closed so as to be openable and closable so as to be covered by a back cover 58 (see FIG. 4). The protruding member is protected.

<Board unit>
Next, the substrate unit 54 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 is mainly shown in FIG.
4 and FIG. 25. FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the back side. FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the substrate unit 54 is attached to a plurality of attachment holes 207 (see FIG. 15) formed in the lower portion of the back surface of the main body frame 3, and is a synthetic resin-molded substrate tray 64. In addition, various boards such as a door relay board 68, a power board board 62, a terminal board box 56, a payout control board box 55, a main drawer relay board 648, and a sub drawer relay board 649 are attached. Among the above boards, the door relay board 68, the power board box 62, the terminal board box 56, and the dispensing control board box 55 are the board tray 6
4, the main drawer relay board 648 and the sub drawer relay board 649 are attached to the front side of the board tray 64. A shield plate is attached to the rear surface of the payout control board box 55 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board or the like, and the main drawer relay board 648 and the sub drawer relay board 649 are attached to the board cover 641. Covered and attached.

First, the substrate tray 64 is formed in a horizontally long synthetic resin, a wiring opening 642 is formed on one side of the rear surface side, and a relay substrate for attaching the door relay substrate 68 inside the wiring opening 642 is formed. A recess is formed. At both the left and right sides and the lower side of the substrate tray 64, mounting pieces 643 for mounting the substrate unit 54 to the main body frame 3 are projected outward, and the mounting pieces 643 are attached to the mounting holes 207 (see FIG. 15), the board unit 54 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. A wiring hooking piece 644 for locking the wiring is formed outside the side wall on the other end side of the substrate tray 64.

Further, an out-sphere passage 645 is formed in an inverted L shape substantially at the center of the front side of the substrate tray 64. The out-ball passage 645 includes the above-described out-port 471 and the ball removal connection passage 4
The upper side is formed widely so as to correspond to the downstream side of 15 and the drop port (not shown), and the downstream side is formed narrow so that the game balls are discharged in a row. Therefore, when the substrate unit 54 is attached to the main body frame 3, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 645 is positioned behind the passage support protrusion (not shown) that supports the lower surface of the out port 471. Then, out balls, winning balls, or ball-out balls are discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 645 toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine (generally, a collection basket on the island).

Next, the main drawer relay board 648 and the sub drawer relay board 649 attached to the front side of the board tray 64 will be described.

Here, the main drawer relay board 648 is provided with a frame side main drawer connector 2000b and a payout control board connector 2010 on the top and bottom. Among these, the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is connected to the unit side main drawer connector 2000a (see FIG. 54) attached to the back side of the game effect control unit 99, whereby the main control device (main control board 710). , See FIG. 64). That is, the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 64) according to this embodiment is supplied with power via the payout control device (payout control board 720, see FIG. 64) on the main body frame 3 side. The frame-side main drawer connector 2000b is electrically connected to the payout control board connector 2010 by an in-board wiring (not shown) of the main drawer relay board 648. The payout control board connector 2010 is connected to the payout control board (payout control board 720,
The power supply line for the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 64) is formed by being connected to an internal connection terminal (not shown) in FIG. 64 by a wire harness (not shown). It becomes. In this embodiment, the unit-side main drawer connector 200
0a and the payout control board connector 2010 are connected to the main controller (main control board 710, FIG. 6).
4) and the payout control device (payout control board 720, see FIG. 64).

On the other hand, the sub-drawer relay board 649 includes a frame side sub-drawer connector 2002b,
Door frame connectors 2012 are provided on the upper and lower sides. Of these, the frame side auxiliary drawer connector 2
002b is connected to the unit side auxiliary drawer connector 2002a attached to the back side of the game effect control unit 99, so that the effect control device (peripheral control board 810 (FIG. 65) is connected.
This is a part for forming an information transmission / reception line for a frame decoration relay terminal board 240 described later. In other words, the frame side sub drawer connector 2002b is electrically connected to the door frame connector 2012 via the in-board wiring (not shown) of the sub drawer relay board 649, and the door frame connector 2012 is connected to the door frame connector 2012. By connecting the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 with a wire harness (not shown), an information transfer line to the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 described later of the effect control device (peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 65)) is provided. Will be formed. As a result, the production control device can control the driving of the speakers 144a and 144b, the operation buttons 327, the frame decoration lamp 842, and the like through the frame decoration relay terminal plate 240.

Although the configuration of the board unit 54 has been described above, in the case of the present embodiment, among various boards necessary for driving and controlling the pachinko machine 1, the board unit 54 is replaced with a change in the game effect unit 4. Door relay board 68 which is a board other than the game control board and the display device control board, power board 395 housed in power board box 62, external terminal board 753 housed in terminal board box 56, housed in payout control board box 55 The dispense control board 720 thus assembled is previously assembled to the board tray 64 to form a unit, and the assembled board unit 5
By simply attaching 4 to the lower part on the back side of the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 is separated separately.
The work efficiency can be improved as compared with various board attachment work that has been attached to the back side of the substrate. Further, in this case, since the wiring between the boards unitized in the board unit 54 can be accommodated in the board tray 64, the wiring connecting the boards is not messed up and disturbed, and is laid out in an orderly manner. Can do.

In the present embodiment, the frame side main drawer connector 200 is provided on the front surface of the board unit 54.
A main drawer relay board 648 having 0b and a sub drawer relay board 649 having a frame side sub drawer connector 2002b are provided. Then, when the game effect control unit 99 is mounted on the main body frame 3 from the front side, the unit-side main drawer of the panel relay terminal board 750 provided on the back side of the game effect control unit 99 game effect unit 4 Connector 2000
a and the unit side sub drawer connector 2002a are connected to the corresponding frame side main drawer connector 2000b and frame side sub drawer connector 2002b, respectively. Therefore, the mounting of the game effect control unit 99 and the connection between the boards can be performed at the same time, and the replacement work of the game effect control unit 99 can be performed efficiently.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 13, the game panel 409 includes one game including the main control device (game control device). The effect control unit 99 is configured to be accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 from the front receiving port 30a. In this respect, in this pachinko machine 1, in this embodiment, first, the box-shaped substrate holder (peripheral control substrate box 24, main control substrate box 25, display device control substrate box 119, etc.) is used. When the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30, at least one inner wall (peripheral wall 290) of the pair of main body frame side wall portions and the main body frame upper wall portion.
To a part of the inner wall of ˜293).

Then, as shown in FIG. 54, a flange portion FG is formed on the periphery of the substrate holder, and a screw hole (not shown) provided at the outer peripheral edge of the rear surface of the panel holder 540 is formed. The board holder is attached to the large game board member provided with the game panel 409 by screwing the flange portion FG in between. Furthermore, when the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30, a power line for the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 64) is connected to the game on the main body frame 3 side. The main drawer connector (unit side) shared with the information transfer line with the payout control device via the payout control device (the payout control board 720, see FIG. 64) attached below the effect unit installation recess 30. The main control device (game control device) and the payout control device are electrically connected by the main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b). Further, of the main drawer connectors, the unit side main drawer connector 2000a provided on the game effect control unit 99 side is fixed so as to face rearward at a position where the flange portion FG on the lower peripheral edge of the substrate holder is provided. The frame-side main drawer connector 2000b provided on the main body frame 3 side of the main drawer connector is fixedly arranged so as to face the front at the lowermost part of the game effect unit installation recess 30. Yes.

In such a configuration, due to the contact between the substrate holder and the inner wall of the main body frame 3, the game effect control unit 99 is properly accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30 while being guided to its accommodation location. It becomes like this. Then, the power supply line for the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 64) is connected to the main body frame 3 via the payout control device (payout control board 720, see FIG. 64). When securing the main drawer connector (unit side main drawer connector 2000a and frame side main drawer connector 2000b) shared with the information exchange line with the device, the unit side main drawer connector 2000a is
The frame holder main drawer connector 2000b is directed forward at the lowermost part of the game effect unit installation recess 30 while being fixedly disposed so as to face rearward at the flange portion FG provided at the lower peripheral edge of the substrate holder. It was decided to be fixed. Therefore, the unit-side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b are automatically connected only by housing the game effect control unit 99 in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3. Thus, after the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30, the main controller (main control board 710, FIG. 6).
4), manual work such as connecting the power supply line with an appropriate connector can be omitted.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the panel holder 54 is provided around the periphery of the box-shaped substrate holder.
The flange portion FG to be screwed with a screw hole (not shown) provided on the rear surface of the 0 is formed, and the unit side main drawer connector 2 is formed at a place where the flange portion FG is formed.
000a was provided. That is, as described above, a structure in which a light-emitting effect is produced from the rear by attaching a box-shaped back unit 510 having a predetermined depth to a large-sized game board member (game board portion) having a transparent board-like game panel 409. The adopted game effect control unit 99 requires a space in which various control boards are arranged in the depth direction. This point,
In the above configuration, the unit side main drawer connector 2000 is attached to the flange portion FG of the substrate holder.
Since the connector 2000a can be disposed in a compact manner, the flange portion FG can be disposed even if a design change occurs in the space in the depth direction in which the various control boards are disposed. The unit-side main drawer connector 20 provided
It is not necessary to change the position of 00a, and as a result, the position of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is also suitably maintained.

For convenience of explanation, although not shown in the drawings, in this embodiment, a wire harness (not shown) provided so that the unit side main drawer connector 2000a enters the board holder from the flange portion FG. And a drawer connector (not shown) in the holder that is connected to the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 64) as a free end on the opposite side of the wire harness. Therefore, even if the arrangement and design of the main control device are changed, the unit-side main drawer connector 2 provided in the flange portion FG.
The position of 000a can be suitably maintained. Still further, the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 64) and the payout control are connected with a wire harness provided so as to enter the board holder from the flange portion FG. As shown in FIG. 54, a signal line (wire harness) used for exchanging information with the apparatus (payout control board 720, see FIG. 64) is connected to the board holder (peripheral control board box 24, main control). It becomes possible to suitably protect against fraud in the board box 25).

In this embodiment, the outer peripheral edge of the rear surface of the panel holder 540 is provided with a plurality of screw holes more than necessary for attaching the substrate holder. Thereby, even if a change occurs in the design on the board holder side, the configuration of the large game board member (game board part) can be suitably maintained.

On the other hand, on the main body frame 3 side, as shown in FIG. 25 together with FIG. 13, only the upper portion where the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is fixedly arranged is A main drawer relay board 648 provided so as to protrude from the lower part of the back surface (the lower part of the main body frame 3) to the game effect unit installation recess (large accommodation space) 30 is provided. The position where the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is fixedly arranged is the position where the unit side main drawer connector 2000a is positioned when the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30. Yes. And the main drawer relay board 648
Payout control electrically connected to the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b by an in-board wiring (not shown) on the lower side of the same surface as the surface on which the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b is fixedly arranged. Since the board (main drawer connector in frame) connector 2010 is fixedly arranged, the frame side main drawer can be changed even if the arrangement and design of the delivery control device (payout control board 720, see FIG. 64) are changed. The position of the connector 2000b can be suitably maintained. Furthermore, since the payout control board connector 2010 is fixedly disposed between the main drawer relay board 648 and the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3, the main control device and the payout control device are connected to each other. Signal line (used to exchange information between
The wire harness) can be suitably protected from fraud in the space between the main drawer relay board 648 and the lower part of the main body frame 3.

Incidentally, the structure and the mounting position of such a unit side main drawer connector 2000a can be said to be the same in the unit side sub drawer connector 2002a.
That is, the unit-side auxiliary drawer connector 2002a is also fixedly disposed so as to face rearward at a location where the flange portion FG is provided on the lower periphery of the substrate holder, and enters the substrate holder from the flange portion FG. Is connected to a wire harness (not shown). In addition, on the opposite side of this wire harness, a drawer connector (not shown) in the holder that is a free end and is connected to the effect control device is formed.

Similarly, in the sub-drawer relay board 649, only the upper part of the sub-drawer relay board 649 where the frame-side sub drawer connector 2002b is fixedly arranged is the lower part of the back side of the main body frame 3 (the lower side of the main body frame 3). The game effect unit installation recess (large accommodation space) 30 protrudes from the portion). The position where the frame side auxiliary drawer connector 2002b is fixedly arranged is the position where the unit side auxiliary drawer connector 2002a is located when the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30. ing.

<Drawer connector>
Next, a drawer connector used for electrical connection between the main body frame 3 and the game effect control unit 99 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a main drawer connector and a sub drawer connector.

As described above, the game effect control unit 99 side has a unit side drawer connector 200.
0a and 2002a are provided, and on the main body frame 3 side, the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 200a are provided.
2b is provided. A pair of drawer connectors composed of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is the main drawer connector 200.
0. Also, the unit side sub drawer connector 2002a and the frame side sub drawer connector 20
A pair of drawer connectors constituted by 02b is a sub drawer connector 2002.

As shown in FIG. 26A, unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a are provided on the game effect control unit 99 side, and frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 200a on the main body frame 3 side.
It can be electrically connected by inserting it into 2b. Unit side drawer connector 20
00a and 2002a are terminals 2001a and 2003a as shown in FIG.
It has. As shown in FIG. 26C, the frame-side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b include contacts 2001b and 2003b. Unit side drawer connector 2
000a and 2002a are inserted into the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b, the terminals 2001a and 2003a are connected to the contacts 2001b and 2002b as shown in FIG.
By pushing down 2003b, the contacts 2001b and 2003b are displaced. The repulsive force of the contacts 2001b and 2003b generated by this displacement is the terminal 2001a,
By bringing 2003a into strong contact, an electrically conductive state is established.

As a result, the main drawer connector 2000 and the sub drawer connector 2002 are formed with control signal lines for transmitting various control signals between the various control boards (for example, by the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720). Further, the main drawer connector 2000 and the sub drawer connector 2002 are further formed with voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages created by the power supply board 395. As described above, the game effect unit 4 is detachably attached to the main body frame 3 so that the unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a and the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b (that is, the main drawer connector 2000 and the sub drawer connector 2002). The control signal line and the voltage supply line can be connected freely.

Note that the terminals 2001a and 2003a and the contact 2001 in the present embodiment.
The bellows type is adopted for b and 2003b. In the case of the pin type, there is a possibility that the pin may be inadvertently touched and bent during the work, but in the case of the bellows type, there is no such risk. Also, terminals 2001a and 2003a and contacts 2001b and 20
Gold plating with a small friction coefficient is adopted for the plating of 03b. Thereby, the sliding goodness (goodness of fitting) at the time of attachment and detachment of the game production unit 4 is ensured.

Here, when the game effect unit 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, if the work is performed with the power switch turned on, the contact between the terminal 2001a and the contact 2001b,
Specifically, since a large current (an inrush current described later) flows at the contacts for various voltage supply lines, welding occurs. If the game effect unit 4 is forcibly pushed into and attached to the main body frame 3 in this welded state, the contact 2001b is bent or broken, or when the game effect unit 4 is removed from the main body frame 3, the contact 2001b The drawer connector 2000a cannot be used because it is peeled off and damaged from the drawer connector 2000a.

In addition, when the terminal 2001a and the contact 2001b are welded, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to breakage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit (live line failure prevention circuit 2100) for preventing welding is provided on the main control board 710, which will be described later, but the details will be described later.

<Locking device>
Next, the locking device 60 attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the locking device and the main body frame. FIG. 28 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing a structure for latching the main body frame of the locking device. FIG. 29 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the pachinko machine. FIG. 30 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a detailed relationship between the locking device and the first peripheral wall and the second peripheral wall of the main body frame. FIG. 31 is a side view (A) of the locking device and a perspective view (B) viewed from the front side. FIG. 32 is a perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, and a perspective view of a sliding frame for a door frame and a sliding frame for a body frame that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device. (
B) and (C). FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device. FIG. 34 is a front view for explaining the action of the door frame sliding rod and the main body frame sliding rod. FIG. 35 is a front view for explaining the operation of the fraud prevention member. The “door frame sliding rod 971 and / or the body frame sliding rod 984” corresponds to the “sliding rod” of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 27, the locking device 60 is attached from the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side of the main body frame 3 and has a U-shaped base 685. . The U-shaped base 685 includes a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) locks formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the outer peripheral side of the main body frame 3 and the rising portion of the first peripheral wall 290. Locking hole 3
51, and a lock mounting hole 350 formed by being cut out in the upper and middle portions of the vertical surface of the first peripheral wall 290, and a lock mounting hole 353 formed in the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 354. Fixed. Hereinafter, the structure of the locking device 60 will be described in detail.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the locking device 60 includes a U-shaped base 685 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 685. Sliding rod 97
1, a body frame sliding rod 984 slidably provided in the U-shaped substrate 685, and the body frame sliding rod 984 so that the body frame sliding rod 984 cannot be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 882 and 890 attached to the lower portion of 685.

The U-shaped base 685 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and slidably providing a door frame sliding rod 971 and a body frame sliding rod 984 therein. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device integrated on an L-shaped base. This is to increase the space surrounded by the peripheral walls 290 to 293 of the main body frame 3 by increasing the size of the game effect unit 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction. That is, in order to increase the size of the game effect unit 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction, it is necessary to extremely reduce the dimension between the first peripheral wall 290 and the outer periphery of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the width of the locking device 60 according to this embodiment is formed to be small so that the locking device 60 can be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 685 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 60 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are formed in a U-shaped base 68 except for the hook portions 973, 988, 1014.
5 is a tamper-proof structure in which the cover 5 is completely covered. That is, since the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are accommodated in the U-shaped base 685, the door frame 5 can be opened even when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The sliding rod 971 and the main body frame sliding rod 984 cannot be directly touched. This makes it possible to provide a highly secure pachinko machine.

The U-shaped base 685 is provided on the upper and lower sides opposite to the open side, and the hook portion 9 of the main body frame sliding rod 984.
A rectangular hook penetration opening 860 through which 88 and 1014 penetrate is formed. Also,
A screw-fastening portion 861 protrudes in the horizontal direction at the upper portion and the middle of the side surface 685b (see FIG. 33) which is opposite to the open side and is in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290. Further, locking protrusions 862 are formed to project from the upper and middle portions of the side surface 685a (see FIG. 33) that do not adhere to the first circumferential wall 290 on the open side, and the lower ends of the both side surfaces 685a and 685b on the open side. ing. Screw fixing part 8
61 and the locking protrusion 862 are for attaching the locking device 60 to the back surface of the main body frame 3. When the locking protrusion 862 is inserted into the lock locking hole 351 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward (see FIG. 28), the screw fixing portion 861 and the lock mounting hole 350 match in this state, and therefore the matching hole The locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown). Note that the locking device 60 is attached not only by the upper and middle screw fixing portions 861 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing holes 898 formed in the lock mounting pieces 866 described later and the cylinder lock through holes 354 above. The lower part of the locking device 60 can also be attached by fixing the lock attaching hole 353 to be fixed with a screw (not shown).

That is, in this embodiment, a predetermined portion of the first main body frame side wall portion that is opposed to the inner wall of the outer wall portion 12a (see FIG. 10) described later (first peripheral wall 290) includes An insertion hole 290a (see FIG. 27) into which a screw stopper 861 as a member for attaching the locking device 60 provided between the outer wall 12a and the inner wall is inserted. Of the thin wall exposed by forming the insertion hole 290a in the first peripheral wall 290, the portion screwed with a screw (screw) (not shown) is thicker than 3 mm. In this thick portion, a lock mounting hole 350 is formed in the front-rear direction in advance. Accordingly, in the state where the screw fixing portion 861 is inserted into the insertion hole 290a of the first peripheral wall 290, a screw is screwed from the screw fixing portion 861 to the lock mounting hole 350. In this embodiment, the locking device 60 is attached to the first peripheral wall 290 with screws having a diameter of approximately 3 mm including the peak and a length of approximately 12 mm.

Further, at the time of the mounting, the locking projections 862 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 685 are inserted into the locking holes 351 to be positioned and locked. Thereafter, screw fixing portions 86 formed at two locations on the upper side opposite to the open side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 685.
The screw fixing hole 898 formed on the open side (front part) of the 1 and U-shaped base 685 is fixed to the lock mounting hole 350 with a screw. Therefore, the front portion of the locking device 60 is connected to the locking projection 862.
And the lock locking hole 351, and the rear portion of the locking device 60 is connected to the screw fixing portion 861 and the lock mounting hole 35.
Since the lower part of the locking device 60 is fixed by the screw fixing hole 898 and the lock mounting hole 353, the locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.
In other words, even when the locking device 60 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 685 having a very small width, the locking device 60 is locked and fixed by the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 60.
Can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3. In particular, in this embodiment, the locking protrusion 862 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion is formed so as to protrude from the side surface 685a that is not in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685. The screw fixing portion 861 and the screw fixing hole 898 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685. Therefore, the locking device 60 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290.

Further, the insertion holes 8 are formed in the upper, middle and lower portions of both side surfaces 685a and 685b of the U-shaped base 685.
63 is formed. Then, by inserting the rivet 864 into the insertion hole 863 and crimping the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 in the U-shaped substrate 685, the inside of the U-shaped substrate 685. The door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 can be slidably attached. In other words, one rivet slot 974 is formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the door frame sliding rod 971, and one is formed on each of the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 of the body frame sliding rod 984. By passing the rivet 864 through the rivet slots 989 and 996, the door frame sliding rod 971 can move upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 984 can move downward. ing. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), a rivet 86 is formed at the lower end of the rivet slots 989 and 996 of the body frame sliding rod 984.
4 penetrates, and as shown in FIG. 32 (C), the rivet slot 97 of the door frame sliding rod 971 is provided.
A rivet 864 penetrates through the upper end of 4.

Further, a tamper-proof notch 865 is formed in the lower part of the U-shaped base 685 on the side opposite to the open side. Further, the side surface 685 in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the main body frame 3 on the open side.
A lock attachment piece 866 for attaching the cylinder lock 868 is provided projecting sideways at the front end of b. Furthermore, an insertion vertical opening 878 is formed in the side surface 685b that is in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290,
A spring locking piece 879 and a relief side hole 880 are formed. Fraud prevention notch 86
5, a stopper piece 885 of a first fraud prevention member 882 described later moves forward and backward, which will be described later. In addition, the lock attachment piece 866 is located on the side surface 685b of the U-shaped base 685 so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game effect unit installation recess 30 in a state where the lock device 60 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. It projects from the front end toward the side. The lock attachment piece 866 has a lock insertion hole 867 through which the cylinder lock 868 passes, and two attachment holes 871 for attaching the cylinder lock 868 with screws 870. Screw fixing holes 898 for attaching the lower part of the device 60 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed. Further, the insertion vertical opening 878 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 874 and the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 fixed to the cylinder lock 868 enter when the cylinder lock 868 rotates. The spring locking pieces 879 are tamper-proof members 882 and 890.
The escape side hole 880 constitutes a relief hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 893. This point will be described later.

Next, the cylinder lock 868 attached to the above-described lock attachment piece 866 will be described. The cylinder lock 868 has a cylindrical cylinder lock body fixed to the front of the lock mounting substrate 869, and a lock shaft 872 of the cylinder lock body protrudes from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 869. The engagement cam 873 is fixed by screws 876. The cylinder lock 868 can be locked and unlocked from the front side of the door frame 5 by the cylindrical portion passing through the door frame 5 (see FIGS. 2, 3, 11 and the like). Furthermore, this cylinder lock 86
8 is arranged on the lower end side of the game effect unit 4 (more specifically, below the dish unit 300).

The engagement cam 873 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 874 that engages with the downward engagement hole 997 of the body frame sliding rod 984 when rotating, and the other end. The side is a second engagement protrusion 875 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 979 of the door frame sliding rod 971 when rotating. The cylinder lock 868 configured as described above has a mounting hole (not indicated) and a lock formed in two places on the lock mounting substrate 869 by inserting the cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into the lock insertion hole 867. The U-shaped base 685 can be fixed by aligning the mounting hole 871 of the mounting piece 866 with the screw 870 and screwing it.

Next, the tamper-proof members 882 and 890 attached to the U-shaped base 685 will be described with reference to FIG.
Will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 882 and 890 are for preventing the body frame sliding rod 984 from being lowered illegally by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 868 with an official key. . Accordingly, the tamper-proof members 882 and 890 have a structure in which the first tamper-proof member 882 and the second tamper-proof member 890 are connected by the connecting pin 893. The first fraud prevention member 882 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is configured to be swingable about a swing shaft hole 883 at the upper end. This first fraud prevention member 882 has a swing shaft hole 883 at the lowermost of the insertion hole 863 and the rivet 864 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984. It is fixed by being attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 685 described above by the insertion hole 863 and the rivet 864.

The first fraud prevention member 882 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 884 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 878 on the plate-like surface, and a second engaging protruding piece 875 is formed in the protruding piece insertion hole 884. It can be inserted. That is, the door frame sliding rod 97 provided inside the U-shaped base 685 when the second engaging protruding piece 875 passes through the protruding piece insertion hole 884 and the insertion vertical opening 878.
The first ascending engagement hole 979 and the second engagement protrusion 875 are engaged with each other. The first
The outline line obliquely above the opening position of the projecting piece insertion hole 884 of the fraud prevention member 882 is the inclined portion 882a.
It has become. The inclined portion 882a contacts the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 874 when the engaging cam 873 rotates, and the first engaging protrusion 874 and the inclined portion 88 when the engaging cam 873 rotates.
As a result of the contact with 2a, the first fraud prevention member 882 swings about the swing shaft hole 883 (clockwise in FIG. 34B).

Further, the first fraud prevention member 882 is provided with a stopper piece 885 protruding on an outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 884, and a restriction protruding piece 889 is provided below the stopper piece 885. A pin hole 887 and a connection hole 888 are formed vertically on the front portion of the restricting protrusion 889. The stopper piece 885 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 865 and the engagement notch 1017 of the body frame sliding rod 984 when the body frame sliding rod 984 is locked. This is to prevent unauthorized sliding. In addition, the restricting protrusion 889 is connected to the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 890 by a spring 894, but when the spring 894 is connected, the biasing direction of the second fraud prevention member 890 is The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 887 is used to fix the guide pin 886. When the guide pin 886 is fixed to the pin hole 887 from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 882, the guide pin 886 is inserted into the insertion vertical opening 878. The first fraud prevention member 882 is guided along the side surface 685b of the U-shaped base 685 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the U-shaped base. Further, the connection hole 888 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 882 and the second tamper-proof member 890 with a connection pin 893.

The second tamper-proof member 890 connected to the first tamper-proof member 882 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 892 is formed at an upper end, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 896 is formed, and a contact portion 897 is provided at the lower end. The connecting hole 892 is the first
The spring lock hole 896 is connected to the connection hole 888 of the fraud prevention member 882 with a connection pin 893, and one end of the spring lock hole 896 is locked to the spring lock piece 879 of the U-shaped base 685. The other end of 894 is locked. The abutting portion 897 abuts on the closing projection 23 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 890 will be described later.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 685 will be described. The door frame sliding rod 971 is composed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 973 project integrally and forwardly at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side of the door frame. Has been. The door frame hook portion 973 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base 685, and when the locking device 60 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, Projecting forward from the door hook hole 352 formed in (see FIG. 11),
It engages with an engagement opening 175 (see FIG. 36) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. In addition,
Since the door frame hook portion 973 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 973 and the engagement opening 175 are released from being locked by raising the door frame sliding rod 971. can do.

Also, a vertically long rivet hole 974 into which the rivet 864 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 971. The uppermost rivet for the rivet long hole 974 A guide protrusion 976 is provided below the elongated hole 974 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 971. The rivet long hole 974 is a hole through which the rivet 864 inserted into the insertion hole 863 of the U-shaped base 685 passes, and the rivet 864 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the door frame sliding rod 971. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 864 is in contact with the upper end of the rivet slot 974. In addition, the guide protrusion 976 includes the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 98 of the body frame sliding rod 984.
6 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 991, 999 formed in the door 6 and the sliding frame 971 for the door frame.
And the sliding motion 984 for the main body frame are guided.

A spring hook portion 980 is formed at the upper end of the door frame sliding rod 971. One end of the spring 982 is locked to the spring hook portion 980, and the other end of the spring 982 is the main frame sliding rod. Spring hook portion 99 formed on upper hook member 985 of 984
3 is locked. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 971 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 984 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 971, a contact elastic piece 981 is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 981 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding bar 971 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 685 so that the door frame is internally used. This prevents the sliding rod 971 from rattling. Furthermore, a vertically long play hole 978 and a rising engagement hole 979 are formed on the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 971. When the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 978 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 874 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 979 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 971 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. In addition, an escape notch 983 that is a notch larger in the vertical direction than the tamper-proof notch 865 is formed at the lower rear side of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 971. The escape notch 983 is a stopper piece 88 of the first fraud prevention member 882.
5 is formed so as not to interfere with the fraud prevention notch 865 and the engagement notch 1017.

On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 984 includes a metal plate upper hook member 985, a metal plate lower hook member 986, and a connecting wire rod 987 connecting the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986.
And is composed of. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 984 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 having the hook portions 988 and 1014 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 987. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 98 are installed in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 685.
4 can be efficiently stored.

By the way, the upper hook member 985 has a hook portion 988 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet slot 989 and a projecting piece moving hole 991 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 993 and a connection hole 994 are formed at the lower end of the vertical side, and
Contact portions 1015 are formed on the upper and lower sides. The hook portion 988 penetrates the hook penetration opening 860 above the U-shaped base 685 and engages with the closing projection 22 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 989 corresponds to the rivet slot 974 formed in the upper portion of the door frame sliding rod 971. In a normal state in which the rivet 864 penetrates the rivet slot 989, The rivet 864 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 989. Thereby, the upper hook member 985 can move downward. As described above, the guide protrusion 976 above the door frame sliding rod 971 is inserted into the protrusion moving hole 991, and the door frame sliding rod 971 and the main body frame sliding rod 984 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. As described above, the spring hook portion 993 is engaged with the other end of the spring 982. The connecting hole 994 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 987. Further, when the abutting portion 1015 is housed in the U-shaped base 685, it comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 685 and the upper hook member 985 slides smoothly without rattling. It is for doing so.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 986 is provided with a hook portion 1014 projecting rearward from the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper portion to the lower portion of the plate surface portion with a long rivet hole 996, a lowering engagement hole 997, and a play hole 998. One moving hole 999 is sequentially formed. Further, a connecting hole 995 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 1017 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and contact portions 1016 are formed at the upper and lower sides. The hook portion 1014 penetrates the hook penetration opening 860 below the U-shaped base 685 and engages with a closing projection 23 provided at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 996 corresponds to the rivet slot 974 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 971. In a normal state where the rivet 864 is penetrated through the rivet slot 996,
The rivet 864 is in a state of passing through the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 996. Thereby, the lower hook member 986 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 997 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 984 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 998 has a distal end portion of the second engagement protrusion 875 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the projecting piece moving hole 999 has the door frame sliding rod 97.
1 is inserted into the door frame sliding bar 971 and the body frame sliding bar 984.
It is designed to guide the mutual movement with. The connecting hole 995 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 987. Further, the abutting portion 1016 has a U-shaped base 6.
The lower hook member 986 abuts against the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 685 when housed in the 85.
This is to make the sliding operation smooth without any play.

By adopting such a structure as the locking device 60 and the above-described mounting structure for the first peripheral wall 290, the outer wall of the first body frame side wall (first peripheral wall 290), The locking device 60 can be disposed in a space having a distance of approximately 18 mm from the inner wall of the side frame plate 13, whereby the volume of the above-described game effect unit installation recess 30, particularly the above. 49 cm can be secured as the maximum lateral width L1 of the front receiving port 30a.

As mentioned above, although each member which comprises the locking device 60 was demonstrated, the method of assembling this locking device 60 is as follows. First, the upper hook member 985 of the body frame sliding rod 984
And the lower hook member 986 are connected by a connecting wire rod 987. In that state, sliding frame 971 for the door frame
The guide projecting piece 976 of the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 is moved to the projecting piece moving hole 99.
1 and 999, and rivet slot 974 and rivet slot 989, 9
96 and align and superimpose. Then, in the overlapped state, the hook portion 988 of the upper hook member 985 and the hook portion 1014 of the lower hook member 986 are connected to the U-shaped base 685.
The door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 9 while passing through the hook penetration opening 860 of
84 is inserted into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 685. Thereafter, the rivet 864 is inserted from the insertion hole 863. At this time, the rivet 864 is a rivet slot 989,996,974.
Insert so that it passes through. However, when inserting the lowest rivet 864, the first
It is necessary to insert the rivet 864 into the swing shaft hole 883 of the tamper-proof member 882 and attach the first tamper-proof member 882 to the U-shaped base 685 at the same time. In addition, the 1st fraud prevention member 88
Before attaching 2 to the U-shaped base 685, the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 8 are used.
90 with the connecting pin 893, the guide pin 886 must be fixed to the pin hole 887 with a screw (not shown), and the guide pin 886 must be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 878. is there.

A rivet 864 allows the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 to form a U-shaped base 685.
The spring 982 is spanned between the spring hook portions 980 and 993 while being housed and fixed inside, and the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are biased in opposite directions. Further, the spring 894 is spanned over the spring locking pieces 879 and 594, and the second fraud prevention member 890 is placed.
Is in contact with the regulating protrusion 889. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 868 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 867 of the lock attachment piece 866, and the cylinder lock 868 is fixed to the attachment hole 871 with the screw 870. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 882a and into the insertion vertical opening 878, and the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted. Of the first tamper-proof member 882 is the protruding piece insertion hole 884 and the insertion vertical opening 87.
The cylinder lock 868 is attached to the lock attachment piece 866 so that the cylinder 7 is slightly inserted.

In order to attach the locking device 60 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the door frame hook portion 973 of the door frame sliding rod 971 is formed on the main body frame 3 as described above. While being inserted into the hook hole 352, the locking projection 862 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the lock locking hole 351 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. Then, the screw fixing portion 861 and the screw fixing hole 898 that protrude in the horizontal direction in that state are aligned with the lock mounting hole 350, and a screw (not shown) is screwed into the corresponding hole, as shown in FIG. The locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, the locking protrusion 862 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to project from the side surface 685a that does not adhere to the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685, while the rear portion Screw fixing part 861 and screw fixing hole 8 constituting the fixing structure
Reference numeral 98 denotes a structure projecting and formed in a horizontal direction from a side surface 685 b that is in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685. Therefore, compared with the case where the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 685b that is in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290, the locking device 60 is configured so as not to be loose.
Can be fixed to.

By the way, the effect | action of the locking device 60 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG.

First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In a state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3,
As shown in FIG. 34A, the closing projections 22 and 23 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 988 and 1014 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 are locked, and the door frame of the door frame sliding rod 971 is engaged. The hook portion 973 for use and the engagement opening 175 of the door frame 5 are locked. In that state, cylinder lock 868
When a key (not shown) is inserted and the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 878, as shown in FIG. 34 (B), the first engagement protrusion The tip of 874 engages with the lowering engagement hole 997 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 to press the lower hook member 986 downward against the urging force of the spring 982. Further, the connecting wire rod 987 and the upper hook member 985 connected thereto are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, the projections 22 and 2 for closing the outer frame 2
3 and the hooks 988 and 1014 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 are released, and the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. . In addition,
When closing the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 is forcibly pressed against the outer frame 2. At this time, the hook portions 988 and 1014 are raised by the urging force of the spring 982 (FIG. 34A).
However, the upper sides of the hook portions 988 and 1014 are inclined downward toward the outside. Therefore, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 988 and 1014 come into contact with the lower end portions of the closing projections 22 and 23, and the main body frame sliding rod 984. Descends downward. Finally, hook portions 988, 1
The upward claw portion of 014 and the closing projections 22 and 23 are locked again, and the main body frame sliding rod 984 rises to return to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 868 and the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 878, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the second engagement protrusion 875 engages with the ascending engagement hole 979 of the door frame sliding rod 971, and pushes up and lifts the door frame sliding rod 971 upward against the urging force of the spring 982. . For this reason,
Since the engagement state between the engagement opening 175 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 973 of the door frame sliding rod 971 is released, the door frame 5 is pulled to the front side by pulling the door frame 5 to the front frame side. 3 can be opened. When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame 5 is forcibly pressed against the main body frame 3. At this time, the door frame hook portion 973 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 982 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 34A), but the lower side of the door frame hook portion 973 is outside. Inclining up towards Therefore, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 973 comes into contact with the upper end portion of the engagement opening 175, and the door frame sliding rod 971 is Ascend upward. Finally, the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 973 and the engagement opening 175 are locked again, and the door frame sliding rod 971 is lowered to return to the locked state.

Note that the door frame sliding rod 971 in the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the entire length of the U-shaped base 685, and the U-shaped base 685 is substantially the side surface in the vertical direction of the main body frame 3. It is attached over the entire length. In addition, since the door frame hook portion 973 that is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 971, the door frame 5 and the main body Locking of the entire length of the frame 3 in the longitudinal direction is ensured. Therefore, there is also an advantage that it is not possible to perform an illegal act of forcibly opening between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and inserting an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from there.

As described above, the locking device 60 according to the present embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 868 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. in this case,
Without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 868, the hook portion 988,1 of the body frame sliding rod 984
Although an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like to 014 and lowering it may be performed, in the present embodiment, such an illegal act cannot be performed. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism including a first fraud prevention member 882 and a second fraud prevention member 890, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 685. The door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are housed in the closed space.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. When the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 35A, the closing projection 23 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 897 of the second fraud prevention member 890 are in contact. It has become a state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 882 rotates counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 894, the stopper piece 885 enters the fraud prevention notch 865, and the stopper piece 885 becomes the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with an engagement notch 1017 formed in the lower hook member 986 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 at a position corresponding to 865. For this reason,
Even if the piano frame or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 984 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 885 and the engagement notch portion 1017 are engaged, so the main body frame sliding rod 984 is pulled down. Therefore, it is not possible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 868, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 5B, the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is obtained by rotating the key.
Is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 878. When the first engagement protrusion 874 is rotated, the inclined portion 882a of the first fraud prevention member 882 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 874 are in contact with each other. The stopper piece 885 starts to rotate from the tamper-proof cutout 865 so as to start rotating in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around the 883. For this reason, the engagement between the stopper piece 885 and the engagement notch 1017 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 890 is in a position where the spring 894 is extended and the contact portion 897 is retracted. When the engagement cam 873 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 874 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 874 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 997 of the lower hook member 986. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 984 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 988 and 1014 and the closing projections 22 and 23 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 890 is in contact with the restricting protrusion 889, so the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 890 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing projection 23 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 897 of the second fraud prevention member 890 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. . For this reason, the 1st fraud prevention member 882 and the 2nd fraud prevention member 890 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. Moreover, in this embodiment, the 1st fraud prevention member 882 and the 2nd fraud prevention member 8
90 prevents the body frame sliding rod 984 from only being lowered.
This is because if the body frame sliding rod 984 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 971 can be easily opened manually after release, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is This is because it is extremely difficult to do. Thus, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 984.

Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the first tamper-proof structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first tamper-proof member 882 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, even if the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in this embodiment, when the locking device 60 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 971 provided inside is provided. And the body frame sliding rod 984 are respectively connected to the hook portions 973.
Except for 988 and 1014, they are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 685 and are completely covered. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted and the body frame sliding rod 984 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 685 is to be pulled down, both sides 685a and 685b of the U-shaped base 685 can Since entry into the enclosed space is prevented, cheating cannot be easily performed.

As described above in detail, the locking device 60 according to the present embodiment has a lateral width dimension for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 685 which is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device integrated in the L-shaped base. Sliding rod 9
71 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 868 for operating the locking device 60 to the U-shaped base 685 is lower than the lower end side of the game effect unit 4 It was set as the position. Thereby, the storage space of the game effect unit 4 (particularly the game panel 409) is not obstructed by the cylinder lock 868, and the size of the game effect unit 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction can be extremely increased. Therefore, even if the space surrounded by the peripheral walls 290 to 293 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the locking device 60 can be firmly attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. And since it is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 60 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 971 provided inside and the main body The frame sliding rods 984 are connected to the hook portions 97 respectively.
Except for 3,988,1014, the U-shaped substrate 685 is completely covered.
Accordingly, it is not possible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a main body frame sliding rod 984 provided by inserting a piano wire or the like. In addition, the locking device 60 is attached when
The locking protrusions 862 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 685 are inserted into the lock locking holes 351 to be positioned and locked. Screw fixing portions 861 and screw fixing holes 898 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the opposite side (rear part) are connected to the lock mounting holes 3.
This structure is fixed to 50 with screws. Therefore, the front portion of the locking device 60 is locked by the locking projection 862 and the lock locking hole 351, and the rear portion of the locking device 60 is locked by the screw fixing portion 861 and the screw locking hole 8.
98 and the lock mounting hole 350, the locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

In the above-described embodiment, the screw fixing hole 898 formed in the lock attachment piece 866 and the cylinder lock through hole 35 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 685 with a screw.
The lock mounting hole 353 formed in the vicinity of the upper portion of the screw 4 is screwed. However, instead of this, a screw 870 for mounting the cylinder lock 868 to the lock mounting piece 866 is used, and the tip of the screw 870 is locked. A structure may be employed in which lock attachment holes that are screwed through the attachment pieces 866 are formed above and below the cylinder lock through holes 354. Further, the locking device 60 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 685 is not screwed, or only by fixing the screw fixing portion 861 at the rear portion of the locking device 60 and the lock mounting hole 350. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are arranged on the left and right side surfaces 685a, 685.
It is assumed that the U-shaped base 685 having b is completely covered.
1 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 685a that is not in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 is omitted.
A L-shaped substrate (tablet substrate), a side surface 685a of the L-shaped substrate (tablet substrate), and a first peripheral wall 290 are used.
The door frame sliding rod 971 and the main body frame sliding rod 984 may be housed in a closed space formed by. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

[About the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

As shown in FIGS. 36 to 38, the door frame 5 includes a door frame main body 100 formed in a square shape, a door lens unit 120, a reinforcing sheet metal 160, a glass unit 190, a dish unit 300, a security cover 210, and the like. Installed. A vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 having an opening area that occupies approximately 3/4 of the door frame main body 100 in a front view is formed in an upper portion of the door frame main body 100. In other words, the door frame main body 100 formed of a synthetic resin in a frame shape has a gaming window 101 formed in an upper part thereof, and a lower part of the gaming window 101 is a plate-like part.
Note that circular speaker openings 102 through which the speakers 144a and 144b penetrate are formed on the upper left and right of the gaming window 101. A stop lever 108 for locking the stopper piece 194 of the glass unit 190 is rotatably provided below the speaker opening 102.

In the door frame 5, the door lens unit 120 is attached around the front surface of the gaming window 101, while the dish unit 300 is provided on the front surface of the plate-like portion below the gaming window 101. Note that one side (open side) of the dish unit 300 has a handle unit 318 described later.
Is fixed. Further, a reinforcing sheet metal 160 is fixed around the gaming window 101 on the back surface of the door frame main body 100, and a glass unit 190 is attached so as to close the gaming window 101. Furthermore, the slide unit 230 corresponding to the handle unit 318, the mounting base 220, and the frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 are attached to the back surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, respectively. A security cover 210 having a security function is also attached to the lower part of the back surface of the glass unit 190.

In the plate-like portion below the game window 101, a prize ball passing port 103 through which a prize ball communication rod 431 (see FIGS. 43 and 44) of the dish unit 300 passes is provided in the upper part on the pivot support side. Further, a lid opening 105 for detaching the side surface opening lid 383 (see FIGS. 43 and 44) is provided near the oblique center of the prize ball passing port 103. Further, a ball feed opening 104 for mounting the ball feed unit 226 is opened at a position adjacent to the opening side of the lid opening 105. A lock hole 106 for allowing the cylinder lock 868 to pass therethrough is further opened near the opening side of the ball feed opening 104.

A slide unit mounting recess 107 for attaching the slide unit 230 is formed at a position below the ball feed opening 104 on the back side of the plate-like portion below the gaming window 101. Further, engagement receiving pieces (not shown) for hooking the latching protrusions 195 of the glass unit 190 are formed on the left and right sides of the gaming window 101. A mounting opening 110 is formed on the side of the engagement receiving piece to which the mounting elastic piece 213 of the security cover 210 is mounted.

Further, at the center of the front surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, the engagement is inserted into the guide hole 436 (see FIG. 44) of the dish unit 300 toward the front (that is, the front side) of the door frame 5. Protrusion 11
1 is formed. On the other hand, on the back surface of the plate-like portion below the gaming window 101, a door frame protrusion 112 protruding rearward (that is, on the back side) of the door frame 5 is formed along the lower side of the door frame main body 100. . The door frame protruding piece 112 is engaged with engaging grooves 42 and 43 (see FIG. 1) formed in the main body frame 3, and an outer protrusion that is engaged at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured as a pair.

<Door lens unit>
Next, the structure of the door lens unit 120 attached to the upper part of the front side of the door frame main body 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door lens unit attached to the front side of the door frame. FIG. 40 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing the relationship between the lens cover of the door lens unit and the lens cover provided on the dish unit. FIG. 41 shows LE among members constituting the speaker cover and the decorative member.
It is a front view of the door frame at the time of removing the member irradiated to D.

As shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, the door lens unit 120 includes reflectors 122 and 130.
a, 130b, cold cathode fluorescent lamps 132, 134a, 134b, LED substrates 137, 138a
, 138b, a lens cover 140, speakers 144a and 144b, and a lens base body 121.

More specifically, the front surfaces of the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b are reflecting surfaces. And, on the front surface of each reflector 122, 130a, 130b,
134a and 134b are respectively attached. Also, each reflector 122, 130a, 1
LED boards 137, 138a, and 138b are attached to the inside of 30b, respectively. Further, the reflectors 122, 130a, 130b are in front of the reflectors 122, 130a, 130b.
A light-transmissive lens cover 140 covering a and 130b is provided. The lens cover 140 is arranged with a lens base body 121 described later as a base, and a pair of left and right speakers 144a and 144b are attached to the upper portion of the lens cover 140.

The lens base body 121 has a circular arc at the front and a linear shape at the rear in plan view,
The rear surface (that is, the back surface) is formed of a synthetic resin so as to form an internal hollow triangular shape. The cold cathode tubes 132, 1 are placed in the hollow interior of the lens base body 121.
An inverter board 136 for supplying a high voltage current to 34a and 134b is housed and fixed. Further, an upper reflector 122 having an L-shaped cross section is attached so as to contact the front and bottom surfaces of the lens base body 121. The upper reflector 122 is formed of a polycarbonate resin colored in white, and has a surface whose reflectance is increased by the white colored resin. That is, the surface of the upper reflector 122 is the upper cold cathode tube 132 and the upper LE.
The reflection surface reflects light emitted from the D substrate 137. Note that side reflectors 130a and 130b, which will be described later, are similarly formed of a polycarbonate resin colored in white.

Meanwhile, electrode support portions 125 for supporting both ends of the upper cold cathode tube 132 are formed at both ends of the upper reflector 122, respectively. Further, in order to support the upper cold cathode tube 132 at an appropriate interval, a cathode tube support piece 123 having a tip portion formed in a U shape is projected from the front surface of the upper reflector 122. This is because the central portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is bent into a "<" shape and is bent, so that the bent portion at the center is stressed and is easily damaged. is there. That is, by supporting the horizontally long upper cold cathode tube 132 not only by the electrode support portions 125 at the left and right ends but also by the cathode tube support piece 123 at an appropriate interval, the upper cold cathode tube 132 is preferably not damaged. Can be supported. Furthermore, the upper cold cathode tube 1
By supporting the upper cold cathode tube 132 so that it does not move with the cathode tube support piece 123 in a state where the 32 is sandwiched between heat resistant rubber packings (not shown), a support structure that is more difficult to break can be obtained.

In addition, the electrode support portions 125 at the left and right ends are open at the top, and an electrode insertion hole (not shown) that is open to receive the end of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is formed on the peripheral wall facing inward. ing. On the other hand, rubber sleeves 133 that can be elastically deformed are attached to the left and right ends of the upper cold cathode tube 132 to which wiring is connected. And electrode support part 125
The electrode lid 127 is fitted from above the electrode support portion 125 in a state where the rubber sleeve 133 is inserted from above into an electrode insertion hole (not shown) formed in the above. Thus, the upper cold cathode tube 132 can be mounted on the front surface of the upper reflector 122.

Thus, the rubber sleeve 133 is attached to both ends of the upper reflector 122, and the rubber sleeve 133 is supported in an electrode insertion hole (not shown) of the electrode support 125 in a loosely fitted state. With this structure, even if the upper cold cathode tube 132 vibrates due to an impact or the like, when the rubber sleeve 133 absorbs the vibration, the end portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is swung by the electrode support portion 125 or The sliding stress is weakened by sliding. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the upper cold cathode tube 132 from being damaged at the electrode support portion 125 and the bent portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132. In addition,
Speaker through holes 128a and 128b through which the speakers 144a and 144b penetrate are formed at the left and right ends of the upper reflector 122, respectively.

By the way, the left and right ends of the upper reflector 122 are connected to the side reflectors 130a and 130b so as to hang down. The side reflectors 130a and 130b are also formed of a polycarbonate resin colored white like the upper reflector 122, and have a surface whose reflectance is increased by the white colored resin. That is, the side reflectors 130a, 1
The surface of 30b has side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b and side LED boards 138a and 138.
The reflecting surface reflects the light emitted from b. Side reflectors 130a, 1
The side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b attached in front of 30b are formed in a straight line extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, electrode support portions 131a and 131b that support the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b are formed at two locations on the upper and lower ends of the side reflectors 130a and 130b, respectively. Of course, the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b are connected to the electrode support 131a.
, 131b is the same as the structure of the above-described cold-cathode tube 132 and the electrode support 125. That is, a rubber sleeve 135a is attached to the ends of the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b.
, 135b are attached, and the rubber sleeves 135a, 135b are electrode support portions 131a,
131b is supported in contact with it. Thereby, the side cold cathode tubes 134a,
It can be set as the support structure which is hard to be damaged even if 134b vibrates.

Note that the inside of the upper reflector 122 and the side reflectors 130a and 130b (the game window 10
1), LED substrates 137, 138a, 138 on which a large number of LEDs are mounted.
b is attached. LE mounted on the LED substrates 137, 138a, 138b
An inner peripheral surface of a lens cover 140 described later is decorated by D.

Then, the upper reflector 122 to which the lens base body 121 and the upper cold cathode tube 132 are attached is provided.
The side reflectors 130a and 130b to which the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b are attached are fixed to the back side of the lens cover 140. The lens cover 140 has a top lens cover portion 141 and a side lens cover portion 142 as cover bodies formed of a transmissive resin.
a, 142b. The upper lens cover portion 141 is a cover body provided corresponding to the upper reflector 122 to which the lens base body 121 and the upper cold cathode tube 132 are attached. The side lens cover parts 142a and 142b are cover bodies provided corresponding to the side reflectors 130a and 130b to which the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b are attached, respectively.

More specifically, the upper lens cover part 141 and the side lens cover parts 142a, 1
42b has a wedge-shaped front bulging portion formed of a synthetic resin as a white lens portion.
Further, on the rear end side of the lens cover portions 141, 142a, 142b, a red lens portion 150 formed of a synthetic resin having a different color from that of the lens cover portions 141, 142a, 142b borders the game window 101. Each is formed along the peripheral surface. In the lens cover portions 141, 142a, and 142b, the white lens portion and the red lens portion 150 are connected and molded in a series. And this red lens part 150 is connected to the upper LED substrate 1.
37 and a plurality of LEDs mounted linearly on the side LED boards 138a and 138b.

By the way, the upper lens cover part 141 is formed in a wedge shape in a cross section in which the inside is hollow and the rear is open, and is configured in a boomerang shape in plan view. The inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip end portion of the upper lens cover portion 141 is close to the above-described upper cold cathode tube 132 formed in a “<” shape. Furthermore, a front lens portion 141c colored in silver is bonded to the outer side of the wedge-shaped tip portion of the upper lens cover portion 141. With this structure, the front bulging surface having a wedge shape in cross section corresponding to almost the entire upper lens cover portion 141 is illuminated by the upper cold cathode tube 132.

Further, the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are the same as the upper lens cover portion 141 in that the inside is hollow and the rear is open and formed in a wedge shape in cross section. However, the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are configured in a boomerang shape having a wedge-shaped protrusion amount smaller than that of the upper lens cover portion 141 in a side view, and having a gentle curve as a whole. Further, the inner surfaces of the wedge-shaped tips of the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are close to the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b formed in the above-described linear shape. Further, on the outer side of the wedge-shaped tip portions of the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b, a leading lens portion 142c colored in silver is provided.
Is glued. With this structure, the front bulging surface having a wedge shape in cross section corresponding to almost the entire side lens cover portion 142a, 142b is illuminated by the side cold cathode tubes 134a, 134b.

In the above-described embodiment, the light emitting sources arranged in the space defined by the reflectors 122, 130a, 130b are the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b and the LED substrate 13.
7, 138a and 138b. And the lens cover part 14 corresponding to these light emission sources
1, 142a and 142b were molded and connected with synthetic resins having different colors (here, white and red). Specifically, the lens cover portions 141, 142a, 142b corresponding to the reflectors 122, 130a, 130b are white lens portions, while the LED substrates 137, 138a are used.
, 138b, the lens cover portions 141, 142a, 142b corresponding to the red lens portion 150.
It was. Thus, the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b and the LED substrates 137, 138
By using a and 138b, the lens cover portions 141, 142a, and 142b can be molded with a structure and color that are suitably irradiated. Of course, different types of light emitting sources are not limited to the combination of the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b and the LED substrates 137, 138a, 138b, and both may be configured as LED substrates.

Incidentally, the upper lens cover part 141 and the side lens cover part 142 of the lens cover 140 are arranged.
Speaker attachment holes 143a and 143b for attaching the speakers 144a and 144b are formed in the connecting portions with a and 142b. These speakers 144a, 1
A speaker cone 145a is provided on the front surface of 44b. Therefore, speaker cone 1
A cone support for supporting 45a is attached from the back surface of the speaker attachment holes 143a and 143b using a predetermined attachment member (not shown). The front surfaces of the speakers 144a and 144b attached to the speaker mounting holes 143a and 143b are speaker covers 146a and 146b having mesh covers 147a and 147b (punching metal).
Covered by.

Further, below the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b, there is a decorative member attachment region 148a.
, 148b are formed, and the decorative member 149a,
149b is attached. The decorative members 149a and 149b have shapes similar to the speaker covers 146a and 146b described above. With such a structure, when the lens cover 140 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, it is possible to give an impression that the upper left and right and the lower left and right of the lens cover 140 are balanced.

Incidentally, the speaker covers 146a, 146b and the decorative members 149a, 149b not only simply cover the front of the speakers 144a, 144b or decorate the lower part of the lens cover 140, but the surroundings are light-decorated with LEDs. It has a structure.

Specifically, inside the speaker covers 146a and 146b, the LED substrate 152 is in close contact with the back surface of the cover base plate 151 formed of a synthetic resin into a flat plate shape. The speaker frame 154 is covered with an inner lens and a front lens (not shown) with the speaker frame 154 built in front of the cover base plate 151. Furthermore, the speaker cover 146a
, 146b is closed with mesh covers 147a, 147b.

Further, inside the decorative members 149a and 149b, the LED substrate 156 is in close contact with the back surface of the decorative base plate 155 formed in a flat plate shape with a synthetic resin. And the decoration base board 155 is covered with the inner lens and decoration lens which are not shown in figure in the state which incorporated the decoration frame 158 ahead of the decoration base board 155. FIG. Further, the front surfaces of the decorative members 149a and 149b are closed by the decorative plates 159a and 159b.

Thus, the speaker covers 146a and 146b and the decorative members 149a and 149b are
In the region surrounding the gaming window 101 of the door frame 5, the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b and L
Apart from the light decoration by the ED substrates 137, 138a, 138b, the four corners of the door frame 5 are mainly light-decorated. Therefore, the entire circumference except for the lower side of the gaming window 101 is not casually decorated with light, but can be a light decoration with strength and weakness. In particular, the light decoration on the upper left and right sides of the door frame 5 has a strong tendency to arrange only speakers. for that reason,
In the conventional gaming machine, since the light decoration around the speaker is not performed, the light decoration around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 has an impression. However, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the entire periphery of the door frame 5 excluding the lower side of the gaming window 101 can be effectively light-decorated.

<Reinforcing sheet metal>
Next, the reinforcing sheet metal 160 attached to the back side of the door frame main body 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the reinforcing sheet metal 160 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 161, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 162, an open side reinforcing sheet metal 163, and a lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 that are fastened with screws or the like. It is configured in a shape. The upper reinforcing sheet metal 161
Are attached along the back of the upper side of the door frame main body 100. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 162 is attached along the shaft support side side part back surface of the door frame main body 100. The open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 is attached along the open-side side portion back surface of the door frame main body 100. The lower reinforcing metal plate 164 is attached along the lower surface of the lower side of the game window 101 of the door frame main body 100.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 161 has a predetermined width and is formed to have the same length as the width of the door frame body 100. Then, both end edges of the long side of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 161 are an upper bent protrusion piece 165 and a lower bent protrusion piece 166 that are bent backward. The upper bent protrusion 165 and the lower bent protrusion 166 are fitted in the upper crime prevention double groove 33 (see FIG. 11) of the main body frame 3.

The pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 162 is also formed to have a predetermined width and substantially the same length as the longitudinal dimension of the door frame main body 100. Then, both end edges of the long side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 162 are a shaft support side short bent protrusion 172 and a shaft support side L-shaped bent protrusion 167 which are bent backward. However,
The shaft side short bent protrusion 172 that is the inner bent protrusion is very short, while the axis side L-shaped bent protrusion 167 that is the outer bent protrusion is L from the bent portion. It is formed in a letter shape. The shaft support side L-shaped bent projecting piece 167 has a tip portion bent in an L shape and the shaft support side portion 4 of the main body frame 3 described above.
9 is in contact with the inside.

The open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the longitudinal dimension of the door frame body 100. Then, both end edges of the long side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 are an open-side outer bent protrusion 173 and an open-side inner bent protrusion 174 that are bent rearward. Open side outer bent piece 17
3 is inserted into the side crime prevention groove 34 (see FIG. 11) of the main body frame 3 described above. Is to be inserted. Engagement openings 175 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 so that the door frame hook portion 973 of the locking device 60 can enter. Then, the hook cover 17 with which the door frame hook portion 973 is engaged so as to cover the back side of the engagement openings 175 is covered.
6 is fixed.

The lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 has a predetermined width and is formed to have the same length as the width of the door frame main body 100. Then, both end edges of the long side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 are a lower bent protrusion piece 178 and an upper bent protrusion piece 179 which are bent toward the rear. However, the downward bent protrusion 178 is
The lower long side edge of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 is bent rearward, and the upper bent protrusion 17
9 is a case where both sides of the upper long side edge of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 are bent rearward, and the portion sandwiched between the upper bent protrusions 179 on both sides extends in the vertical direction. It is a vertically bent projecting piece 180 to be provided. The vertical bent projecting piece 180 is formed in a concave shape so that the upper end edge shape thereof matches the lower end shape of a unit frame 191 of a glass unit 190 described later. Then, when the glass unit 190 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the upper end piece of the vertical bent projecting piece 180 is formed along the substantially central outer periphery in the width direction of the unit frame 191 of the glass unit 190. The mating groove 200 is engaged. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 177 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the door frame main body 100.

<Glass unit>
Next, the glass unit 190 as a transparent plate unit attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 is demonstrated with reference to FIG.37 and FIG.38. As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the glass unit 190 is configured by adhering a unit frame 191 and a glass plate 201 (not a glass plate but a transparent synthetic resin plate). Unit frame 1
Reference numeral 91 denotes an annular vertically long octagonal frame molded from a synthetic resin having an opening larger than the game window 101. The glass plate 201 is two transparent plates disposed on the front and rear surfaces of the opening of the unit frame 191.

Stopping pieces 194 are formed on the left and right sides of the upper portion of the unit frame 191 so as to project outward. In addition, on the left and right sides of the lower part of the unit frame 191, hooking protrusions 195 are formed so as to project outward from the annular shape. As described above, the stopper piece 194 and the latching protrusion 195 are as follows.
This is for attaching the glass unit 190 to the back surface of the door frame 5. In the glass unit 190 of the present embodiment, a pair of security projecting plate portions 199 (see FIG. 9) projecting obliquely upward in a front view is integrally formed with the unit frame 191. Therefore, when the glass unit 190 is attached to the door frame 5, the security protruding plate 199 is connected to the speakers 144 a, 1.
It connects with the side position of 44b without a gap.

<Security cover>
Next, the crime prevention cover 210 provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 190 described above and prevents an unauthorized tool from entering the game effect unit 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the security cover 210 is formed in a flat plate shape with a transparent synthetic resin so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 190 between the left and right reinforcing sheet metals 162 and 163. The upper side of the security cover 210 is the inner rail unit 4.
62 is formed as an arc-shaped contact recess 211 along the lower arc surface of 62, and a post-crime projecting protrusion 214 protrudes rearward along the contact recess 211.

The rear surface of the crime prevention cover 210 is provided with a rear crime prevention end protrusion 215 that projects obliquely on the rear surface of the door frame 5 with the door frame 5 attached thereto. Yes. On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 210, the security cover 210 is attached to the door frame 5, and the pre-crime projection piece 212 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 191, and both lower ends of the unit frame 191. A mounting elastic piece 213 formed in a U-shape is formed so as to project forward.

<Mounting base>
As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the mounting base 220 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the back surface of the plate portion of the door frame main body 100. And like the crime prevention cover 210, it is formed in the horizontal rectangular parallelepiped shape which the front open | released with the transparent synthetic resin. This mounting base 220
A ball flight guide surface 227 is formed on the rear surface of the ball flight guide surface 2 when the door frame 5 is closed.
27 and the plate portion 32 sandwich the firing rail 38. Thereby, the ball launched from the launch rail 38 is smoothly guided to the game area 20.

By the way, an opening for a prize ball passage opening through which a rearward protruding portion of a prize ball passage opening covering portion (not shown) formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 is formed in the upper portion on the shaft support side of the mounting base 220 according to the present embodiment. 221
Is formed. A ball feed unit mounting recess 222 for mounting the ball feed unit 226 is formed in the lower part on the open side of the mounting table 220. In addition, the area | region of the diagonal direction from this ball feed unit attachment recessed part 222 is the above-mentioned ball flight guide surface 227. The ball feed unit 226 attached to the ball feed unit mounting recess 222 is provided with a ball feed member (not shown) that swings in response to the reciprocating motion difference of the hitting ball of the launching device 57. By this swinging movement of the ball feeding member, the balls at the lower end of the guide passage portion 362 of the dish unit 300 are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 38. Further, a lid opening 223 into which a finger can be put when a side opening lid 383 described later is removed is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 220. Further, a vertical wall 224 is formed on a part of the upper side of the mounting table 220. When the security cover 210 is attached, the standing wall 224 is in contact with the front surface of the security cover 210 so as to restrict the lower part of the security cover 210 from moving forward.

<Frame decoration relay terminal board>
As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, a frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 is attached to the lower shaft support side of the mounting table 220. Further, a relay board cover 241 is attached so as to cover the rear surface of the frame decoration relay terminal board 240. The frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 is provided with electric parts and electric parts (cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b, LED board 13) provided on the door frame 5.
7, 138a, 138b, speakers 144a, 144b, 341a, 341b, a switch provided in the handle unit 318, a ball rental unit 324, and an operation button unit 32.
6 etc.) are collectively connected. Then, the wiring from the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 is delivered to the delivery control board box 55 via the door frame connector 2012 of the sub drawer relay board 649 incorporated in the board unit 54 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The control board is connected to the main control board of the main control board box 25.

<Dish unit>
Next, the configuration of the dish unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG.
FIG. 4 is a front view of a dish unit provided on the front surface of the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the dish unit. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the dish unit.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 is composed of a unit frame 30 that forms an appearance.
1, members such as a lower speaker unit 330, a dish body 360, a second ball extraction link unit 400, and a dish lid body 430 are attached. Specifically, the lower speaker unit 330 is attached to the inside of the unit frame 301, while the dish 360 is provided so as to face the upper surface of the unit frame 301 above the lower speaker unit 330. And second
The ball removal link unit 400 performs a ball removal operation of a ball removal valve 375 provided in the dish body 360, while the dish lid body 430 closes the rear surface of the unit frame 301.

First, the unit frame 301 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, in the unit frame 301, an upper surface cover portion 302 and a front surface cover portion 303 are integrally formed of synthetic resin. The upper surface cover portion 302 has a semi-elliptical shape in plan view in which the upper surface is gently inclined toward the near side, and constitutes the upper surface of the unit frame 301. Further, the front cover 303
Extends continuously from the front side to the rear side and constitutes the front and bottom surfaces of the unit frame 301. A vertical cover portion 302 a that contacts the front side of the door frame main body 100 is also integrally formed on the back side of the upper surface cover portion 302. The vertical cover portion 302a has a ball rental button unit opening 323 at the center thereof. The ball rental unit 324 can be attached to the ball rental button unit opening 323 from the back side.
When a ball lending machine is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, the lending unit 324 is provided with a switch for deriving a lending command, a remaining lending indicator, and the like.

Moreover, from the rising part of the vertical cover part 302a of the upper surface cover part 302 toward the front,
A dish upper surface opening 305 is provided. And in the front center of the dish upper surface opening 305,
An operation button unit concave space 306 is formed. In addition, the LED decoration space portion 307 extends from the operation button unit concave space portion 306 along the front end portions of the left and right upper surface cover portions 302.
Is drilled. Further, a first ball extraction button opening 313 a for attaching the first ball extraction button 313 is provided on the side of the dish upper surface opening 305. The dish body upper surface opening 305 is formed in the same shape as the upper surface opening of the storage part 361 of the dish body 360 and the guide passage part 362 communicating therewith. And when the plate body 360 is attached to the unit frame 301,
The storage part 361 and the guide passage part 362 of the dish body 360 face the dish body upper surface opening 305.

In addition, a space portion forming member 310 is attached to the operation button unit concave space portion 306, and the operation button unit 326 is attached to the space portion forming member 310. The space forming member 310 has a wiring housing opening 310b.
The wiring storage opening 310b stores a connector 310a for wiring to be connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the bottom surface of the operation button unit 326 when the operation button unit 326 is inserted into the space forming member 310. It is. The operation button unit 32
6 includes a plurality (three in the illustrated example) of operation buttons 327. The plurality of operation buttons 327 are operated when the player participates in the game content performed on the effect display device 115 or the like.

Further, the first ball removal button 313 is a first ball removal button opening 313 a of the upper surface cover portion 302.
It is attached to the upper surface cover portion 302 via a sliding support member 314 attached to the head, and slides in the sliding support member 314 in the vertical direction. When the first ball removal button 313 is pressed by the player, the rotation member 366 positioned below the first ball removal button 313 rotates about the rotation shaft 367 in the clockwise direction. The slide valve 365 is linked to the lower end of the rotation member 366 in conjunction with the operation of the rotation member 366.
Move. The slide valve 365 is always biased by a spring 369 and is in a position where the downstream end portion of the guide passage portion 362 of the dish body 360 is closed. Then, as described above, the first ball removal button 3
13, when it is moved by the operation of 13, it is retracted from the guide passage part 362 and guided by the guide passage part 362.
And a first ball extraction passage portion 364 continuous with the downstream side of the guide passage portion 362. Accordingly, the balls stored in the storage portion 361 and the guide passage portion 362 of the dish body 360 are replaced with the dish body 36.
The ball can be removed from zero. This structure will be further described in detail when the dish 360 is described.

Next, the configuration of the front cover portion 303 of the unit frame 301 will be described. As described above, the front cover portion 303 forms the front surface and the bottom surface of the unit frame 301 continuously from the front side of the upper surface cover portion 302. Therefore, the front surface portion of the front cover portion 303 is inclined to the back side as the central portion protrudes most forward and moves left and right. Speaker openings 315a and 315b are formed on the left and right sides of the front surface portion of the front cover portion 303 (that is, the central protrusion). The speaker openings 315a and 315b are meshed speaker covers 316a and 316, respectively.
It is coat | covered with b (punching metal). The speaker covers 316a, 3
Two speakers 341 housed and fixed in the lower speaker unit 330 are located behind 16b.
a and 341b are located. Note that the speaker openings 315a and 315b are formed on an inclined surface that inclines from the protruding portion at the center of the front surface of the front cover portion 303 toward the back side. Therefore, when the unit frame 301 is viewed from the front, the unit frame 301 is opened outward from the central vertical line of the pachinko machine 1. And the front decoration board 304 is attached so that the protrusion part of the front surface center of the front cover part 303 may be bordered to the opening edge of the upper part and lower part of speaker opening 315a, 315b.

Further, a handle attachment hole 317 for attaching the handle unit 318 is formed below the open side end of the front cover portion 303. As is well known, the handle unit 318 is for adjusting the resilience of the hit ball. Therefore, the handle unit 31
8, a rotation operation member 318a that can be operated by the player is provided. When the turning operation member 318a is turned, the engaging cam 319 fixed to the rear end of the turning shaft is turned. Then, as described above, by converting the rotational movement of the engaging cam 319 into the sliding movement of the slide engaging / disengaging piece 231 of the slide unit 230, the strength of the elastic force of the launching device 57 can be adjusted. It is like that.

Here, the second ball removal link unit 400 includes a second ball removal button 401 and a pressing swing member (
(Not shown), and a first link 414 and a second link 419. The pressing swing member (not shown) is a member that swings when the second ball extraction button 401 is locked. The first link 414 and the second link 419 are members for transmitting a pressing operation of a pressing swing member (not shown) as a ball swinging motion of the ball release valve 375.

A second ball extraction button opening 320 for opening the second ball extraction button 401 constituting a part of the second ball extraction link unit 400 is opened at the center lower portion of the front cover portion 303. In addition, a ball discharge port for discharging a ball, which has been removed according to the operation of the first ball removal button 313 and the second ball removal button 401, to the outside of the dish unit 300 is provided at the center of the bottom surface of the front cover portion 303. 322 is formed. A fastener insertion hole 325 for attaching the operation button unit 326 is formed obliquely in front of the ball discharge port 322. In this embodiment, the two ball removal buttons 313, the first ball removal button 313 and the second ball removal button 401, are used.
401 are provided for the following reason. That is, all the spheres stored in the storage portion 361 and the guide passage portion 362 of the dish 360 can be extracted by operating the first ball release button 313, but are aligned in a line at the guide passage portion 362. It takes some time to remove the sphere. On the other hand, since the ball on the upstream side from the storage portion 361 of the dish body 360 can be quickly extracted from the large-diameter opening 388 by operating the second extraction button 401, the extraction time is shortened. Can do. That is, it is possible to arbitrarily select the length of time for the player to remove the ball. In addition, when a big hit is made during the game and a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, if the game is continued with the ball left unattended, the full switch 730 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 may function. is assumed. Then, due to the operation of the full tank switch 730, the payout operation is stopped or the ballistic operation is stopped, and there is a possibility that the game cannot be continued even though it is a big hit. In such a case, by operating the second ball extraction button 401, the dish unit 3
By simultaneously removing the ball being stored at 00 and maintaining the supply of the ball to the launch position, it is possible to continue the game during the big hit.

Next, the configuration of the dish lid 430 that closes the back surface of the unit frame 301 of the dish unit 300 will be described. The dish lid 430 is formed of a synthetic resin as a rectangular flat plate so as to close almost the entire back surface of the unit frame 301. Further, a ball passage rear ridge 433 is formed integrally and projectingly at substantially the center on the front side of the dish lid 430. A curved upper guide rod 434 and a lower guide rod 435 are formed in the rear ball passage 433 so as to guide the ball forward and downward. Then, when the dish lid 430 is attached to the back surface of the unit frame 301, the ball outlet passage front rod 337 formed in the speaker box main body 331 of the lower speaker unit 330 and the bulb outlet passage rear rod 433 are opposed to each other. This constitutes a ball passage in the dish. At this time, the guide rod 338 formed on the ball guide passage front rod 337 is positioned between the upper guide rod 434 and the lower guide rod 435 of the ball guide passage rear rod 433. For this reason, the in-dish ball extraction passage is formed in a meandering shape, and the extracted ball is discharged to the outside from the ball discharge port 322 while weakening the momentum.

In addition, an opening lid attachment window 432 is provided in the dish lid body 430 at the upper side of the rear punching passage 433. Further, a square cylindrical award ball connecting rod 431 protrudes from the upper back surface at one end side (axial support side) of the dish lid 430. When the dish unit 300 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, the prize ball communication rod 431 penetrates the prize ball passing port 103 formed in the lower part of the shaft support side of the door frame main body 100, and It penetrates to the back side. Then, with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the end of the prize ball passage formed in the main body frame 3 faces in a superposed manner. The opening lid attaching window 432 is an opening for detachably attaching the side opening lid 383 that closes the side wall opening (not shown) of the second ball extraction passage portion (not shown) of the dish body 360. And it is provided in the position corresponding to the opening 105 for lids (refer FIG.38 and FIG.39) formed in the door frame main body 100. FIG.

<Goods storage unit>
As described above, the space forming member 310 is attached to the operation button unit concave space 306, and the operation button unit 326 is attached to the space forming member 310. Instead of such an operation button unit 326, as shown in FIG.
The article storage unit 1200 can also be attached.

Therefore, as another embodiment, a mode when the article accommodation unit 1200 is mounted will be described. 45 (a) is a perspective view showing the appearance of the article storage unit 1200. FIG.
FIG. 45B is a plan view of the article storage unit 1200, and FIG. 45C is A in FIG.
FIG. FIG. 46A is a front view of the article storage unit 1200 when closed, and FIG. 46B is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 46A. Furthermore,
47 (a) is a front view of the article storage unit 1200 when it is opened, and FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the article storage unit 1200.

The article storage unit 1200 includes a main body 1201 that is an outer shape of the unit, and a main body 120.
1, a placement unit 1202 that can place an article, an opening / closing door unit 1203 that can close an opening portion of the placement unit 1202, and an opening / closing door unit 1203 between a closed position and an open position. The door drive mechanism 1204 to be displaced and the light emitting diode for illumination that can illuminate the inside of the mounting portion 1202 (
(Hereinafter referred to as illumination LED) 1205 and an infrared distance measuring sensor 1206 (see FIG. 45C, etc.).

The main body 1201 includes an upper surface portion 1207, a side wall portion 1208, and a bottom surface portion 1209. The upper surface portion 1207 has a shape close to an ellipse, and has an opening at the center thereof.
The side wall portion 1208 is erected substantially vertically inside the outer edge end portion of the upper surface portion 1207. The bottom surface portion 1209 corresponds to the side wall portion 1208 and forms the bottom surface of the main body portion 1201.

The mounting portion 1202 is formed of a member that can transmit light, and an opening is formed so as to be cut along a plane parallel to the longitudinal direction thereof. This opening corresponds to the opening of the upper surface portion 1207 and is slightly smaller than the opening of the upper surface portion 1207. The placement unit 1202 is shown in FIG.
As can be seen from (b) and the like, it has an arc shape in cross section. Further, as can be seen from FIG. 45 (c), the mounting portion 1202 is fixed to a shaft portion 1210 projecting inward from the side wall portion 1208 at both ends in the longitudinal direction. With this configuration, the placement unit 1202 is disposed inside the main body 1201 so as to have a slight space around it.

The open / close door 1203 is formed by thinly layering a reflective film of a metal such as mercury on a transparent member that can transmit light, or smoked on the transparent member, and is generally called half mirror processing. Is given. Therefore, the inside of the mounting part 1202 is the illumination LED 1.
205, the inside of the placement unit 1202 can be visually recognized, and the illumination LE
When D1205 is turned off, the inside of the placement unit 1202 cannot be visually recognized. The opening / closing door portion 1203 can close the opening of the placement portion 1202 and has an arc shape in cross-sectional view like the placement portion 1202 (see FIG. 46B, etc.). However, the arc that appears in the cross section of the opening / closing door 1203 has a slightly larger radius of curvature than the arc that appears in the cross section of the mounting portion 1202. With this configuration, the opening / closing door portion 1203 closes so as to cover the opening of the placement portion 1202 from the outside. In the state where the placement unit 1202 is closed as described above, the opening / closing door part 1203 forms a football shape together with the placement unit 1202. That is, a football-shaped accommodation space is formed, and the open / close door 1203 is formed on the upper surface 12 of the main body 1201.
The shape protrudes upward from 07. Further, the opening / closing door portion 1203 is pivotally supported by a shaft portion 1210 to which the placement portion 1202 is fixed. Therefore, the opening / closing door portion 1203 is displaced along the outer edge by the placement portion 1202 around the shaft portion 1210. FIG. 46 (b)
As the opening / closing door portion 1203 located at the position shown in FIG. 2 is displaced, the opening of the placement portion 1202 is gradually opened. At this time, the opening is opened from the back side toward the front side toward the front. 47B, when the opening of the mounting portion 1202 is completely opened, the opening / closing door portion 1203 has a door housing portion 1211 formed by the main body portion 1201 and the mounting portion 1202. Is housed in.

As shown in FIG. 48, the door drive mechanism 1204 includes a motor 1212 and a plurality of gears 1213, 1213.
1214, 1215, 1216. Here, when the drive shaft of the motor 1212 rotates, the gear 1213 rotates integrally with the drive shaft, and the gear 1216 integrated with the opening / closing door portion 1203 rotates via the two gears 1214 and 1215. . With this configuration, the opening / closing door portion 1203 is displaced by the door drive mechanism 1204.

The illumination LED 1205 is attached to the top surface of the bottom surface portion 1209 as shown in FIG. Specifically, a plurality of illumination LEDs 1205 are arranged side by side along the outer edge of the bottom surface portion 1209 so that the inside of the placement portion 1202 can be illuminated. Each lighting LED
1205 is arranged substantially vertically upward, and emits light from below the mounting portion 1202. The bottom surface 1209 is provided with a motor opening 1217 so as not to interfere with the motor 1212 of the drive mechanism 1204.

The infrared distance measuring sensor 1206 is attached to the lower part of the placement unit 1202 from the outside.
Specifically, it is a substantially central position in the left-right direction, and is attached to the lower part on the back side toward the front (see FIG. 45 (c), FIG. 46 (b), etc.). Then, infrared rays are emitted obliquely upward and substantially parallel to the cross section shown in FIG. 46B and the like, and the distance to the obstacle is measured using the reflection of the infrared rays. With this configuration, it is possible to detect whether or not a predetermined article is stored in the placement unit 1202.

As described above, the article storage unit 1200 is attached to the space forming member 310 (see FIG. 43) instead of the operation button unit 326. FIG. 49 is a perspective sectional view showing the dish unit 300 to which the article storage unit 1200 is attached. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of the dish unit 300 to which the article storage unit 1200 is attached. As can be seen from FIG. 49, the article storage unit 1200 is attached to the front side of the storage unit 361. Further, as can be seen from FIG. 50, the upper surface is mounted so as to be inclined toward the player side.

The physical structure of the article storage unit 1200 has been described above, but the characteristics of the structure related to the article storage unit 1200 in the pachinko machine 1 can be summarized as follows.

First, the article storage unit 1200 is disposed in a part (specifically, the operation button unit concave space 306) of a dish unit 300 (dish body 360) provided below the game effect unit 4 (game panel 409). Is done. In other words, the dish unit 300 (the dish body 360) is an operation button unit 326 that replaces the article storage unit 1200 that can store an article different from the game ball.
The article storage unit 1200 includes a dish unit 300 (a dish body 3).
60) in the area where the operation button unit 326 is provided (the space forming member 310 of the operation button unit recessed space 306).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 described above, the lottery process related to the payout of the game ball is performed with a predetermined winning probability based on the reception of the game ball to the start port 600, 602, 604, and according to the result of the lottery process. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 115. The content of the effect displayed on the effect display device 115 can be changed according to an instruction from the outside via the operation button 327 such as pressing the operation button 327. Operation button unit 32 including this operation button 327
6 is a dish unit 300 (provided below the game effect unit 4 (game panel 409)).
The plate body 360) is provided. Note that “the content of the effect displayed on the effect display device 115 can be changed according to an instruction from the outside” means that the effect pattern determined based on the result of the lottery process is changed. Rather, based on the determined production pattern,
In other words, the level of the character is increased so that the character reacts in response to the operation of the operation button 327 or the player is further expected.

However, no matter how many times the operation button 327 is operated, the result of the lottery process does not change, and only a slight change can be given to the contents of the effect. Nevertheless, some players continue to strike the operation button 327 so that the operation button 327 is broken. In recent years, the operation of the operation button 327 has contributed to the improvement of interest. Therefore, when the operation button 327 is broken, it is necessary to take measures such as replacing the operation button unit 326 having a new operation button 327. is there. However, the operation button 3
It is obvious that the operation button 327 is broken again in the hall where the player who keeps hitting the operation button 327 as often as it breaks is simply replaced with a new operation button unit 326 when the 27 is broken. Yes.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the dish unit 300 (the dish body 360) is connected to the operation button unit 326 and the article storage unit 1200 configured to correspond to the area (space) where the operation button unit 326 is provided. It was configured so that it could be replaced.
Thereby, the situation where the operation button 327 breaks frequently can be avoided. Furthermore, since the operation button unit 326 and the article storage unit 1200 can be selectively provided, not only as a countermeasure when the operation button 327 is broken, but also in improving the fun of the hall. There will be more choice. In particular, even if an article is given to a player, an article that does not change the payout rate (for example, an article that can be given to the player) is accommodated in the article accommodation unit 1200, and the article is occasionally changed as the game progresses. If it can be given to, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

The dish unit 300 (dish body 360) is formed with an attachment portion (here, the space portion forming member 310) to which the operation button unit 326 can be attached.
0 has a shape that can be directly attached to the attachment portion. For example, when a recess as an attachment portion to which the operation button unit 326 can be attached without causing a gap is formed in the dish unit 300 (dish body 360), the shape of the article storage unit 1200 is
It becomes the shape which can be attached to the said recessed part, without producing a clearance gap. In addition, the attachment part (space part formation member 310) does not necessarily need to be a recessed part, for example, may be mounted and attached.

The article storage unit 1200 includes a main body 1201 having a plate-like placement section 1202 that can store an article, a closed position where an article cannot be taken in and out from the main body 1201, and an article from the main body 1201. Plate-like opening and closing door 1 that can be displaced between the open position in which it can be taken in and out
203 and a door drive mechanism 1204 that can operate the opening / closing door 1203.
Here, the main body 1201 is a part of the dish unit 300 (dish body 360) provided below the game effect unit 4 (game panel 409) (specifically, a space part of the operation button unit concave space part 306). Is formed on the forming member 310). The main body 1201 is box-shaped, and a placement unit 1202 and a door drive mechanism 1204 are disposed inside the box-shaped main body 1201. And between the box-shaped main body 1201 and the mounting portion 1202 (more specifically,
By arranging the opening / closing door portion 1203 at any one end portion of the placement portion 1202 along the shaft portion 1210, a size capable of accommodating an article is secured. The mounting portion 1202 is formed with a concave portion having a predetermined depth having an opening at the upper end, and the opening / closing door portion 1203 is connected to the opening (
As a result, opening / closing operation is realized by opening / closing with respect to the recess). Since the article storage unit 1200 has such a structure, the article storage unit 1200 is made compact while ensuring a size capable of storing the article.

By the way, the article accommodation unit 12 arranged in a part of the dish unit 300 (the dish body 360).
An important point in achieving 00 compactness is that the open / close door 1203 is disposed in the main body 1201 and the predetermined axis (here, the axis of the shaft 1210) is used as an operating axis in the main body 1201. The opening / closing door 1203 operates between the open position and the closed position. Thus, as long as the space for placing the article storage unit 1200 in the dish unit 300 is secured,
The article storage unit 1200 can be arranged in the dish unit 300 (dish body 360) without considering the opening / closing space of the opening / closing door part 1203 and the arrangement space of the door drive mechanism 1204.

As a mode in which the opening / closing door 1203 operates between the open position and the closed position in the main body 1201 with a predetermined axis (here, the axis of the shaft 1210) as an operating shaft, for example, the shaft 12
10 is a mode in which the opening / closing door 1203 is rotated about a rotation axis, a mode in which a curtain-like body typified by a shutter is wound around the shaft 1210 as a winding shaft, and a shaft on the open position side. A mode in which the operating direction of the opening / closing door part 1203 is changed starting from the part 1210 is conceivable. As a result, the space in the front-rear direction necessary for opening / closing the opening / closing door portion 1203 can be reduced, and it is possible to provide a high-functionality item such as the article storage unit 1200. Can be suppressed. The “predetermined axis” may be not only the axis of the shaft portion 1210 as an actually existing operating shaft, but also a virtual shaft on which the opening / closing door portion 1203 operates.

Further, the door driving mechanism 1204 operates the opening / closing door 1203 along the outer surface of the placement unit 1202 when operating the opening / closing door 1203 about a predetermined axis. Since the opening / closing door part 1203 is moved along the outer surface of the placement part 1202 in this way, the opening / closing door part 1203 is opened / closed without using a wasteful space. To do. Thereby, the article storage unit 1200 is made more compact, and it is possible to improve the function of the gaming machine and to suppress the decrease in interest. In addition, “Placement unit 1202
The “outside surface” is not the storage surface on the side where the article is stored in the placement unit 1202, but the back surface of the storage surface. The phrase “activate the opening / closing door 1203 along the outer surface of the mounting portion 1202” means that the opening / closing door portion is formed so that a gap is not generated between the opening / closing door portion 1203 and the mounting portion 1202 as much as possible. In this case, the opening / closing door 1203 is operated while facing 1203 and the outer surface of the placement unit 1202.

Further, the mounting portion 1202 is formed in a sector shape in which a cross section orthogonal to a predetermined one axis has a substantially constant curvature radius. That is, when a cross section of the housing member orthogonal to a predetermined axis is viewed, the distance (curvature radius) from the axis of the shaft portion 1210 to an arbitrary position of the mounting portion 1202 is substantially constant. Further, the opening / closing door portion 1203 is also formed in a sector shape having a substantially constant curvature radius in a cross section orthogonal to a predetermined axis.
However, the opening / closing door portion 1203 is placed between the closed position and the open position when the mounting portion 1202 is operated.
Therefore, the curvature radius of the cross section of the door portion orthogonal to the predetermined one axis is slightly larger than the curvature radius of the cross section of the housing member orthogonal to the predetermined one axis. With this configuration, the opening / closing door portion 1203 and the mounting portion 1202 are located at any position from the open position to the closed position (or from the closed position to the open position). The gap between the outer surface and the outer surface is substantially constant. As a result, only a minimum necessary space is used for opening / closing the opening / closing door portion 1203, so that the article accommodation unit 1200 can be made more compact.

In addition, when the opening / closing door 1203 is in the closed position, it is preferable that at least both the end on the open position side and the end on the closed position side can be locked in a state of overlapping with the placement unit 1202. . That is, when the opening / closing door 1203 is locked in a state where the concave portion of the mounting portion 1202 is covered and articles cannot be taken in and out of the main body 1201 (that is, the door 1203 is in the closed position). The opening / closing door part 1203 and the mounting part 1202 overlap each other so that no gap is formed in the door. Here, it is preferable that end portions of the entire periphery of the opening / closing door portion 1203 overlap with the placement portion 1202, but at least both end portions on the direction side in which the opening / closing door portion 1203 opens / closes (for example, the opening / closing door portion 1203 extends in the front-rear direction). If the opening / closing operation is performed, the front end portion and the rear end portion) and the placement portion 1202 overlap with each other, it is difficult to force open the opening / closing door portion 1203.

Furthermore, even if an external load is applied when the door 1203 is locked in the closed position, the surface of the door 1203 is slipped so that displacement in the direction toward the open position becomes difficult. It is preferable that the surface is configured. In other words, when the opening / closing door 1203 is locked in the closed position, the surface of the opening / closing door 1203 is difficult to apply an external load to the opening / closing door 1203 to make it difficult to open the recess. A smooth surface is constructed. Thereby, the opening / closing door part 1
A situation in which an article accommodated in the article accommodation unit 1200 is stolen by an unauthorized act of forcibly opening 203 is suppressed.

Here, the surface of the opening / closing door portion 1203 is a surface (that is, an exposed surface) that the player can visually recognize when the opening / closing door portion 1203 is in the closed position. In other words, it is the surface on the back side of the surface that faces the placement portion 1202 when the opening / closing door portion 1203 is in the closed position. Moreover, what is comprised by the smooth surface is what is comprised by the plane and curved surface in which the uneven | corrugated | grooved part which can operate the opening-and-closing door part 1203 toward an open position is not formed. That is, if the wall is not formed in a direction in which the opening / closing door part 1203 can be opened and closed, it is difficult to operate the opening / closing door part 1203 from the closed position toward the open position. However, if it is difficult to apply an external load to the opening / closing door portion 1203 to open the recess, some grooves may be formed along the direction in which the opening / closing door portion 1203 can open and close. Further, it is further preferable that wax or the like is applied to the surface of the door portion configured to have a smooth surface so as to make it more difficult to apply an external load to the opening / closing door portion 1203 to open the concave portion. The operation door 1203 can be locked by using, for example, a motor with a brake as the door drive mechanism 1204 or connecting the door 1203 and the mounting portion 1202 when the door 1203 covers the recess. It is realized by doing.

Thus, when the door 1203 is in the closed position, the door 1203 and the mounting portion 120 are placed.
2 so that an external load toward the open position is less likely to be applied to the opening / closing door portion 1203 by making the surface of the opening / closing door portion 1203 a smooth surface. Not only is it difficult to take out illegally, but, for example, a motor with a brake is attached to the door drive mechanism 120.
Even in the case of using for 4, the failure of the motor with brake can be suppressed.

The main body 1201 further includes a box-shaped box member (here, a box-shaped body constituted by the side wall portion 1208 and the bottom surface portion 1209) having an opening formed at the upper end, and the mounting portion 1202 includes: It is accommodated from the opening of the box member. When the open / close door portion 1203 is in the closed position, both the end portion on the open position side and the end portion on the closed position side are connected to the box member and the placement portion 1.
202 and locked between them.

According to this, when the opening / closing door part 1203 operates from the open position to the closed position, the end part on the closed position side enters between the box member and the mounting part 1202 without a gap. That is, the box member and the mounting portion 1202
Between the two, a gap is formed so that the opening / closing door 1203 can enter (that is, approximately the same as or slightly larger than the thickness of the opening / closing door 1203). When the opening / closing door portion 1203 enters between the box member and the placement portion 1202 and the concave portion of the placement portion 1202 is closed, the operation of the opening / closing door portion 1203 is locked. At this time, the end portion of the open / close door 1203 on the open position side is also between the box member and the placement portion 1202. Thereby, the opening / closing door 12
When 03 is in the closed position, there is no gap that assists in opening the opening / closing door part 1203, so that it becomes even more difficult to open the opening / closing door part 1203 illegally.

Further, when the door drive mechanism 1204 operates the opening / closing door part 1203 with a predetermined one axis as an operation axis, the door driving mechanism 1204 operates the opening / closing door part 1203 from the player side (front side) toward the gaming machine side (backward direction). Thus, the opening / closing door 1203 is displaced from the open position to the closed position.

Here, as described above, the article storage unit 1200 includes the dish unit 300 (the dish body 360).
), But the game balls stored in the dish 360 of the dish unit 300 are
Each ball is guided to the launch position. Therefore, in order to rectify the game balls stored in the dish body 360, the player may carry his / her hand to the dish body 360 (and thus the dish unit 300).
The dish unit 300 also has a ball rental unit 324 for renting game balls as game media and a game ball stored in the dish body 360 for removing from the dish body 360 (so-called “ball removal”). Various operation means such as a ball removal button 313 are arranged. The player
In order to operate these various operation means, the hand is often carried to the dish unit 300. Therefore, if the article accommodating unit 1200 provided in the dish unit 300 (dish body 360) is formed with a recess or an opening, the hand may be pinched with the player's palm facing downward. That is, when the player places his palm down on the dish unit 300 (dish body 360), his / her finger may enter the recess of the article storage unit 1200.
Even if 3 is activated, the fingers are pushed upward as the opening / closing door portion 1203 operates from the player side toward the gaming machine side, so that the fear of pinching the hand is suppressed. did.

The dish unit 300 (dish body 360) is formed with an overhanging part (here, the upper surface cover part 302 and the front surface cover part 303 in the unit frame 301) so as to face the player. Yes. In the article storage unit 1200, the player can visually recognize the storage portion at least in front of the handle unit 318 and the dish body 360 and in the vicinity of the foremost position of the overhang portion closest to the player. It is provided as follows. Thereby, the player can grasp that the article is accommodated in the article accommodation unit 1200, and it is possible to inspire gaming motivation. Examples of the “accommodating portion” include an area in which an article formed by the opening / closing door portion 1203 and the placement portion 1202 can be accommodated when the opening / closing door portion 1203 is in the closed position.

Here, as an aspect in which the “accommodating portion” can be visually recognized by the player, the opening / closing door portion 1203 is formed of, for example, a transparent resin, and the bottom surface of the concave portion in the placement portion 1202 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1. As shown, the main body portion 1201 and thus the placement portion 1202 are provided to be inclined toward the front (that is, the player side). The article storage unit 1
200 is preferably arranged so as to be tilted to such an extent that the player can visually recognize the “accommodating portion” without facing the front of the pachinko machine 1.

[About Game Direction Unit]
The configuration of the game effect unit 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG.
It is a front view of a game production unit. FIG. 52 is a perspective view seen from the front of the game effect unit. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the game effect unit. FIG. 54 is a perspective view seen from the back of the game effect unit. FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the game effect unit.

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 55, the game effect unit 4 of the present embodiment includes a front component 680.
, Game panel 409, panel holder 540, back unit 510 as a wide space holding unit,
It mainly includes a panel back plate 504, a center accessory 620, a substrate holder 505, and an effect display device 115.

The game panel 409 is a plate-like panel made of a transparent resin having a size corresponding to the game area 20. The panel holder 540 is a frame-shaped holder made of a resin that detachably fits the game panel 409. The front component member 680 is disposed on the front side of the panel holder 540 and sandwiches the game panel 409 in cooperation with the panel holder 540. Further, the front component member 680 includes a guide rail 482 that partitions the game area 20 and guides the game ball into the game area 20. The guide rail 482 includes an outer rail unit 472 and an inner rail unit 462. A center accessory 620 described later is attached to the approximate center of the game panel 409.

Further, the game effect unit 4 includes a plate-like panel back plate 504 disposed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540, and a substrate disposed on the rear surface side of the panel back plate 504. A holder 505 is provided. The substrate holder 505 has a box shape with the front and upper sides open, and the peripheral control substrate box 24 and the main control substrate box 25 are supported on the rear side. Specifically, the peripheral control board box 24 in which the peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 65) is accommodated is mounted on the board holder 505, and the main control is performed while being superimposed on the rear side of the peripheral control board box 24. A main control board box 25 in which a board 710 (see FIG. 64) is housed is mounted. The substrate holder 505 is the substrate holder 505.
Supports the unit-side main drawer connector 2000a and the unit-side sub drawer connector 2002a that are electrically connected to the main control board and the like in the main control board box 25 supported on the rear side and that can be slidably connected from the rear. A panel relay terminal plate 750 is further provided.

Furthermore, the game panel 409 is further provided with a back unit 510 attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 540, and an effect display device 115 including an LCD capable of displaying a predetermined effect image. The back unit 510 has a frame-like box-shaped back box 514 that can form a wide space of a predetermined volume behind the game panel 409. The effect display device 115 is detachably supported by the back box 514 so as to close the opening 514a formed on the rear surface side of the back box 514.

A display device control board box 119 having a display device control board 816 (see FIG. 65) for controlling the effect display device 115 and the like is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 115. In addition, the effect display device 115 is provided with a larger one (for example, about 21 inches) than the effect display device used in the conventional pachinko machine.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11, the front component member 680 includes an outer rail unit 472.
Arc-shaped opening 68 that connects the upper end of the inner rail unit 462 to the lower end of the inner rail unit 462 in a clockwise direction.
0a (see FIG. 55) is formed, and the game area 20 having a substantially circular shape in front view is defined by the guide rail 482 and the opening 680a. The guide ball 482 guides the game ball launched along the launch rail 38 by the game ball launching device 57 to the upper part of the game area 20. Further, at the downstream end of the outer rail unit 472, the above-described connection passage portion 477 connected to the rail connection member 44 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 38 is formed in an oblique shape. A foul port 489 (see FIG. 23) is formed on the upstream side adjacent to the connection passage portion 477.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the structure relating to the foul ball discharge formed in the game effect unit 4 described above (the foul port 489 (see FIG. 23), the guide rail 482, the rail connection member 44, the connection passage portion 477, A foul ball guide hole 489), etc.
(See FIG. 23). Then, by assembling the front component member 680, a foul port 489 is provided in the game effect unit 4 without providing a foul port on the main body frame side (see FIG. 23).
It is possible to properly discharge the foul ball.

Furthermore, a security protrusion 465 (see FIG. 11) is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail unit 472 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. The security protrusion 465 is provided with a security rear end protrusion 215 (see FIG. 36) that protrudes from the security cover 210 (see FIG. 36) with the door frame 5 closed.
And an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that is inserted from the middle of the gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the shaft support side in a vertically overlapping manner is prevented.

Also, at the center of the lower portion along the inner rail unit 462 (that is, the most downstream side in the game area 20), none of the winning ports such as the start ports 600, 602, 604 and the general winning port 614 was won. An out port 471 for discharging the game ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. Between the inner rail unit 462 and the outer rail unit 472 from the out port 471 to the backflow prevention member 463, a guide passage through which the hit ball is guided to the game area 20 is configured. Then, the hit ball that has flowed back through the guide passage without reaching the game area 20 is taken into the foul mouth 489 (see FIG. 23) and discharged again to the dish body 360 (see FIG. 2) of the dish unit 300. ing. Also, the outlet 47 of the inner rail unit 462
A rail security groove 464 (see FIG.
Reference) is formed. The rail crime prevention groove 464 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime protrusion piece 214 (see FIG. 36) protruding from the crime prevention cover 210 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed enters. And the piano inserted from the middle of the gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the open side is overlapped in the vertical direction by the concave-convex engagement of the rail security groove 464 and the post-crime projection piece 214. Finally, the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as wires is prevented.

Further, a substrate holder 505 is fixed to the lower part of the back surface of the back unit 510. In this substrate holder 505, a space is formed so as to collect the winning balls in front of it, and a drop opening (not shown) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. This drop port is an out port 471
The rear surface portion joins and further communicates with an out-sphere passage 645 formed in the substrate unit 54. Also, the substrate holder 505 has a peripheral control board box 24 for storing a peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 65) for controlling the game operation on the back surface thereof and a main control board 710 (
A main control board box 25 that houses the board control terminal box 25 and a panel relay terminal board 750 (see also FIG. 64) for connecting to a payout control board, a power supply board, and the like provided in the board unit 54 are attached. . On the panel relay terminal board 750, the above-mentioned frame side drawer connector 2000 is automatically provided on the board unit 54 only by mounting the game effect unit 4 on the main body frame 3.
Unit-side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a connected to b and 2002b are provided.

Further, the center accessory 620 provided in the game panel 409 is an accessory that is formed in the game area 20 with various ornamental bodies, winning holes, and the like, and is attached from the front side of the game panel 409. ing. Specifically, as described above, the game panel 409 is appropriately formed with an opening 409e for attaching the center accessory 620, and the center accessory 620 is formed.
After being fitted into each opening 409e from the front side of the game panel 409, it is fixed with screws or the like.

The center accessory 620 has a frame-shaped decorative body 622 as a main component, and the frame-shaped decorative body 62.
The effect display device 115 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized through an opening 621 formed in the center of No. 2. However, a transparent plate 621 a made of a transparent resin is formed in the opening 621 so as to cover the entire back surface of the frame-shaped decorative body 622. Therefore, from the front side of the game effect unit 4, the effect display device 115 can be visually recognized through the opening 621 (transparent plate 621 a), while the game ball can be viewed through the opening 621 (transparent plate 621 a). It is impossible to enter behind the center actor 620.

In the state where the center bonus 620 is attached to the game panel 409, the game panel 4
09 and the transparent plate 621a form substantially the same plane (substantially flush with each other). Therefore, in the game effect unit 4, the position (the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 621) where the game panel 409 is arranged.
The light can be transmitted in the back direction or the front direction beyond the plane position formed by a), while the game ball is positioned at the position where the game panel 409 is disposed (the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 621).
In principle, it is possible to prevent intrusion in the back direction beyond the plane position formed by a).

Further, the rear unit 510 is configured such that the effect display device 115 is detachably attached to the rear unit 510. Specifically, the back unit 510 is formed with an inner periphery of an opening 514a formed in a substantially rectangular shape in the back box 514, separated vertically up and down on one side (left side in rear view) extending vertically. Two attachment / detachment grooves 516 and an attachment / detachment mechanism 518 having an attachment / detachment lever disposed on the rear surface of the back box 514 on the opposite side to the attachment / detachment groove 516 (right side in the rear view) are provided.

On the other hand, the effect display device 115 is formed in a substantially rectangular outer shape, and two detachable protrusions 11 formed at positions separated from each other in the vertical direction on one of the left and right side surfaces (the left side surface in the rear view).
6 and an attachment / detachment locking portion 118 formed at the approximate center in the vertical direction on the other side surface (the side surface on the right side in the rear view) opposite to the side surface on which the attachment / detachment protrusion 116 is formed. These detachable protrusions 11
6 and the attachment / detachment locking portion 118 both protrude outward, and the back unit 510
Are formed so as to correspond to the attachment / detachment groove 516 and the attachment / detachment mechanism 518, and the effect display device 115.
Is configured to be detachable from the back unit 510.

Furthermore, the wide space of the back unit 510 is provided with a rotation distribution accessory and a decoration accessory which will be described later. Here, the back unit 510 is arranged such that the wide space of the back unit 510 is formed over the entire back side of the game panel 409. Therefore, the wide space of the back unit 510 functions as an effect area formed over the entire back side of the game panel 409. Also,
On the front side of the back unit 510, a plurality of electric decoration parts and light emitters described later are disposed. A lamp driving board box 508 that accommodates a lamp driving board 850 (see FIG. 65) that is connected to these accessories, electrical components, and the like and controls driving is disposed at the lower back of the back unit 510. .

By the way, as shown in FIG. 11, the main body frame 3 is provided on one side (axis support side) of the game effect unit 4.
A positioning recess 466 that fits into the unit positioning projection 37 formed on the game frame is formed, and on the other side (open side) of the game effect unit 4 is a unit stopper insertion hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame 3. A game effect unit stopper 467 to be inserted is provided. When the game effect unit stopper 467 is pushed and fixed, its end is inserted into the unit stopper insertion hole. In order to fix the game production unit 4 to the main body frame 3,
After inserting the game effect unit 4 from an oblique direction so that the positioning recess 466 fits into the unit positioning protrusion 37 from the front side of the main body frame 3, the entire game effect unit 4 is moved to the main body frame 3.
Is pushed into the game effect unit installation recess 30 and the game effect unit stopper 467 which is free in that state is pushed in and fixed, and its end is inserted into the unit stopper insertion hole and fixed. Thereafter, the game effect unit fixing tool 46 that is rotatably provided on the upper front surface of the plate portion 32 of the main body frame 3 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game panel 409. As a result, the entire game effect unit 4 including the game panel 409 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game effect unit 4, the procedure may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure. However, in the case of the illustrated embodiment, a fastening portion 469 is formed by cutting out a part of the lower side on the lower side of the game panel 409, and is formed on the fastening portion 469 and the plate portion 32 of the main body frame 3. By fastening the fastening hole 41 with a fastener (not shown), it is possible to prevent the game effect unit 4 from being removed from the main body frame 3 unless the fastener is cut.

Furthermore, unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2 provided on the game effect unit 4 side.
002a and the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b provided on the main body frame 3 side are:
When the game effect unit 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 from the front, the game effect units 4 are arranged at positions where they face each other and can be fitted to each other. The board unit 54 includes a frame side drawer connector 2000.
The fitting hole 646 (refer FIG. 25) extended in the back direction is formed in the approximate middle position of b and 2002b. On the other hand, the panel relay terminal plate 750 includes unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 20
A fitting protrusion 751 (see FIG. 54) extending rearward is formed at a substantially intermediate position of 02a. With this structure, when the game effect unit 4 is attached to the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 from the front surface, the fitting protrusion 751 is fitted into the fitting hole 646 while being guided. At the same time, unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 200 on the game effect unit 4 side.
2a is positioned so as to face the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b on the main body frame 3 side. Therefore, the main drawer connector 2000 (2000a and 2000b) and the auxiliary drawer connector 2002 (200) can be obtained simply by mounting the game effect unit 4 on the main body frame 3.
Since 2a and 2002b) are interconnected, it is not necessary to carry out an electrical connection work from behind the pachinko machine 1 and work efficiency is improved.

Note that the game panel 409 has speakers 14 provided on the back side of the door frame 5 on the upper left and right.
A speaker notch 468 is formed so as to be able to receive the rearward protruding portions of 4a and 144b. Further, a passage cutout portion 478 into which a part of the passage for discharging the prize ball is inserted obliquely below the foul mouth 489 (see FIG. 23) is also formed.

Thus, at least the game panel 409 is provided in the game effect unit 4 according to the present embodiment.
Is constituted by a transparent member, and an electric decoration or the like arranged behind can be visually recognized through the game panel 409. In other words, it is not necessary to provide an electric decoration or the like in the game area, and the area where the game ball can actually flow down in the game area 20 can be made as wide as possible. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating. Game area 2
Since the game panel 409 in which 0 is formed is formed of a transparent member, the player can visually recognize what is arranged behind the game panel 409. For example, a large effect display device 115 extending over the entire game area 20 is arranged behind the game panel 409 to display an unprecedented large effect image, and various effects and decorations are displayed in depth. It can be set as the structure of the game production | presentation unit 4 with a sense of depth which is not arranged until now. Thereby, it becomes possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can attract the player's interest.

<Assembly structure of game production unit>
Here, the assembly structure of the main members (the front component member 680, the game panel 409, the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504, and the board holder 505) constituting the game effect unit 4 described above will be specifically described. FIG. 56 is an enlarged front perspective view of the game effect unit excluding the center combination and the back unit. FIG. 57 is a rear perspective enlarged view of the game effect unit excluding the center combination and the back unit. FIG. 58 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the game effect unit excluding the center combination and the back unit. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective enlarged view of the game effect unit shown in FIGS. 56 and 57 as viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is similar to FIG.
It is the disassembled perspective enlarged view which looked at the game production unit shown in 6 and FIG. 57 from the back.

In addition, in order to make an understanding easy in FIGS. 56-60, the assembly structure of the game production | presentation unit 4 is demonstrated except the center actor 620 and the back unit 510. FIG. Further, the shape, position, size, and the like of the opening 409e in the game panel 409 vary depending on the structure of the center accessory 620 attached to the opening 409e, but here the opening 409
e is not shown. However, in FIG. 58, the back unit 510 for the game panel 409 is used.
In order to explain the mounting structure, only the back box 514 is schematically shown among the components of the back unit 510.

First, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 60, the front component member 680 is provided with a plurality of positioning fixing bosses 680c and positioning protrusions 680d that protrude rearward on the rear surface side. The positioning fixing boss 680c and the positioning protrusion 680d can be positioned with the panel holder 540 and the substrate holder 505 disposed on the rear side, as will be described in detail later. A plurality of positioning projections 680d are also provided on the rear surface side of the inner rail unit 462, and are fitted and fixed in an inner rail fixing hole 409d of a game panel 409 described later.

The gaming panel 409 in the gaming effect unit 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 20 and is formed of a transparent resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin or the like. . Note that the gaming panel 409 is thinner than the panel holder 540 and has a necessary minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail 410 (see FIG. 58) is installed. Yes.

The game panel 409 includes a plurality of fitting holes 409a that are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the upper part and are formed of round holes that pass through in the front-rear direction. 409b is provided. The fitting hole 409a and the long hole 409b are disposed outside the game area 20 and are positioned with the panel holder 540.

Further, the game panel 409 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 409c whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 409c is formed by cutting out substantially half of the thickness of the game panel 409, and is disposed outside the game area 20 as well as the fitting hole 409a and the long hole 409b. , Panel holder 540 and gaming panel 40
9 for engaging and fixing.

Furthermore, the game panel 409 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 409d at predetermined positions. The inner rail unit 462 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 680d protruding from the rear side of the inner rail unit 462 into the inner rail fixing hole 409d.

Further, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 58, the game panel 409 is provided with a lower hole 409f for planting the obstacle nail 410 so as to penetrate the game panel 409.
The inner diameter of 09f is slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the obstacle nail 410 on the planting side. In this game panel 409, a plurality of lower holes 409f are formed at predetermined positions.
The obstacle nails 410 are planted from the front side by using an unillustrated obstacle nail planting device, so that the many obstacle nails 410 have a predetermined gauge arrangement.

The obstacle nail 410 according to this embodiment has a head diameter of 4-5 mm and a total length of 25-3.
0 mm. And the driving | running | working part formed in the axial part of the obstruction nail 410 is rounded at the front-end | tip, and the helical part cut | disconnected helically is formed. That is, since the tip shape of the driving portion of the obstacle nail 410 is rounded, the obstacle nail 410 can be easily inserted into the small-diameter pilot hole 409f. Furthermore, it is easy to embed the obstacle nail 410 in the game panel 409 by the torsion part formed in the driving part of the obstacle nail 410. The depth at which the obstacle nail 410 is implanted with respect to the game panel 409 (so-called driving dimension) is 10 mm.
The degree is preferred.

Further, on the front side of the game panel 409 (that is, the surface on which the game area 20 is formed), in addition to the many obstacle nails 410, a windmill (not shown) is disposed at an appropriate position. Further, the game panel 409 is appropriately formed with an opening 409e having a predetermined shape so that the front structural member 680 including the guide rail 78, the frame-shaped center accessory 620, and the like are fixed by screws. Yes.

By the way, when the gaming panel 409 is a transparent resin plate formed by extrusion, the material may be taken so that the vertical direction of the gaming panel 409 is inclined by about 45 degrees with respect to the extrusion direction. Thereby, the dot matrix of the effect display device 115 arranged behind the game panel 409 interferes with a plurality of fine molding marks formed by extrusion molding, and the occurrence of moire is suppressed as much as possible. It is possible to prevent the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 from being difficult to see due to moire.

Subsequently, the panel holder 540 in the game effect unit 4 has a substantially square shape with a size including the game panel 409 in a front view, and is a member made of wooden plywood in the game effect unit of a conventional pachinko machine (for example, a game effect). The unit base is made of a thermoplastic resin having a thickness substantially equal to the thickness of the unit base (in this example, about 20 mm). The panel holder 540 is detachably fitted with a game panel 409 and is fitted with a fitting step 540a that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side. The inside of the fitting step 540a is substantially the same size as the game area 20. Now, it mainly includes a through-hole 540b penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The fitting step portion 540a of the panel holder 540 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 409, and the front surface of the game panel 409 fitted to the fitting step portion 540a is the panel holder 540. It is designed to be substantially flush with the front surface of the. Further, the fitting step 540
The front inner peripheral surface of a is such that a predetermined amount of clearance C is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 409. The clearance C can absorb the expansion and contraction even if the game panel 409 expands and contracts relatively due to a change in temperature or a change with time. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance C.

Further, the panel holder 540 is provided with an engaged portion that engages with the engagement step portion 409c at a position corresponding to the engagement step portion 409c of the game panel 409. More specifically, the engaged portion disposed in the fitting step portion 540a on the lower side of the panel holder 540 corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 409c in the game panel 409, and is in contact with the front surface of the fitting step portion 540a. An engagement protrusion that extends a predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 540 with a predetermined gap of a size that allows insertion of the engagement step portion 409c of the game panel 409 therebetween. 540c is formed. On the other hand, the engaged portion disposed in the fitting step portion 540a on the upper side of the panel holder 540 is the gaming panel 4.
An engagement claw portion 540d that protrudes forward from the front surface of the fitting step portion 540a and elastically engages with the engagement step portion 409c corresponds to the upper engagement step portion 409c at 09. The engagement claw portion 540d has such a size that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 540. The engaging step 409 of the game panel 409 is engaged with the engaging protrusion 540c and the engaging claw 540d.
The panel holder 540 can hold | maintain the game panel 409 so that attachment or detachment is possible by engaging c.

Further, the panel holder 540 has a gaming panel 409 fitted and supported by the fitting step 540a.
Are arranged at positions corresponding to the fitting holes 409a and the long holes 409b formed in the fitting step 5
40a extending forward from the front surface of the game panel 409, the fitting hole 409a and the long hole 4
09b is provided with a plurality of projecting pins 540e that can be fitted and inserted. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 540e into the fitting holes 409a and the long holes 409b of the game panel 409, the panel holder 540 and the game panel 409 can be positioned relative to each other.

Further, the panel holder 540 has a positioning and fixing boss 68 provided on the front component member 680.
A boss insertion hole 540f penetrating in the front-rear direction through which 0c can be inserted is formed. The panel holder 540 and the front component member 680 are positioned relative to each other by inserting the positioning fixing boss 680c of the front component member 680 into the boss insertion hole 540f.

Further, the panel holder 540 is provided with a mounting support portion 540g having a recessed shape on the front side so as to leave the lower side and the outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction on the rear surface side.
The rear surface of the panel holder 540 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to the predetermined height by the mounting support portion 540g, and the rear outer peripheral portion protrudes backward,
The amount of depression (depth) is a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate a flange-like fixing portion of a predetermined member such as the back box 514 attached and fixed to the mounting support portion 540g. 1-3m
m is preferably between m). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 540g, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 540, and the panel holder 540, that is, the game effect unit 4 is connected to the pachinko machine 1. The main body frame 3 can be securely attached.

Further, on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 5 is recessed toward the front side below the position where the mounting support portion 540 g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to the predetermined height.
An accommodation recess 540h capable of accommodating 04 is formed. Further, a locking portion 540i that is disposed so as to penetrate through the housing recess 540h in the front-rear direction and that can lock the locking claw 504c formed on the panel back plate 504 is further formed. The housing recess 540h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 504 by engaging the locking claw 504c of the panel back plate 504 with the locking portion 540i, and the rear surface of the accommodated panel back plate 504 is a panel. The holder 540 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface.

Further, the mounting support portion 540g formed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540 has a plurality of first mounting holes 540j and a plurality of second mounting holes 540k as shown in the figure.
Each of them is provided in a predetermined arrangement including the part that reaches the edge. A plurality of first mounting holes 540
A small-diameter first screw 515 disposed on the upper side of the housing recess 540h can be screwed to j. A plurality of second mounting holes 540k has a second screw (not shown) having a larger diameter than the first screw 515.
Can be screwed on the upper side of the mounting support portion 540g. In this example, the diameters of the screw portions of the first screw 515 and the second screw are about 2.1 mm and about 3 mm, respectively, and the first mounting hole 540
The diameter of j and the second mounting hole 540k is set to a diameter capable of screwing the first screw 515 and the second screw.

Further, the panel holder 540 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 540l disposed so as to correspond to the first mounting hole 540j and the second mounting hole 540k. This positioning hole 540
l is a positioning protrusion formed on a member that is mounted and fixed using the first mounting hole 540j or the second mounting hole 540k (for example, a positioning protrusion 514 formed on the fixing portion 514b of the back box 514).
c) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 540l is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the back.

Further, the panel holder 540 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 540m that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 540 is reduced by the thinned portions 540m. It has become. On the other hand, these thinned portions 540m are not formed in the predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 540h, that is, the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 540 to the predetermined height. That is, within this range, since the front surface of the panel holder 540 is a substantially flat surface, the front structural member 680 disposed on the front surface thereof.
The rear surface of the guide rail 482 becomes a substantially flat surface. Thereby, the game ball launched from the launching device 57 is smoothly guided in the guide rail 78. Further, the panel holder 540 is formed with a thinned portion 540m, so that the first mounting hole 540j, the second mounting hole 540k, and the like are formed in a boss shape. At the same time, the first mounting hole 540j and the second mounting hole 5
In order to support 40k or the like or to maintain the strength of the panel holder 540, grid-like ribs are formed.

The panel holder 540 is formed with an existing obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and a positioning portion 540n corresponding to positioning means such as an assembly jig, and the game panel 409 is attached to the obstacle nail planting device. It can be set while holding. Further, a communication hole 540o that communicates with the communication port 473 of the guide rail 482 in the front component member 680 and a communication hole 540p that communicates with the out port 471 of the front component member 680 are further provided at the lower portion of the panel holder 540. ing.

Next, the panel back plate 504 of the game effect unit 4 is arranged on the rear side of the panel holder 540 so as to cover the lightening portion 540m within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height. At the same time, the housing recesses 540h of the panel holder 540 can be accommodated so that the rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. Then, a plurality of screw holes 504a arranged in a predetermined arrangement on the flat rear surface and capable of screwing the first screws 515, and a plurality of positioning holes 504 arranged so as to correspond to the screw holes 504a.
b, a locking claw 504c that can be locked to the locking portion 540i of the panel holder 540, and a concave portion 504d for reducing the weight so as not to penetrate from the front side.

The screw hole 504a and the positioning hole 504b in the panel back plate 504 have substantially the same configuration as the first mounting hole 540j and the positioning hole 540l in the panel holder 540. Similarly to the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504 is also formed in a boss-like portion where the screw holes 504a and the positioning holes 504b are formed by the recessed portions 504d. At the same time, the screw holes 504a and the positioning holes 504b are supported, and the panel back plate 50
In order to maintain the strength of 4, grid-like ribs are formed. Furthermore,
The panel back plate 504 is provided with an opening 504e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the communication holes 540o and 540p and the boss insertion hole 540f of the panel holder 540.

The panel back plate 504 is housed in the housing recess 540h of the panel holder 540, and the locking claw 504c of the panel back plate 504 is locked to the locking portion 540i of the panel holder 540, so that it is integrated with the panel holder 540. Assembled. In such a state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 504 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 540. Thus, by integrating the panel holder 540 and the panel back plate 504, the first mounting holes 540j are arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540 in a predetermined arrangement over the entire outer periphery of the through-hole 540b. The mounting holes including the second mounting holes 540k and the screw holes 504a and the positioning holes 540l and 504b are arranged. The presence of these mounting holes makes it possible to attach a predetermined member having a size substantially the same as that of the panel holder 540, and select and mount an appropriate mounting hole at an arbitrary position. Since it becomes possible, the freedom degree of design can be raised. In the present embodiment, the back box 514 and the substrate holder 505 are provided with a size substantially the same as the panel holder 540.

The board holder 505 in the game effect unit 4 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel back plate 504 and has a box shape with the front and upper sides opened, and the game ball discharge port 505a, the bottom plate 505b, the escape portion 505c, and the board support. Part 505d. Game ball outlet 505
a is a game medium outlet having a size through which a game ball can pass. The bottom plate 505b is a plate-like portion that is inclined so that the upper surface thereof becomes lower toward the game ball outlet 505a. Relief part 505c
Is a predetermined amount of gap formed between the rear side of the panel back plate 504. Substrate support 5
05d is arranged on the rear side where the escape portion 505c is formed, and supports the main control board box 25 having the main control board 710 and the like.

The substrate holder 505 collects game balls that have been driven into the game area 20 and can discharge them downward from the game ball discharge port 505a. Also, the escape portion 505c
Is a depth that can accommodate a flange-like fixing portion of a member (not shown) attached and fixed to the panel back plate 504, in the same manner as the mounting support portion 540g of the panel holder 540 (in this example, about 1
mm, and preferably between 0.5 and 3 mm).

Further, the substrate holder 505 is provided with a cylindrical fixing boss 505e that fits with the positioning fixing boss 680c of the front component 680 at a predetermined position on the front side thereof. Then, the fixed boss 505e is fitted to the positioning fixed boss 680c of the front component 680 with the panel holder 540 sandwiched between the fixed boss 505e and the front component 680. At the same time, a predetermined screw is passed through the through-hole 505f penetrating the fixed boss 505e from the rear side of the substrate holder 505 to the front component member 6.
By screwing into the positioning fixing boss 680c of 80, the front component member 680, the panel holder 5
40 and the substrate holder 505 can be fixed together.

Further, the substrate holder 505 has a communication port 473 of the front component member 680 at the lower part of the front surface thereof.
An opening receiving portion 505g communicating with the air is provided. The opening receiving portion 505g is connected to the game ball outlet 50.
The game ball can be guided to the lower side of the substrate holder 505 at a position different from 5a.
The “dead ball” received inside the substrate holder 505 can be distinguished from the game ball that was missed when the game ball was driven into the game area 20.

The assembly structure of each member constituting the game effect unit 4 has been described above. With this structure, the main members constituting the game effect unit 4 (the front component member 680, the game panel 4)
09, the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504, the substrate holder 505, etc.) can be assembled easily and integrally. In particular, preferably holding a transparent resin game panel 409,
By arranging the center actor 620, the back unit 510, the effect display device 115, and the like before and after the game panel 409, the game effect unit 4 having a depth which is not conventional can be realized.

In this example, the game panel 409 and the panel holder 5 are excluded except for a part of the front component member 680.
40, the panel back plate 504 and the substrate holder 505 are made of thermoplastic resin,
These parts can be recycled. As the resin, acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, polypropylene, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, and the like can be used. It may be used. In addition to the game panel 409, the front component 680 and the panel holder 5
A transparent resin may also be used for 40, the panel back plate 504, and the like.

<About Center Title>
Next, the center accessory 620 disposed from the front side of the game panel 409 will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, a frame-shaped center accessory 620 is arranged in the center of the game area 20. The center accessory 620 occupies a width of 4/5 or more in the width direction of the game area 20. The center accessory 620 has a substantially rectangular opening 621.
have. The center accessory 620 includes a frame-shaped decorative body 622, and the frame-shaped decorative body 622 is provided along the opening edge of the opening 621.

And the effect display apparatus 115 is arrange | positioned behind the transparent plate 621a arrange | positioned so that the opening part 621 may be obstruct | occluded so that it can visually recognize through this opening part 621 by front view. That is, the inside (that is, the opening 621) of the center accessory 620 is an image display area 20a in which the effect display device 115 is exposed in the game area 20. Then, the game area 20 is divided into the above-described image display area 20a and the ball flow-down area 20b where game balls mainly flow down by the center accessory 620. In principle, the game ball enters the image display area 20a only when the game ball passes through warp paths 550 and 650, which will be described later.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a large number of game balls enter the opening 621 and the behind-the-scenes display device 115 becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the game balls. In particular, in the present embodiment, despite the fact that the display device 115 is larger than the conventional display, the image display area 20a keeps various effects displayed on the effect display device 115 in a good state for easy viewing. The person can surely visually recognize various effects displayed on the effect display device 115.

In the gaming panel 409, the center role 620 is arranged so as not to come into contact with the front component 680, and a game ball driven into the game area 20 passes through the right side or the left side of the center role 620. It flows down toward an out port 471 provided below the center accessory 620. In the present embodiment, the center accessory 620 (specifically, a frame-shaped decorative body 622)
An arc-shaped side wall extending in the clockwise direction from above to the lower right is close enough to form a gap through which only one game ball can pass between the inner peripheral wall of the front component member 680. . Therefore, most of the game balls that have been driven into the game area 20 flow down to the left side of the game area 20 in which a second starting port 602 and a passage gate 612, which will be described later, are disposed. On the other hand, among the game balls that are driven into the game area 20, a part of the game balls that are driven with a large elasticity by the launching device 57 can flow down the right side of the game area 20 one by one.

A first start port 600 capable of receiving a game ball driven toward the game area 20 is disposed below the center accessory 620. Below the first start port 600, a pair of movable pieces 6
A third start port 604 having 06 (the second start port will be described later) is disposed. When the pair of movable pieces 606 is in the closed state, the third start port 604 is unable to receive the game ball or difficult to receive, and when the pair of movable pieces 606 is in the open state, It becomes easier to accept game balls than the one start port 600.

An opening / closing device 500 is provided between the first start port 600 and the out port 471, specifically below the third start port 604 and above the out port 471 (directly above in the present embodiment). Yes. The opening / closing device 500 includes a prize winning opening 500a and a prize winning opening / closing door 500b provided corresponding to the prize winning opening 500a. The big prize opening 500a is an opening that can accept a game ball. The special prize opening / closing door 500b is a member for switching the special prize opening 500a between an open state in which a game ball can be received and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be received or difficult. In addition, when the special winning opening 500a is in the closed state, it is not necessarily limited to the fact that it is not necessarily impossible to accept the game ball that is driven toward the game area 20, difficult,
Preferably it may be extremely difficult.

On the left side of the first start port 600, a passing gate 612 through which game balls can pass is provided. Further, three general winning ports 614 are provided on the left and right sides of the third starting port 604 slightly below the passing gate 612.

The game balls that have not won any of the start ports 600, 602, 604, the opening / closing device 500 and the general winning port 614 are arranged on the most downstream side in the flow direction of the game balls.
An outlet 471 for discharging is formed at the back. That is, each start port 600, 602, 604 provided on the upstream side of the out port 471 in the flow direction of the game ball, the opening / closing device 50
A game ball that has not won any of 0 and the general winning opening 614 flows down toward the out opening 471.

The opening / closing device 500 is disposed immediately above the out port 471. Thereby, the switchgear 50
During the opening / closing operation of 0, the game balls that did not win any of the start ports 600, 602, 604, the opening / closing device 500, and the general winning port 614 gather near the opening / closing device 500, so that the expectation of winning a prize can be expected. Can have.

An LED display area 80 composed of a plurality of LEDs is formed at the lower right of the center accessory 620. In this LED display area 80, a first special symbol display 84 for displaying a lottery result by a first special symbol lottery means 900 to be described later, and a second special symbol display for displaying a lottery result by a second special symbol lottery means 910. 86, a first special symbol hold indicator 88 for displaying the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (the number of lottery processes performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900 in the hold state) and the second A second special symbol hold display 90 is provided for displaying the number of lotteries held by the special symbol lottery means 910 (the number of lottery processes performed by the second special symbol lottery means 910 in the on-hold state). The LED display area 80 includes
A normal symbol display 82 for displaying the lottery result by the normal symbol lottery means 920 and a normal symbol hold indicator 92 for displaying the number of lotteries held by the normal symbol lottery means 920 are provided.
These displays can recognize that a plurality of processes relating to the progress of the game sequentially executed by the main control board 710 described later are functioning based on control data stored in the RAM 713 described later. It can also be said to be a main control function diagnostic display.

Each of these indicators 82, 84, 86, 88, 90, 92 is composed of, for example, an LED, and the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the second special symbol lottery means, depending on the lighting state of this LED. The lottery result by 910, the lottery result by the normal symbol lottery means 920, the holding number of lotteries by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the holding number of lotteries by the second special symbol lottery means 910, and the holding number of lotteries by the normal symbol lottery means 920 Is notified.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, the “number of lottery holds” refers to the number of holds for the determination (lottery process) of whether or not the acquired random number for determination is correct, even though the random number for determination of success is acquired. This means, but is not limited to this, and it may be the number of determinations of the random number for determination of the success / failure for which the acquisition of random numbers for determination of the determination / rejection is suspended.

Further, the first special symbol hold indicator 88 and the second special symbol hold indicator 90 may be the number of lots to be held instead of the lottery hold number. In other words, although it is determined whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is obtained and whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired, the determination result is not displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. , The number of such hold may be displayed.

The center accessory 620 is a shelf-like stage 660 near the lower frame of the frame-shaped decorative body 622.
have. In addition, in the vicinity of the vertical center of the left frame of the frame-shaped decorative body 622 (that is, to the side of the frame-shaped decorative body 622), a game ball flowing down the game area 20 is guided to the first stage 660. A first warp inlet 65 that can be received in a first warp passage 650 that is a stage guide path.
2 is provided. The game ball received at the first warp inlet 652 is discharged from the first warp outlet 654 and guided to the first stage 660. That is, when a game ball flowing down the game area 20 enters the first warp inlet 652, the game ball is transferred to the first stage 660 provided inside the center accessory 620 via the first warp passage 650. It is configured to be.

The first warp inlet 652 is provided below the second start port 602 in the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the game area 20. A warp guide piece 658 for guiding a game ball to the first warp inlet 652 is provided below the first warp inlet 652. The warp guide piece 658 protrudes from the frame-shaped decorative body 622 toward the left (that is, from the center accessory 620 to the game area 20), so that the game ball is easily guided to the first warp inlet 652.
Therefore, even if the game ball is not led to the second start port 602, the first warp inlet 6
The expectation that the game ball will be accepted in 52 is increased, and the interest is enhanced.

The first stage 660 includes a first warp outlet side end 666 to a first warp counter-exit side end 6.
A curved surface formed in a wave shape is formed over 68. Specifically, a crest portion 662 that bulges upward is formed at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the stage 660, and a trough portion 664 continuously connected to the crest portion 662 is formed on the left and right sides of the crest portion 662. Is formed.

In addition, the height of the peak portion 662 is lower than the first warp outlet side end portion 666 and the first warp counter-exit side end portion 668. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the first warp outlet 654 can get over the mountain portion 662 and reciprocate between the first warp outlet side end 666 and the first warp counter-exit side end 668. Can roll.

As a result, the flow direction of the game ball in the first warp passage 650 and the rolling direction of the game ball in the first stage 660 are substantially collinear, so that the game ball flowing down the first warp passage 650 has kinetic energy. There is little loss. That is, when the game ball flowing down the first warp passage 650 changes its traveling direction, kinetic energy is lost. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down the first warp passage 650 rolls on the first stage 660 vigorously. In the present embodiment, the game ball is not guided to the first stage 660 from the right side of the center accessory 620. That is, since the game ball is guided to the first stage 660 only from the left side of the center actor 620, the game ball rolling on the first stage 660 is inhibited from rolling by the game ball guided from the opposite direction. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the time for the game ball to roll on the first stage 660 vigorously and stay on the first stage 660 is increased, and as a result, the first stage 660 is increased.
At this time, the game ball is played and the interest is enhanced.

In addition, a guide groove that is inclined downward toward the front side is formed in the peak portion 662 of the first stage 660 in order to guide the game ball to the first start port 600. Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the first stage 660 loses the momentum to roll around the mountain portion 662, the game ball is easily guided to the first start port 600 by the guide groove. On the other hand, the valley 664 of the first stage 660.
Is formed with a guide groove inclined downward toward the front side in order to guide the game ball to the side of the first start port 600. Accordingly, when the game ball rolling on the first stage 660 loses the momentum to roll in the vicinity of the valley 664, the game ball is relatively easily guided to the first start port 600 by the guide groove. . Therefore, even if the game ball is not guided to the second start port 602, the expectation that the game ball will be received by the first start port 600 is increased, and the interest is enhanced.

<About back unit>
Next, the back unit 510 disposed on the back side of the game panel 409 will be described. The back unit 510 has an opening formed substantially in the center, and the effect display device 115 is formed in the opening.
Is arranged to face. In addition, this back unit 510 is an effect space 510G described later.
Are attached to the back side of the game panel 409. Production display device 1
15 is arranged so that the liquid crystal display surface is substantially parallel to the game panel 409, and thereby, the effect display device 115 is opened from the front side of the game effect unit 4 through the opening 621 of the center accessory 620. The liquid crystal display surface becomes visible. The opening 621 of the center accessory 620 is provided with a transparent shielding plate that shields from the game area 20, and the rear of the shielding plate is also included in the above-described effect space 510G.

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 55, the back unit 510 has a shelf-like second stage 560 on which a game ball can roll in the vicinity of the bottom wall of the opening 514 a of the back box 514. A second warp passage 550 is provided on the left side wall of the opening 514a of the back box 514. The second warp passage 550 is a stage guide path for guiding the game ball won in the second start port 602 to the second stage 560. . The game ball received in the second start port 602 is the second warp outlet 55.
4 is discharged to the second stage 560. That is, when a game ball flowing down the game area 20 enters the second start port 602, the game ball passes through the second warp passage 550 and is back box 5.
14 is transported to a second stage 560 provided inside 14 (that is, the bottom wall of the opening 514a).

By the way, the above-described shielding plate provided in the opening 621 of the center accessory 620 prevents the game ball rolling on the second stage 560 from returning to the game area 20 again. In other words, the so-called out ball received in the second start port 602 is used to produce an effect. Thus, the effect space 510G is formed not only around the effect display device 115 but also in the front surface of the effect display device 115.

The game ball received in the second starting port 602 is the front side of the back unit 510 (ie,
When the second warp passage 550 flows down in the second warp passage 550 provided behind the gaming panel 409, the second warp passage 550 is configured as a transparent member. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the gap between the game panel 409 and the back unit 510 through the transparent game panel 409. Therefore, the player can observe the state in which the game ball received in the second start port 602 is conveyed to the second stage 560, and the interest is enhanced.

The second stage 560 is provided with a rotation distributing tool 580 having a rod-like body whose diameter is reduced toward both left and right ends, with the left-right direction of the game effect unit 4 being the longitudinal axis direction. In the second stage 560, the height of the substantially intermediate position in the left-right direction on the front side of the rotary distribution tool 580 is lower than the second warp outlet side end portion 566 and the second warp counter-exit side end portion 568. Inclined so that Therefore, the game ball guided to the second stage 560 is located on the front side of the rotary distribution combination 580 in the second stage 560 (the front stage 560a).
), The second warp outlet side end 666 and the second warp counter-exit side end 668 can reciprocate and roll.

The rotary distribution combination 580 provided on the second stage 560 rotates in one direction from the near side to the far side with the horizontal direction of the game effect unit 4 as the axis line center. A magnetic body (not shown) is provided in the magnetized portion 580a, which is a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the rotational distribution member 580, and the game ball is attached to the magnetized portion 580a by the magnetic force of the magnetic body. It is possible to contact. That is, the game ball that rolls on the front stage 560a of the second stage 560 is the magnetized portion 58 of the rotary distribution tool 580.
When the momentum of rolling in the vicinity of 0a is lost, the magnetized part 580a is attached by the magnetic force.

In addition, the rear side of the rotary distribution role 580 in the second stage 560 (the rear stage 560b).
), A special receiving port 562 capable of receiving a game ball is formed at the approximate center in the left-right direction, and is formed adjacent to the rotary sorting tool 580. In addition, on the left and right sides of the special receiving port 562, a normal receiving port 564 is formed adjacent to the rotary distribution tool 580, respectively. And, the rotation distribution role 58
The game ball attached to the zero magnetic attachment portion 580a is transported to the back side of the second stage 560 as the rotary distribution role 580 rotates, and is sent to either the special reception port 562 or the normal reception port 564. It is accepted as it is distributed.

As described above, by using the game ball won at the second start port 602 to perform the sorting operation by the rotary sorting tool 580 in the second stage 560, the game ball won at the second start port 602 or more. It is possible to give the player a sense of joy and superiority. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is received at the special receiving port 562, a certain point is given to the player, and when the accumulated point becomes equal to or greater than a specific value, a predetermined privilege is given to the player. (For example, a special effect that is not normally displayed is displayed). Therefore, when a game ball wins at the second starting port 602, the player will be watching whether or not the game ball is received by the special receiving port 562, so that the excitement of the game can be enhanced. .

Note that the rear stage 560b of the second stage 560 is inclined so that the height of the substantially intermediate position in the left-right direction is higher than the second warp outlet side end 666 and the second warp counter-exit side end 668. ing. Therefore, if the game ball attached to the magnetically attached portion 580a of the rotary distribution role 580 is not received by either the special receiving port 562 or the normal receiving port 564, the game ball moves on the rear stage 560b. After rolling toward the second warp outlet side end 666 or the second warp counter-exit side end 668, it is again guided to the front stage 560a. Therefore, the game ball supplied to the second stage 560 is surely received in either the special receiving port 562 or the normal receiving port 564.

On the other hand, near the upper wall of the opening 514a of the back box 514, an unidentified flying object (so-called U
A disk-like accessory 590 that is a decorative body simulating FO) is provided, and a plurality of electrical decoration members are provided on the main body 591 thereof. More specifically, three hemispherical lower electrical decoration bodies 592 projecting downward are provided on the bottom surface side of the main body 591, and two upper parts simulating a circular window are provided on the front side of the main body 591. An electric decoration body 594 is provided, and a line-shaped middle electric decoration body 596 extending left and right is provided between the lower electric decoration body 592 and the upper electric decoration body 594.

Inside the main body portion 591 of the disk-shaped accessory 590, there is an LED substrate (not shown) having LEDs as light emitting sources in the back, corresponding to each of the electric decorations 592, 594, 596. The driving of these electric decorators 592, 594, 596 is also controlled by a lamp driving board 850 (see FIG. 65) housed in a lamp driving board box 508 provided in the back unit 510.

Note that the opening 514a of the back box 514 is formed so as to partially protrude upward, and a disk-shaped accessory 590 is fitted into this protruding portion. Therefore, when the game effect unit 4 is viewed from the front, only the lower electric decoration 592 of the disk-like accessory 590 is the effect display device 1.
It overlaps with 15 displayable areas. As described above, even if the disk-like accessory 590 having a relatively large volume is provided in the back unit 510, the range in which the disk-like accessory 590 overlaps the displayable area of the effect display device 115 is narrow. The object 590 prevents the effect display device 115 from being difficult to visually recognize.

By the way, the back unit 510 is provided with a second stage 560 for performing an effect of distributing the game balls, a rotary sorting tool 580, a large disk-shaped tool 590 for decorating the game panel 409, and the like. Further, since the effect display device 115 larger than usual is attached to the back unit 510, the rear projecting portion of the game effect unit 4 is necessarily increased.
However, in the present embodiment, the rear projecting portion of the game effect unit 4 can be easily accommodated by the structure for mounting the game effect unit 4 by the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 described above. Therefore, the game effect unit 4 can adopt various parts and shapes not only on the front side of the game panel 409 but also on the back side, and the game effect unit 4 can have a more diverse and deep structure. it can.

<About the electrical decoration member of the game production unit and its light emission mode>
A plurality of electric decoration parts and light emitters are arranged behind the game panel 409, and the driving of these electric parts and the like is accommodated in a lamp driving board box 508 provided in the back unit 510. It is controlled by 850 (see FIG. 65). Hereinafter, the main ones of these electric parts will be described in detail. The main body 5 of a disk-like accessory 590 described later.
The LED board 5 that emits light from behind the electrical decoration member provided in 91, the lower electrical decoration body 592 (described later) provided on the bottom surface side of the main body 591, and the blade-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632 described later.
The LEDs provided in 35 are collectively referred to as a center decoration lamp 853. Further, a panel decoration lamp 852 includes an LED (not shown) that emits light from behind a feather-shaped decorative body 530 and an LED (not shown) that emits light-like decorative body 520 from below.
Called.

First, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the center accessory 620 is formed with a plurality of wing-shaped decorative bodies 630 having a substantially wing shape when viewed from the front. The plurality of feather-shaped decorative bodies 630 are slightly curved from the outer edge of the effect display device 115 toward the outer periphery of the game panel 409 in front view from the upper side to the lower right side in the clockwise direction in the frame-shaped decorative body 622 of the center accessory 620. However, it is formed at substantially equal intervals so as to extend (that is, radially). Each feather-shaped decorative body 63
0 has a blade shape that gradually becomes wider in front view as it goes in the extending direction (direction toward the outer periphery of the game panel 409).

In addition, a blade-type decorative body 632 that protrudes from the frame-shaped decorative body 622 is formed on the left side of the frame-shaped decorative body 622 of the center accessory 620. The feather-shaped decorative body 632 is formed to extend while slightly curving from the left side edge of the effect display device 115 to a position where it is joined to the inner rail unit 462 in a front view. It should be noted that the wing-shaped decorative body 632 is also a wing-shaped decorative body that gradually becomes wider in the front view as it goes in the extending direction (direction toward the outer periphery of the game panel 409), like the wing-shaped decorative body 630 described above. It has a shape.

However, the plurality of feather-shaped decorative bodies 630 are formed in the inner region of the frame-shaped decorative body 622 (that is, the image display area 20a) where the game balls do not flow down, whereas the blade-shaped decorative bodies 632 It protrudes from the outer region of the frame-shaped decorative body 622 (that is, the ball flow-down region 20b). For this reason, the wing-shaped decorative body 632 provided in the ball flow down region 20b allows a game ball to pass behind it, so that a space slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball is formed between it and the game panel 409. In addition, the frame-shaped decorative body 622 is installed to the inner rail unit 462. Further, unlike the plurality of blade-type decorative bodies 630, the blade-shaped decorative body 632 is formed with a slit-shaped window portion 632a so that a game ball flowing down behind can be visually recognized.

On the other hand, the back unit 510 is also formed with a plurality of blade-type decorative bodies 530 that are substantially blade-shaped when viewed from the front. The plurality of feather-shaped decorative bodies 530 are arranged from the outer edge of the effect display device 115 from the outer edge of the opening 514a of the back box 514 in the clockwise direction upward from the lower left to the game panel 40.
It is formed at substantially equal intervals so as to extend while curving slightly toward the outer periphery of 9 (that is, radially). Each feather-shaped decorative body 530 is a feather-shaped decorative body 630 of the center accessory 620.
, 632, a blade-shaped shape that becomes wider in front view as it extends in the extending direction (direction toward the outer periphery of the game panel 409).

Then, on the front side of the back unit 510, the above-mentioned feather-type decorative bodies 630 and 632 in front view.
Is provided with an LED substrate 535 (see FIG. 53) having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting sources. In other words, the feather-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632 of the center actor 620
The LED boards 535 are provided behind the game panels 409 through the game panels 409, respectively. Each blade-type decorative body 630, 632 emits white light at the outer edge portion of each blade-type decorative body 630, 632 when viewed from the front by driving the LED substrate 535 provided behind each.

Similarly, in the back unit 510, an LED substrate 535 is also provided behind the plurality of blade-type decorative bodies 530. And each feather-type decorative body 530 has LE which has each back.
By driving the D substrate 535, the outer edge portion of each blade-type decorative body 530 emits white light when viewed from the front.

Here, the feather-shaped decorative body 530 is provided in the back unit 510, while the blade-shaped decorative body 63 is provided.
0 and 632 are provided in the center role 620. However, the game production unit 4
When viewed from the front, the feather-shaped decorative bodies 530, 630, and 632 function as a series of decorative members that extend radially from the outer edge of the effect display device 115 toward the outline of the game panel 409. When the feather-shaped decorative bodies 530, 630, and 632 emit light by driving the corresponding LED substrates 535, an effect is provided in which light extends radially from the effect display device 115 in the outer direction of the game panel 409. Thereby, the impression as if the effect display device 115 emitted light toward the outline of the game panel 409 beyond the displayable region (that is, the impression that the light emission display extends outward from the effect display device 115). And the illusion that the displayable area of the effect display device 115 temporarily increases.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after securing the depth width (FIG. 13: depth width L2) as the above-described game production unit installation recess (large accommodation space) 30, first, the above production As shown in FIG. 61, the display surface of the display device 115 is the outer frame 2 described above.
It is arranged behind the rear surface and in front of the rear wall portion (third rear wall portion) of the second main body frame side wall portion (axis side). And on this, the wing-shaped decorative body 530 as a rear inclined decorative body, which is disposed rearward of the game panel 409 and inclined toward the direction in which the display surface of the effect display device 115 is provided, In addition, blade-type decorative bodies 630 and 632 are provided as front-side inclined decorative bodies that are arranged in front of the game panel 409 and are inclined toward the direction in which the display surface of the effect image device 115 is provided. . As will be described later, when a predetermined light emission effect is performed on the display surface of the effect display device 115, the CPU 811 (see FIG. 65) of the peripheral control board 810 is provided on the side where the display surface of the effect display device 115 is provided. From the above, the control for causing the blade-type decorative bodies 530, 630, and 632 to emit light is performed through the outer peripheral side substrate (lamp driving substrate and LED substrate) and the like. As a result, the light emission effect that appears on the display surface of the effect display device 115 jumps out to the player side through light emission over almost the entire game area 20 by the rear inclined decorative body and the front inclined decorative body. It becomes possible to realize a three-dimensional effect like Taka.

Moreover, in this embodiment, the CPU 811 of the peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 65)
When a predetermined light emission effect is performed on the display surface of the effect display device 115, the blade-shaped decorative body 530 itself as the rear inclined decorative body or the blade-shaped decorative body 6 as the front inclined decorative body.
30 and 632 themselves emit light from the side close to the display surface of the effect display device 115. Therefore, it is possible to more surely realize a three-dimensional effect as if the light-emitting effect that appeared on the display surface of the effect display device 115 jumped out to the player side. As described above, the blade-type decorative bodies 530, 630, 632 are actually
Light is emitted by light emitted from the LEDs on the LED substrate provided behind them.

Further, the back unit 510 is formed with a plurality of third light-like decorative bodies 520 in front view. These light-like decorative bodies 520 are configured as a set of one blue lens body and two red lens bodies adjacent to the blue lens body. The light decorative body 52
In 0, the blue lens body and the red lens body are circular, and the red lens body is a lens body having a smaller diameter than the blue lens body.

The plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520 are arranged at substantially equal intervals on the front side of the back unit 510 so as to surround the entire circumference of the opening 514a of the back unit 510. Further, behind each light-like decorative body 520, an LED substrate (not shown) including LEDs corresponding to each of the three lens bodies (one blue lens body and two red lens bodies) is provided. . This LED
By driving the substrate (not shown), each light-like decorative body 520 emits light through the red lens body or the blue lens body.

Thus, in this embodiment, the rear side (game panel 409 in the game effect unit 4).
Various illumination members (in particular, a plurality of light-like decorative bodies 5)
20), and the illumination member projects light to the front side of the game effect unit 4. Further, many of the main components constituting the game effect unit 4 are made of a light transmitting member, such as the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 621a made of transparent resin. Therefore, an electric lighting member such as a plurality of light decorative bodies 520 gives an impression that the entire game effect unit 4 is lit up in a front view, and the depth of the game effect unit 4 is strongly emphasized. The

More specifically, when only the blue lens body is caused to emit light among the plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520, the back unit In addition to 510, the center accessory 620, the front component 680, and the like are illuminated in blue. On the other hand, when only the red lens body is caused to emit light among the plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520, the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 62 are emitted by the red light emission of each light-like decorative body 520.
Not only the back unit 510 but also the center accessory 620, the front component member 680, etc. are illuminated in red via 1a. In other words, taking advantage of the deep depth of the game production unit 4,
Each light-like decorative body 520 irradiates light from the back side of the game effect unit 4 toward the near side,
It is possible to light up and decorate so that the entire game effect unit 4 is illuminated. This not only gives a strong visual impact to the player, but also gives the impression that the depth of the game production unit 4 can be seen deeper than it actually is, not only by experiencing the depth of the game production unit 4. be able to.

In addition, if the blue lens body and the red lens body are caused to emit light simultaneously in each light-like decorative body 520, the player who is spaced a predetermined distance from the game panel 409 will receive the light-like decorative body 52.
It is grasped as if 0 is emitting pink light. Therefore, the light of each light-like decorative body 520 causes the center accessory 62 not only through the back unit 510 but also through the game panel 409.
It is also possible to make 0 and the front structural member 680 appear to shine pink.

Here, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 115 are red, blue,
It is represented in one of the pink colors. That is, the three colors of red, blue, and pink can be said to be image colors that symbolize the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment. And the light decoration 5
The light emission control of red, blue, and pink by 20 has an effect of impressing the player with the image color of the pachinko machine 1.

By the way, in a conventional pachinko machine, a game window (glass unit) formed on the door frame is usually formed in a substantially circular shape in accordance with the game area of the game effect unit. However, in the present embodiment, the gaming window 101 (glass unit 190) formed in the door frame 5 is vertically long and has a size that greatly exceeds the gaming area 20 in front view and encompasses substantially the entire gaming panel 409. It is formed in a substantially octagonal shape. That is, gaming window 101 (glass unit 190)
However, the area is extremely large compared to the conventional case. Thereby, the player can use the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment.
Can be experienced more strongly, and light emitted from various electrical decoration members from the back side of the game effect unit 4 can be easily displayed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, light is visually emitted by the player). The mode can be easily grasped).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the depth in which the game effect unit 4 is arranged is deep, it is difficult for light to enter the game area 20 from the outside of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in a state where the effect display device 115 and various electric decoration members are not driven, the game area 20 is darker than the conventional pachinko machine. And the effect display apparatus 115 and various electrical decoration members are located in the back | inner side of the game effect unit 4 which is hard to be illuminated by the light from the outside.

For this reason, the effect display device 115 and the various illumination members are prevented from being disturbed by the player entering the pachinko machine 1 from outside the display mode and the light emission mode. That is, the effect display device 115 and the various illumination members are displayed or light-emitted on the back side of the game effect unit 4 that is kept in a relatively dark state.
It is easy to visually recognize the image display in 15 and the light emission modes of various electric decoration members.

Further, by using a structure that blocks the entrance of light from the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and intentionally darkening the effect display device 115 and various electric decoration members, the gaming area 20 is darker than the conventional gaming machine. State. Then, using the intentionally darkened game area 20, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the game area 20 is a space or a concert venue. For example, in this game area 20, it is possible to produce a UFO that floats in outer space in a pseudo manner by illuminating or emitting light from the disk-shaped accessory 590. In the game area 20, more various effects can be realized by using the image display on the effect display device 115 and the light emission modes of various electric decoration members.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 as described above.
It is possible to effectively perform light decoration on the entire circumference except the lower side. Conventional pachinko machine 1
In FIG. 2, the light-decorated range is mainly limited to the game area 20, but when the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is viewed from the front, the area that is light-decorated including the game area 20 and the door frame 5 is extremely large. . In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a planar spread of light decoration that could not be achieved with a conventional gaming machine.

In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an unprecedented depth feeling due to the light decoration is realized by performing the light decoration with the electric decoration member from the back side of the game effect unit 4. In other words, combined with the flatness and depth of light decoration, players will feel as if they are wrapped in light decoration, and they can concentrate on the game while experiencing an unprecedented interest. it can.

Further, by performing light decoration with an electric decoration member from the back side of the game effect unit 4, the game balls flowing down the game area 20 are illuminated by the light. This
An impression can be given to the player as if the game ball flowing down the game area 20 is floating. Furthermore, since the light that illuminates the game ball is diffusely reflected on the surface of the game ball, the color of the game ball can have a complex variety, and the game ball is a meteor flowing through outer space for the player. An image like that can be given.

Furthermore, the electrical decoration member provided in the game effect unit 4 has the following effects, particularly in relation to the effect display device 115. That is, in the present embodiment, the back unit 510 has a plurality of light emitting decorative bodies (specifically, light-like decorative bodies 520). This light decorative body 520 is in an after-mentioned effect space 510G for accommodating the effect device behind the game panel 409, and is formed on the outer periphery of the effect display device 115 (that is, formed on the back unit 510) in front view. The outer edge of the opening). Thereby, the light emission mode of the light-like decorative body 520 can be grasped via the transparent game panel 409. In addition, the light decorative body 520 is disposed on the back side of the gaming panel 409 in which the gaming area 20 is formed (it is not necessary to be disposed in the gaming area 20), thus obstructing the flow space of the gaming ball. There is nothing to do. As a result, a plurality of or relatively large light-like decorative bodies 520 can be employed, and a large effect display device 115 can be employed as long as it is not wasted. In addition, it is possible to prevent the cost from increasing.

By the way, if the effect display device 115 is made larger than necessary, not only a wasteful display area is increased, but also the cost is increased. In other words, since the human eye cannot gaze at all the large area screen, even if the production display device 115 is enlarged more than necessary, it is the specific area of the large area screen that is being watched during the game. This is the only area. Therefore, even if an effect or the like is performed in an area where the player can watch, the player hardly notices it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the “light emitting decorative body”, a lamp (such as a light decorative body 520) having a higher luminance than a liquid crystal display, such as a LED, is employed. Thereby, the player recognizes the display image of the effect display device 115 by arranging the light-like decorative body 520 on the outer periphery of the effect display device 115 in front view (that is, an area where the player cannot gaze or is difficult). On the other hand, it is also possible to grasp the light emission mode such as turning on, blinking, and / or turning off the light-like decorative body 520.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the electrical decoration member comprised in the game effect unit 4 is the pachinko machine 1.
The light emission mode is appropriately controlled according to the gaming state. For example, in a gaming state in which the opening extension function is activated (an external advantageous gaming state described later), a light-emitting decorative body (light-like decorative body 520).
) Is an advantageous mode, and a flashy lighting effect is performed. Thereby, the player can confirm that the flashy performance is performed without gazing at the light-like decorative body 520. In addition, this flashy production is performed in a wide-area production area (production space 510G described later) using substantially the entire area on the back side of the game panel 409. Can suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since this light emission effect is performed around the effect display device 115 (that is, a portion where it is difficult for the player to gaze), a flashy light emission effect can be performed without adversely affecting the player's eyes. The “flashy lighting effect”
For example, it is an effect that enhances the player's mood, such as an effect of performing illumination with a plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies.

Further, in a gaming state in which the opening extension function is not activated (external normal gaming state described later), the light emitting decorative body (light-like decorative body 520) is controlled to the normal mode. This normal mode is a modest mode than the advantageous mode, and corresponds to, for example, light extinction or dark lighting. Thereby, the player can grasp that the gaming state is not advantageous to the player. By the way, the “external normal gaming state” according to the present embodiment has an “external normal gaming state A” in which the probability changing function does not operate and an “external normal gaming state B” in which the probability changing function operates. Therefore, in the “external normal game state B”, the image effect on the effect display device 115 is substantially the same as that in the “external normal game state A”, while the light effect on the light-like decorative body 520 is flashy. It may be made to become. As a result, the “external normal gaming state A” and the “external normal gaming state B” can be made to have different atmospheres and auras in each gaming state, while the production mode is very similar as a whole.

In a gaming state that is executed only for a predetermined period (a goal achievement mode to be described later), while the effect image indicating the goal achievement mode is displayed on the effect display device 115, at least the light-emitting decorative body (light-like decorative body 520) It becomes a flashy mode than the normal mode. Thereby, the effect display device 1
It is possible to make the player think that the player is in an advantageous state not only by the display by 15 but also by the effect over substantially the entire game area 20. And it is preferable to control so that the light-like decorative body 520 will be in a normal mode after completion of the objective achievement mode. This allows the player to recognize that the state advantageous to him has ended, so that the joy will be even greater if the big win is won early in the goal achievement mode.

By the way, it is possible to produce a deep effect depending on whether the light emitting decoration (light-like decoration 520) arranged in the three-dimensional space (that is, the effect space 510G) is turned on or off. For example, as described above, the duty ratio of the pulse wave transmitted to the light emitting decoration body is controlled when being controlled to the “external normal gaming state A” and when being controlled to the “external normal gaming state B”. By changing, the atmosphere emitted from the entire game area 20 changes. In addition, the production space 510G is formed over the entire back surface of the game area 20,
By controlling the light emission mode of the light decorative body 520 arranged in the effect space 510G, it is possible to create an atmosphere in which a so-called aura is generated from the entire pachinko machine 1.

Further, in the case of being controlled to the “external normal gaming state A” and the case of being controlled to the “external normal gaming state B”, the aspect of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 is the same or extremely different from each other. While it is set as the effect image which resembles, only the light emission mode of the light emission mode of the light-like decorative body 520 may be different. As a result, the player cannot clearly grasp whether the player is controlled to “external normal gaming state A” or “external normal gaming state B”.
By the aura emitted from the entire pachinko machine 1, it is possible to give a sense that it is controlled to the “external normal gaming state B”.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, at the rear of the game area 20, the effect is produced in the effect space 510G as a wide three-dimensional space extending in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, and the depth direction of the game area 20. It is the composition which can perform.

An effect display device 115 is arranged in the center of the wide effect space 510G, and a plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies (light-like decorative bodies 520) are arranged around the effect display device 115. By arranging the plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520 uniformly in the left and right direction and the up and down direction of the game area 20, it is possible to produce effects in substantially the entire area of the game area 20. In addition, what is arrange | positioned in the production space 510G is not restricted only to the light-like decorative body 520, You may arrange | position several types of lamp | ramp, LED, etc. FIG.

By the way, conventionally, since it is necessary to secure a space such as a flow path through which the game ball flows down and obstacle nails, it has been difficult to arrange the light emitting decorative body over the entire game area 20. In addition, since the effect display device 115 has been enlarged in recent years, the space for arranging the light emitting decorative body has been eroded. For this reason, the production using the production display device 115 is flowing more than the production using the luminescent decorative body.

However, the area that can be watched by human eyes (hereinafter referred to as “gaze area”) is a limited range, and even if the effect display device 115 is enlarged, only the useless area that cannot be watched is increased. Further, increasing such a useless area leads to high cost. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 115 is disposed in the gaze area, and the light emitting decorative body is disposed in the area outside the gaze area. Therefore, the light emitting decorative body arranged outside the gaze area is
A lamp or LED having higher luminance than the liquid crystal display is preferable.

In addition, the effect display device 115 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 20 as the gaze area, and a light emitting decorative body is arranged along the periphery of the effect display device 115, so that direct information is provided to the player. It is possible to send information and send information indirectly.

This will be described in detail. Since the effect display device 115 is arranged in the gaze area, the display state of the effect display device 115 can directly inform the player of information such as the current game state. . For example, if it is an aspect in which information related to the gaming state is displayed by displaying characters etc. on the liquid crystal, unless it is a rare case such as looking away, if you are watching the effect display device 115 and playing a game, Character display device 11
5 can be confirmed. In this sense, the display by the effect display device 115 is direct information transmission.

On the other hand, when the light emission mode of the light emitting decorative body arranged outside the gaze area is changed, the player may not notice the change unless the change is very large. The plurality of light emitting decorations (light-like decorations 520) arranged outside the gaze area (specifically, the outer peripheral side of the effect display device 115) are uniformly distributed throughout the gaming area 20. Individual light-like decorative bodies 52
Although 0 is easily visible, it is difficult to visually recognize all the light-like decorative bodies 520 at a time. In other words, it is easy for the player to grasp the light emission mode of each light decorative body 520 individually, but the light emission modes of all the light decorative bodies 520 dispersed in a wide area are grasped at a time. It is difficult. Therefore, it is possible to indirectly transmit information to the player by changing the light emission mode of the light emitting decorations that are uniformly arranged in the entire game area 20.

In addition, as an example of changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting decorative body, in addition to changing only the light emitting mode of some light emitting decorative bodies, the duty ratio of the pulse wave transmitted to the light emitting decorative body is changed to It is conceivable to give a slight change to the light emission mode. Conventionally, since a small number of light-emitting decorative bodies have been arranged in the game area 20, when information is transmitted to a player using the light-emitting decorative bodies, it is necessary to clearly change them. For example, it is turned off in the normal gaming state and blinked in the advantageous gaming state. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since information can be transmitted using substantially the entire game area 20, a fuzzy change is given to the light emission mode of the light emitting decorative body (that is, by giving a slight change), It becomes possible to send information indirectly to the player.

With the above configuration, for example, when being controlled to the “external normal game state B”, the display form of the effect display device 115 is made to be very similar to that of the “external normal game state A”, while the light decorative body 520 is used. If a fuzzy change is given to the light emission mode, the player feels a unique sense of incongruity although the probability change state cannot be clearly grasped. In other words, the player feels that the pachinko machine 1 has a unique atmosphere and aura.
This makes it possible for the player to have a sensory expectation of “may be probable” although it is not explicit.

In this embodiment, the outer peripheral board of the sub-control device has the light emitting mode (light emission color, light emission frequency, light emission intensity, etc.) of the light emitting decorative body in the external normal gaming state (external normal gaming state). A light emission drive means (LED drive circuit or the like) that makes the difference between A or B) and the above-described external advantageous game state is provided. As a result, even if the merit due to the transition to the external advantageous gaming state is small (the operation frequency of the pair of movable pieces 606 is low), the current display without viewing the display surface of the effect display device 115 The game state can be easily recognized. This makes it possible to feel the merit in the external advantageous gaming state with a higher probability in combination with the display mode of image symbols and game specifications appearing on the effect display device 115 described later. In this embodiment, the opening 514 of the back box 514 is used.
The disk-like accessory 590 provided in the vicinity of the upper wall in a is lit in yellow when in the external normal gaming state, while being lit in red when in the external advantageous normal gaming state. .

[Relationship between outer frame, main frame and game effect unit]
Next, the positional relationship when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the game effect unit 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. 61 is a plan sectional view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 62 is a plan sectional view of the pachinko machine, in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame, and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame.

Of the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10
The lower frame plate 11 is made of wood having a thickness of 19 mm. On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are thin-walled members made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate. In this embodiment,
The side frame plates 12 and 13 have a thickness of 3 mm. Further, as described above, ribs are formed on the inner side of the rear portion of the side frame plates 12 and 13 so that the thickness h2 (see FIG. 10C) of the rear portion is increased. That is, the side frame plates 12 and 13 include vertically long outer wall portions 12a and 13a (a portion having a thickness of 3 mm), and thickness portions 12b and 13b formed with ribs directed toward the inner side of the rear portions of the side frame plates 12 and 13, respectively. (The outer wall 13a and the thickness 13b of the open side frame 13 are shown in FIG. 7). The thickness portions 12b and 13b are formed on the side frame 1
The plane cross section is formed in a substantially U shape so as to have a space portion 12G opened behind the second and thirteenth.

The outer wall portions 12a and 13a are substantially flat plate members, and the thickness portions 12b and 13b are erected inwardly from the rear end portions of the outer wall portions 12a and 13a. Thereby, the thickness of the left-right direction in the front-end part of the side frame boards 12 and 13 becomes the thickness of the outer wall parts 12a and 13a, and there is no structure which increases this thickness elsewhere. In addition, inside the outer wall portions 12a and 13a,
Spaces 12A and 13A in the outer frame having the rib width are formed. Therefore, a part of the main body frame 3 (more specifically, the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 29 is formed in the outer frame inner space 12A.
1) can be accommodated, and the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291 can be brought closer to the outer frame 2. As a result, the width in the left-right direction between the peripheral wall 290-293 on the shaft support side and the peripheral wall 290-293 on the open side can be widened to the limit, and the left-right width of the game area 20 can be increased. Moreover, by making the side frame plates 12 and 13 thin,
The effect is remarkable. In this way, while the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made thin by reducing the thickness, not only can the strength equal to or higher than that of conventional wood be maintained, but also the game area 20 can be enlarged. Can also be achieved. The “outer frame spaces 12A, 13A” correspond to the “vertical frame spaces” of the present invention.

Furthermore, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 of the locking device 60 described above in the state where the main body frame 3 is confined to the outer frame 2 are also provided in the outer frame inner space 13A. Be contained. As a result, the horizontal width of the game panel 409 (left and right width when viewed from the player) is
Almost, the thickness of the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 (more specifically, the thickness of the outer wall portion) is subtracted from the width of the entire pachinko machine 1. As a result, a sufficient width of the game area 20 can be secured. When the main body frame 3 is confined to the outer frame 2, the second peripheral wall 291 of the main body frame 3 is close to the open side thick portion 13 b of the side frame plate 13. It is difficult to insert a finger or the like from between b and the second peripheral wall 291). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress injustice such as operating the door frame sliding rod 971 or the body frame sliding rod 984 from behind the outer frame 2.

The main body frame 3 is formed with peripheral wall 290 to 293 along the inner peripheral surface of the outer frame 2. That is, the main body frame 3 maintains the width of the left and right widths when viewed from the front, while maintaining the circumferential wall 290-2.
93 is provided along the surface of the inner peripheral wall of the outer frame 2. Specifically, the inner side wall surface of the pivot side frame 12 and the outer side surface of the first peripheral wall 290 on the pivot side are closely adjacent to each other and formed on the side frame plate 12 on the pivot side. A first peripheral wall 290 is extended to the ribs. In addition, the open side frame plate 13 and the open side first peripheral wall 290 are formed on the open side frame plate 13 so that the outer side surfaces of the open side frame plate 290 are close to each other with the thin locking device 60 (details will be described later) interposed therebetween. 1st to the ribs that are
A peripheral wall 290 is extended. In this way, the first peripheral wall 290 is closest to the outer frame 2 on both the pivot support side and the open side. Accordingly, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the shaft support side
And the width in the left-right direction between the opening-side peripheral wall 290 to 293 can be maximized. Note that almost no openings are formed in the peripheral walls 290 to 293.

Further, on the pivot support side, the main body frame 3 is bent at a substantially right angle to the inside of about 18 mm immediately before the rib formed on the side frame plate 13 on the open side, and the second peripheral wall 291 avoids this rib. Is extended substantially in parallel with the first peripheral wall 290 toward the rear.

The third peripheral wall 292 is substantially parallel to the second peripheral wall 291 from the rear end of the second peripheral wall 291 (the boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292) to the rear. Is extended. Note that the third peripheral wall 292 is slightly (about 1 mm) inside the second peripheral wall 291. In other words, on the shaft support side, a fine step having a wall thickness is formed between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292.

Furthermore, from the rear end portion (boundary portion between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293) of the third peripheral wall 292 toward the rear, the fourth peripheral wall 293 is substantially parallel to the third peripheral wall 292. Is extended. The fourth peripheral wall 293 is slightly (about 1 mm) inside the third peripheral wall 292. That is, on the shaft support side, a fine step having a thickness of about 3 mm is formed between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293.

In addition, since the thickness of the level | step difference between the 2nd surrounding wall 291 and the 3rd surrounding wall 292 and between the 3rd surrounding wall 292 and the 4th surrounding wall 293 is as thin as about thickness, the main body frame 3 is 2nd. From the front end portion of the peripheral wall 291 to the rear end portion of the fourth peripheral wall 293, it extends substantially linearly in a direction substantially orthogonal to the game panel 409. Moreover, although the second peripheral wall 291 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 are substantially straight, the strength of the main body frame 3 is increased by forming a fine step of about the thickness.

On the other hand, on the open side, the main body frame 3 is connected to the first peripheral wall 290 from the rear end of the first peripheral wall 290 (the boundary between the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291) toward the rear. A second peripheral wall 291 extends substantially in parallel. Note that the second peripheral wall 291 is slightly (about 5 mm) inside the first peripheral wall 290. That is, on the open side, the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291
A fine step of about the thickness is formed between the two.

Further, a third peripheral wall 292 extends from the rear end portion of the second peripheral wall 291 (the boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292) toward the rear inner side. The second peripheral wall 291
At the boundary between the first peripheral wall 292 and the third peripheral wall 292, a fine step having a thickness of about a thickness is formed. That is, this third
The peripheral wall 292 is rearward from the front end (boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292) toward the rear end (boundary between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293). It will be formed diagonally.

In addition, a fourth peripheral wall 293 extends from the rear end portion of the third peripheral wall 292 (the boundary between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293) toward the rear inner side. The third peripheral wall 292
And a fourth step wall 293 is formed with a fine step of about the thickness. That is, the fourth peripheral wall 293 on the open side is the tip (the boundary between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293).
To the rear end portion (boundary portion between the fourth peripheral wall 293 and the open-side rear wall 294).

In this way, the main body frame 3 is formed obliquely rearward from the front end portion of the third peripheral wall 292 toward the rear end portion of the fourth peripheral wall 293 without interfering with the side frame plate 13 on the open side. The body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 around the axis connecting the upper shaft support bracket 47 and the lower shaft support bracket 48 (see FIG. 2) (see FIG. 2). 62). In particular, in the present embodiment, when the axial center connecting the upper shaft support bracket 47 and the lower shaft support bracket 48 (see FIG. 2) is used as the rotation center, the open-side peripheral walls 290 to 293 have It is formed along a circular arc whose radius is the length from the center to a portion close to the inner end of the side frame plate 13 (specifically, the first peripheral wall).

In other words, the main body frame 3 has a plurality of peripheral walls 290 to 293 as strip-shaped plate portions whose longitudinal direction is the vertical direction, and is thicker so that the rear peripheral wall is arranged on the inner side. A slight level difference is formed. That is, the second peripheral wall 291 is located inside the first peripheral wall 290,
The third peripheral wall 292 is on the inner side of the second peripheral wall 291 and the fourth peripheral wall 293 is the third peripheral wall 29.
A very slight stepped portion is formed on the inner side of 2 so as to be disposed respectively. As a result, the strength of the main body frame 3 can be increased, and the opening-side peripheral wall 290 to 203 can be brought close to the inner end (inner side surface) of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2. While adopting the effect display device 115, the width of the game panel 409 (the width in the left-right direction as viewed from the player), that is, the width of the game area 20 can be sufficiently secured. Further, on the open side, the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293 are inclined obliquely inward toward the rear, so that the outer frame 2
On the other hand, the main body frame 3 can be opened smoothly without the main body frame 3 interfering with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is opened.

Of the peripheral walls 290 to 293, the surface close to the open side frame plate 13 (that is, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 extending rearward from the open side inner surface) is the “free end” of the present invention. It corresponds to the “side wall portion”. Moreover, the surface (namely, the peripheral wall 290-293 extended toward the back from the inner surface of a shaft support side) among the surrounding surface walls 290-293 close to the side frame board 12 by the side of a support is "" This corresponds to the “opening / closing axis side wall”. Further, the first peripheral wall 290, the second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 2 on the side close to the side frame plates 12 and 13 among the peripheral walls 290 to 293.
Each of 93 corresponds to a “strip-shaped plate portion” of the present invention.

Further, the game effect unit 4 is inserted into the main body frame 3 described above. More specifically, the front structural member 680 and the panel holder 540 that define and form the gaming area 20 include the first
It arrange | positions along the inner wall of the surrounding surface wall 290 without a clearance gap. The transparent game panel 409 is sandwiched between the front component member 680 and the panel holder 540.

In addition, the game effect unit 4 is inserted into the main body frame 3 so as to be accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30. In other words, the foremost part of the game effect unit 4 (the surface of the game panel 409) is located deeper than the foremost part of the main body frame 3 (the foremost surface of the first peripheral wall 290). The open-side rear wall 294 is formed at a substantially right angle from the rear end of the open-side third peripheral wall 292 toward the inside (left side in front view), and the upper rear wall 295 is the rear of the upper fourth peripheral wall 293. From the end to the inside (
(The lower side of the front view) is formed at a substantially right angle, and the shaft support side rear wall 296 is formed on the shaft support side third peripheral wall 29.
2 is formed at a substantially right angle from the rear end portion toward the inside (right side in front view). Accordingly, the game effect unit 4 is closed in the depth direction by the peripheral wall 290 to 293 of the outer frame 2. As a result, a foreign object is inserted from the side of the gaming panel 409 and the gaming panel 409 is inserted.
Start ports 600, 602, 604, general winning port 614 and opening / closing device 500 provided in
It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as operating a winning member such as a pachinko machine 1 having excellent security. In particular, since the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is not formed with an opening other than the lock locking hole 351, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 functions as a covering portion that covers the game effect unit 4 from the side. The cheating from the side with respect to the production unit 4 can be suppressed.

Behind the panel holder 540, a back unit 510 having a frame-like box-shaped back box 514 forming a space of a predetermined volume is disposed. An opening 514a is formed on the rear surface side of the back box 514, and the effect display device 115 is arranged so as to close the opening 514a. Behind the effect display device 115, a main control board box 25 that houses a main control board 710 (see FIG. 64) and a peripheral control board box 24 that houses a peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 65) are mounted.

Thus, the front structural member 680, the panel holder 540, the game panel 409, the back unit 510, the effect display device 115, the main control board box 25, and the peripheral control board box 24 are accommodated in the main body frame 3. That is, the front structural member 680, the panel holder 540, the game panel 409, the back unit 510, the effect display device 115, the main control board box 25 and the peripheral control board box 24 are mounted on the main body frame 3 as a box-like game box. Is done.

Here, in other words, the positional relationship among the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the game effect unit 4 is a state in which the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the game effect unit 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The side portions (outer side surfaces in the longitudinal direction) of the pivot support side and the open side game panel 409 are brought close to the inner ends (inner side surfaces) of the side frame plates 12 and 13 on the pivot support side and the open side, respectively. Is formed. In addition, for each of the pivot support side and the open side, a thin first peripheral wall 290 extends from the front toward the rear between the side portion of the game panel 409 and the inner ends of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is installed. Further, the upper side portion (outer side surface in the short side direction) of the game panel 409 is formed to be close to the inner end (inner side surface) of the upper frame plate 10, and the upper side portion and the upper frame plate of the game panel 409 are formed. A thin-walled first peripheral wall 290 extends from the front to the rear also between the inner ends of the tenth. Thereby, the game area 20 formed in the game panel 409 can be designed sufficiently large. In addition, the left limit, right limit, and upper limit of the accommodation space of the game effect unit 4 are easy to understand, and the design of the game effect unit 4 can be facilitated.

By the way, in the space formed by the back unit 510, a light-like decorative body 520 and a decorative board 521 are arranged. The light decorative body 520 is an electrical decoration member as described above, and projects light toward the front side of the game effect unit 4. The light decorative body 52
0 is a game area 2 around the effect display device 115 arranged in the approximate center of the back unit 510.
It is arranged so as to be scattered over substantially the whole area of zero.

On the other hand, the decorative plate 521 is a decorative member molded in a mesh shape, and includes a back unit 510.
In the space formed by the above, the entire area of the game area 20 is spirally arranged in the front-rear direction, and the light-like decorative body 520 is supported. The decorative plate 521 has a gloss plating on the surface and shines brightly by reflection of light. Accordingly, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that gives an image that emits beautiful light forward from substantially the entire back surface of the game area 20 without increasing the number of light emitting decorations arranged in the effect area 510G.

In addition, by making the decorative plate 521 glossy plating in this way, it is not always necessary to uniformly arrange the plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520 behind the game area 20, and a plurality of LEDs are collectively arranged. You may arrange | position an LED board only in the specific site | part with which the back surface of the game area | region 20 was biased. Even in such a case, since the external light source or the light source of the LED is reflected by the decoration plate 521, it is possible to shine the entire game area 20 from the rear toward the front. In addition, at this time, by increasing or decreasing the duty ratio of the LED, only a specific part is caused to emit light strongly (in this case, direct information transmission), or the entire area of the game area 20 is lighted gently. be able to. In this way, it is possible to switch between indirect information transmission and direct information transmission.

In the present embodiment, the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 621a are made of a transparent resin,
Many of the main components constituting the game effect unit 4 are light transmitting members. Furthermore, in the space formed by the back unit 510, effect devices such as a light-like decorative body 520 and a decorative board 521 are arranged. Accordingly, the game area 20 is not narrowed by the light decorative body 520 and the decorative plate 521, and a sufficient space for the game ball to flow down can be secured. In addition, since the main body frame 3 extends rearward while maintaining a wide state, a wide-area production space 510G (nets illustrated in FIGS. 61 to 63) for accommodating the production device is provided behind the game panel 409. A hanging portion) is formed, and it is possible to play a three-dimensional game with a wide and deep sense of reality. In particular, an electric lighting member such as a plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520 can give an impression that the entire game effect unit 4 is lit up in front view, and the decorative plate 521 is front and rear as viewed from the player. By arranging in a spiral manner in the direction, it is strongly emphasized that the depth of the game effect unit 4 (more specifically, the depth of the effect space 510G) is deep. In addition, this wide production space 510G is widely formed behind the game panel 409 (particularly, formed up to the back of the guide rail 482).

Also, the main body frame 3 has a housing part (game effect unit installation recess) formed so as to be surrounded by the peripheral surface walls 290 to 293 with almost no opening on the side surface from the first peripheral wall 290 to the fourth peripheral wall 293. 30). The main body frame 3 is integrally molded. Therefore,
There is no gap or the like that may occur when a plurality of plate members are screwed, and security is improved.
Further, a box-shaped game whose main components are the front component member 680, the panel holder 540, the game panel 409, the back unit 510, the effect display device 115, the main control board box 25 and the peripheral control board box 24. The production unit 4 can be accommodated as it is. Thereby, it is only necessary to design the game effect unit 4 in consideration of only the space secured by the peripheral walls 290 to 293, and it is not necessary to consider the balance with other components constituting the pachinko machine 1. The production unit 4 can be easily designed. In addition, game panel 4
09 is provided with winning members such as the start ports 600, 602, 604, the general winning port 614, and the opening / closing device 500, and the foreign members are inserted from the side of the game panel 409 to operate these winning members. The pachinko machine 1 with excellent security can be provided.

Further, the main body frame 3 has a peripheral wall 2 facing the side frame plates 12 and 13 among the peripheral walls 290 to 293.
90 to 293 (in this embodiment, the side wall of the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291)
It extends from the rear to the rear. In addition, the main body frame 3 is integrally molded, and the back cover 58 has a rear end surface of the main body frame 3 (open side rear wall 294, upper rear wall 295, shaft support side rear wall 296).
Is provided. As a result, unlike the conventional case, without worrying about interference between the hinge for opening and closing the back cover (corresponding to the back cover support cylinder portion 280 of the present embodiment) and the outer frame (more specifically, the side frame plate 13), A back cover 58 can be provided. Accordingly, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 can be made closer to the inner wall of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the width in the left-right direction between the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the pivot support side and the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the open side can be increased. can do.

Next, the flow of game balls flowing through the prize ball tank 50, the tank rail member 51, the ball path unit 52, and the ball payout device 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 63. FIG. FIG. 61 is as described above, and FIG. 63 is a side sectional view of the pachinko machine.

The prize ball tank 50 is disposed in front of the open side rear wall 294 and above the outer frame 2 (more specifically, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 extending from the upper side of the main body frame 3 toward the rear. Placed on the top surface). By the way, since the prize ball tank 50 receives the game balls circulated and supplied from the island facility, the position of the pachinko machine 1 is uniquely determined. That is, since the island facility cannot be remodeled unnecessarily, it is necessary to be able to receive a game ball supplied from the island facility even if any pachinko machine is installed on the island. However, the prize ball tank 50 of this embodiment includes a position (region) for receiving a game ball supplied from the island facility, and is disposed over a wide region extending from the upper surface of the peripheral wall 290 to 293. Thereby, even if the prize ball tank 50 is formed in a shallow dish shape, a large amount of game balls can be stored, so that the peripheral walls 290-29 extending from the upper side of the main body frame 3 toward the rear.
3 can be molded close to the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2, and as a result, the game effect unit 4
Can also be increased in the vertical direction (the height direction seen from the player). Therefore, the game area 20 can be enlarged both in the left-right direction and the up-down direction, and the effect space 510G provided behind the game panel 409 can be enlarged both in the left-right direction and the up-down direction. Thereby, the game area 2 expanded in both the left and right direction and the up and down direction.
Since 0 and the effect space 510G can be formed, it is possible to provide a game full of three-dimensional effect and profound feeling.

The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 50 flow to the tank rail member 51 by a gravitational action. The tank rail member 51 is a double rail, and game balls are alternately sent from the rails to the ball path unit 52 one by one by the order supply device 51a. The tank rail member 51 is disposed along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294.

The ball path unit 52 is a single rail, and is meandered in the width direction (left and right direction as viewed from the player) so that the game ball flowing down by its own weight meanders and flows down. Thereby, the ball pressure more than necessary is not applied to the game ball flowing down in the tank rail member 51. The game balls flowing through the ball passage unit 52 are sent to the ball dispensing device 53 one by one. The ball passage unit 52 is disposed along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294.
Further, by making the ball passage unit 52 a single rail, the thickness of the ball passage unit 52 can be reduced in both the front-rear direction and the left-right direction as viewed from the front, and the ball passage unit 52 can be made compact. Can do. Furthermore, since the ball path unit 52 can meander in the left-right direction, a wide-area effect space 510G formed by the back unit 510 over the entire back side of the game panel 409 can be secured.

The ball payout device 53 is a device that pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 in accordance with winning, and has a payout motor 1465 for ball cutting. And along the rear surface of the open side rear wall 294, it is disposed below the ball passage unit 52. However, since the game ball paid out from the ball payout device 53 is supplied to the storage unit 361 by the action of gravity, the ball payout device 53 needs to be arranged at a position higher than the storage unit 361. In the present embodiment, the ball dispensing device 53 is disposed behind the open-side rear wall 294 and at a slightly higher position than the storage portion 361, and is disposed below as much as possible ( At least below the effect display device 115).

Here, as shown in FIG. 11, a ball payout passage 59 formed in the internal space is formed between the ball payout device 53 and the storage portion 361 so that the flow path of the game ball meanders. A ball outlet 1536 (see FIG. 21) which is an opening formed on the most downstream side of the game ball in the ball payout passage 59 is a prize ball communication rod 431 (see FIGS. 43 and 44) of the dish unit 300 described later. Furthermore, it communicates with the passage notch 478 (see FIG. 23). Then, the game balls paid out from the ball payout device 53 are paid out to the storage unit 361 through the ball payout passage 59 and the prize ball contact bar 431. The ball payout passage 59 can store game balls as much as possible from the rear of the open-side rear wall 294 to the storage unit 361. That is, the ball payout passage 59 cannot be visually recognized by the player, but can substantially store the game balls that have been paid out, so that there are more game balls than the number of game balls that can be stored in the storage portion 361 (the portion that can be viewed). Can actually be stored. In particular, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment can store the same or more gaming balls in the storage unit 361, although there is no conventional lower dish.

On the other hand, the ball payout passage 59 is connected to the above-described ball payout device 53 on the most upstream side of the game ball, and a foul ball inlet 1538 (see FIG. 21), which is an opening through which the game ball can flow, is formed. Yes. The foul ball entrance 1538 communicates with the communication port 473 on the back side of the game effect unit 4. Here, among the game balls that have been ejected by the launching device 57 and entered the game effect unit 4, the launch guide path 29 (which is formed in the gap between the outer rail unit 472 and the inner rail unit 462) without reaching the game area 20. The hit ball that has flowed back the injection path of the game ball is received by the foul port 489 and enters the communication port 473. Then, the game ball that has entered the communication port 473 is guided from the back side of the game effect unit 4 to the ball payout passage 59 via the foul ball entrance 1538, and in the same manner as described above, the ball payout passage 59 and the prize ball contact box 431. Storage section 3
61 is discharged. The ball dispensing device 53 is also provided with a ball removal connecting passage 415 that is a flow path for discharging the game balls with the ball removed from the bottom of the pachinko machine 1 into the island.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the tank rail member 51, the ball passage unit 52, and the ball dispensing device 53 are all disposed along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294 (that is, the above-mentioned). It will be arranged on the rear side of the game box). Thereby, it does not interfere with the display device control board box 119 which is arranged behind the above-mentioned wide-area effect space 510G and attached to the rear side of the effect display device 115. Therefore, it is possible to freely design the arrangement positions of the tank rail member 51, the ball passage unit 52, and the ball payout device 53 while securing the wide production space 510G and increasing the size of the production display device 115. In particular, the ball passage unit 52 needs to be folded back so as not to be subjected to a load higher than a predetermined ball pressure to release the ball pressure. However, the ball passage unit 52 in the present embodiment is a compact single rail, and is further meandering in the left-right direction along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294. It can be designed freely, and it is possible to avoid clogging due to abnormal ball pressure.

In addition, since the ball payout device 53 is arranged as low as possible, it is possible to secure a certain amount or more of the game balls present in the pachinko machine 1, and to suppress a ball shortage trouble. That is, if a certain amount or more of game balls existing in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be secured, for example, when a large amount of game balls are paid out, the game paid out more than the amount of game balls existing in the pachinko machine 1 There is concern that the amount of spheres will exceed. Since the amount of game balls existing in the pachinko machine 1 is determined by the amount of game balls existing between the prize ball tank 50 and the ball payout device 53, the ball payout device 53 is arranged as low as possible. Trouble caused by the shortage of balls can be suppressed.

If the ball payout device 53 is arranged below, the time from winning a game ball to paying out a game ball as a winning ball is shortened, and it is confirmed that the game ball as a prize ball has been paid out reliably. May not be able to confirm. In other words, if there is a certain time lag between winning a prize and paying out a prize ball and paying out a game ball as a winning ball, rather than a series of actions of winning and winning a ball being performed instantaneously It is easy to perform both checks. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the ball payout passage 59 is provided between the ball payout device 53 and the storage unit 361, and the ball path unit 52 is a single rail. By disposing 53 below, it is possible to provide a certain time lag between winning a prize and paying out a prize ball while suppressing a problem of running out of balls.

By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, the game board attached to the main body frame is a mountain shape in which only the center portion where the effect display device is provided in the lateral width direction protrudes backward in plan view (that is, when viewed from above). It was common to have a shape or pyramid shape. But,
The game effect unit 4 according to the present embodiment has a square shape having substantially the same protruding width in the rear direction in the lateral width direction in plan view (that is, when viewed from above). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54, the game effect unit 4 has a substantially box-shaped appearance as a whole, and such a characteristic shape is caused by the following points.

That is, in the game effect unit 4, the effect display device 115 is connected to the game panel 4 as described above.
A wide-area effect space 510G is formed in the gap between the effect display device 115 and the game panel 409. With this structure, the substantially central portion of the game effect unit 4 in front view largely protrudes behind the game panel 409 (in the depth direction).

Further, in the game effect unit 4, a feather-shaped decorative body 530 or a light-shaped decorative body 520 as a plurality of light emitting members each having an LED substrate behind is provided behind the game panel 409 around the effect display device 115 in a front view. It is arranged. Various substrates such as lighting / flashing control of the LED substrate behind the light emitting member behind these light emitting members (more specifically, on the back side of the decorative plate 521 inside the back box 514). Is provided.

In this way, the game effect unit 4 is in the outer peripheral portion with respect to the substantially central portion in the front view.
It has a plurality of light emitting members and various substrates related thereto. Therefore, the outer peripheral portion with respect to the substantially central portion of the game effect unit 4 also largely protrudes behind the game panel 409 (depth direction). With this structure, almost the entire area of the game effect unit 4 in front view largely protrudes behind the game panel 409 (in the depth direction), and forms a substantially box-shaped appearance as a whole. Then, the substantially box-shaped game effect unit 4 can be closely fitted into the effect space 510G having a space shape substantially equal to that of the game effect unit 4.

[Control structure of main board and peripheral board]
Next, a control configuration of the main board and the peripheral board of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG. FIG. 64 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the main board. FIG. 65 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the peripheral substrate. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate connection and direction of the signal.

The control of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is broadly divided into a group of main boards 700 (shown in FIG. 64) and a group of peripheral boards 800 (shown in FIG. 65). Main board 70
The group of 0 controls game operations (winning detection, random number acquisition and winning determination, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the peripheral board 800 group has stage operations (issue decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display and decoration). Body movement etc.).

As shown in FIG. 64, the main board 700 includes a main control board 710 and a payout control board 720. The main control board 710 includes a CPU 711 as a central processing unit, a ROM 712 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 713 as a readable / writable memory.

The CPU 711 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 712, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral board 800 or the payout control board 720.

The RAM 713 temporarily stores information such as various data and input signals generated in various processes executed by the main control board 710.

Note that the main board 700 is connected to the power supply board 395 so that operating power is supplied from the power supply board 395. Specifically, the payout control board 72 from the power supply board 395.
The power for operation is supplied to 0, and the power for operation is supplied to the main control board 710 via the payout control board 720. However, as described above, in this embodiment, a main drawer relay board 648 is provided between the payout control board 720 and the main control board 710, and the main control board 710 is connected to the main drawer relay board 648 (main drawer board 648). The power supply from the payout control board 720 is received via the connector 2000). Various information exchanges between the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720 are also performed by the main drawer relay board 648 (the main drawer connector 2).
000).

The input interface of the main control board 710 is connected via a panel relay terminal board 750.
A first starting port sensor 780 that detects a winning state at the first starting port 600, a second starting port sensor 782 that detects a winning state at the second starting port 602, and a winning state at the third starting port 604 are detected. A third start port sensor 784, a gate sensor 760 for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 612, and a general winning port sensor 762 for detecting that the game ball has won are connected to the general winning port 614.

Further, an open / close device count sensor 776 is connected to the input interface of the main control board 710 via an open / close device relay terminal plate 754 connected to the panel relay terminal plate 750.

  Detection signals from the sensors are input to the main control board 710.

On the other hand, a normal symbol / special symbol display substrate 768 is connected to an output interface of the panel relay terminal board 750 via a symbol limiting resistor substrate 766. Thereby, the main control board 71
0 can output drive signals to the normal symbol display 82, the first special symbol display 84, and the second special symbol display 86.

The output interface of the switchgear relay terminal board 754 has a normal electric accessory solenoid 7.
74 and an opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 778 are connected to each other, and a drive signal is output from the main control board 710 toward the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 774 and the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 778. Note that the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 774 drives a pair of movable pieces 606 provided above the third start port 604, and the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 778 is the opening / closing device 50.
0 (more specifically, the big prize opening / closing door 500b) is driven.

On the other hand, the payout control board 720 includes a CPU 722 as a central processing unit, a ROM 724 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 726 as a readable / writable memory.

Then, the payout control board 720 processes the command signal input from the main control board 710, and outputs a drive signal to the ball payout device 53 and the launching device 57 including the launching handle and the firing motor. As a result, the ball payout device 53 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the launch device 57 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal.

Also connected to the input interface of the payout control board 720 are an inner frame opening switch 736 for detecting the opening state of the front frame (not shown) of the main body frame 3 and a door opening switch 738 for detecting the opening state of the door frame 5. Has been.

Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720 via the respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main control board 710 transmits a prize ball command, in response to this An ACK signal is returned from the payout control board 720 to the main control board 710.

In addition, the payout control board 720 is also connected to a full tank switch 730 for detecting that the game balls stored in the dish 360 have become full. Please remove it from the office. "

An external terminal board 753 is connected to the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720. Various information such as the winning state at each of the start openings 600, 602, 604, the variation state of the normal symbol / special symbol, and the gaming state based on the lottery result are provided in the hall provided in the gaming facility via the external terminal board 753. Output to a computer or the like.

On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 800 includes a peripheral control substrate 810 and a display device control substrate 816 as shown in FIG. Note that communication in only one direction is performed between the output interface and the input interface between the main control board 710 and the peripheral control board 810. That is, even if a command is transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810, no command is transmitted from the peripheral control board 810 to the main control board 710. Further, the operating power supplied to the peripheral board 800 is supplied via the main control board 710.

The peripheral control board 810 also has electronic components such as a CPU 811, ROM 812, and RAM 813, and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components.

In addition, the peripheral control board 810 stores an RO that stores a sound source that is a base for effect sounds, musical effects, etc.
M819 and a sound source IC 818 that outputs effect sounds according to the contents of the effects and effects such as music based on the sound sources stored in the ROM 819 are provided.

Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 810 and the display device control board 816 with each input / output interface.

On the other hand, the display device control board 816 has a liquid crystal display (LCD) as an effect display device 115.
) Is connected. The display device control board 816 processes the command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 810 and outputs a drive signal to the effect display device 115. Note that the display device control board 816 includes a CPU 832, a RAM 834, a ROM 836, a VDP 838, and an image ROM 839.

The CPU 832 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 810 via the input / output interface and performs arithmetic processing based on the command to obtain the VDP 838.
Control.

The RAM 834 provides a work area for the CPU 832 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 836 holds a program for the CPU 832 (for display control).

A VDP (video display processor) 838 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 115. A register is provided in the VDP 838, and it is possible to hold the operation mode of the VDP 838, setting information of various display functions, and the like. Then, the CPU 832 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode in the effect display device 115 can be changed variously.

The image ROM 839 is a non-volatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display designs, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

As described above, the peripheral substrate 800 (the peripheral control substrate 810 and the display device control substrate 816)
This is a part that performs effect control for an image displayed on the effect display device 115, including a fluctuating display effect for a decorative design 1153, which will be described later.

The peripheral control board 810 includes a lamp driving board 850 and a frame decoration relay terminal board 240.
Is connected.

A panel decoration lamp 852 and a center decoration lamp 853 are connected to the output interface of the lamp driving board 850. Thereby, the lamp drive board 850 can switch the lighting state of each of these lamps. Further, the lamp driving substrate 8
The 50 input interface is connected to a discharge port detection sensor 854 that detects a game ball discharged from the rear side of the game panel 409 (that is, an out ball).

The frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 connected to the peripheral control board 810 is connected to speakers 144 and 341 connected to the door frame 5, operation buttons 327, a frame decoration lamp 842, and the like. The frame decoration relay terminal board 240 is connected to the peripheral control board 810 via the sub drawer relay board 649 described above. The peripheral control board 810 switches the effect mode output to the effect display device 115 based on the operation state of the operation button 327, and outputs a drive signal to the speakers 144, 341 and the frame decoration lamp 842.

In the configuration in which the article storage unit 1200 is mounted instead of the operation button unit 326, the frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 connected to the peripheral control board 810 is connected to the door frame 5 as shown in FIG. Speakers 144, 341, article storage unit 1200, frame decoration lamp 842, and the like are connected. As described above, the article accommodation unit 1200 includes the door driving mechanism 1204, the illumination LED 1205, the infrared distance measuring sensor 1206, and the like. Therefore, in this case, the peripheral control board 810 controls the drive of the motor 1212 of the door drive mechanism 1204 and controls the lighting LED 1205 to be turned on / off. Also, the peripheral control board 8
10 receives the signal from the infrared distance measuring sensor 1206, thereby receiving the article storage unit 12.
It is possible to determine whether or not an article is stored in the 00 placement unit 1202.

[Functional configuration of main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the main control board 710 and the peripheral board 800 constituting the main board 700 of the pachinko machine 1
A functional configuration of the peripheral control board 810 configuring the above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG.
7 is a functional block diagram schematically showing functional configurations of the main control board and the peripheral control board.

As shown in FIG. 67, the main control board 710 includes a gaming state control means 934, a first special symbol lottery means 900, a first special symbol display control means 702, a first special symbol hold display control means 930, First special symbol hold counter 903, second special symbol lottery means 910, second special symbol display control means 704, second special symbol hold display control means 932, second special symbol hold counter 913, hold order Storage means 940, random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure, processing area 5132, jackpot game execution means 715, opening / closing device operation processing means 714, opening / closing operation control means 938, normal symbol lottery means 920, normal symbol Display control means 716;
Normal symbol hold display control means 718, normal symbol hold means 923, and movable piece opening / closing control means 9
28 and command transmission means 946.

The gaming state control means 934 determines which gaming state the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is, and controls the gaming state based on the determined gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is an external game state in which the game state can be grasped from the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, and the player is more than the external normal game state (normal game state) and the external normal game state. The game state is controlled to any one of the external advantageous game states (chance game state) that is advantageous to the game.

The external normal game state is a game state in which a later-described opening extension function (so-called time-shortening function) is not activated, and is a game state in which the pair of movable pieces 606 are not controlled in a later-described promotion mode. That is,
As will be described later, the pair of movable pieces 606 open and close when triggered by a lottery process performed by the normal symbol lottery means 920, thereby increasing the probability of winning a game ball to the third start port 604. However, as the operation mode when the movable piece 606 operates, the first operation mode and the second operation mode (which is more advantageous to the player than the first operation mode)
Promotion mode). Among these, the movable piece 6 in the external normal gaming state.
The first operation mode is adopted as the operation mode when 06 operates. In addition, this 1st operation | movement aspect is an aspect in which the winning of a game ball to the said 3rd starting port 604 is hard to be promoted, for example, the aspect by which the 3rd starting port 604 is maintained in a closed state, or A mode in which the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened to the extent that they do not affect the winning of the game ball as compared to the case where the third start port 604 is maintained in the closed state (ie, even if the movable pieces 606 are opened and closed) This is a mode in which the winning frequency at the third start port 604 is substantially the same as when the closed state is maintained. “To the extent that it does not affect the winning of the game ball” is almost equivalent to the case where the winning frequency at the third start port 604 is maintained in the closed state even if the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened and closed. That is, even if the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened, it means that the winning of the game ball to the third starting port 604 is hardly promoted.

On the other hand, the external advantageous game state is a game state in which an opening extension function to be described later operates, and a game in which the second operation mode (promotion mode) is adopted as an operation mode when the pair of movable pieces 606 operate. State. Here, the “promotion mode” is a mode in which winning of the game ball to the third starting port 604 is promoted, and for example, a mode in which a longer time is adopted as the opening time of the pair of movable pieces 606. It is. That is, the “promotion mode” means that the winning probability in the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 920 is increased, the lottery time by the normal symbol lottery means 920 is shortened (the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened), and the opening time of the pair of movable pieces 606. Up is equivalent. However,
Of these three modes, only one or two may be used as a promotion mode, or all three may be used as a promotion mode.

In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 includes an internally controlled gaming state that is difficult to grasp from the appearance. In the present embodiment, a gaming state in which a later-described probability changing function (so-called probability variation function) operates and a gaming state in which the probability changing function does not operate correspond to it.

When the probability variation function is not activated, the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 performs the lottery process with a predetermined low probability (first probability) of winning the jackpot. On the other hand, when the probability changing function is activated, the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 causes the probability of winning the jackpot to be at least twice as high as the first probability (in this embodiment, the first symbol lottery means 910). The lottery process is performed with a second probability (winning probability B) that is 10 times the probability of 1 (winning probability A). In this way, when the probability variation function is activated, the probability of winning the jackpot is at least double that when the probability variation function is not activated when the probability variation function is not activated when the probability variation function is activated. This is because it is possible to win a big hit at a stage where the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is small compared to, in order to prevent a decrease in interest.

In this embodiment, a gaming state in which neither the opening extension function nor the probability changing function is operated is referred to as “external normal gaming state A”, and a gaming state in which the opening extension function is not operated but the probability changing function is operated is referred to as “external normal gaming state B”. The game state in which the release extension function operates but the probability change function does not operate is referred to as “external advantageous game state A”, and the game state in which both the release extension function and the probability change function operate is referred to as “external advantage game state B”. Called. The above-mentioned “external normal gaming state” means to include both “external normal gaming state A” and “external normal gaming state B”
The above-mentioned “external advantageous gaming state” includes “external advantageous gaming state A” and “external advantageous gaming state B”.
It means to include both.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player cannot distinguish between the external normal gaming state A and the external normal gaming state B. Similarly, the external advantageous gaming state A and the external advantageous gaming state B Can not be distinguished. Therefore, the player determines that the game state is advantageous to him if the game is in the external advantageous game state, and determines that the game state is not advantageous to him in the normal normal game state.

In addition, a change from any gaming state to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player is performed only when the condition device is activated. Of the four game states (external normal game state A, external normal game state B, external advantageous game state A, and external advantageous game state B), the most advantageous game state for the player is the external advantageous game state B. Yes, the most disadvantageous game state for the player is the external normal game state A. Therefore, a change from the external normal game state A to another game state (external normal game state B, external advantageous game state A and external advantageous game state B), a change from the external advantageous game state A to the external advantageous game state B, etc. Is not performed unless the condition device is activated.

The first special symbol lottery means 900, when a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780 based on the winning of the first start port 600, out of the random numbers for the validity determination generated in the random number range of 0 to 652. One random number is acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquiring means 902. The acquired random number is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure, and the number of the acquired random number is held to a first predetermined number (for example, 4) by the first special symbol hold counter 903. When the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 903 is released, random numbers stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure are transferred to the processing area 5132 in the order of acquisition.
The special symbol success / failure determination means 904 determines whether or not a big win is won or whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

In the case of the external special game state A or the external advantageous game state A, the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 determines whether or not the randomness value has been acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition unit 902. It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the figure determination table 906. In this embodiment, since 19 and 457 are jackpot random numbers (random numbers determined to be jackpot winning), first, the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902
It is determined whether or not the random number value obtained by the above is a jackpot random number. If it is a jackpot random number, the jackpot game executing means 715 executes the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the case of the external normal gaming state B or the external advantageous gaming state B, the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 is performed by using the random number value acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition unit 902 and the first random symbol value. It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the probability variation special figure determination table 908. In this embodiment, 19, 41, 71, 97, 101,
137, 167, 181, 191, 199, 233, 263, 277, 331, 353,
Since 373, 419, 457, 499, and 509 are jackpot random numbers, first, it is determined whether or not the random number values acquired by the first special symbol win / fail determination random number acquisition means 902 are these jackpot random numbers. If there is, the jackpot game is executed by the jackpot game execution means 715.

When the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 782 or the third start port sensor 784 based on the winning at the second start port 602 or the third start port 604, the second special symbol lottery means 910 In the same way as when winning the first starting port 600, one random number for the special symbol success / failure determination random number generated with a random number range of 0 to 652 is used as the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 9.
12 to obtain. The acquired random number is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure, and the number of the acquired random number is held up to a second predetermined number (for example, 4) by the second special symbol hold counter 913. Then, when the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 913 is released, the random numbers stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not it is determined are transferred to the processing area 5132 in the order of acquisition, and is determined by the second special symbol determination unit 914. It is determined whether or not the jackpot is won or whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

In the case of the external special gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state A, whether the second special symbol success / failure determination unit 914 determines whether or not the random number value acquired by the second special symbol appropriateness determination random number acquisition unit 912 and the second normal special event determination unit 914 It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the figure determination table 907. Note that the jackpot random number stored in the second normal special figure determination table 907 is the same as the jackpot random number stored in the first normal special figure determination table 906.

On the other hand, in the case of the external normal gaming state B or the external advantageous gaming state B, the determination of success / failure by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is made by using the random number value acquired by the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 912 and the second random symbol value. It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the probability variation special figure determination table 909. The jackpot random number stored in the second probability variation special figure determination table 909 is the same as the jackpot random number stored in the first probability variation special figure determination table 908.

When a jackpot game is being executed, even if a game ball wins the first starting port 600, the winning / nothing determination is not performed, and the acquired winning / nothing determination random number is the winning / nothing determination random number storage area 5131.
And the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is counted up. The first normal special figure determination table 906, the second normal special figure determination table 907, the first probability variation special figure determination table 908, and the second probability variation special figure determination table 909 are all ROM7.
12 (see FIG. 64).

Thus, different tables are used for the hit determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 and the hit determination by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914. In this way, by varying the lottery process depending on which start port among the start ports 600, 602, and 604 is awarded, it is possible to increase variations in game content and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure stores a lottery order for each special symbol lottery means (that is, the first
Although the lottery order by the special symbol lottery means 900 and the lottery order by the second special symbol lottery means 910 are respectively stored, the lottery order obtained by merging the two (ie, each start port sensor 7)
The order in which game balls are detected by 80, 782, 784) is not stored. Order in which the game balls are detected by the start port sensors 780, 782, 784 (that is, the order in which random numbers are acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 or the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 912) Is stored by the hold order storage means 940. Accordingly, the first special symbol lottery means 900 (specifically, the first special symbol determination unit 904) or the second special symbol lottery means 910 (specifically, the second special symbol lottery means 904) based on the order stored by the holding order storage means 940. The special symbol success / failure determination means 914) determines whether or not the acquired random numbers are correct (one random number is determined).

By the way, when the result of the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 or the second special symbol appropriateness determination unit 914 is determined to be a big hit, a symbol random number acquisition unit (not shown)
One random number is acquired from among the design random numbers generated with a random number range of 0 to 99. And if this acquired random number value is 39-68, it will be determined as 1st long open big hit, if it is 76-99, it will be determined as 2nd long open big hit, and if it is 3-38, 3rd long open will be determined. It is determined to be a big hit, 0
If it is -2, it will be determined as the 1st short opening jackpot, and if it is 69-75, it will be determined as the 2nd short opening jackpot. When the determined jackpot type is the first long open jackpot, the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot, an effect image indicating that the jackpot is won by the long open jackpot game execution means 715a is displayed. A long open jackpot (a jackpot game that prompts the player to pay out a certain amount of game balls) is executed to open and close the opening / closing device 500 under the situation displayed on the display surface of the effect display device (effect image display device) 115. Is done. On the other hand, the first
In the case of the short opening big hit or the second short opening big hit, the short opening big hit game execution means 715b does not display an effect image indicating that the big win is won on the display surface of the effect display device (effect image display device) 115. Under the circumstances, a short open jackpot (a jackpot game that does not prompt the player to pay out a certain amount of game balls) is performed to open and close the opening / closing device 500.

On the other hand, if the random numbers acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 and the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 912 are not big hit random numbers, whether the specific condition is satisfied or not is determined. 1 special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or second special symbol success / failure determination means 91
4 is determined. Specifically, in the first normal special figure determination table 906 and the first probability variation special figure determination table 908, 1, 3, 31, 211 among the random numbers for determination of success / failure are stored as specific condition establishment random numbers. On the other hand, in the second normal special figure determination table 907 and the second certain probability variation special figure determination table 909, only three of the random numbers for determination of validity are stored as specific condition establishment random numbers. When it is determined that the acquired random number is a random number that satisfies these specific conditions, an opening / closing device operation process in which the opening / closing device 500 is opened / closed by the opening / closing device operation processing means 714 to approximate the opening / closing operation of the short open big hit is performed. Executed.

Thus, in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is always constant regardless of whether or not the probability changing function is operating. Similarly, in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is always constant regardless of whether or not the probability changing function is activated. However, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900 is different from the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (first special symbol lottery). Means 900
The probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the above is higher than the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910).

By the way, if it is an external advantageous game state in which the open extension function is activated, the pair of movable pieces 60
In performing the opening / closing operation of No. 6, for example, a longer time is adopted as the opening time (promotion mode), so that the lottery frequency by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is increased (the lottery chance of the special symbol is increased). In other words, the chance of winning the jackpot increases as the special symbol lottery opportunities increase compared to the case of the external normal gaming state. Therefore, by making the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910 relatively lower than the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the player The frequency with which a specific condition with a small profit given to is satisfied is reduced. Thereby, the troublesomeness resulting from frequent establishment of specific conditions can be reduced, and the fall of interest can be suppressed.

On the other hand, if the open extension function does not operate, for example, in the external normal gaming state A, the pair of movable pieces 6
In performing the opening / closing operation of 06, for example, since a longer time is not adopted as the opening time, there are fewer special symbol lottery opportunities as compared with the gaming state in which the opening extension function is activated. Here, since the opening / closing device operating process and the second short open jackpot game are very similar to each other, it is expected that the probability change function may be activated by increasing the frequency with which the specific condition is satisfied. The frequency to give to becomes high, and the fall of interest can be suppressed.

In this way, by making the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910 relatively lower than the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900, In any gaming state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

As described above, whether the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the second special symbol lottery means 910 are successful is determined by the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 9.
13 is performed based on the fact that the hold cancellation condition is established. The release condition in the present embodiment is the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but is not limited thereto.
For example, when a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained is determined, the determination result may be stored until the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

The determination result by the first special symbol presence / absence determination means 904 or the second special symbol presence / absence determination means 914 is determined by the first special symbol display control means 702 or the second special symbol display control means 704 by the first special symbol display 84 or the first special symbol display 84. 2 is displayed on the special symbol display 86. However, since the display is displayed by lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs, it is difficult for the player to grasp the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914. .

The number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913 is set by the first special symbol hold display control means 930 or the second special symbol hold display control means 932, respectively. Indicator 88 or second special symbol hold indicator 9
0 is displayed.

The jackpot game execution means 715 and the opening / closing device operation processing means 714 execute the jackpot game or the opening / closing device operation processing based on the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914. Here, the jackpot game is a game accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the opening / closing device operation processing is a game not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device.

The condition device includes first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or second special symbol success / failure determination means 914.
It is activated only when the result of the determination is a jackpot, and a change (transition) from one gaming state to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the one gaming state is when the condition device is activated Only possible. For example, a change (transition) from the external normal gaming state A to the external normal gaming state B is a condition that the condition device operates. Accordingly, the gaming state does not change when the opening / closing device operating process is executed. For example, when the opening / closing device operating process is executed in the external normal gaming state A, the external normal gaming state A continues, Even if the opening / closing device operation process is executed in the normal game state B, the external normal game state B continues.

Note that a change (transition) from one gaming state to a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the one gaming state is not only the operation of the condition device, but also a gaming state changing lottery (from one gaming state to the one gaming state). In the case of winning a lottery for whether or not to change to a game state that is unfavorable by the player rather than the game state of the game, or when a special symbol change is performed a certain number of times is there. Therefore, for example, a change (transition) from the external normal gaming state B to the external normal gaming state A, a change (transition) from the external advantageous gaming state B to the external advantageous gaming state A, etc. are cases where the condition device does not operate. May also be performed when the other conditions described above are satisfied.

If the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is a big hit, the jackpot game execution means 715
The opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 778 is operated by 38 to open / close the opening / closing device 500, and the jackpot game is executed.

More specifically, as the type of jackpot game, the long opening jackpot game in which the maximum opening time of the switching device 500 (for example, 30 sec) is relatively long and the maximum opening time of the switching device 500 (for example, 0.6 sec) are relative. There is a short short-open big hit game. If the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit, the big hit game execution means The long open jackpot game execution means 715a as 715 executes the long open jackpot game. On the other hand, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is the first short open big hit or the second short open big hit, the short as the big hit game execution means 715 The open big hit game execution means 715b executes the short open big hit game.

Here, the long-open big hit game is the opening / closing operation control means 93 for the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500.
It is a game played 15 rounds by 8. The short open big hit game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 is performed two rounds by the opening / closing operation control means 938. When a game ball wins the open / close device 500, the open / close device count sensor 776 counts the number of winning balls. Then, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls as prize balls are paid out from the ball payout device 53 to the tray by the payout control board 720.

The types of jackpot games are not limited to long-open jackpots and short-open jackpots, and the maximum opening time of the opening / closing device 500 is substantially the same (for example, 30 seconds), but the maximum number of times of opening is relatively There may be a large jackpot (for example, 15 rounds) and a jackpot (for example, two rounds) with a relatively small maximum number of times of opening. Further, although the maximum number of times of opening is substantially the same (for example, 15 rounds), the maximum opening time of the switching device 500 is relatively long (for example, 30 sec) and the maximum opening time of the switching device 500 is relatively short (for example, 15 rounds). For example 0.3
sec).

Here, “round” is an opening / closing operation unit of the opening / closing device 500 at the time of the big hit game. After the opening / closing device 500 is opened, the closing condition is established from the opened state, and the opening / closing device 5.
One round is until 00 closes. The closing condition is that a predetermined time elapses after the opening / closing device 500 is opened or that the maximum number of game balls wins the opening / closing device 500. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing device 500 is closed.

By the way, in this embodiment, the closing conditions at the time of a long open big hit game and the closing conditions at the time of a short open game are different. The closing condition in the long open jackpot game is the opening / closing device 5
30 seconds have elapsed since 00 opened, or 9 game balls have won. On the other hand, the closing condition in the short-open big hit game is 0 after the opening / closing device 500 is opened.
. 6 seconds have elapsed, or 3 game balls have won.

The closing conditions of the opening / closing device 500 are not limited to these. However, in the long open big hit game, the closing condition is set so that the maximum number of winning game balls can be won by the opening / closing device 500 before the opening / closing device 500 is opened until a predetermined time elapses. It is preferable. On the other hand, at the time of a short-open big hit game, the opening / closing device 500 barely has one or two game balls to be able to win the opening / closing device 500 to some extent while the opening / closing device 500 is open.
It is preferable that a closing condition is set.

In this way, the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914.
Even if the result of the determination is a jackpot, the profit given to the player differs greatly depending on whether the jackpot type is a long-open jackpot or a short-open jackpot. That is, when the winning jackpot type is the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit, a large amount of game balls can win the opening / closing device 500. On the other hand, when the winning jackpot type is the first short-open jackpot or the second short-open jackpot, the game device can barely win one or two game balls. Thereby, the profit given to the player is greatly different between the case where the long open jackpot game is executed and the case where the short open jackpot game is executed.

When the opening / closing device operation processing means 714 determines that the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is out and the specific condition is satisfied, An opening / closing device operating process for opening / closing the opening / closing device 500 is performed in a manner very similar to the short-open big hit game. The “similarity (approximate) mode” includes both the mode that is exactly the same as the short open jackpot game and the mode that is very similar to the short open jackpot game.

It should be noted that the “very similar mode” is similar to the degree that the player cannot determine whether the short open big hit game or the open / close device operation process has been performed simply by visually recognizing the open mode of the open / close device 500. It means that it is an aspect. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determining unit 904 or the second special symbol appropriateness determining unit 914 is out of place and the specific condition is satisfied, the opening / closing is performed. 0.6 after device 500 opens
The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 is performed twice with the closing condition of elapse of sec or that three game balls win a prize (the opening / closing operation unit of the opening / closing device 500 in the big hit game is “round”) On the other hand, the opening / closing operation unit of the opening / closing device 500 in the opening / closing device operation processing is referred to as “times”).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode displayed on the effect display device 115 and the speaker 1
The sound effects and effect sounds output from 44 and 341 are the same as when the opening / closing device operation processing is completed and
They are very similar to each other when the short open jackpot game based on the short open jackpot ends. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not include a state notification unit such as a state notification lamp for notifying which gaming state the internal gaming state is (a general gaming machine has a state notification lamp). Therefore, the internal game state (whether or not the probability changing function is activated) is not notified at all (in fact, the player may not even know the existence of the external normal game state B). Thereby, even if the player notices that the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 has been performed, the player grasps whether the opening / closing device 500 is based on the second short opening jackpot or on the establishment of a specific condition. (In a general gaming machine in which the gaming state is notified, the probability changing function is activated when the short open big hit game is executed, and it is notified that the probability changing function is activated). In addition, since the opening extension function operates after the short opening jackpot game based on the first short opening jackpot is completed, it can be understood that the game was the first short opening jackpot game. Further, “very similar” means not only the same thing but also a very similar thing.

In this way, in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910, there is a possibility that a specific condition may be satisfied even if the big win is not won, and the short open big hit game Since the opening / closing device operating process is very similar to each other, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in the normal gaming state.

In addition, the jackpot determination by the first special symbol determination unit 904 or the second special symbol determination unit 914 is performed separately from the determination of establishment of the specific condition. Here, assuming that the determination of establishment of the specific condition is performed prior to the determination of whether or not the jackpot is successful, the winning determination of the jackpot is not performed when the specific condition is satisfied. That is, the determination of whether or not the specific condition is satisfied is based on the premise that the jackpot determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 904 or the second special symbol determination unit 914 is out of order, and therefore the determination of whether or not the jackpot is determined If the determination of establishment of the specific condition is made first, the opportunity to win a jackpot will be lost when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 is performed by determining whether or not the jackpot is won prior to the determination of the establishment of the specific condition.
In the lottery of all the special symbols performed by, determination on whether or not to win the jackpot will be made, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, when the establishment of the specific condition is not treated as a failure (that is, treated as a winning type), and the jackpot determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is a win, It is possible to make the winning and the establishment of the specific condition overlap, but in this case, it is necessary to decide which one is to be given priority, which is complicated in terms of control. Therefore, only when the jackpot is not won as in this embodiment (
Control complexity can be avoided by determining whether a specific condition is satisfied (only in the case of a loss). Furthermore, two lottery opportunities for determining whether or not the jackpot is successful and determining whether or not the specific condition is satisfied can be given, and the player can be given a feeling of feeling, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the probability that the specific condition will be met is set higher than the probability of winning the jackpot,
Moreover, it is impossible to grasp whether the opening / closing device operation processing is being executed or whether the short open big hit game is being executed. Therefore, when the player is in the external normal gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state A, the expectation that the player may win a short open jackpot that may cause the probability variation function to operate each time a specific condition is satisfied. It can have a feeling and can suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, by giving the player a sense of expectation that is changed from the external normal gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state A to the external normal gaming state B or the external advantageous gaming state B, the player cannot stop stopping the game. As a result, the operation rate of the pachinko machine is improved, and a profit is also provided for the game shop.

On the other hand, even if the specific condition is satisfied or the short open jackpot is won in the external normal game state B or the external advantageous game state B, the external normal game state B or the external advantageous game state B is continued (that is, The operation of the probability variation function continues), so that the player can feel secure. That is, in the external normal gaming state B or the external advantageous gaming state B, the opening / closing device 500
Even if the opening / closing operation is performed twice (or two rounds), since it is not changed to the external normal gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state A, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

It should be noted that the same special table need not be used as the table used for the determination of the success / failure by the first special symbol determination unit 904 and the second special symbol determination unit 914. The first special symbol determination unit 904 and the second special symbol determination unit 904 are not necessarily used. Different tables may be used for each of the determination units 914. In this case, the winning probability in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 900 may be different from the winning probability in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 910. Furthermore, a mode (for example, given to a player) is different between the jackpot game mode when winning in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the jackpot game mode when winning in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 910. It is also possible to adopt a mode in which profits differ.

  Next, lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 920 will be described.

The normal symbol lottery means 920 is configured such that the game ball passes through the passage gate 612 and the gate sensor 760.
, One random number for normal symbol success / failure determination random numbers generated with a random number range of 0 to 250 is acquired by the normal symbol appropriateness determination random number acquisition means 922. The acquired random number is stored in the storage area for storing the acquired random number and the normal symbol holding means 923 having a normal symbol holding counter 923 that stores the number of the acquired random numbers as a counter value.
For example, 4) are reserved. When the normal symbol holding means 923 cancels the hold, the normal symbol appropriateness determination means 924 determines whether or not the normal symbol is determined.

If the determination of success / failure by the normal symbol success / failure determination unit 924 is an external normal gaming state, the random number value acquired by the random number acquisition unit 922 for determination of normal symbol success / failure determination and the normal normal symbol determination table 926
Control is performed by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the above. In this embodiment, since 246 to 250 are hit random numbers, it is determined whether or not the random number values acquired by the normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 922 are those hit random numbers. The opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is executed by the means 928. At this time, the variation time of the normal symbol is 4000 msec, and the pair of movable pieces 606 performs an opening / closing operation once for an opening time of 180 ms (normal mode).

On the other hand, in the case of an external advantageous game state, the success / failure determination by the normal symbol success / failure determination unit 924 is performed based on the random number value acquired by the normal symbol determination / rejection determination random number acquisition unit 922 and the open extended general symbol determination table 927. As described above, the game state control means 934 controls the game.
In the present embodiment, since 1 to 250 is a random number, a random number acquisition unit 922 for determining whether or not a normal symbol is appropriate.
It is determined whether or not the random number value obtained by the above is a winning random number. If the random number is a winning random number, the movable piece opening / closing control means 928 performs the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606. At this time, the variation time of the normal symbol is 1024 msec, and the pair of movable pieces 606 are
An opening / closing operation with an opening time of 1300 msec is executed three times and an opening / closing operation with an opening time of 856 msec is executed twice (promotion mode).

As described above, when the game is in the external advantageous game state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the third start port 604 is dramatically improved as compared to the case of the external normal game state. Therefore, in the case of an external advantageous game state, the number of special symbol lottery opportunities increases dramatically, and a sense of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed increases, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Here, the normal map determination table 926 and the open extended map determination table 927 are both stored in the ROM 712 (see FIG. 64).

In the present embodiment, whether or not the normal symbol is determined by the normal symbol determination unit 924 is determined to be a win even in the external normal gaming state, and the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 can be executed. Thus, the hit probability may be zero when in the external normal gaming state. That is, the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 may be performed only in the external advantageous gaming state.

The determination result by the normal symbol appropriateness determination unit 924 is displayed on the normal symbol display 82 by the normal symbol display control unit 716. Also, the number of holds by the normal symbol holding means 923 is displayed on the normal symbol hold display 92 by the normal symbol hold display control means 718.

The movable piece opening / closing control means 928 activates the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 774 to operate the pair of movable pieces 60 when the lottery result determined by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 924 is winning.
6 is opened and closed. However, as described above, the opening / closing operation mode of the pair of movable pieces 606 is different between the case of the external advantageous gaming state and the case of the external normal gaming state (in the case of the external advantageous gaming state, the third start The winning of the game ball to the mouth 604 is made easier than in the case of the external normal game state).

In the present embodiment, when the pair of movable pieces 606 are closed, the third start port 604 is used.
The game ball cannot be won in the first start port 600 and the second start as the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened and closed. It becomes easier than winning a game ball to the mouth 602. However, when the pair of movable pieces 606 are closed,
The game ball winning to the third starting port 604 is not limited to the mode in which the winning of the gaming ball to the third starting port 604 is impossible, and the winning of the gaming ball to the third starting port 600 or the second starting port 602 is applied to the gaming ball. It may be more difficult than winning.

The command transmission unit 946 transmits the lottery result by the first special symbol determination unit 904 or the second special symbol determination unit 914 and information related to the lottery result to the peripheral board 800. The “information related to the lottery result” corresponds to a variation time of the decorative symbol performed in the effect display device 115.

It should be noted that the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904, the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914, and the normal symbol success / failure determination means 924 does not necessarily include a deviation. For example, if the opening / closing device operation process is executed in a manner in which it is extremely difficult to win a game ball to the opening / closing device 500, the opening / closing device operation process may be performed when all winnings are not won. .

Further, as in the present embodiment, in the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is made prior to the determination of establishment of the specific condition is as described above. Although a remarkable effect is brought about, the establishment of the specific condition may be treated as the winning type, and the determination of whether or not the jackpot is successful and the establishment of the specific condition may be performed collectively.

On the other hand, the peripheral control board 810 includes command receiving means 950, effect lottery means 960, effect control means 962, and article provision control means 964, as shown in FIG.

The command receiving unit 950 is a part that receives the determination result by the first special symbol admission / rejection determination unit 904 or the second special symbol adequacy determination unit 914 transmitted from the main control board 710 and information related to the determination result.

In addition, the effect lottery means 960, as will be described later, the effect mode to be displayed on the effect display device 115 based on the command transmitted from the main control board 710 and the speakers 144, 3
41, sound effects output from 41, production sounds such as music, and further lamps 842, 852, 853
This is a part for determining the display mode and so on.

The effect control unit 962 is a part that transmits information to the display device control board 816 so that the effect mode determined by the effect lottery unit 960 is displayed on the effect display device 115. In addition, the effect sound and the display are controlled via the frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 so that the speakers 144 and 341 and the frame decoration lamp 842 are output and displayed. Further, the panel decoration lamp 852 and the center decoration lamp 85 are provided via the lamp driving board 850.
The display in 3 is also controlled.

The article application control unit 964 controls various operations of the article storage unit 1200. For example, the door drive mechanism 1204 is controlled to open and close the opening / closing door 1203, the illumination light emitting diode 1205 is turned on and blinked, and detection control by the infrared distance measuring sensor 1206 is performed. The article granting control means 964 can grant an article as a game value to the player at a specific opportunity, which will be described in detail later.

Next, various control processes executed on the main board 700 in accordance with the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[About main system processing]
First, a description will be given based on FIG. FIG. 68 shows the CPU mounted on the main control board of the main board.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main system process which is performed.

As shown in FIG. 68, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 711 (see FIG. 64) executes power-on processing (step S10). In this power-on process,
It is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM 713 (see FIG. 64) is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). That is, the RAM 713 of this embodiment.
The (data memory) has a backup area in which various control data is backed up by constantly supplying power. When the power supply is stopped, the pachinko machine 1 performs a process of temporarily saving various control data stored in the processing area of the RAM 713 to the backup area, and the temporarily saved data when the power is restored. The RA
By reading into the processing area of M713, a continuity game can be executed from the time of power-off.

Therefore, in this power-on process (step S10), if the backup data (data in the backup area) is normal, the process of returning to the power supply stop state according to the backup data stored in the RAM 713 (power recovery) Time processing). On the other hand, if the backup data is abnormal, the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is deleted. After that, in the RAM 713, various control data necessary for the progress of the game such as jackpot winning probability and control data indicating the current game state are written with respective initial parameters (initialization). processing). Also, when the power is turned on for the first time after commercialization, various control data necessary for game progress are written with respective initial parameters.

The current gaming state written in the power-on process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 810, and the display on the effect display device 115 is controlled based on this command. In this way, the current gaming state at the time of a power failure is stored in the RAM 713 of the main control board 710, and the current gaming state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 810 after power recovery, so that even if there is a power failure, And the gaming state displayed on the effect display device 115 can be matched (
The peripheral control board 810 does not store the gaming state at the time of a power failure). By the way, with respect to the current gaming state, in order to synchronize the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 and the special symbol corresponding symbol of the effect display device 115 with the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern described later at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol. The information of the command is transmitted. Immediately after transmitting the command, a command for the current game information is transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810 each time. As a result, the peripheral control board 810 can always grasp the current gaming state.

However, in this power-on process (step S10), it is also determined whether or not the RAM erase switch that instructs to erase the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is on. That is, even when this RAM erase switch is on, the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is erased. At the same time, various control data necessary for the game progress, such as the jackpot winning probability and the control data indicating the current game state, are written in the processing area of the RAM 713 with respective initial parameters. Processing)
. In the state in which such initialization processing has been performed (at the initial time), the control data indicating the jackpot winning probability shows the first probability (winning probability A), which indicates the current gaming state. The control data indicates an “external normal gaming state A” which is a gaming state in which neither the opening extension function nor the probability changing function is activated. Therefore, if the pair of movable pieces 606 may be operated at the time of initializing, the pair of movable pieces 606 will be open for 18 hours.
An opening / closing operation of 0 ms is executed once (normal time mode).

Further, in the power-on process (step S10), a power-on command indicating that the main control board 710 (see FIG. 64) has been activated when such initialization processing is executed is sent to the peripheral control board 810 (FIG. 65). The process of setting to a state where transmission is possible is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 810 that the main control board 710 has been activated. In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM 713, and the power supply is started when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started again. Processing at the time of execution is executed.

When the power-on process (step S10) ends, the CPU 711 starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop process, the CPU 711 first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S20). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 395. That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Power is supplied to the device. When a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, the power supply board to the main control board 7
A power failure warning signal indicating that the supply of power supply voltage is stopped is transmitted to 10. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the CPU 511 mounted on the main control board 710 in step S20, a process at the time of power failure occurrence is executed (step S40).

The process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption is a power supply voltage (2 in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure.
4V) is a process of temporarily saving data in the backup area of the RAM 713 in order to start the operation of the gaming machine from the state before the power failure when the power is restored (hereinafter referred to as “power recovery”). . Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not interrupt processing, but as branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

When a power failure warning signal is not detected in step S20 (NO in step S20)
In other words, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, a non-winning random number update process for updating the random number used in the game is performed (step S30). Note that the random numbers updated in the non-winning random number update process will be described later.

[Power failure occurrence processing]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing upon occurrence of power interruption. As described above, the power interruption occurrence process (step S40) is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main system process (YES in step S20). First, the CPU 711 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S42). Then, a checksum in the processing area of the RAM 713 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored in the backup area of the RAM 713 (step S44). This checksum is used for checking whether or not the contents of the RAM 713 before the power failure are properly maintained at the time of power recovery.

Next, the CPU 711 sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 713 (step S46). When the above processing is completed, the CPU 711 prohibits access to the RAM 713 (step S48).
), Enter into an infinite loop and prepare for the stop of power supply. By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to an extremely short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”) and the process at the time of power interruption occurs, the power supply voltage is not actually stopped. Therefore, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the CPU 711 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed, but is not updated when the process when the power is cut off is entered. As a result, the process is started when the power is cut off due to a momentary power failure, and even when the infinite loop shown in FIG. 69 is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period of time.
Will start.

Note that, in place of the backup area of the RAM 713, a rewritable nonvolatile memory (E
EPROM etc. may be provided. In this case, there is a merit that a constant power supply is not required to back up data.

Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 713 may be a backup area in which data is backed up by constantly supplying power. In this case, the RAM 713 is turned off when the power is turned off.
There is no need to save the data stored in the specific area to other areas. Also,
Since it is not necessary to read the saved data to the processing area even when the power is restored, the load required for these processes is reduced.

[About timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, the CPU mounted on main control board 710 of main board 700 during execution of the main system process.
In step 711, timer interrupt processing is executed every 4 ms. In timer interrupt processing, CPU
In step S711, after the register standby process is executed (step S50), the process from step S60 to step S270 is executed.

In the sensor monitoring process in step S60, the above-described various sensors (gate sensor 760,
The first start port sensor 780, the second start port sensor 782, the third start port sensor 784, the opening / closing device count sensor 776 and the like are monitored.

In the winning random number update process of step S70, a process of updating a random number used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the winning random number update process is different from the random number updated in the non-winning random number update process. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the winning random number updating process may be updated in the non-winning random number updating process.

In the payout control process in step S80, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control board 720 based on the signal detected in the sensor monitoring process (step S60).

In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process in step S90, the control process related to the normal symbol display 82 is executed based on the signal detected from the gate sensor 760 in the sensor monitoring process (step S60). The process for performing opening / closing control of the movable piece 606 is executed.

In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process in step S100, a series of processing from the start of the special symbol change to the start of the winning game is executed, and the opening / closing device 5 as the special electric accessory is executed.
A process for performing the opening / closing control of 00 is executed.

In the output data setting process in step S260, the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 8 are based on information determined in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100).
A process for generating a command to be transmitted to 10 is executed.

In the command transmission processing in step S270, output data setting processing (step S260).
A process for transmitting the command set in step S1 to the peripheral control board 810 is performed. When the processing from step S60 to step S270 is executed, register restoration processing (step S280) is performed.
) To finish the timer interrupt process.

Here, various random numbers that are updated by the CPU 711 in the above-described non-winning random number update processing (step S30) and winning random number update processing (step S70) will be described.

In the present embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, random numbers for success / failure determination, design random numbers, random numbers for reach determination (more strictly speaking, random numbers for high expectation effect determination), variation pattern random numbers, and random numbers for normal design success / failure determination Etc.

The determination random number is a random determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game or a switchgear operating process. When the design random number is determined to generate a jackpot game, the type of jackpot (first long opening jackpot, second long opening jackpot, third long opening jackpot, first short opening jackpot and second short opening jackpot) It is a random number used for the determination of. The reach determination random number is used to determine whether or not to perform a highly anticipated effect such as a reach effect when it is determined that the jackpot is not won (i.e., missed) and the specific condition is not satisfied. The random number used. The variation pattern random number is a random number used for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86.
The normal symbol determination random number is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 606 to be in an open state.

It should be noted that the variation pattern of the decorative design that is displayed and controlled by the effect display device 115 may be determined by a variation pattern random number, and the CPU mounted on the peripheral control board 810 of the peripheral board 800.
811 or CPU 832 mounted on display device control board 816 (see FIG. 65 for both)
You may make it determine by. The variation pattern random number is not essential, and the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number.

Among these random numbers, in the winning random number update process, whether to control the pair of movable pieces 606 in an open state in which it is easy to accept a winning / non-judgment random number, a design random number, and a game ball related to the occurrence of the jackpot game or the switching device operation process The random number for judgment per ordinary symbol related to whether or not is updated. Here, the random numbers used for determining whether or not the big hit game is generated and whether or not the pair of movable pieces 606 are controlled to be opened are updated every 4 ms as a fixed timing. By doing so, the probability (probability determined to generate jackpot game or switchgear operation processing, probability to control the pair of movable pieces 606 to be opened) in a predetermined period in each random number is constant. (That is, it is possible to prevent the probability from being biased due to aiming or the like), and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

On the other hand, in the non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number and the variation pattern random number irrespective of the occurrence of the winning game and the display result of the normal symbol are updated. The main control board 71
The random number updated at 0 is not limited to the above, and in the non-winning random number updating process, the initial value of the random number for success / failure determination that starts counting next when the counter that updates the randomness for success / failure determination makes one round is used. The initial value determination random number for determination is also updated.

In the present embodiment, as means for acquiring the random number for determination of success / failure, random number acquisition means 902 for the first special symbol determination / prohibition determination and random number acquisition means 912 for the second special symbol determination / decision determination 912
One means is provided, but only one may be provided.

[Regarding special symbol / special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process.

In this special symbol / special electric accessory control process, first, first, second, and third start opening winning process (
Step S110) is performed. Specifically, as will be described later, the first start port 600 and the second start port 60.
2. It is determined whether or not a game ball is received at the third start port 604, and a series of processing is performed based on this. Once the first, second, and third start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process flag is checked (steps S120 to S230), and the process corresponding to the process flag is performed.

When the first, second, and third start opening winning processes (step S110) are completed, it is first determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120). If the processing flag is 0 (step S).
(YES in 120) The fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. Fluctuation start processing (
In step S130), settings for starting the special symbol variation display are performed. As will be described in detail later, it is determined whether or not to start the jackpot game or the switching device operation process, and the processing flag is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S120 (NO in step S120), the process proceeds to step S140.

In step S140, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S14).
0). If the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 and the decoration pattern displayed on the effect display device 115 is determined, and the variation pattern is set to the variation pattern. A correspondingly set fluctuation time (the time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation display to the stop display on either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86) is set in the timer. The processing flag is updated to “2”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S140 (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S170.

In step S170, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S17).
0). If the process flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the process during change (step S180) is executed. In the changing process, the changing pattern setting process (step S15).
The variation time set in 0) is monitored by a timer, and the first time based on the time-out
The special symbol display on the special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is stopped. At this time, if it is determined to be a big hit in the change start process (step S130), the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and if it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied,
The process selection flag is updated to “4”, and if neither the big win nor the determination that the specific condition is satisfied is made, the process selection flag is updated to “0”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S170 (NO in step S170), the process proceeds to step S190.

In step S190, it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190).
If the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), a big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, a jackpot type (long open jackpot or short open jackpot) is determined, and the number of rounds, opening time, and game ball winning for controlling the opening / closing operation of the switchgear 500 according to the jackpot type. Set the limit number,
The processing flag is updated to “5”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210).
If the process flag is 4 (YES in step S210), the process when the specific condition is satisfied (step S220) is executed. In this opening / closing device operation processing, the number of times of opening and the opening time for controlling the opening operation of the opening / closing device 500 are set, and the processing flag is updated to “6”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), the process proceeds to step S230.

In step S230, it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S230).
If the process flag is 5 (YES in step S230), a special electric utility jackpot control process (step S240) is executed. In this special electric utility jackpot control process, the opening / closing operation of the switchgear 500 is controlled based on the number of rounds, the opening time and the number of game balls that can be won in the jackpot game start process (step S200), and the jackpot game ends. In the case of performing, a process of updating whether or not to operate the probability variation function and the time reduction function and updating the processing flag to “0” is performed.

On the other hand, if the process flag is not 5 in step S230 (NO in step S230), the opening / closing device operation process (step S250) is executed. In this opening / closing device operation process (step S250), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 is controlled based on the number of opening times, the opening time, and the limited number set in the process when the specific condition is satisfied (step S220). When the process ends, a process for updating the process flag to “0” is performed. Note that the opening / closing device operation processing is not a game involving the operation of the condition device like the jackpot game, but as described above, it is a game that is very similar to a short-open jackpot game that is a kind of jackpot game.

When any of the various processes from step S130 to step S250 is executed, a special symbol /
The special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[About the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd starting opening prize process]
Next, the first / second / third start opening winning process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the first, second, and third start-up winning process.

In the first, second, and third starting opening winning process, the CPU 711 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the second starting opening 602 or the third starting opening 604 (step S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of game ball detection by the second start port sensor 782 or the third start port 784 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 782 or the third start port sensor 784, it is determined that the game ball has won the second start port 602 or the third start port 604 (YES in step S1101). ). If no game balls are detected by the second start port sensor 782 and the third start port sensor 784, the second start port 602 and the third start port 6 are detected.
It is determined that the game ball has not won any of 04 (NO in step S1101).

When it is determined in step S1101 that the game ball has won the second start port 602 or the third start port 604, various data (random determination random numbers acquired by the second special symbol determination random number acquisition means 912, symbol random numbers). , Special symbol type). Then, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol holding counter 913 is less than the upper limit of 4 (
Step S1102).

In step S1101, the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is the upper limit of 4
If it is determined that it is less than (YES in step S1102), the CPU 711
A hold storage process is performed (step S1103), and then the process proceeds to step S1104. Second
The hold storage process stores various data (random determination random number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball in the second starting port 602 in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity, This is a process of adding 1 to the counter value of the special symbol hold counter 913.
The random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not to win has a random number storage area for determining whether or not to win, a symbol random number storage area, and a special symbol type storage area, and a game ball wins a prize in the second start port 602 or the third start port 604. Various data acquired by doing so are stored in the respective storage areas.

In step S1101, the CPU 711 executes the second start port 602 and the third start port 60.
When it is determined that the game ball has not won any of 4 (N in step S1101)
O) and when it is determined in step S1102 that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 has reached the upper limit of 4 (NO in step S1102), the process proceeds to step S1104.

In step S1104, the CPU 711 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first starting port 600 (step S1104). Specifically, the presence / absence of game ball detection by the first start port sensor 780 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780, it is determined that the game ball has won the first start port 600 (YES in step S1104). If no game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780, the first start port 600
It is determined that no game ball has been won (NO in step S1104).

When it is determined in step S1104 that the game ball has won the first starting port 600, various random numbers (random determination random numbers, symbol random numbers, special symbol types acquired by the first special symbol determination random number acquisition means 902) are used. It is acquired and it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1105).

In step S1104, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is the upper limit of 4
If it is determined that it is less than (YES in step S1105), the CPU 711
A hold storage process is performed (step S1106), and the first, second, and third start opening prize winning processes are terminated. In the first hold storage process, various data (random determination number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball at the first start port 600 are stored in the random number storage region 513 for determination of success / failure.
1 and 1 is added to the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903. In addition, various data acquired by winning a game ball at the first starting port 600 are determined as pass / fail as well as various data acquired by winning a game ball at the second starting port 602 or the third starting port 604. It is stored in each storage area in the random number storage area 5131 for use.

When CPU 711 determines in step S1104 that a game ball has not won at first starting port 600 (NO in step S1104), and step S1105.
When it is determined that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 has reached the upper limit of 4 (NO in step S1105), the first, second, and third start opening winning processes are all finished.

In step S1102, when the game ball wins the second starting port 602 or the third starting port 604, the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is the upper limit value.
Various data acquired in step S1101 are discarded. Similarly, if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is the upper limit value when the game ball wins the first starting port 600 in step S1105, the various data acquired in step S1104 are discarded.

When it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 602 or the third start port 604,
Acquisition of various data (randomness number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) is not necessarily performed in step S
It is not necessary to carry out at 1101, and it may be carried out between step S1101 to step S1103. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1101, it is possible to acquire various data after determining that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102, or in step S1103 You may make it acquire by a 2nd pending | holding memory | storage process.

Similarly, when it is determined that a game ball has been won at the first start port 600, acquisition of various data (randomness number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) is not necessarily performed in step S1104; What is necessary is just to perform between step S1106. For example, step S
In step S1102, the first special symbol hold counter 9 is acquired without acquiring various data in step 1104.
Various data may be acquired after it is determined that the counter value of 03 is less than the upper limit value, or may be acquired in the first hold storage process of step S1106.

Thus, in this embodiment, after performing the winning process (step S1101-step S1103) to the 2nd starting port 602 or the 3rd starting port 604, the winning process (step S1104-) to the 1st starting port 600 is performed. 1106). However, instead of this, the second start port 602 or the third start port 60 is executed after the winning process for the first start port 600 is executed.
4 may be a mode in which the winning process to No. 4 is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start opening 600, the lottery processing is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900, and when the second start opening 602 or the third start opening 604 wins, Although the lottery process is performed by the 2 special symbol lottery means 910, it is not limited to this. For example, when a game ball wins at the first starting port 600 or the third starting port 602, the lottery process is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900, and when the winning ball is won at the second starting port 602, the second is selected.
A lottery process may be performed by the special symbol lottery means 910. Furthermore, special symbol lottery means may be provided corresponding to each of the start ports 600, 602, and 604 (that is, corresponding to the first special symbol lottery unit corresponding to the first start port and the second start port). Second special symbol lottery means and third special symbol lottery means corresponding to the third start port may be provided).

Moreover, in this embodiment, even if any of the lottery process by the 1st special symbol lottery means 900 and the lottery process by the 2nd special symbol lottery means 910 is performed, the winning probability to the jackpot is the same. It is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot winning probability when the lottery process is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the jackpot winning probability when the lottery process is performed by the second special symbol lottery means 910 are different. good.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a bonus is awarded to a player when winning a jackpot in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and when winning a jackpot in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910. There is no difference in the profits made, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900 is performed, the probability that the first long open big hit game is executed is set relatively high, while the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is performed. When the process is performed, the probability that the first long open jackpot game is executed is set to be relatively low.

[About variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

In the variation start process (step S130) executed when the process selection flag is “0”,
The CPU 711 first determines whether or not the number of random numbers (starting storage number) stored in the validity determination random number storage area 5131 is 0 (step S1301). The fact that the starting storage number stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity is 0 indicates that the first special symbol hold counter 9
It means that both the counter value of 03 and the second special symbol hold counter 913 are 0.

If the starting storage number is not 0 (NO in step S1301), a shift process of the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity is performed (step S1302). This shift process is a process for shifting the order in which the determination of whether or not the random numbers acquired based on the winning of the game balls to the start ports 600, 602, and 604 are made is performed. That is, whether or not the special symbol is successful is determined by each of the start ports 600, 602.
Since the game balls are awarded in the order of winning in 604, the order is shifted as the change starts.
The random number acquired earliest among the random numbers acquired based on the winning of the game ball at each start port 600, 602, 604 is transferred to the processing area 5132. If the start memory number is 0 in step S1301 (YES in step S1301), the variation start process is terminated.

After performing the shift process in step S1302, the CPU 711 executes processing area 51.
32 is determined (whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol) stored in 32 (
Step S1303). Here, if the type is the second special symbol type (step S13).
03), the second special symbol flag is turned on (step S1303), and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is decremented by 1 (step S1305).
), The process proceeds to step S1308. On the other hand, if the type is the first special symbol type (NO in step S1303), the first special symbol flag is turned on (step S1306).
) And 1 is subtracted from the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 (step S13).
07), and the process proceeds to step S1308.

In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the gaming state (external normal gaming state B or external advantageous gaming state B) in which the probability changing function is operating (step S1308). Here, if the gaming state in which the probability changing function is operating (YES in step S1308), the first probability variation special figure determination table 908 or the second probability variation special figure determination table 909 is selected (step S1309). Specifically, if the first special symbol flag is in the ON state, the first probability variation special figure determination table 908 is selected, and if the second special symbol flag is in the ON state, the second probability variation special symbol determination table 909 is selected. The

On the other hand, if the probability changing function is not activated in step S1308 (NO in step S1308), the first normal special figure determination table 906 or the second normal special figure determination table 907 is obtained.
Is selected (step S1310). Specifically, if the first special symbol flag is ON, the first normal special symbol determination table 906 is selected, and if the second special symbol flag is ON, the second normal special symbol determination table 907 is selected. The

Then, the determination is made based on the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the determination random number stored in the processing area 5132 (step S1311).

Note that the jackpot determination in step S1311 is performed by the first special symbol determination unit 904 if the first special symbol flag is ON, and the second special symbol determination unit if the second special symbol flag is ON. 914.

If it is determined in step S1311 that the game is a big hit (step S
YES in 1311), the jackpot type is determined based on the acquired symbol random number (step S1312). Thereafter, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type is turned on (step S1313). Specifically, if the first long open big hit, the first long open big hit flag is turned on, if the second long open big hit, the second long open big hit flag is turned on,
If the third long open big hit, the third long open big hit flag is turned on, if the first short open big hit, the first short open big hit flag is turned on, and if the second short open big hit, the second short open big hit Turn on the jackpot flag. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “1” (step S1316), and the variation start process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1311 that it is not a big hit (NO in step S1311), it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (step S).
1314). If it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied (YES in step S1314), the specific condition flag is turned on (step S1315), and step S1 is executed.
Proceeding to 316, the processing flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start processing is terminated. Step S13
14 that the specific condition is not satisfied (N in step S1314).
O), proceeding to step S1316, the processing flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, after the shift process is performed in step S1302, the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the processing area 5 are processed.
The success / failure determination is performed based on the determination result random number stored in 132 (step S).
1311) is not limited to this. For example, a determination table and a random number storage area 5 for determination of success / failure
It is also possible to determine whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number stored in 131 that is the earliest stored random number for determination, and then perform a shift process. At this time, the validity determination random number stored in the validity determination random number storage area 5131 can be referred to only when the change starts.

[About variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

The variation pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation pattern according to the determination result.
In this process, first, it is determined whether or not any jackpot flag among a plurality of types of jackpots is ON, or whether or not a specific condition flag is ON (step S1).
510). If the jackpot flag or the specific condition flag is ON (step S
YES in 1510), hit variation pattern table setting processing is performed (step S1)
520) After that, a variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1560). Although details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

If neither the jackpot flag nor the specific condition flag is ON in step S1510 (NO in step S1510), it is determined whether or not a high expectation effect (for example, a reach effect) with a high degree of expectation for winning the jackpot should be performed. (Step S1530). Here, if it is determined that a high expectation effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot is to be performed (YES in step S1530), a high disappointment variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1540), and then the variation Pattern determination processing is performed (step S1560). Although details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1530 that a high expectation effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot should not be performed (NO in step S1530), a low-expectation variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1550), and then A variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1560). Although details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

The decision as to whether or not to perform a high-expected production is judged to be a high-expected production if the high-expected production lottery is won, and a high-expected production is not performed if the high-expected production lottery is lost. It is judged. The high-expectation effect lottery acquires the above-described reach determination random numbers when winning at each of the start ports 600, 602, and 604, and the acquisition is performed when the variation of the symbol is started when the success / failure determination random numbers are out of place. This is done by determining whether the reach reach random number is correct. Here, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery varies depending on whether or not the opening extension function is activated.
Furthermore, when the open extension function is not activated, the probability of winning the high-expected effect lottery also depends on the counter value (so-called number of holds) by the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913.

Speaking in more detail about the probability of winning the high-expected performance lottery, when the opening extension function is not activated (that is, in the case of the external normal gaming state) and the fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first special symbol, If the counter value of one special symbol hold counter 903 is 0, 1 / 10th,
If the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 1, it is 1/12. If the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 2, it is 13.5. If the counter value is 3, it is 1/15. In addition, when the opening extension function is not activated (that is, in the case of an external normal game state) and the change is a change of the second special symbol, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is the second special draw. If the counter value of the symbol hold counter 913 is 0, it is 10.5, and if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 1, it is 1/12, and the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is If it is 2, 13.5, and if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 3, it will be 1/15. The counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the second special symbol hold counter 91
The counter value of 3 is a counter value after being subtracted upon the change.

In addition, when the open extension function is activated (that is, in the case of an external advantageous game state), regardless of the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913,
The probability of winning a highly anticipated lottery will always be 1/14. Thus, in this embodiment, when the open extension function is activated and when the open extension function is not activated, the probability that a high expectation production with a high degree of expectation for jackpot will be performed is similar. It is said that. As a result, it is possible to avoid repeatedly performing only effects (such as non-reach effects) with low expectation of winning the jackpot, and the jackpot is won unfortunately in an external advantageous gaming state. Even if a lot of lottery processes have to be performed by the time, the interest of the game is suitably maintained.

Next, when the variation pattern is determined in step S1560, the determined variation pattern is set as a selection value (step S1570), and the variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern is set in the timer (step S1580). For example, if it is determined that the variation pattern is the variation number 10, the command 0AH corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation number 10 is set as an effect command and the variation time value is 43000 mse.
Set c to the timer. Even if the determined variation pattern is another variation pattern, a command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set as an effect command, as in the case where the variation pattern of variation number 10 is determined, A variation time value corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the timer. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S1590), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

In addition, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is not limited to the above description. That is, when the open extension function is not activated, the probability of winning the high-expected performance lottery is always constant regardless of the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913. Anyway. On the other hand, when the open extension function is activated, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is not uniform, but varies depending on the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913. Also good.

In addition, based on the variation pattern set in this variation pattern setting process, it is displayed by a lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86.

[About hit variation pattern table setting processing]
Next, the hit variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hit variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 76 is a list showing variation patterns for each variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process. In the winning column of FIG. 76, ◎ means a long open jackpot, ○ means a short open jackpot, △ means the establishment of a specific condition,
X means off.

In the hit variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 75, first, the CPU 711 determines whether or not it is in the external normal gaming state, that is, whether or not the opening extension function is operating (step S15201). If it is determined that the game is in the external normal gaming state (the opening extension function is not activated) (YES in step S15201), it is determined whether or not the first long opening jackpot flag is ON (step S15202). If it is determined in step S15202 that the first long open jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S15202),
One of the variation pattern tables A1 to A3 shown in FIG. 76 is selected (step S15203), and the winning variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, a total number “1000” of table selection random numbers is associated with each of the variation pattern tables A1 to A7, K1, and K2. When selecting the variation pattern table, one of the selection random numbers is acquired, and the variation pattern tables A1 to A7, based on the acquired selection random number,
One of K1 and K2 is selected. Therefore, step S15203
76, the variation pattern table A1 is selected with a probability of 820/1000, the variation pattern table A2 is selected with a probability of 175/1000, and as shown in FIG. The variation pattern table A3 is selected with a probability of 5. Of these tables A1 to A3, the table A2 is a table on which a continuous effect is performed. The table selection random number may be used in combination with other random numbers.

If it is determined in step S15202 that the first long open jackpot flag is not ON (
In step S15202, it is determined whether the second long open jackpot flag or the third long open jackpot flag is ON (step S15204). Step S152
If it is determined in 04 that the second long open jackpot flag or the third long open jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S15204), the variation pattern table A1 or variation pattern table A2 shown in FIG. 76 is selected (step S15205). The hit variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 76, the variation pattern table A1 is selected with a probability of 825/1000, as shown in FIG.
The variation pattern table A2 is selected with a probability of 175 minutes.

If it is determined in step S15204 that neither the second long open jackpot flag nor the third long open jackpot flag is ON (NO in step S15204), whether or not the first short open jackpot flag or the second short open jackpot flag is ON. Is determined (step S13206). If it is determined in step S15206 that the first short opening jackpot flag or the second short opening jackpot flag is ON (Y in step S15206).
ES), the variation pattern table A4 shown in FIG. 76 is always selected (step S1520).
7) The hit variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S15206 that neither the first short open big hit flag nor the second short open big hit flag is ON (NO in step S15206), the fluctuation pattern table K1 shown in FIG. 76 is always selected (step S15208). The variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

Further, when the CPU 711 determines in step S15201 that it is not in the external normal gaming state (that is, in the external advantageous gaming state in which the opening extension function is activated) (step S15).
NO in 201), the first long open jackpot flag or the second long open jackpot flag is O
It is determined whether or not N (step S15209). If it is determined in step S15209 that the first long open jackpot flag or the second long open jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S15209), the variation pattern table A5 or variation pattern table A6 shown in FIG. 76 is selected (step S15210). ), The winning variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 76, the variation pattern table A5 is selected with a probability of 335/1000, as shown in FIG.
The variation pattern table A6 is selected with a probability of 665 minutes.

If it is determined in step S15209 that neither the first long open jackpot flag nor the second long open jackpot flag is ON (NO in step S15209), it is determined whether the third long open jackpot flag is ON (step S15211). ). If it is determined in step S15211 that the third long open jackpot flag is ON (step S1521).
YES in 15211), the variation pattern table A6 shown in FIG. 76 is always selected (step S15212), and the winning variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S15211 that the third long open jackpot flag is not ON (
In step S15211, it is determined whether the first short opening jackpot flag or the second short opening jackpot flag is ON (step S15213). Step S152
13, when it is determined that the first short open big hit flag or the second short open big hit flag is ON (YES in step S15213), the fluctuation pattern table A7 shown in FIG. 76 is always selected (step S15214), and the hit fluctuation pattern End the table setting process.

If it is determined in step S15213 that neither the first short open big hit flag nor the second short open big hit flag is ON (NO in step S15213), the variation pattern table K2 shown in FIG. 76 is always selected (step S15215). The variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

[Highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process]
Next, the highly expected deviating variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a high expectation disapproval variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 78 is a table showing a variation pattern for each variation pattern table set in the highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process. 78 in the winning column in FIG. 78 means a long open jackpot, ○ means a short open jackpot, Δ means establishment of a specific condition, and x means a miss.

In the highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process in FIG.
It is determined whether or not it is an external normal game state, that is, whether or not the open extension function is activated (
Step S15401). If it is determined that the game is in the external normal gaming state (the opening extension function is not activated) (YES in step S 15401), one of the variation pattern tables H 1 to H 4 shown in FIG. 78 is selected (step S 15401). S1540
2) The highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 78, the total number “1000” of table selection random numbers is associated with each of the variation pattern tables H1 to H5. In selecting the variation pattern table, one of the selection random numbers is acquired, and one of the variation pattern tables H1 to H5 is selected based on the acquired selection random number. ing. Therefore, in the variation pattern table selection process in step S 15402, as shown in FIG. 78, the variation pattern table H has a probability of 820/1000.
1 is selected, and the variation pattern table H2 is selected with a probability of 135/1000, 10
The variation pattern table H3 is selected with a probability of 5/00, and the variation pattern table H4 is selected with a probability of 40/1000. In addition, the probability that the continuous performance is performed in the external normal gaming state is a multiplier (10500) of the reach probability (10.5 to 1/15) and the probability that the table H4 is selected (40/1000). 40 to 15000/40).

Further, the CPU 711 determines in step S 15401 that it is not in the external normal gaming state (that is, in the external advantageous gaming state in which the opening extension function is activated) (step S 15).
NO in 401), the variation pattern table H5 shown in FIG. 78 is always selected (step S15403), and the highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process is terminated. In addition, the probability that the continuous performance is performed in the external advantageous gaming state is a multiplier (752/14000) of the reach probability (1/14) and the probability that the variable number 58 is selected (752/1000). .

[About low-expected variation pattern table setting processing]
Next, the low expectation variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the low-expected variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 80 is a table showing a variation pattern for each variation pattern table set in the low-expected variation pattern table setting process.

In the low expectation / disappointment variation pattern table setting process of FIG.
It is determined whether or not it is an external normal game state, that is, whether or not the open extension function is activated (
Step S15501). If it is determined that the game is in the external normal game state (the opening extension function is not activated) (YES in step S15501), a continuous effect lottery is performed (step S).
15502). The continuous performance lottery is expected from the player despite the fact that both the result of the success / failure determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 and the result of the high expectation effect lottery are out of place. It is a lottery of whether or not to perform a continuous production that can give a feeling. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot flag and the specific condition flag are not ON and the reach is not performed, the continuous effect lottery is won with a probability of 1/251. Thus, in this embodiment, in the external normal game state in which the opening extension function does not operate, the probability that the continuous effect is performed when the jackpot is not won is set to be extremely low. As will be described later, the continuous effect is the special symbol display 84 or 86 that is displayed only once after the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. ,
This is an effect (pseudo effect) that appears as if a plurality of decorative symbols 1153 described later have been subjected to a variable display effect multiple times.

After the continuous production lottery is performed, it is determined whether or not the continuous production lottery has been won (step S1).
5503), when it is determined that the continuous production lottery is won (YE in step S15503).
S) and always selects the variation pattern table H6 shown in FIG. 80 (step S15504).
), The low-expected variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S15503 that the continuous production lottery has been lost (step S15).
80), the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 80 according to the number of holdings, that is, the counter value (the counter value after subtraction upon the fluctuation) by the first special symbol holding counter 903 or the second special symbol holding counter 913 Any variation pattern table is selected from H7 to H9 (step S15505), and the low-expectation variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

Note that the variation pattern table is selected in step S15505 because the variation is the first.
When the special symbol changes, as shown in FIG. 80, the first special symbol hold counter 903
If the counter value is 0 or 1, the fluctuation pattern table H7 is 1; if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 2, the fluctuation pattern table H8 is 3 and the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 3 If there is, the variation pattern table H9 is selected. When the change is a change in the second special symbol, the second special symbol hold counter 913 is used.
If the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 0 or 1, the fluctuation pattern table H7 is 2 or the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 2, and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 3. If there is, the variation pattern table H9 is selected. That is, the special symbol is displayed in a shorter time when the number of lottery processes in the hold state is larger than when the number is smaller.

In addition, the CPU 711 determines in step S15501 that it is not in the external normal gaming state (that is, in the external advantageous gaming state in which the opening extension function is activated) (step S15).
80), the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 80 according to the number of holdings, that is, the counter value (the counter value after subtraction after the fluctuation) by the first special symbol holding counter 903 or the second special symbol holding counter 913 H10 or variation pattern table H
11 is selected (step S15506), and the low-expected variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

Note that the variation pattern table is selected in step S15506 because the variation is the first.
When the special symbol changes, as shown in FIG. 80, the first special symbol hold counter 903
If the counter value is 0 or 1, the fluctuation pattern table H10 is selected. If the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 2 or 3, the fluctuation pattern table H11 is selected. Further, when the change is a change of the second special symbol, if the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 0 or 1, the change pattern table H10 indicates that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 2 Or if it is 3, the fluctuation pattern table H11
Are selected. That is, when the number of lottery processes in the hold state is large, the time required for the variable symbol display is less than “½” when the number of lottery processes is small. The variation display of the special symbol is performed.

76, 78 and 80, when the opening extension function is not activated, “continuous effect 2 times (or 3 times)” is displayed, while the opening extension function is activated. Is not displayed as "continuous production ...".

More specifically, in the variation names of the variation numbers 59 to 96, the display of “continuous effect...” Is simply omitted, and actually, two variations of the display effect are simulated. The reach effect corresponding to the variable name is performed only in the simulated second variable display effect. As will be described later, a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the opening extension function is not activated and the case where the opening extension function is activated are prepared (for example, the variation number 49 and the variation number 79 correspond to each other). Variation pattern). That is, the variation patterns corresponding to each other when the opening extension function is not activated and when the opening extension function is activated are very similar (same or very similar) as display modes in the effect display device 115. It becomes a display mode. For example, when the variation pattern with the variation number 79 is displayed on the effect display device 115,
The effect display device 115 is a display mode that is very similar to the variation pattern of the variation number 49.
“Consecutive production twice, D-music reach, and normal off” are displayed.

Next, the variation pattern determination process in step S1560 will be described. In this variation pattern setting process, variation is performed based on the variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process in step S1520, the high expectation disappointment variation pattern setting process in step S1540, or the low expectation disappointment variation pattern setting process in step S1550. A pattern is determined. Hereinafter, the variation pattern determination process will be described for each set variation pattern table.

That is, in each variation pattern table A1 to A7, K1, K2, H1 to H5, the total number “
The random number for determining the variation mode of “1000” is associated with each variation number indicating the variation display mode (variation name) and the like. In determining the variation pattern, one of the variation mode determination random numbers is acquired, and the variation pattern tables A1 to A7, K1, and K2 are acquired based on the acquired variation mode determination random numbers. One is decided. Note that the variation mode determination random number may also be used in combination with other random numbers.

Therefore, when the set fluctuation pattern table is A1, the fluctuation numbers 5, 7, 9, 1
1, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, and 23, each of the fluctuation patterns,
12/1000, 24/1000, 20/1000, 64/1000
It is determined with a probability of 188/112, 112/1000, 156/1000, 92/1000, 220/1000, and 112/1000.

When the set fluctuation pattern table is A2, the fluctuation numbers 26, 27, 29, 3
No. 1, 33, 35, 37, 39, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, the variation pattern is 24/1000, 8/1000, 60/1000, respectively.
, 124/1000, 72/1000, 76/1000, 64/1000, 10
It is determined with a probability of 80/00, 8/1000, 56/1000, 120/1000, 76/1000, 76/1000, 68/1000, and 88/1000.

When the set variation pattern table is A3, it is always determined as the variation pattern with the variation number 55. When the variation pattern table set is A4, it is always determined as the variation pattern with the variation number 54 and is set. Is always determined as a variation pattern of variation number 53.

When the set variation pattern table is A5, the variation numbers 61, 62, 65, 67, 6
The change pattern of any one of 9, 72, 74, 75, 81, 84, 86, 96, and 99 is 8/1000, 8/1000, 40/1000, and 140/1000, respectively.
, 360/1000, 20/1000, 24/1000, 36/1000, 10
It is determined with a probability of 20/00, 20/1000, 236/1000, 80/1000, and 8/1000.

When the set variation pattern table is A6, variation numbers 60, 64, 71, 73, 7
7, 80, 83, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94 to any one of the fluctuation patterns, respectively, 8/1000, 100/1000, 100/1000,
100/1000, 160/1000, 140/1000, 160/1000,
4/1000, 8/1000, 4/1000, 8/1000, 4/1000
It is determined with a probability of 8/1000, 4/1000, and 192/1000.

When the set variation pattern table is A7, it is always determined as the variation pattern with the variation number 98. When the set variation pattern table is K2, it is always determined as the variation pattern with the variation number 97.

When the set variation pattern table is H1, any one of the variation numbers 4, 6, and 22 is determined with a probability of 716/1000, 240/1000, and 44/1000, respectively.

When the set fluctuation pattern table is H2, the fluctuation numbers 10, 12, 14, 16, 1
One of the variation patterns of 8, 20 is 360/1000, 200/1000, 228/1000, 88/1000, 72/1000, 5/1000, respectively.
It is determined with a probability of 2.

When the set fluctuation pattern table is H3, the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 4 is 1000.
It is determined with a probability of 920 / min, and with a probability of 80/1000 for the variation pattern of variation number 8.

When the set variation pattern table is H4, the variation numbers 25, 28, 30, 32, 3
4, 36, 38, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51 to any one of the fluctuation patterns, 360/1000, 140/1000, 84/1000, 64/1000, respectively. Of 32,28 / 1000,16 / 1000,108 / 1000
, 60/1000, 48/1000, 24/1000, 24/1000, 100
It is determined with a probability of 24/0.

When the set fluctuation pattern table is H5, the fluctuation numbers 58, 59, 63, 66, 6
8, 70, 76, 78, 79, 82, 85, any of the fluctuation patterns,
75/1000, 124/1000, 4/1000, 28/1000
20/0, 16/1000, 8/1000, 8/1000, 12/1000,
It is determined with a probability of 4/1000, 20/1000, and 4/1000.

On the other hand, when the set variation pattern table is H6, the variation pattern of variation number 24 is always determined. That is, since the continuous production lottery is won, the fluctuation pattern is always determined to be out of the continuous production twice.

Even when the set variation pattern table is H7, the variation pattern of variation number 1 is always determined. Similarly, when the set variation pattern table is H8, it is always determined to be the variation pattern of variation number 2, and when the set variation pattern table is H9,
The variation pattern of variation number 3 is always determined.

When the set variation pattern table is H10, the variation pattern with the variation number 56 is always determined. When the variation pattern table set is H11, the variation pattern with the variation number 57 is always determined.

When the variation pattern (variation number) is determined in this way, a command (information) corresponding to the determined variation pattern is transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral board 800, and the above-mentioned in the peripheral board 800 It is used for processing such as effect lottery by the effect lottery means 960.
That is, the effect mode (continuous effect, reach effect, etc.) related to the variable display effect of the decorative design 1153 displayed on the effect display device 115 is actually transmitted from the main control board 710 in the peripheral board 800. Is determined according to the command to be executed. In this sense, the control related to the variable display effect of the decorative pattern 1153 displayed on the effect display device 115 is performed in cooperation by the main control board 710 and the peripheral board 800 (display control means).

[About change processing]
Next, the changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. In the changing process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S1801). Here, if any of the first special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86 is changing, it is determined that it is changing. If the special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1801), the changing process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S1801 that the special symbol is changing (step S180).
1), the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the variable time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer has elapsed in the variation pattern setting process. If the variation time has not elapsed, the process waits until the variation time has elapsed (NO in step S1802). When the fluctuation time has elapsed (step S18)
If YES in 02), the special symbol change is stopped (step S1803). That is, the first
In the changing display of the special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86, the first
The lottery result of the special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 is derived and displayed.

When the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S1803), it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags is ON (step S1804). That is, as a result of the fact that the current fluctuation is stopped and the lottery result is derived, it is determined whether or not any jackpot game is started. If any of the jackpot flags is in the ON state (YES in step S1804), the processing flag is updated to “3” (step S1805), and the changing process is terminated. If none of the jackpot flags is ON (N in step S1804)
O) Next, it is determined whether or not the specific condition flag is in an ON state (step S1806).
That is, as a result of stopping the current fluctuation and deriving the lottery result, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing device operation process is started. If the specific condition flag is ON (YE in step S1806)
S), the processing flag is updated to “4” (step S1807), and the changing process is terminated. If the specific condition flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S1808), and the changing process is terminated.

[About jackpot game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game start process. In this jackpot game start process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation (step S2001). As described above, since the probability variation function does not operate when the jackpot game is being executed, when the probability variation function is activated, the operation of the probability variation function is stopped (step S2002), and step S200.
Proceed to step 3. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the probability variation function is not activated (
NO in step S2001), skipping step S2002 and step S20
Proceed to 03.

In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the open extension function is in operation. As described above, since the opening extension function does not operate when the jackpot game is being executed, when the opening extension function is operating, the operation of the opening extension function is stopped (step S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. move on. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2003 that the opening extension function is not activated (NO in step S2003), step S2004 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the long open big hit. Specifically, the first
If any one of the long open big hit flag, the second long open big hit flag, and the third long open big hit flag is ON, it is determined that the long open big hit flag is set (step S20).
YES in 05), the number of rounds in the long open big hit game (for example, 15 rounds), the maximum open time (for example, 30 seconds) of the switchgear 500 per round, and the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 balls) are set (step S2006). . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2008, the processing flag is updated to “5”, and the jackpot game start processing is ended.

On the other hand, if any one of the first short opening jackpot flag and the second short opening jackpot flag is ON in step S2005, it is determined that the short opening jackpot is not a long opening jackpot (NO in step S2005), Number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) at the time of the short opening big hit game, the maximum opening time of the switchgear 500 per round (
For example, 0.6 sec) and the maximum winning number (for example, 3 balls) are set, and step S2008 is performed.
Proceed to

[About processing when specific conditions are met]
Next, the process when the specific condition is satisfied will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when a specific condition is satisfied. In the process when the specific condition is satisfied, first, the number of times of opening and closing the switching device 500 based on the satisfaction of the specific condition (for example, 2 times), the maximum opening time of the switching device 500 per time (for example, 0.6 sec), and the maximum number of winnings ( For example, 3 balls) are set (step S2201). Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “6”, and the process when the specific condition is satisfied is terminated (step S2202).

[Special electric utility jackpot control processing]
Next, based on FIG. 84, the special electric utility jackpot control process will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process. In the special electric utility jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing device 500 is open (step S2401). If the opening / closing device 500 is open (YE in step S2401)
S), it is determined whether or not the preset maximum opening time of the switchgear 500 has elapsed (step S2402). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in step S2006 or step S2007 has elapsed. If it is determined that the maximum opening time of switchgear 500 has elapsed (YES in step S2402), switchgear 500 is closed (step S2404), and the process proceeds to step S2405.

If the opening time of the opening / closing device 500 has not elapsed in step S2402 (NO in step S2402), it is determined whether or not a game ball having a preset maximum number of winnings has been received by the opening / closing device 500 (step S2403). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the count value by the opening / closing device count sensor 776 has reached the maximum number of winnings set in step S2006 or step S2007. If it is determined that the maximum number of winning game balls has been received by the switchgear 500 (YES in step S2403), the process proceeds to step S2404, and the switchgear 500 is closed. On the other hand, if the maximum number of winning balls has not been accepted by the opening / closing device 500, the process returns to step S2402.

In step S2405, it is determined whether a preset number of rounds has been reached (step S2405). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds set in step S2006 or step S2007 has been reached. If the number of rounds set in advance is reached (YES in step S2405), the process proceeds to step S2407,
The big hit flag (the flag which is in the ON state among the first to third long open big hit flags and the first and second short open big hit flags) is turned OFF. On the other hand, if the preset round number has not been reached (NO in step S2405), the opening / closing device 500 is opened (step S2406), and the process returns to step S2402.

If it is determined in step S2401 that the opening / closing device 500 is not open (
NO in step S2401), the process proceeds to step S2405.

After turning off the jackpot flag in step S2407, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function should be activated (step S2408). If the probability variation function is to be activated, the probability variation function is activated (step S2409). Specifically, in step S2407, OFF.
If the set big hit flag is one of the first long open big hit flag, the second long open big hit flag, the first short open big hit flag, and the second short open big hit flag, the probability changing function is activated. That is, if the jackpot game that has been played so far is one of the first long open big hit game, the second long open big hit game, the first short open big hit game, and the second short open big hit game, the probability changing function Actuate.

Next, it is determined whether or not the opening extension function should be operated (step S2410). If the opening extension function should be operated, an operation process of the opening extension function is performed (step S2411). After that, the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2415), and the special feature jackpot control processing is terminated. On the other hand, also when it is determined in step S2410 that the opening extension function is not to be activated (NO in step S2410), the process proceeds to step S2415 to update the processing flag to “0” and the special feature big hit control process is terminated.

By the way, in this embodiment, the gaming state when the jackpot wins has a significant influence on whether or not the opening extension function should be activated.

Specifically, if the jackpot game is executed by winning the jackpot when in the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B, the jackpot flag that was turned OFF in step S2407 is released to the first long Only when it is a big hit flag or a first short open big hit flag, it is determined in step S2410 that the open extension function should be activated. On the other hand, when the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407 is the second long open jackpot flag or the second short open jackpot flag, it is determined in step S2408 that the probability variation function should be activated, but in step S2410. It is determined that the open extension function is not activated.

If the jackpot game is executed by winning the jackpot in the external advantageous game state A or the external advantageous game state B, the type of jackpot flag that is turned OFF in step S2407 is any type of jackpot flag. Even so, it is determined in step S2410 that the open extension function should be activated. That is, OF in step S2407
Even if the jackpot flag set to F is any one of the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit, the first short open big hit, and the second short open big hit (when the third long open big hit is won, step S2410) In step S2410, it is determined that the open extension function should be activated. Therefore, once the first long open big hit game or the first short open big hit game is executed, the second long open big hit game or the second short open big hit game is executed unless the third long open big hit game is executed. The later gaming state becomes the external advantageous gaming state B.

Strictly speaking, in the process of step S2410, first, based on the jackpot flag, it is determined whether or not one of the first long open jackpot and the first short open jackpot is won. As a result, if it is determined that either the first long open jackpot or the first short open jackpot has been won, the open extension function is activated in the process of step S2411.

However, in the process of step S2410, the first long open jackpot and the first
There is a case where it is determined that neither the second long open jackpot or the second short open jackpot has been won. In such a case,
It is further determined whether or not the opening extension function has been activated at the time of winning the winning hit (second long opening jackpot or second short opening jackpot) (before the jackpot game is played). As a result, when it is determined that the opening extension function has not been activated (external normal gaming state A or external normal gaming state B), the process proceeds to step S2411 (opening extension function is activated). If the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2415), the special bonus jackpot control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening extension function has been activated (external advantageous gaming state A or external advantageous gaming state B)
) In the process of step S2411, after the release extension function is activated, when the process flag is updated to “0” (step S2415), the special feature jackpot control process is terminated.

In such a configuration, as long as the player is in the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, the second long open jackpot or the second short open jackpot is merely an opportunity to shift to the external normal gaming state. It ’s just a hit. However, the first long open jackpot and the first
After one of the short-opening jackpots is won and the game proceeds to a gaming state (external advantageous gaming state) in which the opening extension function is activated, the second long-opening jackpot or the second short-opening jackpot is “external advantageous game”. "The opportunity to enter the state (the most advantageous hit for the player)"
The game value will change greatly. In this sense, the first long opening jackpot or the first short opening jackpot is “the opportunity to shift to a gaming state in which the gaming values of the second long opening jackpot and the second short opening jackpot are different. It can be said.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when it is determined in step S2408 that the probability variation function should not be activated (third long open big hit) is determined to be won (step S2).
(NO in 408), it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned extension extension function was activated at the time of winning the corresponding hit (third long opening jackpot) (before the jackpot game was played) ( Step S2412). As a result, when it is determined that the release extension function has not been activated (external normal gaming state A or external normal gaming state B), the processing flag is updated to “0” at that time (step S2415). ). However, step S above
If it is determined in the processing of 2412 that the opening extension function has been activated (external advantageous gaming state A or external advantageous gaming state B), the opening extension function is activated (step S24).
13). After that, at the time when the operation number of opening extension function (for example, 100 times) is set (
In step S2414), the process proceeds to step S2415, the processing flag is updated to “0”, and the special electric utility jackpot control process is terminated.

In such a configuration, even if the third long open jackpot is won in the external advantageous state, after the jackpot game corresponding to the selection is performed, the above-mentioned second The two long open jackpots and the second short open jackpot are set to function as “hits that trigger the transition to the external advantageous game state (the highest wins for the player)”.

If the jackpot game is executed by winning the jackpot when in the external normal game state, the jackpot flag that was turned off in step S2407 is open and extended in step S2412 regardless of the jackpot flag. It is not determined that the function should be activated (ie, proceeding to step S2415 following step S2412).
This is because the process cannot proceed to step S2412 unless the third long open jackpot is won.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game is executed by winning the jackpot when in the external advantageous game state, when the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407 is the third long open jackpot flag, in step S2412 It is determined that the open extension function should be activated, and the process proceeds to step S2413. If the jackpot flag turned off in step S2407 is not the third long open jackpot flag, the process does not proceed to step S2412 and always proceeds to step S2409. Therefore, it cannot be determined NO in step S2412.

[Switching device operation processing]
Next, the opening / closing device operation process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the opening / closing device operation processing. In the switchgear operation process, first, step S2
It is determined whether the maximum number of game balls set in 201 has won the opening / closing device 500 (step S2501). If the maximum number of winning game balls has won the opening / closing device 500 (YES in step S2501), it is determined whether the opening / closing device 500 is being opened or closed (step S2502). If opening / closing device 500 is being opened / closed (Y in step S2502)
ES), the switchgear 500 is closed (step S2503), and the specific condition flag is turned off (step S2509). If the opening / closing device 500 is not open (ie, closed) in step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2509, and the specific condition flag is set to OF.
Set to F state. Then, the process proceeds to step S2510, the processing flag is updated to “0”, and the opening / closing device operation processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2501 that the maximum number of winning game balls has not won the opening / closing device 500, it is determined whether the opening / closing device 500 is open (step S2504).
If the opening / closing device 500 is open (YES in step S2504), it is determined whether or not the opening time set in advance in step S2201 has elapsed (step S2505), and the opening time has elapsed. (YES in step S2505)
The opening / closing device 500 is closed (step S2506). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of opening and closing of the opening / closing device 500 has reached the number set in advance in step S2201 (step S2507). After the specific condition flag is turned off (step S2509), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2510). In step S2504, the opening / closing device 5
If it is determined that 00 is not open (NO in step S2504), step S25 is performed.
Proceed to 07.

If it is determined in step S2505 that the opening time of the opening / closing device 500 has not passed the predetermined time (NO in step S2505), the process returns to step S2501. If it is determined in step S2507 that the opening / closing device 500 has not reached the predetermined number of times (NO in step S2507), the opening / closing device 500 is opened again (step S2508), and then the process returns to step S2501. .

Thus, when it is determined that a pre-set game ball has won the opening / closing device 500 (YES in step S2501), regardless of whether or not the number of opening / closing operations of the opening / closing device 500 set in step S2201 has been reached. The switchgear operating process is terminated.

[About game content]
Next, game contents in each game state will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the external normal gaming state A, the external normal gaming state B, the external advantageous gaming state A, and the external advantageous gaming state B are set as described above. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, externally, when the player is in one of the external normal gaming state A and the external normal gaming state B, it is determined in advance regardless of the state. The player is only suggested to the player to be in the single (one) gaming state (external normal gaming state which is also the gaming state at the time of initial).

When a game ball wins one of the start ports 600, 602, 604, a special symbol lottery is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910. The lottery result is displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 and is displayed on the effect display device 115 by a combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1153.

As shown in FIGS. 86 to 91, the effect display device 115 has a decorative pattern 11 in the center area.
53 is displayed, and the first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000 and the second special symbol corresponding symbol 1 are displayed.
002 and a hold display area 1150. The decorative symbol 1153 is composed of three symbol columns, the left symbol column 1153a displayed on the left side when viewed from the player, the middle symbol column 1153b displayed in the middle when viewed from the player, and the right symbol column when viewed from the player. Right symbol row 115 to be displayed
It is composed of three symbol rows 3c. In this embodiment, each symbol row 1 of the decorative symbol 1153
In 153a to 1153c, a plurality of symbols 1 to 8 are arranged and displayed in order. Of these multiple symbols, 3 and 7 are displayed in red, 1, 2, 5 and 6 are displayed in pink, and 4
And 8 are displayed in blue. Hereinafter, a symbol displayed in red is referred to as a specific symbol, a symbol displayed in pink is referred to as a quasi-specific symbol, and a symbol displayed in blue is referred to as a non-specific symbol.

The hold display area 1150 is arranged in a lower area of the effect display device 115 and has a first hold display area 1151 and a second hold display area 1152 adjacent to each other. The first hold display area 1151 is a first array arranged in a line in the left-right direction.
There are four reserved storage display sections, namely, the reserved storage display section 1151a to the fourth reserved storage display section 1151d. The second hold display area 1152 has four hold storage display sections, a fifth hold storage display section 1152a to an eighth hold storage display section 1152d arranged in a line in the left-right direction. That is, the sum of the hold storage display section of the first hold display area 1151 and the hold storage display section of the second hold display area 1152 and the upper limit value of the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 903 (
The first predetermined number) and the upper limit value of the holding by the second special symbol holding counter 913 (second predetermined number)
Is equal to the sum of More specifically, the number of the reserved storage display parts in the first hold display area 1151 is equal to the first predetermined number, and the number of the hold display parts in the second hold display area 1152 is equal to the second predetermined number. The number is the same. In the present embodiment, the number (first predetermined number) of reserved storage display units in the first reserved display area 1151 and the number of reserved storage display units in the second reserved display area 1152 (
The first predetermined number) is “4” based on the pre-pending digestion (“3” based on the post-pending digestion).
")".

In addition, the first reserved storage display unit 1151a, the second reserved storage display unit 1151b, the third reserved storage display unit 1151c, the fourth reserved storage display unit 1151d, and the fifth reserved storage display unit 11
52a, sixth reserved storage display section 1152b, seventh reserved storage display section 1152c and eighth
Of the stored storage display portions 1152d are regularly arranged in this order in the left-right direction.
The derivation of the lottery result in the area where 53 is displayed (common symbol display area) is derived in the order in which they are arranged. That is, the lottery hold corresponding to each hold storage display unit from the first hold (hold corresponding to the first hold storage display unit 1151a) to the end hold (for example, the eighth hold storage display unit 1152d) in order. It will be derived in the order of the hold. Thereby, it is possible to clearly grasp the order in which the lottery results are derived in the common symbol display area.

Each hold storage display unit 1151a to 1151d in the first hold display area 1151 is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903, which is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903, and held by the second special symbol hold counter 913. Is displayed in any one of the second display mode indicating that it is held and the third display mode indicating that it is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903.

Each hold storage display unit 1152a to 1152d in the second hold display area 1152 can be displayed in any one of the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode, and the first Information regarding the number of holds in the special symbol hold counter 903 and the second special symbol hold counter 913 may be hidden.

Each display mode will be described below. For example, in FIG.
The display mode of 1a, the 2nd hold memory display part 1151b, and the 4th hold memory display part 1151d is a 3rd display mode, The display of the 3rd hold memory display part 1151c and the 5th hold memory display part 1152a The mode is the second display mode, and the display mode of the sixth reserved storage display unit 1152b is the first display mode. Note that the display modes of the seventh reserved storage display unit 1152c and the eighth reserved storage display unit 1152d are not displayed.

In the present embodiment, the first display mode indicates that a frame (inside the frame is gray) is displayed and can be reserved by the first special symbol reservation counter 903. The second display mode means that a red character (here, a character imitating UFO) is displayed and held by the second special symbol hold counter 913. The third display mode means that a blue character (here, a character imitating a UFO of a size smaller than the second display mode) is displayed and is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903. Yes. In this way, the display mode is different between the display mode that means being held by the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the display mode that is held by the second special symbol hold counter 913. .

Here, FIG. 86 shows an external normal gaming state (external normal gaming state A or external normal gaming state B).
FIG. 8A is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device 115, where (a) is a background image is a dome stadium, (b) is a background image is a passenger ship, and (c) is an image where the background image is a night view. In the external normal game state, any one of the images shown in FIGS. 86 (a) to 86 (c) is selected and determined at random. Note that any one of the images shown in FIGS. 86A to 86C may be selected and determined by the operation button 327. Thereby, the player's desired image is displayed in the effect display device 115.
It will be displayed on the screen, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In an external normal gaming state, the first long open big hit and the second long open big hit in a lottery process (hereinafter simply referred to as “special symbol lottery process”) by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 Or, when winning the 3rd long open jackpot, each symbol row 1153a to 1153c of the decorative symbol 1153 scrolls in the vertical direction, and then stops and displays in the Zoro eyes (three symbol rows 1153a to 1153c become the same symbol). Is done.

The result of the special symbol lottery process is not only the decorative symbol 1153 but also the effect display device 115.
Are also displayed as special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002 at the lower right of the image displayed on the screen. Here, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 900 is displayed as the first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000, and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is the second special symbol corresponding symbol 100.
2 is displayed.

When the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first long open jackpot, the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) is stopped and displayed with a specific symbol, a quasi-specific symbol or a non-specific symbol. A long open jackpot game based on the 1 long open jackpot is executed. The gaming state after the long open jackpot game is over will be in the external advantageous gaming state B until the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process. Although the details will be described later, after the long open jackpot game based on the result of the special symbol lottery process in the external normal game state based on the first long open jackpot has ended, there is a possibility that a great benefit may be brought to the player Enter the “elevation mode”.

On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol lottery processing is the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit, the decorative symbols 1153 (the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) are stopped and displayed with a semi-specific symbol or a non-specific symbol with a doublet. After that, a long open jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot is executed.

The game state after the long open jackpot game based on the result of the special symbol lottery process being the second long open jackpot is the external normal game state B. The gaming state after the long opening jackpot game based on the result of the special symbol lottery processing being the third long opening jackpot is the external normal gaming state A. In other words, when the result of the special symbol lottery process is the second long open jackpot and when the result of the special symbol lottery process is the third long open jackpot, these The external game state after the long open jackpot game based on the jackpot of the game is the normal external game state that appears even at the initial time as shown in FIG. Therefore, the player determines that the game state is not advantageous to him and plays the game.

In this way, the decorative symbol 1153 displayed on the effect display device 115 in the external normal gaming state.
If (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) is a doublet of a specific symbol, it can be grasped that the first long open jackpot was won at that time. As a result, it is possible to grasp that the gaming state after the first long open big hit game is the external advantageous gaming state B (that is, to enter the promotion mode), it can give a great sense of expectation to the player, Reduction can be suppressed.

On the other hand, if the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) displayed on the effect display device 115 in the external normal gaming state is a quasi-specific symbol or a non-specific symbol, it is grasped which jackpot is won at this stage. I can't do it. However, even if the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) displayed on the effect display device 115 are quasi-specific symbols or non-specific symbols, if the first long open jackpot is won, After the jackpot game is over, it is notified that the first long open jackpot was made. Therefore,
Since the player executes the jackpot game while expecting to enter the “promotion mode”, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the jackpot game that tends to be monotonous.

In addition, regardless of the gaming state, when the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first short open big hit or the second short open big hit, or the result of the special symbol lottery process is out and the specific condition is satisfied At this time, in the present embodiment, a chance eye is displayed on the effect display device 115 without displaying a flat eye. If the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first short open jackpot, a short open big hit game based on the first short open big hit is executed, and the gaming state after the short open big hit game is finished is the external advantageous gaming state B. (It can be grasped that the first short opening big hit was obtained by operating the opening extension function). After the short open jackpot game based on the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first short open jackpot, the game enters the “promotion mode”.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery process is the second short open big hit, the short open big hit game based on the second short open big hit is executed, and the gaming state after the short open big hit game is finished is an external normal Game state B is entered. Further, if the result of the special symbol lottery process is not satisfied and the specific condition is satisfied, the opening / closing device operating process is executed. Since the execution of the opening / closing device operating process is not a condition, the gaming state is not changed even when the opening / closing device operating process is executed. For example, if the specific condition is satisfied when the external normal game state A is established, the external normal game state A remains after the end of the opening / closing device operation process, and the specific condition is satisfied when the external normal game state B is satisfied. In this case, the external normal gaming state B remains even after the opening / closing device operation process is completed.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery process is the second short open jackpot when in the external normal gaming state, or if the result of the special symbol lottery process is out and the specific condition is satisfied, The game state after the short open big hit game based on the second short open big hit or the opening / closing device operating process based on the establishment of the specific condition is the external normal game state, and the operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is promoted. There is no control. For this reason, it seems that there is no change in the gaming state from the viewpoint of the player.

The number of random numbers per first long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per second long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per third long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per first short open jackpot, Based on the number of second short-open jackpots, the “probability of entering the promotion mode” in the external normal gaming state is approximately one third. The “probability of entering the“ promotion mode ”when in the external normal gaming state” is the “percentage distribution per opportunity that triggers the transition to the promotion mode” when in the external normal gaming state. Yes, specifically, the probability of winning the `` promotion mode '' after winning the jackpot game in the special symbol lottery processing in the external normal game state, after the jackpot game based on the winning to the jackpot game is over, This means that it is approximately one third of the number of times that the jackpot game is executed.

After winning the 2nd long open jackpot or the 3rd long open jackpot in the external normal gaming state, after the long open jackpot game based on the winning of the 2nd long open jackpot or the 3rd long open jackpot ends, It becomes an external normal game state. However, if the winning type at this time is the second long open jackpot, the gaming state after the second long open big hit game is the external normal gaming state B, and if the third long open big hit, the third long The gaming state after the open jackpot game is ended is an external normal gaming state A.

In this way, in the external normal game state, when winning either the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot, regardless of the winning type, the jackpot game corresponding to the corresponding win has ended. After that, the external normal gaming state is set again, and the effect image indicating that it is in the external normal gaming state is displayed on the effect display device 115 again. Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is not provided with a state notification lamp (for example, a lamp that displays whether or not the probability changing function is activated when the lottery process is performed) that always displays the gaming state. .
Accordingly, the player plays a game by determining that the game state is not advantageous to the player (the game state that appears even at the initial stage) regardless of whether the player is internally in the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B. It will be. In other words, since the operation mode when the pair of movable pieces 606 operates is the same as that at the initial time, the player has no change in the gaming state from the initial time, and the jackpot winning probability is also the above It is determined that it will be the same as the winning probability A (first probability) adopted at the time of initial, and the game is played.

However, the number of random numbers per second long-open big jackpot (per-share distribution ratio per second long-open big jackpot) and the number of random numbers per third long-open big jackpot (per-third per long-open big jackpot distribution) Rate), in the external normal gaming state, the probability of winning the second long open jackpot (the distribution ratio per second long open jackpot) and the probability of winning the third long open jackpot (third long open jackpot) Is the same level (generally 2 to 3).
According to such a configuration, when one of the second long open jackpot and the third long open jackpot is continuously shifted to the external normal gaming state, the winning probability A employed at the initial time is also adopted. When the lottery process is performed with (first probability) and when the lottery process is performed with a winning probability B (second probability) that is higher than the corresponding selection probability A, the same gaming state is established. Under the circumstances suggested to the player, the lottery process for the jackpot is performed with the double standard of the winning probability A and the winning probability B. Accordingly, the player wins the above jackpot in a small number of lotteries since the previous jackpot game was performed, even though the player continuously shifted to the external normal gaming state similar to that at the initial time. It becomes easy to enjoy the so-called jackpot villas per surprise (unexpected jackpot).

Incidentally, FIG. 87 is an image showing one aspect of the effect mode that appears on the effect display device 115 in the external normal gaming state, for example, one of the second long open jackpot and the third long open jackpot is won. Therefore, it appears on the effect display device 115 when, for example, the game continuously shifts to the external normal gaming state. In this image, the background image is a dome stadium, and the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol rows 1153 a to 1153 c) scroll in the vertical direction. As described above, as long as the game is in the external normal game state, the predetermined single (one) game state (the external normal game state adopted also at the initial time) regardless of the internal game state.
It is suggested to the player instinctively.

In this embodiment, after the long open jackpot game based on the winning of the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot ends, the special symbol lottery process is performed up to 50 times until FIG.
7 is displayed. Then, if a big hit game does not occur while the result of the special symbol lottery process is performed 50 times, the image shown in FIG. 87 is displayed, and then FIGS. 86 (a) to (c).
One of the images is displayed.

By the way, based on the number of random numbers of the second long open jackpot with respect to the random number width of the design random number and the number of third long open jackpots with respect to the random number width of the design random number, the jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot and the third long The ratio to the open jackpot game is approximately 2 to 3 (that is, the game state after the long open jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot is the external normal gaming state A) And the external normal gaming state B is approximately 3 to 2). Therefore, in the gaming state after the long-opening jackpot game based on the second long-opening jackpot or the third long-opening jackpot, the frequency of winning the jackpot increases until the special symbol change is performed several tens of times. In other words, the jackpot game can be executed in a so-called bead sequence. It should be noted that, in the case of the external normal gaming state B, it is needless to say that the jackpot is won at a very high frequency until the change of the special symbol is performed several tens of times, but even if it is the external normal gaming state A, In the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the jackpot will be won before the change of the special symbol is performed several tens of times due to the probability of winning the jackpot in the external normal gaming state A.

On the other hand, since the player is playing the game on the premise that the player is in the external normal gaming state A in which the probability variation function does not operate, the number after the long open big hit game based on the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit It is unexpected for a player to win a jackpot in a daisy chain at an early stage compared to the winning probability of the jackpot in the external normal gaming state A where the probability variation function does not operate, such as 10 rotations. In this way, if the player wins a jackpot unexpectedly (hereinafter referred to as “unexpected jackpot”), the player thinks that he / she has “luck” and plays the game well. It can be performed, and the decline of interest can be suppressed.

Such an unexpected jackpot is actually a game state after the long open jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot has ended, even though the game state does not seem to be a game state in which the probability variation function operates. Is generated by positively presenting the case of the external normal game state B in which the probability changing function is activated (as much as the external normal game state B). Therefore, the jackpot game is not executed in a daisy chain by mere coincidence relying only on the winning probability of the jackpot in the external normal gaming state A in which the probability variation function does not operate. Can be won, so the decline in interest can be suppressed. Moreover, despite the possibility of an unexpected jackpot after the long-open jackpot game based on the second long-open jackpot or the third long-open jackpot game, the reverse, that is, what is the number of changes in the special symbol, for example? Since it is not intentionally set to a game state that falls into a so-called humiliation such as a thousand revolutions (but there is a possibility that it will accidentally fall into the so-called hamari), the willingness to continue the game is not lost, Reduction can be suppressed.

In other words, in the external normal game state after the long open jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot, the winning probability A adopted at the initial time,
A lottery process for the above jackpot with one of the two winning probabilities, the winning probability B, which is higher than the corresponding winning probability A (by the double standard of the winning probability A and the winning probability B). Is executed. Therefore, even if this external normal gaming state is repeated, since at least the same winning probability A as the external normal gaming state A is maintained, the situation of falling into a state where the jackpot is not won for a long period of time is eliminated. In addition, with the winning probability B that is easy to win a big win, it is possible to give a change (so-called wave) to the ease of winning a big win in the external normal gaming state.

Further, if the winning probabilities for the second long open jackpot and the third long open jackpot that trigger the transition to the external normal gaming state are set to be similar to each other, the winning probability in the external normal gaming state is as follows. With B, the expectation that the jackpot lottery process will be executed increases. In other words, the winning probability (average probability) expected in the external normal gaming state is much larger than the winning probability A in consideration of the proportion in which the winning probability A is adopted in the external normal gaming state and the proportion in which the winning probability B is adopted. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation is further enhanced in the external normal gaming state.

[About the game contents when the article storage unit is installed]
In the present embodiment, the operation button unit 3 is arranged so that the player can participate in a part of the game content.
26. This operation button unit 326 is provided with a plurality of operation buttons 327, and as will be described later, it is possible to select music when winning a jackpot. By the way, it has already been described that the article storage unit 1200 can be mounted instead of the operation button unit 326 (see FIGS. 45 to 50, etc.). And this article accommodation unit 1200
When you wear, the game content will be special. Therefore, the contents of the game when the article storage unit 1200 is mounted will be described here.

When the article storage unit 1200 is attached, two types of game values can be given to the player. The first game value is a game ball. That is, each starting port 600, 602, 6
When a game ball wins any one of 04, a special symbol lottery is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910. The lottery result is displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 and is displayed on the effect display device 115 by a combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1153. When the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first long open jackpot, the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153).
c) is stopped and displayed with a specific symbol, semi-specific symbol, or non-specific symbol, and then the first symbol
A long open jackpot game based on the long open jackpot is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol lottery process is the second long opening jackpot or the third long opening jackpot, the decorative symbol 1153 (
The symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) are stopped and displayed with a quasi-specific symbol or a non-specific symbol's double eye (they are not stopped with a specific symbol's double eye), and then the second long open big hit or the third long open. A long open jackpot game based on jackpot is executed. Then, by executing such a long open jackpot game, a game ball as the first game value is given.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, when a jackpot game is executed, a large amount of game balls are paid out as the first game value by the payout control board 720 with respect to the number of game balls launched toward the game area 20. It is. As a specific example of the jackpot game, as described above, a game mode in which the opening / closing device 500 that is normally closed is repeatedly opened and closed is exemplified. Switchgear 500
When a game ball wins, for example, 15 balls are paid out for one win. When the jackpot game is executed and a large amount of game balls are paid out, the payout rate as a ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout control board 720 to the number of game balls launched toward the game area 20 is temporarily Improve (rise). Here, “temporary” means that the jackpot game has not been executed for a specific period such as when the jackpot game is being executed (for example, the normal game state)
This is because the payout rate will increase. As described above, the normal gaming state is the start port 600.
, 602, 604 based on the detection of the acceptance of the game ball, a game state in which a lottery process is performed with a predetermined probability by the special symbol lottery means 900, 910 (when the jackpot game is being executed, the start port 600 , 602, and 604, lottery processing based on detection of game ball acceptance is not performed). In the present embodiment, a lottery process is performed with a high probability that the lottery process by the special symbol lottery means 900 and 910 is performed with a normal probability (normal game state) and the winning probability is higher than the normal probability. There is a game state (probability change game state) to be played, but when the jackpot game is executed, the payout rate increases as compared with both the normal game state and the probability change game state.

The second game value is an article stored in the article storage unit 1200. The article here may be any item, and in particular, it is exemplified as goods that are not generally sold. For example, an original figure, a mobile phone strap, a key chain, a lighter, etc. can be mentioned. It would be even better if these goods were in line with the theme of the pachinko machine. Alternatively, a ticket related to a service at a game arcade is exemplified. For example, a free drink ticket, a preferential ticket that promises a preferential game at an event, a present ticket that can receive any present from the amusement hall, a lottery ticket that can participate in a lottery performed at the amusement hall, and the like.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, the opening / closing door portion 1203 in the article storage unit 1200.
Is always in the closed position, and a predetermined article stored in the placement unit 1202 cannot be taken out. However, the opening / closing door 1203 does not open / close only when the lottery result is a win as in the big prize opening 500a, but according to the progress of the game (that is, the fact that the game has been performed). As a premise), it opens and closes at a specific moment. Here, even if a predetermined article is given, there is no influence on the payout rate. Therefore, as long as a game is played, the predetermined article can be given flexibly as needed. That is, even if a predetermined article different from the game ball is given, the payout rate is not changed, so that the predetermined article can be easily given as needed.

Next, a specific flow of article provision will be described. Various operations of the article storage unit 1200 are controlled by a control program (corresponding to the article application control unit 964 in FIG. 67) executed by the CPU 811 in the peripheral control board 810. This is performed under the control of the application control means 964).

First, a predetermined article is placed on the placement unit 12 of the article storage unit 1200 by a store clerk or the like in a game hall.
02. In this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko machine is cut off, the motor 1212 is driven and controlled by a signal from the peripheral control board 810, and the article storage unit 1200.
The open / close door 1203 is displaced to the open position (see FIG. 47). Thereby, the mounting portion 1
The article is allowed to be taken in and out 202. Therefore, a predetermined article may be placed in this state. On the other hand, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine, the motor 121
2 is driven and controlled, and the door 1203 of the article storage unit 1200 is displaced to the closed position (see FIG. 46). Thereby, it will be in the state by which the taking-in / out of the article | item with respect to the mounting part 1202 was controlled.

The peripheral control board 810 determines whether an article is placed on the placement unit 1202 based on a signal from the infrared distance measuring sensor 1206. When it is determined that the article is placed, the illumination LED 1205 is turned on. The illumination LED 1205 is mounted on the placement unit 120.
The interior of 2 can be illuminated. Moreover, the reflective film laminated | stacked on the opening-and-closing door part 1203 permeate | transmits the light from an inside. Therefore, even when in the closed position, the illumination LED 12
By turning on 05, the article placed on the placement unit 1202 becomes easily visible. Moreover,
Since the article storage unit 1200 is disposed on the nearer side than the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300, the player can see the given article. On the other hand, when it is determined that the article is not placed, the illumination LED 1205 is turned off. In addition, the reflective film stacked on the opening / closing door 1203 reflects light from the outside. Therefore, if there is no light transmitted from the inside, the opening / closing door portion 1203 reflects the player's face and the like like a mirror, and the inside of the placement portion 1202 becomes difficult to visually recognize. Thereby, the effect that the article accommodation unit 1200 becomes a kind of decorative member and becomes inconspicuous is also produced.

Now, in the main control board 710, the special symbol lottery is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910. The lottery result is the main control board 71.
The command is transmitted from the command transmission means 946 in the form of a command from 0, and the peripheral control board 8
10, the command is received through the command receiving means 950. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the peripheral control board 810 counts the number of times that the lottery result has been lost based on the command, and determines whether the number of times of loss has reached a predetermined number (for example, 300 times). judge. In this case, if a winning is made in the middle, the number of lost elections is cleared to “0”. Therefore, an affirmative determination is made when the result of defeat is continued up to a predetermined number of times. Needless to say, even if a winning is made in the middle, the determination may be made based on the cumulative number of winnings without clearing the number of winnings.

Here, when it is determined that the number of times of defeat has reached a predetermined number, the motor 1212 of the door drive mechanism 1204 is driven and controlled by a signal from the peripheral control board 810, and the open / close door 1203 is displaced to the open position (FIG. 47). Thereby, the article is given to the player. That is, the player can take out the article placed on the placement unit 1202 of the article accommodation unit 1200.

By the way, it is conceivable that the article is attached only once. For example, a predetermined article is accommodated in the article accommodation unit 1200 before the game hall is opened, and the article is given only once based on the number of defeats as described above. In this way, there is a possibility of playing a game with us, especially when the scarcity of the article is high, which contributes to an increase in game motivation.

In addition, after the opening / closing door portion 1203 is displaced to the open position to allow removal of the article,
In the peripheral control board 810, an infrared distance measuring sensor 1206 indicates whether or not the player has taken out the article.
If the player has forgotten to take the article, a predetermined display may be made on the liquid crystal display device 115 via the display device control board 816 to notify that the article has been forgotten. In this way, it is possible to avoid as much as possible the situation of forgetting to remove the article to be given.

The peripheral control board 810 may be configured to drive and control the motor 1212 of the door drive mechanism 1204 so that the opening / closing door portion 1203 that has been displaced to the open position for article application is displaced again to the closed position. For example, as described above, the infrared distance measuring sensor 1206 determines whether or not the player has taken out the article, and after determining that the player has taken out the article, the open / close door portion 1203 is again displaced to the closed position. In this case, if the illumination LED 1205 is turned off, then the article storage unit 1200 can be seen as a kind of decorative member. Further, it becomes obvious at a glance whether or not an article is accommodated.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 810, the open / close door portion 1 that is displaced to the open position for article application is provided.
203 may then be held in the open position. In this way, the player can use the mounting portion 1202 having an opening in the upper portion as an accessory case.
In this case, it may be determined by the infrared distance measuring sensor 1206 that the player's property has been placed on the placement unit 1202, and the illumination LED 1205 may be turned on. In this way, it is less likely to forget to take the property.

From the above, the game content when the article storage unit 1200 is attached is completely different from the game content when the operation button unit 326 is attached. In other words, here
Two game values were added. In other words, the game ball is given every time a special symbol is drawn, whereas the provision of an article is not necessarily dependent on the special symbol lottery as it is performed at a specific opportunity. That is, the main control board 710 (specifically, the big hit game execution means 715) has a function of giving a game ball as a prize ball as the first game value,
The peripheral control board 810 (specifically, the article provision control means 964) has a function of imparting an article different from the game ball as the second game value.

That is, the peripheral control board 810 (article application control means 964) is the main control board 710.
The game value is not given only when the result of the lottery process is a win as in the case of the big hit game execution means 715, but according to the progress of the game (that is, on the assumption that the game has been performed) A predetermined item as the second game value can be given at any time (at a specific opportunity). In this way, by allowing a predetermined item different from the game ball to be given as the second game value, the predetermined item can be used according to the progress of the game without affecting the payout rate. ,
Can be granted on a case-by-case basis. That is, even if a predetermined article different from the game ball is given, the payout rate is not changed, so that the predetermined article can be easily given as needed.

In other words, the jackpot game execution means 715 can be given a game ball as the first game value by opening and closing the big prize opening 500a that is always closed only when the lottery result is a win. While creating the first state to temporarily improve the payout rate,
The article granting control means 964 opens and closes the opening / closing door portion 1203 according to the progress of the game, so that a predetermined article as the second game value can be given without affecting the payout rate. Create a state at any time. That is, various opening / closing mechanisms (opening / closing door 5 provided in the pachinko machine 1).
When the 00b and the opening / closing door 1203) are operated, some game value is given to the player. In this way, by operating the various opening / closing mechanisms, it is possible to realize that a game value is given even when the concentration of the player with respect to the game is distracted.

Here, the game area 20 is formed in a substantially circular shape using a substantially front surface of the game panel 409,
It is preferable that the big winning opening 500a is disposed at a substantially central portion and in the lower side in the left-right direction of the substantially circular game area 20. In addition, below the game panel 409 is a dish unit 30.
0 (dish 360) is arranged, and the article storage unit 1200 is the dish unit 300.
It is preferable to be provided in a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the (dish body 360). This
Since the prize winning opening 500a and the article accommodation unit 1200 are arranged in a vertical relationship with each other, and the prize winning opening 500a is arranged below the game area 20, the prize winning opening 500 is provided.
a and the article storage unit 1200 are also close to each other in the vertical direction. Therefore, the player can visually recognize both the prize winning opening 500a and the article storage unit 1200, and even if either the prize winning opening opening / closing door 500b or the opening / closing door part 1203 is opened / closed, the player enters the vision. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the interest of the player through an operation such as opening / closing operation.

In addition, even when it is difficult to acquire a game ball, it is expected to play a game for the purpose of acquiring an article, and a decrease in player's willingness to play can be suppressed. The article storage unit 1
Since an article that can be accommodated in the game 200 is given, it is completely different from the prize exchange after the game ends, and it is possible to surely suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play. Furthermore, unlike exchange of prizes after the end of the game, if the provision of goods is a burden on the game hall, it can be configured to give the goods relatively easily, so in this sense, the player's willingness to play is reduced. It contributes to restraining. In addition, the article is provided by the opening / closing door 120 of the article storage unit 1200.
3 is performed in such a manner that it is displaced to the open position. Thereby, it becomes easy for the player to give the article, and it is easy to increase the game motivation.

In addition, the lighting / light-off control of the illumination LED 1205 based on the signal from the peripheral control board 810 switches the visual state inside the placement unit 1202 in combination with the function of the reflective film stacked on the opening / closing door unit 1203. That is, if the lighting LED 1205 is turned on to make it easy to visually recognize, the player can see the article placed on the placement unit 1202 and can further increase the game motivation. In particular, when the item seems to be desired, the game motivation effect is conspicuous. On the other hand, when the article is not placed on the placement unit 1202, if the illumination LED 1205 is turned off to make it difficult to see, the article storage unit 1200 can be made inconspicuous as a kind of decorative member. And lighting LED1
It is also advantageous in that the viewing state inside the placement unit 1202 can be switched by a relatively simple control of controlling the turning on / off of 205. Note that the method of switching the viewing state is not limited to this, and the transmitted light may be controlled by using liquid crystal for the opening / closing door portion 1203. Specifically, a polarizing filter that transmits only light having a specific polarization direction may be disposed before and after the liquid crystal, and the direction (alignment) of the liquid crystal molecules may be changed by applying a voltage to the liquid crystal.

Furthermore, the door 12 is controlled by controlling the motor 1212 of the door drive mechanism 1204.
203 is displaced and the opening provided in the upper part of the mounting part 1202 is opened and closed. Thereby, with a comparatively easy structure, taking-out of articles | goods can be controlled or taking-out of articles | goods can be permitted. Further, as the opening / closing door portion 1203 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the opening of the placement portion 1202 is closed from the near side to the deep side with respect to the player. As a result, it is possible to avoid as much as possible the situation that the player accidentally pinches the hand. Furthermore, since the opening / closing door portion 1203 is accommodated in the door accommodating portion 1211 in the open position, it can be prevented from interfering with the game when displaced to the open position. The opening / closing door 120
3 can be prevented. Furthermore, since the football-shaped accommodation space having a circular cross section is formed by the opening / closing door portion 1203 and the mounting portion 1202 (see FIG. 46B, etc.), a relatively small space is used for high design. A storage space is formed.

Further, the game ball is given by being paid out to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300, while the article is given from the article storage unit 1200 of the dish unit 300. This makes it easy for the player to understand that there are two types of game values, and can provide a player with a pachinko machine that is completely different from the conventional one.

Here, the peripheral control board 810 (specifically, the article assignment control means 964) counts the number of times that the lottery results are lost based on a command from the main control board 710, and the number of times of the winning is a predetermined number. It was determined whether it reached | attained, and the articles | goods were provided based on this determination result. On the other hand, the number of lotteries including winning and winning may be counted to determine whether or not the number of lotteries has reached a predetermined number. Even in such a case, since the game for the purpose of acquiring the goods is expected to continue, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In the peripheral control board 810 (specifically, the article application control means 964), the main control board 7 is used.
Regardless of the command from 10, for example, it is determined whether or not a preset time has been reached, or whether or not a preset time has elapsed, and the article is applied. Also good. In this case, it is conceivable that a special setting switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine that cannot be operated by the player, and the time can be set by this setting switch.
In addition, particularly in the case of giving an article due to time as described above, it is determined whether or not a game ball is actually being fired, and if it is determined that a game ball is being fired, the article is given. It is desirable. It can be considered to determine whether or not a game ball is being fired by detecting an operation of the handle unit 318, for example. Further, for example, it is conceivable to perform by detecting the discharge of the game ball from the out port 471 or the like. Thereby, it becomes possible to give goods only with the pachinko machine where the game is actually performed, and the situation where goods are given when there is no one can be avoided.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 810 (specifically, the article giving control means 964) is configured to draw a lottery separately from the special symbol lottery on the main control board 710, and to give the article based on the lottery result. It is good. In this case, it can be considered that the lottery regarding the provision of articles is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 115 via the display device control board 816. For example, a roulette image is displayed and a lottery is performed. At this time, an internal lottery may be performed first, and an effect using the roulette image may be performed based on the lottery result, or an actual lottery may be performed during the effect using the roulette image. That is, the lottery result may be obtained only after the roulette on the screen stops. By the way, in the special symbol lottery, because the lottery is done internally first,
The operation of the operation buttons in the subsequent effects does not affect the lottery result. On the other hand, for example, in the case of the roulette, the output may be predicted by the operation button, and the article may be provided when the predicted output is obtained.

Further, in this embodiment, when the power to the pachinko machine is cut off, the motor 1212 is driven and controlled by a signal from the peripheral control board 810, and the door 1 of the article storage unit 1200 is opened / closed.
The configuration is such that 203 is displaced to the open position (see FIG. 47). And in such a state, the store clerk etc. shall carry goods. On the other hand, for example, a special switch is provided on the back side of a pachinko machine that cannot be operated by the player, and the motor 1212 is driven and controlled by depressing this switch after turning on the power.
It is good also as a structure by which the opening-and-closing door part 1203 of 0 is displaced to an open position. In this way, an article can be placed by a store clerk or the like without shutting off the power supply of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine, the motor 1212 is driven and controlled, and the open / close door 1203 of the article storage unit 1200 is displaced to the closed position (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, for example, similarly to the above, the motor 1212 may be driven and controlled by a switch provided on the back side, and the opening / closing door 1203 of the article storage unit 1200 may be displaced to the closed position. Alternatively, when the open / close door 1203 is manually displaced to the closed position, the peripheral control board 810 may detect the displacement and start control to hold the open / close door 1203 at the closed position.

By the way, as described above, the article storage unit 1200 includes the dish unit 300 (the dish body 3
60) at the place where the operation button unit 327 is installed.
It is attached instead of. Here, the peripheral control board 810 (specifically, the article application control means 9
64) can give an article as the second game value only when the article storage unit 1200 is provided in the dish unit 300 (the dish body 360). That is, the article application control means 964 does not function at all when the operation button unit 326 is provided in the dish unit 300 (dish body 360), and when the article storage unit 1200 is provided in the lower component part. Only in this case, an item stored in the item storage unit 1200 can be given to the player.

Here, the article granting control means 964 is not able to grant a game ball only when the result of the lottery process is a win as in the main control board 710 (specifically, the big hit game executing means 715). Assuming that has been performed, the article can be given at a specific opportunity. In other words, without affecting the payout rate as a proportion of the game balls paid out to the game balls that have been launched,
The article can be easily attached. Thereby, in addition to the game property only for the acquisition of a game ball like the conventional game machine, since goods can be acquired with a higher possibility, the fall of interest can be aimed at. As described above, the “specific opportunity” is, for example, 30 minutes after the power is turned on (that is, when the hall has just opened) or when a predetermined number of game balls are fired (that is, the predetermined time). For example, when an amount of money is played).

As a result, in recent years there are many gaming machines with a low probability of winning in the lottery process, and in order to acquire a large amount of game balls, it takes a certain amount of time and investment, so a large amount of game balls is acquired. Even if you can't do that, you have the possibility to acquire an item that is different from the game ball.
Decrease in game willingness can be suppressed. Here, as goods, the numbered ticket which a hall issues as mentioned above, a coffee service ticket, a parking lot service ticket (a parking lot may be charged in a city center) etc. are illustrated. In addition, by making it possible to give articles that do not affect the payout rate, the holes will not be unilaterally lost, unlike simply making it easier to acquire game balls. Not only that, you can also enjoy the effect of increasing the effect of attracting customers.

Here, when the operation button unit 326 is provided in the dish unit 300 (dish body 360), the article provision control means 964 does not impart an article as the second game value,
It is preferable that an article as the second game value can be given only when the article storage unit 1200 is provided in the dish unit 300 (the dish body 360). Thus, the dish unit 300 (in spite of having the opportunity to be given the item as the second game value with great effort.
Although the operation button unit 326 is provided on the dish body 360), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the fact that no article is provided.

By the way, in the article storage unit 1200, the opening / closing door portion 12 that can place a predetermined article given as the second game value and protect the article from being acquired from the outside.
03, and the article application control means 964 operates the door 1203 so that a predetermined article can be acquired from the outside at a specific opportunity. In other words, unless a “specific opportunity” occurs,
A predetermined article given as the second game value is protected by the opening / closing door portion 1203. This is because if the predetermined article can be acquired from the outside even though a specific opportunity has not occurred, the original effect that the predetermined article can be given at any time cannot be enjoyed. Therefore, unless a specific opportunity occurs, by preventing the player from acquiring the predetermined article placed on the article storage unit 1200, the predetermined game can be obtained from the second game as necessary. It can be added as value.

In addition, by configuring the article storage unit 1200 so that a predetermined article is placed from the outside, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play. As an aspect that can be visually recognized from the outside, the article housing unit 1200 may have a recess member on which a predetermined article can be placed, and the door portion that opens and closes the recess member may be made of a transparent resin or the like. Equivalent to. In addition, the article storage unit 1200 has a substantially flat placement portion on which a predetermined article can be placed, and a fixing holding member for fixing and holding the predetermined article placed on the placement portion is a protective member. In such a case, only a part of the predetermined article is fixedly held by the fixing holding member so that the appearance of the predetermined article can be grasped.

On the other hand, the peripheral control board 810 (specifically, the effect control means 962) is connected to the dish unit 300 (
When the article storage unit 1200 is provided in the dish body 360), the display unit 300 (the dish body 36) is not performed without performing display control of an effect prompting an external operation via the operation button 327.
Only when the operation button unit 326 is provided at 0), the display control of the effect that prompts the external operation via the operation button 327 can be performed.

According to this, when the article storage unit 1200 is provided in the dish unit 300 (the dish body 360), even if the player performs display control of an effect that prompts an external operation via the operation button 327, the player Since no operation can be performed, display control of such effects is not performed. In this way, if an effect that prompts an external operation via the operation button 327 is displayed until the player is unable to operate the operation button 327, a decrease in interest may be promoted. Therefore, the operation button unit 3 is attached to the plate unit 300 (the plate body 360).
Only when 26 is provided, the display control of the effect which prompts the operation from the outside via the operation button 327 can be performed, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest.

By the way, the peripheral control board 810 has determination means for determining which of the operation button unit 326 and the article storage unit 1200 is provided in the dish unit 300 (the dish body 360). The “determination unit” corresponds to, for example, a control program (CPU 811) that executes a process of determining which of the operation button unit 326 and the article storage unit 1200 is connected to the dish unit 300 on the peripheral control board 810. .

According to this, the peripheral control board 810 (specifically, determination means) automatically determines which of the operation button unit 326 and the article storage unit 1200 is provided on the dish unit 300 (the dish body 360). Therefore, for example, the staff of the hall clerk is not bothered. Further, the article assignment control means 964 will assign an article as the second game value according to the determination result by the determination means. Further, it is determined whether or not the effect control unit 962 performs display control of the effect that prompts an external operation via the operation button 327 according to the determination result by the determination unit.

Moreover, it replaces with said determination means, and this pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the dish unit 300 (dish body 360).
Further, setting means capable of externally setting which of the operation button unit 326 and the article storage unit 1200 is provided may be provided. As the “setting means”, the operation button unit 326 and the article storage unit 1 are connected to the peripheral control board 810.
An external switch capable of arbitrarily setting which of 200 is connected to the dish unit 300 is equivalent.

According to this, it is not automatically determined which of the operation button unit 326 and the article storage unit 1200 is provided in the plate unit 300 (the plate body 360), but the operation button unit is, for example, by a hall clerk. 326 and the article storage unit 120
It can be set from the outside which of 0 is provided in the dish unit 300 (dish body 360). As a result, the article granting control unit 964 grants an article as the second game value according to the contents set by the setting unit. In addition, it is determined whether or not the effect control unit 962 performs display control of the effect that prompts an external operation via the operation button 327 according to the content set by the setting unit.

The pachinko machine 1 includes an infrared distance measuring sensor 1206 that detects whether or not a predetermined article is placed on the article storage unit 1200, and outputs information detected by the infrared distance measuring sensor 1206 to the outside. It is preferable to further include external output means (here, frame decoration lamp 842 and speakers 144, 341). According to this, since information on whether or not a predetermined article is placed on the article storage unit 1200 is output to the outside, when the predetermined article is not placed on the article storage unit 1200, Based on the information, the hall clerk can replenish predetermined articles. The infrared distance measuring sensor 1206 detects whether or not a predetermined article is placed, but may be provided with detection means for detecting whether or not the opening / closing door portion 1203 is activated instead. As an external output means, a speaker 144, 341 emits a sound as an alert to notify that a predetermined article is not placed, or a frame decoration is used to notify that a predetermined article is not placed. For example, the lamp 842 is caused to emit light.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes a power switch that can start supply of power necessary for advancing the game by an external operation, and the article application control means 964 operates the power switch. When the open / close door portion 1203 is activated to the open position after the power supply is started, the open position may be maintained in the open position. In other words, if a predetermined article is given even once after the power supply is started (that is, after the hall is opened)
Unless goods are replenished by a hall clerk or the like, a predetermined article is not accommodated. In this case, if the hall clerk is urged to replenish predetermined articles, the hall clerk will be bothered. On the other hand, if the opening / closing door portion 1203 is operated to return to the closed position without replenishing a predetermined article, the player does not know that the predetermined article is not provided, which is not preferable. Therefore, when the predetermined article is given even once, the opening / closing door portion 1203 is provided.
Was kept open. Thereby, the player can freely use the article accommodation unit 1200. For example, since it is troublesome to take a mobile phone or cigarette from the bag and then return it to the bag again, the convenience of the player is improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the above-described article storage unit 1200 (specifically, the placement unit 1)
202) is provided with an infrared distance measuring sensor 1206 for detecting whether or not a predetermined article is accommodated, and the article application control means 964 operates by opening the open / close door 1203 that is always in the closed position to the open position. The opening / closing door portion 1203 in the open position is operated to the closed position in response to the detection by the infrared distance measuring sensor 1206 that the predetermined portion is not accommodated in the placement portion 1202. Anyway. That is, the opening / closing door 1203 is always in the closed position (normally, that is, unless a predetermined article is applied), and operates in the open position only when the predetermined article is applied. And when the predetermined | prescribed article accommodated in the mounting part 1202 is taken out, the opening-and-closing door part 1203 will operate | move from an open position to a closed position. The infrared distance measuring sensor 1206 detects that a predetermined article stored in the placement unit 1202 has been taken out. As a result, the opening / closing door 1203 is always in the closed position except for the timing at which the article is applied, so that it is possible to prevent mischief such as placing a foreign object in the recess of the placement unit 1202. The provision of the article accommodation unit 1200 as a new functionality can suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when a predetermined article is not placed on the article storage unit 1200, only when the predetermined article is placed on the article storage unit 1200 without causing the illumination LED 1205 to emit light. It is preferable to cause the illumination LED 1205 to emit light. This is because whether or not an article is stored in the article storage unit 1200 can be grasped based on whether or not the article is actually visible. Further, when it can be visually confirmed that a predetermined article is stored in the article storage unit 1200, the player's willingness to play can be increased.
On the other hand, even if a predetermined article is not accommodated in the accommodation unit 1200, it can not be visually confirmed that the article is not actually accommodated, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

[About time limit mode]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the second short opening jackpot is won in the external normal gaming state, or when the specific condition is satisfied, the short opening big hit game based on the second short opening jackpot winning or the specific condition is established After the opening / closing device operation processing based on is completed, the “time limit mode” is entered.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the time limit mode. In this “time limit mode”, as shown in FIG.
Eight alphabets are displayed on the screen. When entering the time limit mode,
All alphabets are displayed in black, and partially displayed in color as the game progresses.
In FIG. 88, “I”, “K”, “A”, and “D” are black display, and “P”, “N”.
, “L” and “Y” are colored displays. In the time limit mode, as the game progresses, the black display of the alphabet is changed to colored display, and when all the eight alphabets are changed to colored display within a limited time indicated in advance, The jackpot game is started. In this time limit mode, the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a
˜1153c) performs scroll fluctuation in the vertical direction as shown in FIG.

In the normal normal game state A where neither the probability changing function nor the open extension function is activated, if the player wins the second short open big hit or enters the “time limit mode” due to the establishment of a specific condition, the game state in this time limit mode Is the external normal gaming state A
And the normal normal gaming state B. Based on the number of jackpot random numbers for the random number width of the above-mentioned determination random number, the second short open jackpot for the random number width of the design random number, and the number of random numbers satisfying a specific condition for the random number width of the determination random number The ratio between the winning probability for the second short open jackpot in A and the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 1:19.

On the other hand, in the case of entering the “time limit mode” because the second short open jackpot is won or the specific condition is satisfied in the external normal game state B, the game state at this time is always the external normal game state B. Become. This is because the opening / closing device operation process is not a hit with the operation of the condition device, so that the external normal game state B continues even if the specific condition is satisfied in the external normal game state B.

By the way, although the game state in the “time limit mode” may be the external normal game state A and the external normal game state B, the game state can be recognized only by the player only in the external normal game state. It is. However, in the external normal gaming state A, the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot is won, and the second long open jackpot or third
It does not make the player think that the game state is such that the probabilistic function does not operate like the game state after the long open jackpot game based on the winning of the long open jackpot game, but as described above, a certain amount of When a predetermined matter (in this embodiment, a matter that the black-out display portion for all eight letters is colored and displayed) is achieved within a limited time, a jackpot game is started to some extent. Is given to players. Moreover, since the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is higher than the probability of winning the jackpot, the player enters the “time limit mode” at a relatively high frequency, and can suppress a decrease in interest.

Externally, the jackpot game starts when the black display portion for all eight alphabets is colored and displayed, but internally, when the jackpot is won, all the eight alphabets are colored. Processing such as display is performed. Therefore, in the case of the external normal game state B, the colored display alphabet is increased more than the black display alphabet than in the external normal game state A, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. ing.

In the present embodiment, when the “time limit mode” is entered, the effect display device 115 is provided.
A timer 1004 indicating the remaining time of the “time limit mode” is displayed in the lower left area. Here, the time in the “time limit mode” is a fixed time (3 minutes in the present embodiment) regardless of whether the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B. Since the number of fluctuations of special symbols per minute is about 5 on average, the number of fluctuations of special symbols in “time limit mode” is about 15 (variation display with a long variation time of special symbols such as reach production) If done, the number of changes will be even less). This number of 15 times is less than half of the reciprocal of the winning probability for the jackpot in the external normal gaming state B.

As described above, in the “time limit mode”, the lottery process for the jackpot is performed with the winning probability B that is higher than the winning probability A of the jackpot adopted at the initial by the winning of the second short open jackpot. If the specific condition is satisfied, the lottery process is performed under the condition that the external normal gaming state at the time of the corresponding selection is maintained. In other words, since there is a case in which a lottery process is performed with the winning probability B by winning the second short open jackpot, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in the “time limit mode” is suitably set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the “time limit mode”.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, when the game is continuously shifted to the external normal gaming state, the winning probability A adopted at the initial time and the winning probability set to be higher than the corresponding winning probability A. One of the two winning probabilities with B is adopted to the same extent (winning probability A and winning probability B are double standard), and when the lottery process is performed with the winning probability A, the lottery process is performed with the winning probability B. Under the circumstances where the player is suggested to be in a predetermined single (one) game state regardless of the time, the lottery process is performed with either the winning probability A or the winning probability B. Like to do. Therefore, the player sees that the lottery process is performed only with the winning probability A, regardless of whether the winning of the second short open big hit or the establishment of the specific condition is entered. Compared with the case where the final value is determined, the expectation level for jackpots can be dramatically increased.

By the way, when the game state in the “time limit mode” is the external normal game state B, the game state remains in the external normal game state B even if the jackpot is not won during the “time limit mode”. That is, in the “time limit mode”, even if the “time limit mode” ends without the black display portion of all eight alphabets being colored, the probability variation function remains active. The jackpot game can occur at a relatively early stage.

In the present embodiment, even if the gaming state in the “time limit mode” is the external normal gaming state B, it is not always a big win in the “time limit mode”.
In other words, while the number of changes in the special symbol in the “time limit mode” is about 15 as described above, the reciprocal of the jackpot winning probability in the external normal gaming state B is more than 15 times. That is, even if it is assumed that the “time limit mode” is the external normal gaming state B, the probability of winning a big hit in the “time limit mode” is less than half. As a result, although the player is discouraged once, it can be revived and it can be made to seem that the player has won the jackpot, the player can be given more joy, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. Moreover, "
When the “time limit mode” is finished, even if it is the external normal gaming state B, the background image of the effect display device 115 is externally similar to the case of the external normal gaming state A, When the “time limit mode” ends, the player can be greatly discouraged. The greater the degree of discouragement, the greater the joy when a big hit game is generated at a relatively early stage.

In addition, the “time limit mode” is entered not only when a specific condition is satisfied, but also when winning the second short opening big hit, so it is a so-called mission mode that is merely a mere presentation as in the past. Unlike the “time limit mode”, it is possible to improve the expectation of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the “time limit mode” is entered even when a specific condition is satisfied in the external normal gaming state (that is, the external normal gaming state B) after winning the second long open jackpot. In this case, in the “time limit mode”, since the probability changing function is operated based on the second long open jackpot, it is very easy to win the jackpot. As a result, the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot in the “time limit mode” can be further improved.

In “Time Limit Mode”, as described above, a big win lottery with one of two winning probabilities (double standard), that is, a winning probability A in which the probability variation function is not activated and a winning probability B in which the probability variation function is activated. Processing is executed. And in “time limit mode”, the winning probability B
In order to increase the degree of expectation that the jackpot lottery process will be executed, the player enters the “time limit mode” when winning the second short opening jackpot. However, such as the second short-opening jackpot, “the player who is not prompted to pay out a certain amount of game balls despite winning the jackpot” is recognized by the player as having a low value as a jackpot There is a need to improve this.

In this regard, as will be described later, in this embodiment, when the first short-opening jackpot is won, which is “a winning where the player is not prompted to pay out a certain amount of game balls despite winning the jackpot” Shifts to the promotion mode in which the second long open jackpot functions as a so-called probabilistic jackpot (a so-called probability fluctuation function and a so-called short-time function, which is the most valuable hit for the player) Like that. In such a promotion mode, so-called probable jackpots are more likely to be won than in the above-described external normal gaming state (in this sense, if the winning probabilities are only “so-called probable jackpots”, the corresponding selection probability is more It can be said that the mode has been changed to a high winning probability), and the player's main purpose is to shift to such a promotion mode, rather than simply winning per winning ball that prompts a certain amount of game balls to be paid out. The game is aimed at winning the first short opening big hit. As a result, the value of “a winning where the player is not prompted to pay out a certain amount of game balls despite winning the jackpot” has been increased, including the case where the second short opening jackpot is won. Thus, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when the player does not win a winning ball that prompts a certain amount of game balls to be paid out. In other words, not only a monotonous game such as how much can be won per a ball that prompts the player to pay out a certain amount of game balls, but also a new game can be provided.

By the way, in the “time limit mode”, in the external normal game state A, the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit is won, and the long open based on the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit is won. There is a case where the player enters a normal game state after the jackpot game is over. At this time, the sum of the number of changes in the special symbol from the end of the jackpot game until entering the “time limit mode” and the number of changes in the special symbol in the “time limit mode” may be less than 50 times. is there. For example, after the jackpot game ends,
For example, if the special symbol change display is performed 10 times before entering the “time limit mode” and then the “time limit mode” is entered, the number of times the special symbol changes until the “time limit mode” is entered. And the sum of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the “time limit mode” is approximately 25 times. In such a case, when the “time limit mode” is ended, the image displayed on the effect display device 115 regardless of whether it is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B is shown in FIG. The image becomes one of (a) to (c) and does not return to FIG. 87 again. As a result, in the external normal game state A, the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot was won, and the long open jackpot game based on the win for the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot has ended. When entering the “time limit mode” from this gaming state, in the external normal gaming state A, the second long opening jackpot or the third long opening jackpot is won, and the second long opening jackpot or the third long opening jackpot is won. A process for storing the number of special symbol fluctuations in the gaming state after the long open jackpot game based on the winning is not required, and the load on the CPU 832 mounted on the display device control board 816 can be reduced.

[About promotion mode]
Next, game contents in the external advantageous game state B, that is, the “promotion mode” will be described.
Winning the jackpot without the operation of the opening extension function (ie, the jackpot where the opening extension function does not operate after the jackpot game ends even if winning in the special symbol lottery process in the external normal gaming state A) Even so, in the “promotion mode”, the opening extension function is activated after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, as described above, the “promotion mode” means that when the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first long open big hit or the first short open big hit in the external normal gaming state, This is a gaming state after the short-opening jackpot game based on the first short-opening jackpot or the short-opening jackpot game based on the first short-opening jackpot (that is, the external advantageous gaming state B). In the promotion mode entered after the long open jackpot game based on the first long open jackpot and the promotion mode entered after the short open jackpot game based on the first short open jackpot ended, the effect display device 115 The background image displayed on is different.

Here, FIG. 89 is a diagram illustrating an image displayed on the effect display device 115 when the promotion mode is entered after the long open jackpot game based on the first long open jackpot has ended. FIG. 89
According to the above, in the promotion mode after the long open jackpot game based on the first long open jackpot is over, the effect display device 115 displays a diagram reminiscent of outer space as a background image. In addition, each symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) is displayed attached to a card-like display on which a character is drawn, and the front and back surfaces are alternately displayed instead of scroll fluctuation. As a result, rotational fluctuations that change the design are performed.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device when the short open big hit game based on the first short open big hit is finished and then the promotion mode is entered. According to FIG. 90, the first
In the promotion mode after the short-opening jackpot game based on the short-opening jackpot is over, the effect display device 115 displays the character silhouette on a dark background image (because the character silhouette is displayed behind the decorative pattern 1153). It is difficult to see in FIG. 89).
In addition, each symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) is displayed on a card-like display on which a character is drawn, and scrolls.

Thus, the image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the “elevation mode” is significantly different from the image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the external normal gaming state. In particular, since the display method of each symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) is remarkably different, the “elevation mode” seems to be in a special state different from the external normal gaming state. Can be grasped. Furthermore, since the operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is controlled in the promotion mode, the player can grasp that the gaming state is advantageous to him / herself.

By the way, when it is in the external normal game state, if the second long open jackpot or the second short open jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process, the long open jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot or the second short open jackpot is based. The gaming state after the short opening big hit game is ended becomes an external normal gaming state B that does not involve the operation of the opening extension function. Further, when the third long open jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process in the external normal game state A, the game state after the long open big hit game is ended remains the external normal game state A.

However, in the “promotion mode”, even if the special symbol lottery process wins the second long open jackpot or the second short open big hit, the long open big hit game or the second short open based on the second long open big hit The game state after the short open jackpot game based on jackpot is over,
It becomes the external advantageous game state B with the operation of both the probability changing function and the opening extension function. That is, even if the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) displayed on the effect display device 115 are not only specific symbols but also semi-specific symbols, the “elevation mode” after the jackpot game is over. (In other words, it becomes a probable open extended game). Here, among the symbols 1 to 8, the number of specific symbols is two (3 and 7), and the number of quasi-specific symbols is four (1, 2, 5 and 6). It seems that “promotion mode” continues with a probability of 6 minutes. Thereby, game willingness improves and the fall of interest can be suppressed. However, even if the result of the special symbol lottery processing is the first long open big hit or the second long open big hit, as in the case of the external normal gaming state A, the effect display device 115 stops at the non-specific symbol double-eyed It may be displayed.

In addition, when in the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B, the player can clearly grasp that the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first long open jackpot before the jackpot game is executed. Is only when the effect display device 115 is stopped and displayed with a specific design of a double-eyed eye. However, when the promotion mode is in effect, the special display lottery processing result is displayed even if the effect display device 115 is stopped and displayed with a specific design of a double eye, or is stopped and displayed with a semi-specific design of a double design. The player can clearly grasp that the first long open jackpot is executed before the jackpot game is executed. That is, if the promotion mode is in progress, the promotion mode (that is, the external advantageous gaming state B) is executed again after the jackpot game is executed even if the effect display device 115 is stopped and displayed with the semi-specific symbols. It becomes. Therefore, for the player, among the decorative symbols 1 to 8, not only “3” and “7” as specific symbols but also “1”, “2”, “
The promotion mode is continued even when the display is stopped with a doublet of any of the decorative symbols of “5” and “6”. In this way, once entering the promotion mode, a loop state occurs in which it is easy to enter the promotion mode again after the jackpot game is executed, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the promotion mode. In addition, once entering the promotion mode, it has a very large explosive power, so the player will play with the expectation to enter the promotion mode even in the normal gaming state, and only in the promotion mode In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the normal gaming state.

Note that in the “promotion mode”, internally, the first random number width of the above-described symbol random number is used.
Based on the number of random numbers per long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per second long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per third long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per first short open jackpot and the number of random numbers per second short open jackpot ,
The probability that the “promotion mode” will continue after the jackpot game ends is approximately three-fifths.
In this sense, the second long open jackpot has a function (in this way) in the external normal game state so that the per-share distribution rate that triggers the transition to the external normal game state becomes the highest per-share distribution rate. While maintaining the specifications as a gaming machine), in the external advantageous gaming state, the function is set so that the per-share distribution ratio that triggers the transition to the external advantageous gaming state becomes the highest per-share distribution ratio. It can also be said that the reinforcement is to increase the continuity of the chance gaming state advantageous to the player.

By the way, also in this “promotion mode”, when the third long open jackpot is won, after the jackpot game corresponding to the third long open jackpot is over, the above-mentioned external normal game state A is entered. Will be migrated. However, as will be described later, in this embodiment, prior to the transition to the external normal gaming state A, the second long open jackpot functions as a so-called probability variation jackpot (awakening gaming state), and a so-called probability variation function and so-called time saving. It is decided to shift to the “retraction mode” in which only the short-time function is activated among the functions for a predetermined retraction period. That is, in this case, even if the third long open jackpot is won in the “promotion mode”, the predetermined pull-back period after the jackpot game corresponding to the selection is performed is a so-called probability change jackpot (so-called probability fluctuation jackpot). If it is only the winning probability of the function and the so-called short-time function, the winning value of the highest value for the player), it has a probability that is more advantageous to the player than when in the above-mentioned external normal gaming state A The lottery process for the jackpot is performed. Therefore, when the “promotion mode” ends, it is suitably suppressed that the interest of the game is suddenly lowered. Note that the “retraction mode” of this embodiment is configured as an external advantageous gaming state A with the operation of the opening extension function (the probability changing function is not activated). In this “retraction mode”, the decorative pattern 115 is used.
The number of symbols constituting each symbol row 1153a to 1153c in FIG. 3 is 8, whereas the number of specific symbols (3, 7) and quasi-specific symbols (1, 2, 5, and 6) is 6, The visual probability that the “elevation mode” will continue is 3/4. Thereby, it can have a big expectation with respect to continuing "elevation mode", and can suppress the fall of interest.

In this way, while in the external normal gaming state, the expectation to enter the “elevation mode” is relatively low, but once entering the “elevation mode”, the so-called continuous change in the expectation increases and the interest is great. Enhanced. Moreover, in terms of probability, if you win three times for the jackpot in the special symbol lottery in the external normal gaming state A, one of them will be a jackpot to enter the “promotion mode” (however, it is a quarter in the visual sense) The conditions for entering the “elevation mode” are not so severe for the player. In other words, if the conditions for entering the “elevation mode” are severe, the “elevation mode” is far away unless the player is a high-skilled so-called advanced player. Some players feel that way. However, if it is possible to enter the “promotion mode” with a probability of one out of three times, anyone will feel that there is an opportunity to enter the “promotion mode”, and the “promotion mode” will be familiar Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

By the way, with the conventional short opening with probability change (so-called sudden probability change), the payout of the prize ball is poor and only the operation of the probability change function is given, but rather, the player can get a lot of prize balls. I sometimes felt disappointed that I failed to win. In that regard, in the first short opening jackpot of the present embodiment, after the short opening jackpot game based on the first short opening jackpot is completed, the game proceeds to the “promotion mode”. In the “promotion mode”, not only the operation of the probability changing function is given, but also when the second long open big hit is won, the external advantageous gaming state B is executed after the big hit game ends (that is, the second long open) The jackpot is given the same benefits as the first long open jackpot). In other words, the first short opening jackpot of this embodiment functions as a “perception awakening” that transforms the second long opening jackpot into a first long opening jackpot that has a greater benefit to the player. Therefore, the player can expect a large profit when winning the first short opening jackpot, and does not experience the disappointment as when winning per conventional short opening with certainty.

[Retraction mode]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the “elevation mode” ends,
There is a “pullback mode” in which the “promotion mode” can be pulled back with a high probability until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a specified value. The specified value is the number of times the open extension function is activated (for example, 1
00 times).

Specifically, in the case of the external advantageous gaming state A, in the special symbol lottery process, if one of the first long opening jackpot, the second long opening jackpot, the first short opening jackpot and the second short opening jackpot is won, The “elevation mode” can be pulled back again. That is, in this embodiment, the state in which the opening extension function is activated is a state (awakening gaming state) in which the gaming value as the second long opening jackpot is different. Then, based on the number of random numbers per first long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per second long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per first short open jackpot, and the number of second short open jackpots for the random number width of the design random number described above In this “Pullback Mode”, if you win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery process, the probability that you can pull back the “Promotion Mode” is about three times if the jackpot game is executed five times. It is. That is, the lottery process for the jackpot so as to be more advantageous to the player than when in the external normal gaming state (in this embodiment, a series of processes including the process of determining the winning type according to the design random number) Will be done.

In this embodiment, when the third long open jackpot is won as a result of the lottery process for the jackpot during the “retraction mode”, a special symbol is played after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is performed. The “elevation mode” is again shifted (extended) to the “retraction mode” in which the “elevation mode” can be pulled back with a high probability until the number of fluctuations reaches a specified value. Also at this time, the specified value is, for example, 100 times.

Here, FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device in the “retraction mode”. In this “retraction mode”, the stage space is displayed as a background image on the effect display device 115, as shown in FIG. Also, a decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 115
Each symbol constituting 3a to 1153c) is displayed on a card-like display on which a character is drawn, as in the promotion mode. As a result, even in the pullback mode, it is possible to grasp at a glance that there is a special state unlike the external normal gaming state. Decorative design 1
The change of 153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) is a scroll change unlike the promotion mode.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is externally played as a single external normal gaming state both in the external normal gaming state A and in the external normal gaming state B. It is grasped by the person. In other words, if the jackpot is won in the external normal gaming state A, it is certain that the probability changing function will be activated after the jackpot game is over. Only when winning short open jackpot. Therefore, while the external normal gaming state feels that the probability of winning the jackpot with the activation of the probability variation function is relatively low, once entering the “elevation mode”, the probability of winning the jackpot with the operation of the probability variation function increases. I can feel it. Therefore, if it is in the external normal gaming state, the game will be played while expecting to enter the “promotion mode” that can give a big profit to the player,
Decline in interest can be suppressed.

By the way, in a general gaming machine, when winning the first short opening jackpot or the second short opening jackpot, the game balls given as prize balls to the player while winning the big jackpot in the special symbol lottery process The amount is the first long open jackpot, the second long open jackpot or the third
It is very few compared to the case where the long open jackpot is won. Accordingly, when the first short opening jackpot or the second short opening jackpot is won, the probability changing function is activated after the short opening jackpot game based on the winning of the first short opening jackpot or the second short opening jackpot ends. Even if he can be sure, the player will feel lost.

However, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when winning the first short opening jackpot that can be convinced that it is the first short opening jackpot in the special symbol lottery process (that is, it can be sure that the specific condition is not satisfied) The second long open jackpot functions as a so-called probability change jackpot (awakening gaming state), and enters a “promotion mode” in which both a so-called probability change function and a so-called time-shortening function are activated. Therefore, even if the player wins the jackpot type (first short-open jackpot) with a small amount of game balls given to the player as a prize ball, a large number of game balls are subsequently awarded to the player as a prize ball. Since it can be granted, rather than the feeling that winning the first short open jackpot is a loss, the expectation that the jackpot game continues to change will exceed, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Moreover, in the “elevation mode”, the “elevation mode” continues even if the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol columns 1153a to 1153c) displayed on the effect display device 115 are not only specific symbols but also quasi-specific symbols. It seems that “promotion mode” continues with a probability of three quarters. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the feeling that it is a loss to win the first short-open jackpot, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, even if the result of the special symbol lottery processing in the “promotion mode” after the first short open jackpot game ends is the third long open jackpot game, the long open jackpot game based on the third long open jackpot game ends. After that, it enters the “retraction mode”. Therefore, when the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first short-open big hit game, the probability that the game ball as the award ball is returned to the external normal game state A is hardly given to the player. This
It is possible to further reduce the feeling that winning the first short-open jackpot is a loss, and to give the player a sense of expectation that the jackpot game will continue, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

As described above, when the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment wins any of the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit, the first short open big hit, and the second short open big hit in the “elevation mode”, After the jackpot game based on the game is over, the gaming state becomes the “promotion mode” again (that is, both the probability changing function and the opening extension function are activated). Further, in the “pulling back mode”, when the winning combination of the first long opening jackpot, the second long opening jackpot, the first short opening jackpot or the second short opening jackpot is won, the “promotion mode” can be pulled back again. This is to confirm whether or not the opening extension function is activated when the jackpot is won, and if the opening extension function is activated, the jackpot game based on the winning jackpot is determined regardless of the type of the winning jackpot. This is because an internal control process such as activating the open extension function is performed after the execution. That is, the CPU 711 mounted on the main control board 710 can provide the “elevation mode” and the “retraction mode” only by confirming whether or not the opening extension function is activated when the big win is won. As a result, it is possible to provide an “elevation mode” and a “retraction mode” while suppressing an increase in the load on the CPU 711, and it is possible to provide gaming machines rich in variations. On the other hand, if the opening extension function is not activated when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery process, depending on the type of the winning jackpot, in the gaming state after the jackpot game based on the winning jackpot is executed It is determined whether the open extension function is activated.

[Variation time of special symbols]
By the way, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have different variation times depending on whether or not the opening extension function is activated. In addition, when the opening extension function is not activated, the variation time of the first special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed depends on the counter value (the so-called first reserved number) by the first special symbol hold counter 903. Similarly, when the high expectation effect is not performed, the variation time of the second special symbol differs depending on the counter value (so-called second reserved number) by the second special symbol hold counter 913.

Specifically, in the external normal gaming state in which the opening extension function is not activated, the variation time of the first special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed is the counter value (first special symbol hold counter 903 at the start of variation) If the counter value after the counter value is subtracted with the start of the change) is 3, it is 3000 msec. Also, if the counter value is 2, 7000 msec, if the counter value is 0 or 1, 11000 ms
ec. Also, the variation time of the second special symbol when the high-expected effect is not performed is the second special symbol hold counter 9 at the start of the variation, similarly to the variation time of the first special symbol.
If the counter value by 13 (the counter value after the counter value is subtracted in accordance with the start of the change) is 3, it is 3000 msec. If the counter value is 2, it is 7000 msec, and if the counter value is 0 or 1, it is 11000 msec. Note that the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the high expectation effect is performed is determined by the mode (type) of the high expectation effect.

On the other hand, in the external advantageous gaming state (external advantageous gaming state A, external advantageous gaming state B) in which the opening extension function is activated, the variation time of the first special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed is If the counter value by the 1 special symbol hold counter 903 (the counter value after the counter value is subtracted with the start of the change) is 2 or 3, 200
0 msec. Also, if the counter value is 0 or 1, 7000 msec
It has become. Also, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol when the high-expected performance is not performed,
Similar to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol hold counter 913 at the start of the fluctuation.
If the counter value according to (the counter value after the counter value is subtracted with the start of the change) is 2 or 3, it is 2000 msec. If the counter value is 0 or 1, it is 7000 msec.

Thus, the special symbol variation time is significantly different between when the open extension function is activated and when it is not activated. Further, since the variation time of the special symbol can be grasped externally, the player determines whether or not the game state is advantageous to the player based on the variation time of the special symbol. Therefore, the player's willingness to continue the game is improved in the external advantageous gaming state, while the willingness to continue the game may be lost in the external normal gaming state. In addition, there are cases in which the player is in the normal normal gaming state and in the internal advantageous gaming state as in the external normal gaming state B. Even in such a gaming state, the player is not advantageous to himself / herself. It will be judged that it is a gaming state. At this time, an unexpected jackpot can occur, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Note that the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 and the special symbol-corresponding symbol corresponds to the variation time of the special symbol. Is almost the same time.

In other words, in the external advantageous game state in which the opening extension function is activated, when the high expectation effect is not performed, the variation time of the decorative symbol 1153 is also determined by the number of lottery processes that are put on hold. More specifically, when the number of lottery processes that are put on hold is large, the time required for the variable display effect for the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 is small (7000 ms). Thus, the variable display effect of the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 is performed in a shortened variable display mode of less than “½” (2000 ms). When such a shortened variation display mode is adopted, the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are displayed as 2 for example.
Even if the variable display effect is performed over a number of times, the time required for the first variable display effect for one time (7000) when the number of lottery processes is small (the counter value is 0 or 1) (7000)
ms). In addition, if the player is informed that a plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are subjected to a variable display effect in a plurality of times in the shortened variable display mode, it is suggested to the player that the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is high. It is also possible.

[Direction display mode]
Next, representative ones of the effect display modes (including the variation pattern of the decorative symbols 1153) according to the lottery result of the special symbols executed in the effect display device 115 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to the drawings.

In the “effect display mode”, an effect in which a character imitating a person sings a song (hereinafter,
Character singing performance) may be executed. In the “character singing effect”, an image (including a moving image) representing the singing operation of the character is displayed on the effect display device 115 and various music pieces (here, music A to music G) are displayed from the speakers 144 and 341. Is output as audio.

In addition, the “music piece” in the present embodiment includes three parts of an introduction part (intro part), a first half part, and a second half part, and one piece of music is configured as a whole by combining the parts. Specifically, the “introduction section (intro section)” is a musical tone at the beginning of a musical piece, and makes the player conceive the musical title and subsequent musical tone. The “first half” is a musical sound of a part following the intro part of the music, and includes at least the first half of the main part (so-called rust part) of the music. "Second half"
Is the musical sound of the part following the first half of the music, at least the main part of the music (so-called rust part)
Including the latter half of

In this embodiment, the “music piece” is composed of the introduction part (intro part) and the main part (rust part), but may be a series of music from the introduction part to the end of the music piece. Also, “music”
Means a part of a song. Therefore, only the introduction part (intro part), only the first half part, and only the second half part correspond to musical sounds. The musical sound is not limited to one phrase, and may be a plurality of phrases.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the external normal gaming state (external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B) in which the release extension function does not operate and the external advantageous gaming state (external advantageous game) in which the release extension function operates. In the state A or the external advantageous game state B), the effect display mode (including the variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153) accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is greatly different. Therefore, in the following, the external normal gaming state and the external advantageous gaming state are divided and each effect display mode is specifically described.

[Variation pattern table]
The effect display mode based on the lottery result of special symbols (pending lottery) is a variation pattern (specifically, determined by the above-described variation pattern setting process (see FIGS. 74, 75, 77 and 79). The variation pattern determined based on the selected variation pattern table is executed. Therefore, in the following, details of the effect display mode based on each variation pattern will be described with reference to the variation pattern name and variation number defined in each variation pattern table shown in FIG. 76, FIG. 78 and FIG. I will explain it.

Incidentally, each variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 75, 77 and 79, and FIG.
As is apparent from the variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 78 and 80, each variation depends on whether or not the external extension extension function is activated regardless of whether or not the internal probability variation function is activated. Each table (each variation pattern) is selected from the pattern table. In other words, even if the internal probability changing function is activated, the variation pattern that can be selected differs depending on whether or not the external opening extension function is activated. Specifically, even in the external normal gaming state A in which the probability changing function is activated, the opening extension function is not activated, and therefore the same variation pattern as that in the external normal gaming state B in which the probability varying function is not activated is selected. Further, in the external advantageous game state A in which the probability changing function is activated, the same extension pattern is selected as in the external advantageous game state B in which the probability changing function is not activated because the opening extension function is activated.

In addition to the presence / absence of activation of the opening extension function (external normal gaming state or external advantageous gaming state), the winning type (first long opening big hit, second long opening big hit, third long opening big hit, first short Each table (each variation pattern) is selected from each variation pattern table depending on whether it is an open big hit, a second short open big hit, or a specific condition being met. For this reason, an optimal variation pattern corresponding to the winning type is selected from each variation pattern table.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 77, in the external advantageous gaming state, the winning type is the second.
In the case of a long open jackpot, the variation pattern is selected in the same manner as the first long open jackpot, so the probability variation determination table (A5) can be selected even if the second long open jackpot. On the other hand, in the external normal gaming state, when the winning type is the second long open jackpot, the variation pattern is selected differently from the first long open jackpot. That is, the probability change confirmation table (
A3) is never selected. Note that the probability variation confirmation table (A3) and the probability variation confirmation table (A5) are tables in which only a variation pattern for deriving the first long open big hit confirmation is selected. That is, as described above, in the external advantageous gaming state (promotion mode and pullback mode), the second long open jackpot is handled as being promoted to the first long open jackpot,
Such a table configuration and variation pattern selection are employed.

[Low expectation fluctuation when the open extension function is not activated]
First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the “low expectation variation” that is the most basic effect display mode in the external normal gaming state in which the opening extension function does not operate will be described.
This “low-expectation deviating fluctuation” is a mode in which a deviation is derived as a lottery result without a high-expected production such as the occurrence of reach.

FIG. 92 shows the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means or the second in the external normal gaming state.
It is a figure which shows the production | presentation display aspect in the case of deriving the lottery result by the special symbol lottery means to the production display device. That is, FIG. 92 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of a decorative symbol 1153 before the start of change, FIG. 92 (B) is a diagram showing an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 during change, and FIG. 92 (C) is a variable number. 1
The figure which shows the stop mode of the decoration symbol 1153 based on "normal fluctuation" of "-3", "shortening fluctuation 1", or "shortening fluctuation 2", FIG.92 (D) is a figure which shows the screen which derives | leads-out the reach establishment, FIG. 92 (E
) Is a diagram showing a variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153 in a state where the reach is established.

As shown in FIG. 92 (A), the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed before the start of change. Further, for example, in the hold display area 1150, the hold storage display portions 1151a to 1151d, 115 are displayed.
2a to 1152b are the second display mode or the third display mode, and the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (counter value by the first special symbol hold counter 903) and the second
It is shown that the total of the number of lotteries held by the special symbol lottery means 910 (the counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 913) is six. In the following, each special symbol lottery means 9
According to the hold order of 00, 910, the symbol fluctuation based on the lottery hold by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (change display of the first special symbol) and the symbol fluctuation based on the lottery hold by the second special symbol lottery means 910 ( The second special symbol variation display) is executed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), when the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is started in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), the left symbol column 1153a and the right symbol In the row 1153c, each symbol is changed in a vertical scrolling direction (more specifically, from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player), and in the middle symbol row 1153b, each symbol is switched on the spot. Variations are made in the manner. And the left symbol row 1153a,
It stops in the order of the right symbol row 1153c and the middle symbol row 1153b. If the change corresponds to the first special symbol, even in the first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000, after the symbol variation,
The display is stopped as in the case of the decorative design 1153. On the other hand, if the change corresponds to the second special symbol, the second special symbol corresponding symbol 1002 also has the decorative symbol 115 after the symbol variation.
3 is stopped and displayed.

Note that the number of holds shown in the hold display area 1150 is decremented by 1 due to the start of the change of the special symbol. On-hold storage display units 1151a to 1151d, 115
The display is shifted to 2a. Further, the display mode of the sixth reserved storage display unit 1152b is set to the first display mode or non-display. As a result, in the hold display area 1150, it is shown that one hold by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or one hold by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is digested and there are a total of five.

Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (C), the stop symbols in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c are stopped at different symbols that are completely unrelated, and an “out” is derived. The display mode is “low anticipation fluctuation” in the present embodiment. This “low-expected fluctuation” corresponds to any one of “normal fluctuation” of fluctuation number 1, “shortening fluctuation 1” of fluctuation number 2, and “shortening fluctuation 2” of fluctuation number 3.

As described above, in this embodiment, whether or not the high-expected effect is performed when the result of the special symbol lottery process is out of order and the specific condition is not satisfied when the opening extension function is inactive. Is drawn (high-expected production lottery). Next, when the high-expected effect lottery is not won (in other words, when the execution of “normally off-effect” is selected), a variation number 24 described later.
Whether or not to execute “continuous effect twice off” is selected (continuous effect lottery). Then, when the continuous production lottery is not won, the “low expectation fluctuation” is executed for the fluctuation time determined according to the number of the lottery holds.

More specifically, “decreased disappointment” for the decorative symbol 1153 corresponding to the first special symbol.
When the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (the counter value by the first special symbol hold counter 903) is 0 or 1 on the basis of the post-holding digestion, “Normal fluctuation (variation time: 12000 ms)” is selected and executed, and if there are two after the suspended digestion, “shortened fluctuation 1 (variable time: 7000 ms)” of the variation number 2 is selectively executed, and after the suspended digestion as a reference If the number is 3, the fluctuation number 2 is “shortening fluctuation 2 (variation time: 30
00 ms) "is selected and executed. Note that the number of lotteries held by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (when the “low expectation fluctuation” is performed on the decorative symbol 1153 corresponding to the second special symbol (
Similarly, the variation pattern is selected and executed based on the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913.

Thus, in this embodiment, in the external normal gaming state where the opening extension function does not operate,
If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of play, if winning the continuous production lottery without winning the high-expected production lottery, the “normal out of production” variation number 24 “continuous production twice out” is executed. . In addition, when the continuous production lottery is not won, the variable number 1 is set as the “normal deviating production”.
The “normal fluctuation”, the “shortening fluctuation 1” of the fluctuation number 2 and the “shortening fluctuation 2” of the fluctuation number 3 are executed according to the number of reserved special symbols. As the number of reserved special symbols increases, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is selected, which suppresses the generation of so-called invalid spheres and prevents the occurrence of a state in which all of the special symbol reservations are digested. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

On the other hand, in the external normal gaming state in which the release extension function is not activated, when the variation pattern with the variation numbers 4 to 23 is selected and executed, the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 115
The stop symbol of 3c becomes the same, and a screen for deriving reach is displayed on the effect display device 115 as shown in FIG. 92 (D). In the state where the reach is established as shown in FIG. 92 (E), only the middle symbol row 1153b of the decorative symbols 1153 fluctuates, and the symbol variation also continues in the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002. Executed. And
As will be described below, reach effects based on various variation patterns are executed.

[Music reach production when the open extension function is not activated]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a “music reach effect” that is an effect display mode with reach when the external normal gaming state is executed will be described. This “music reach production” is a mode in which a win or miss is derived as a lottery result after performing a reach production using a part or all of a predetermined music.

After the reach notification is made as described above (see FIG. 92D), the effect display device 115 displays the singing effect of the character unique to the A song (see FIG. 92E), and the speaker 144. From 341, the introduction section of the A musical piece is output by voice. After the singing effect using the introduction part of the A music piece is executed, the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed in a symbol different from the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, and “off” is derived. The mode corresponds to the variation number 4 “A music reach short out”. On the other hand, after the singing effect using the introduction part of the A music piece is executed, the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed in the same symbols as the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, and “big hit” (in detail, The effect display mode derived from winning the first to third long open big wins) corresponds to “A music reach / short hit” of the variation number 5. As described above, when the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped, the symbol variation in the special symbol-corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002 is also stopped, and the decorative symbol 1
The lottery result of the special symbol indicated by 153 is also notified by the stop symbol in the special symbol corresponding symbol 1000, 1002.

Here, after the singing effect using the introduction part of the A musical piece is executed, the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, and “disconnect”.
Even if is derived, when the symbol variation in the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002 is continuously performed, the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped. And this decorative pattern 115
3 is resumed from the temporarily stopped state, while the effect display device 115 continues to perform the singing effect of the character, and the first half of the A song continues from the introductory part through the speakers 144 and 341. The sound is output as if The effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the A music piece is executed is “
Corresponds to “A Song Reach Long Out”. On the other hand, after the singing production using the first half of the A music piece is executed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is the variable number 7
Corresponds to “A song reach long hit”.

On the other hand, after the singing effect using the introduction part of the A music piece is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the change of the middle symbol row 1153b is resumed, and the effect display device 11
5, the singing performance of the character is continuously executed, and voices may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 so that the main part (first half part and second half part) of the A musical piece is continuous from the introduction part. The effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the main part of the A music piece is executed corresponds to “A music reach / super long out” of the variation number 8. On the other hand, after the singing production using the main part of the A music piece is executed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is equivalent to the “variable number 9“ A music reach / very long ”” To do.

Next, in the middle of the performance of the singing using the introduction part of the A song, the middle symbol row 1153b
In the effect display device 115, the introduction screen to the B music is switched and displayed on the effect display device 115, and the introduction part of the B music may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 in place of the A music. (Music switching effect to B music). Further, after the music switching effect using the B music introduction section is executed, the effect display device 115 continues to execute the singing effect of the character unique to the B music, and the speakers 144 and 341 transmit the B music. Audio may be output so that the first half part is continuous from the introduction part. Then, after the singing effect using the first half of the B music is executed, the effect display mode in which “out” is derived is the variable number 1
Corresponds to 0 “B Music Reach Normal Out”. On the other hand, after the singing production using the first half of the B music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to the “B music reach / normal win” of the variation number 11. .

On the other hand, after the singing effect using the first half of the B music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the change of the middle symbol row 1153b is resumed and the effect display device 11
5, the singing performance of the character is continuously executed, and voices may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 so that the second half of the B music is continuous from the first half. The effect display mode in which “disappear” is derived after the singing effect using the latter half of the B music is executed corresponds to “B music reach / development failure” of the variation number 12. On the other hand, after the singing production using the latter half of the B music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit”
It corresponds to the variation number 13 “B music reach / per development”.

Next, while the music switching effect using the introduction part of B music is being executed, the middle symbol sequence 115
In the effect display device 115, the change display of 115b is displayed on the introduction screen for C music without being stopped, and the introduction part of C music may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 in place of B music. Yes (music switching effect to C music). Furthermore, after the music switching effect using the introduction part of the C music is executed, the effect display device 115 continuously executes the singing effect of the character unique to the C music, and the C music from the speakers 144 and 341 is displayed. Audio may be output so that the first half part is continuous from the introduction part. Then, the effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the C music is executed corresponds to “C music reach / normal out” of the variation number 14. On the other hand, after the singing production using the first half of the C music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to the “C music reach / normal win” of the variation number 15. .

On the other hand, after the singing effect using the first half of the C music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the change of the middle symbol row 1153b is resumed and the effect display device 11
5, the singing performance of the character is continuously executed, and a voice may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 so that the latter half of the C music is continued from the first half. The effect display mode in which “disappear” is derived after the singing effect using the latter half of the C music is executed corresponds to “C music reach / development failure” of the variation number 16. On the other hand, after the singing production using the latter half of the C music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit”
It corresponds to the variation number 17 “performing C music reach / per development”.

Next, while the music switching effect using the introduction part of C music is being executed, the middle symbol sequence 115
In the effect display device 115, the change display of 115b is displayed on the introduction screen for D music without being stopped, and the introduction of D music may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 in place of the C music. Yes (music switching effect to D music). Further, after the music switching effect using the D music introduction unit is executed, the effect display device 115 continues to perform the character singing effect unique to the D music, and the speakers 144 and 341 receive the D music. Audio may be output so that the first half part is continuous from the introduction part. Then, the effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the D music is executed corresponds to “D music reach / normal out” of the variation number 18. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the first half of the D music is executed, the effect display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to the “D music reach / normal win” of the variation number 19. .

On the other hand, after the singing effect using the first half of the D music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the change in the middle symbol row 1153b is resumed and the effect display device 11
5, the character singing performance is continuously executed, and voices may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 so that the latter half of the D music continues from the first half. The effect display mode in which “depart” is derived after the singing effect using the latter half of the D music is executed corresponds to “D music reach / development failure” of the variation number 20. On the other hand, after the singing production using the latter half of the D music is executed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit”
It corresponds to the variable number 21 “D music reach / per development”.

After the reach notification (see FIG. 92D), the singing effect of the character unique to the G music is suddenly displayed on the effect display device 115 without performing the singing effect using the introduction part of the A music. As a result, the G music may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 as sound. Then, the effect display mode in which “off” is derived after the singing effect using the G music is executed corresponds to “G music reach out” of the variation number 22. On the other hand, after the singing effect using the G music is executed, scroll fluctuations (so-called full rotation fluctuations) are performed in a so-called double-eyed state in which the symbols in the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c are all in the same symbol. Later, the effect display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is the change number 2
This corresponds to “G music reach / per full rotation”.

In this way, in the “music reach production” when the open extension function of the present embodiment is not operated, each reach production develops in stages (specifically, the variation time of special symbols is extended). And
Each of the A to D music pieces can be output as a part continuous with the introduction part, the first half part, and the second half part.
And as each part of A to D music is continuously output (that is, the singing effect of each music continues), the degree of expectation of winning the “big hit” is increased. Yes. Therefore, the player can enjoy the reach production while thinking that the singing production of each of the A to D music pieces is continued for a longer time, and the decrease in the interest is suppressed.

In addition, in the “music reach production” when the open extension function is not activated according to the present embodiment, the degree of expectation that the “big hit” is won in the order of A song, B song, C song, and D song among the songs. It is configured to be high. Therefore, the player can perform a music switching effect to B music when a reach occurs or when a singing effect is performed using the introduction part of A music.
Since the reach effect is watched while expecting the music switching effect to be performed to the music and the D music, a decrease in interest is suppressed.

[Continuous production n times when the open extension function is not activated]
Here, as described above, the continuous effect is that the special symbol display 84 and 86 is variably displayed only once after the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. In other words, it is an effect that appears as if the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 have been subjected to a variable display effect multiple times. That is, the effect lottery means 96 of the peripheral control board 810.
0 suggests the result of the lottery process to the player by performing effect control related to such a continuous effect. It should be noted that after the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed in a variable manner over a plurality of times, it is suggested that the winning symbol is hit or missed by a combination of stop symbols.

Next, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the external normal gaming state is being executed, the effect display that seems to have been derived from winning or losing after the decorative symbol 1153 has been displayed in multiple variations. The “continuous effect n times effect” which is an aspect will be described.

First, as before, the decorative design 1153 is stopped and displayed before the change starts (FIG. 92).
(Refer to (A)) From this state, the variation display effect for the decorative symbol 1153 is executed by simulating the above-mentioned variation number 2 of “shortening variation 1” (7000 ms) (see FIG. 92 (B)).
. Then, the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c are stopped and displayed with different symbols, and "displacement" is derived. However, the stop display at this time is in a temporary stop (interval) state,
In the special symbol indicators 84 and 86, the variable display for the special symbol is continued. And the fluctuation | variation of each symbol row | line | column 1153a-1153c is restarted from the state which this decoration symbol 1153 stopped temporarily. At this time, the number of lottery holds shown in the hold display area 1150 is maintained without being subtracted. In this embodiment, the temporary stop (interval) of the decorative pattern 1153 is 1
It is executed for 000 ms.

Then, the variation display effect for the decorative pattern 1153 is again changed to “shortened variation 1” of variation number 2.
”(7000 ms), and after executing, the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153
The variation in which each stop symbol of b and the right symbol row 1153c stops at a different symbol that is not related at all corresponds to the above-mentioned variation number 24 “out of two consecutive effects” (15000 ms). on the other hand,
When the variation pattern with variation numbers 25-39 is selected and executed in the external normal gaming state in which the release extension function is not activated, the stop symbol in the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol in the right symbol row 1153c are the same, The display device 115 displays a screen for deriving reach (
(See FIG. 92D). After that, based on various fluctuation patterns, the above-mentioned “music reach production”
The same reach production is executed.

Thus, based on one hold related to the lottery result of the special symbol, the effect display mode in which the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 based on the “shortening variation 1” of the variation number 2 is performed continuously twice is “continuous rendering”. It's called “Twice production”. In other words, during one variation of the special symbol based on one hold, the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 based on the “shortening variation 1” of the variation number 2 is performed pseudo twice. Similarly, based on one hold related to the lottery result of the special symbol, the effect display mode in which the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 based on the “shortening variation 1” of the variation number 2 is performed three times in succession is “continuous rendering 3 "Direction".

Specifically, the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variation number 6 is performed after the “continuous effect twice effect” is equivalent to the variable number 25 “continuous effect twice / A music reach / long miss” The effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variation number 7 is performed after the “continuous effect twice effect” corresponds to the variable number 26 “continuous effect twice / A music reach / long”. An effect display mode in which a reach effect similar to the variation number 9 is performed after “continuous effect twice effect”
It corresponds to the variation number 27 “continuous production twice, A music reach, per super long”. Similarly, the effect display modes in which the reach effect similar to the change numbers 10 to 21 after the “continuous effect twice effect” is performed correspond to the change patterns of the change numbers 28 to 39, respectively. Also,"
The effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the change number 9 is performed after the “3 consecutive effects” is equivalent to the change number 40 “continuous effect 3 times / A music reach / very long”. Similarly, the effect display modes in which the reach effect similar to the change numbers 10 to 21 is performed after the “continuous effect 3 times effect” correspond to the change patterns of the change numbers 41 to 52, respectively.

[Specific conditions when opening extension function is not activated, special effect per short hit]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an effect display mode that is executed when a specific condition is established in the external normal gaming state or when a short win (first short open big hit and second short open big hit) is won. The “specific condition establishment / short win special effect” will be described. The “special effect” is an effect display mode for deriving that a specific “win” is won in a special mode without going through the derivation of reach establishment by the decorative symbol 1153.

93 and 94 are diagrams showing an effect display mode derived to the effect display device when a specific condition is established in the external normal game state or when a short open jackpot is won.
That is, FIG. 93A is a diagram showing an aspect before the start of variation of the decorative symbol, FIG. 93B is a diagram illustrating an aspect during the variation of the decorative symbol, and FIG. 93C is a diagram illustrating the ranking board. FIG. 93D is a diagram showing a branch effect using the image, and FIG. 93D is a diagram showing a branch effect in which the character's costume is converted. FIG. 94A shows a branching effect in which the character's costume is converted following FIG. 93D, and FIG. 94B shows the effect in which the character's costume is converted into a dress (white). FIG. 94 shows an example, FIG. 94C shows an effect screen in the time limit mode, FIG. 94D shows an example of an effect in which a character's costume is converted into a dress (red), FIG.
4 (E) is a diagram showing an effect screen in the promotion mode, FIG. 94 (F) is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a character's costume is converted into a space suit, and FIG. 94 (G) is a winner of the jackpot It is a figure which shows the production | presentation screen which derives.

First, as before, the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed before the change starts (FIG. 93).
(Refer to (A)), the variation of the decorative pattern 1153 is executed from this state (see FIG. 93 (B)). Then, while the decoration symbol 1153 is being changed, as shown in FIG. 93C, the effect display device 115 displays the image imitating the ranking board by switching to the normal background image. Further, as shown in FIGS. 93 (D) and 94 (A), the effect display device 115 provides an effect display in which the character's costume is converted into one of a plurality of patterns of costumes on the stage, After that, decorative design 1153 (special design 10
00, 1002) is stopped and displayed in a “out” manner. 93D and FIG.
The previous mode is derived from the costume finally worn by the character by the effect display shown in 4 (A).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), when the character's costume is converted into a dress (white) by the effects shown in FIGS. 93 (D) and 94 (A), the variation number 53 “ Corresponds to “specific conditions established / per special variation”. And this "specific condition establishment / special fluctuation per"
Is an effect display mode that is selected and executed when a specific condition is satisfied in the special symbol lottery process or when the second short open jackpot is won. Therefore, after the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 based on the establishment of the specific condition or the winning of the second short opening jackpot, the gaming state shifts to the “time limit mode” described above as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 94 (D), when the costume of the character is converted into a dress (red) by the effects shown in FIG. 93 (D) and FIG. 94 (A), “2R jackpot / It corresponds to “per special variation”. The “2R jackpot / special variation hit” is an effect display mode that is selected and executed when the first short opening jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process. Therefore, after the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 based on the first short open jackpot, the gaming state shifts to the above-described “promotion mode” as shown in FIG.

In this way, in the “specific condition establishment / short hit special effect” when the extended extension is not activated according to the present embodiment, an effect display in a special mode different from the above-described normal variation, reach effect, and the like is performed. Then, the player can grasp that the specific condition is established or the short-open jackpot is won without depending on the stop symbol of the decorative design 1153, while the specific condition is established or the second
In the case of winning a short open jackpot, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the “time limit mode” by not being able to grasp which one has been won.

By the way, in the present embodiment, “15R big hit / special change re-variation per” of the variation number 55 is provided as “special effect” different from other variation patterns other than “specific condition establishment / short hit special effect”. Yes. This "15R jackpot / special change per change" is the first
It is a fluctuation pattern that is confirmed to be won by the long open jackpot, and has significance as a premier production with a very low appearance rate.

In the effect display mode based on the variation number 55 “15R jackpot / special variation re-variation”, the same effect as the variation number 53 “specific condition fulfillment / special variation re-variation” (see FIG. 76)
In the effect display device 115, “decline” is once derived by the decorative symbol 1153. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 94 (F), when the costume of the character is converted into a space suit after the re-variation by the decorative design 1153, the “big hit” is given by the specific design.
Is derived, an effect screen for deriving the winning of “big hit” is displayed as shown in FIG. 94 (G).

Thus, the variation number 55 “15R jackpot / special variation re-variation per” has the following significance as well as a mere premier effect. In other words, by making the variation mode of winning (first long open big hit) and deviating (satisfaction of the specific condition) the most valuable for the player, the variation mode is very similar or identical to each other, so The player can be given great surprise and joy by deriving that the first long open jackpot has been won by re-variation while discouraging the player that the specific condition is satisfied.

[Low-expectation fluctuation and double fluctuation effect when opening extension function is activated]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the external advantageous gaming state is being executed, it is an effect display mode for deriving a disengagement as a lottery result without accompanying a high expectation effect. An explanation will be given of “off-change” and “twice-change effect” which is an effect display mode in which the “open extension extended / low expected off-change” is executed twice in a pseudo manner.

FIG. 95 shows the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means or the second in the external advantageous gaming state.
It is a figure which shows the production | presentation display aspect in the case of deriving the lottery result by the special symbol lottery means to the production display device. That is, FIG. 95 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of a decorative pattern 1153 before the start of variation, FIG. 95 (B) is a diagram illustrating an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 during variation, and FIG. 95 (C) is a variation number. 5
FIG. 95 (D) is a diagram showing a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 1153 based on “57 during opening extension / normal fluctuation” and “fluctuation during opening extension / shortening fluctuation” of FIG. 2
FIG. 95 (E) is a diagram showing a stop mode based on “during extended extension / twice out of fluctuation” of the decorative pattern 1153, and FIG. 95 (F) is a diagram showing a special light emission effect. .

As described above, in the external advantageous gaming state (when the opening extension function is activated), the effect display device 1
In FIG. 15, the silhouette of the character is displayed on the black background image, and the symbols constituting the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) are displayed on the card-like display on which the character is drawn. The switching changes so that appears alternately (however, the scrolling changes in the pull-back mode). Thus, by adopting a display mode in which the decorative symbols 1153 and the background image are greatly different from the external normal game state (when the open extension function is not activated), the player can play the external advantageous game state (when the open extension function is activated). It is possible to clearly grasp that and to give a sense of superiority.

First, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed before the change starts. Further, for example, in the hold display area 1150, the hold storage display portions 1151a to 1151d,
Reference numerals 1152a to 1152b denote the second display mode or the third display mode, and the number of lottery holds by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (counter value by the first special symbol hold counter 903).
And the number of lotteries held by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (second special symbol hold counter 91
It is shown that the total of the counter value by 3) is six. In the following, according to the holding order by each special symbol lottery means 900, 910, the symbol variation based on the lottery suspension by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (change display of the first special symbol) and the second special symbol lottery means 910 Symbol variation based on the lottery suspension (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), when the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is started in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), each symbol row 1153a to 1153.
In 3c, the variable display effect is performed in such a manner that each symbol is switched on the spot. And FIG.
C), the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c.
An effect display mode in which “stop” is derived by stopping at approximately the same timing in different symbols that are completely unrelated to each stop symbol of “open extension extended / low expected loss variation” in the present embodiment.
The “open extension / low expected deviation fluctuation” corresponds to the fluctuation number 56 “open extension / normal fluctuation” or the fluctuation number 57 “open extension / short fluctuation”. In the same way as described above, the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002 are also stopped and displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol 1153 after the symbol variation, and the lottery result of each special symbol is derived.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the special symbol lottery process is not performed when the opening extension function is activated, whether or not to execute the effect display mode with the reach effect is selected (high expectation effect lottery). . Next, when the lottery is not won in the high expectation effect lottery, “open extension extended / low expectation fluctuation” is selected and executed in accordance with the number of pending lotteries.

More specifically, in the case of performing “open extension extended / low expectation fluctuation” for the first special symbol, the number of lots to be held by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (count value by the first special symbol hold counter 903) However, if it is 0 or 1 on the basis of post-holding digestion, “Opening extension / normal fluctuation” of variation number 56 is selected and executed, and if it is 2 or 3 on the basis of post-digestion, variation number 57 is selected. “Opening extended / shortening fluctuation” is selected and executed. The same applies to the case of performing “low expected disappointment fluctuation when the extended extension function is activated” for the second special symbol based on the number of lotteries held by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 913). The variation pattern is selected and executed. Note that the variation number 57 “opening extension / shortening variation” is set to have a shorter variation time of the special symbol than the variation number 56 “opening extension / normal variation”.
Also, the variation number 56 of “opening extension / normal variation” and the variation number 57 of “opening extension / shortening variation” are both changed to the symbol rows 1153a to 1153 after the decoration symbol 1153 changes.
When c stops, the symbol pattern 1153a on the left is displayed for the variation number 56 "Under extended extension / normal variation".
The right symbol row 1153c and the middle symbol row 1153b are stopped in this order. On the other hand, the variation number 57 of “opening extended / shortening variation” is the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b.
Differ in that they stop almost simultaneously.

Similar to the external normal gaming state, the hold display area 1150 is displayed when the special symbol starts to change.
1 is subtracted from the number of lottery holds shown in FIG.
The display modes in 51d and 1152a to 1152b are shifted and displayed on the respective previous storage storage display sections 1151a to 1151d and 1152a. Further, the display mode of the sixth reserved storage display unit 1152b is set to the first display mode or non-display. Thus, in the hold display area 1150, one lottery hold by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or one lottery hold by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is digested, and the total number of these holds is five. It is shown.

On the other hand, after the variation display of the decoration symbol 1153 based on the variation number 57 “during open extension / shortening variation” is performed (see FIG. 95B), the symbol columns 1153a to 1153c are stopped and displayed with different symbols. Although “displacement” is derived (see FIG. 95C), the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped (interval) in which the symbol variation in the special symbol corresponding symbol 1000, 1002 is continuously performed. (“Extended opening, twice off”, etc.) In this case, as shown in FIG. 95 (D), the decoration pattern 1153 is changed based on the “opening extension / shortening fluctuation” of the fluctuation number 57 again from the state where the decoration symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped. At this time, the number of lottery holds shown in the hold display area 1150 is maintained without being subtracted. In addition,
In the present embodiment, the temporary stop (interval) of the decorative symbol 1153 is executed for 1000 msec.

Then, after the second decoration pattern 1153 shown in FIG. 95 (D) is changed, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 5 (E), the fluctuation in which each of the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c stops at a different symbol that is not related at all corresponds to the fluctuation number 58 “during extension of extension / off twice fluctuation”. On the other hand, in the external advantageous game state in which the opening extension function is activated, when the variation pattern of the variation numbers 59 to 96 is selected and executed, the “special light emission effect” shown in FIG. Is executed. This “special light emission effect” is an effect for deriving the occurrence of reach when the open extension function is activated, and in the effect display device 115, an image effect in which a plurality of lights extend radially from the center of the screen toward the outer edge. At the same time, various illuminations provided in the game effect unit 4 are controlled to emit light in conjunction with the image effect.

Note that the variation number 58 “extended extension / twenty variation out” is a variation pattern that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of play in the external advantageous gaming state and the lottery of the high expectation effect lottery is won. It is. In other words, in the external advantageous game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out and the high-expected production lottery is won, the variation number 58 “Extended opening extended / Fluctuated twice” is selected. If this is done, reach will not be established and “displacement” will be derived.

By the way, in the external normal game state in which the opening extension function does not operate, the probability that a continuous effect is performed when the jackpot is not won is set to be very low, as described above, 40/10500 to 40/15000. . On the other hand, in the external advantageous gaming state, the probability that a continuous effect (two-time fluctuation deviation) is performed when the jackpot is not won is set relatively high as 752/14000 as described above. In this way, by providing “out of fluctuation twice”,
In the external advantageous game state, the continuous variation of “out” is frequently performed, and it can be seen that the variation is performed without interruption of the lottery hold. In particular, as shown in FIG.
The fluctuation time when the result of the special symbol lottery in the external advantageous gaming state is out is shorter than the fluctuation time when the result of the special symbol lottery in the external normal gaming state is out (the number of holdings is the same) Suppose). Therefore, by increasing the frequency at which the continuous performance is performed in the external advantageous gaming state than the frequency at which the continuous performance is performed in the external normal gaming state,
It is possible to suppress the suspension of the suspended display due to interruption of the hold, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the external advantageous gaming state.

By the way, in the external advantageous gaming state, every time a high-expected production lottery is won even though the special symbol lottery result is out, an effect display mode based on a variation pattern with a long variation time, such as establishment of reach, was performed. In such a case, the time required for the next lottery process after the lottery process is performed cannot be shortened, and the player can fully enjoy the merit (such as high lottery efficiency) in the external advantageous gaming state. It becomes impossible to feel (enjoy). In this respect, the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed after the special symbol is variably displayed until the special symbol is stopped.
If the player is appealed to the possibility of being a continuous production as if the variable display production is performed multiple times, the player will have a high expectation of winning the jackpot in a short time. I can suggest. In this way, if the direct performance is performed in such a way as to positively suggest the player with a high expectation degree to the jackpot, many lotteries will be made before the jackpot is won in the external advantageous game state. Even if processing must be performed, the interest of the game can be suitably maintained while maintaining the lottery efficiency. In other words, even if the high-expectation effect lottery is won, it is possible to make it appear that the shortening variation is being performed smoothly and quickly by making it possible to frequently select “twice out of fluctuation”.

For example, as shown in FIG. 95 (B) and FIG. 95 (D), a character imitating a UFO is approached from the back side of the screen to the near side on the effect display device 115 during the variable display of the decorative symbol 1153. It may be displayed in an enlarged manner (UFO effect). Then, in FIG. 95B (first pseudo variation), it is suggested that the UFO effect has a high expectation that the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 will be performed again without stopping the variation display of the special symbol. (That is, the degree of expectation that the “twice fluctuation effect” is performed increases). Note that this UFO effect may be performed even though the above-described continuous effect is not performed (so-called “gase effect”). Also, in FIG. 95D (second pseudo variation), when this UFO effect is performed, it is shown that the degree of expectation that the “special light emission effect” will be executed thereafter is high (that is, reach occurs). Expectation increases). In other words, in the external advantageous gaming state of the present embodiment (when the extended extension function is activated), it is necessary that the “special light emission effect” is always performed via the “twice fluctuation effect” (and the jackpot is further increased). Derived condition). For this reason, when UFO effects are continuously generated, the expectation that a jackpot is derived increases, and the player can be thrilled to suppress a decrease in interest.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned continuous effect may be performed without going through the UFO effect. That is, when continuous display is performed in such a manner, it can be difficult to detect that the “twice variation effect” is being performed as viewed from the player, and based on the “twice variation effect”. It becomes possible to make the pseudo two-time fluctuation appear to be different independent fluctuations (that is, fluctuations based on different lottery suspensions), so that the lottery efficiency can be improved. .

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect display mode with the reach effect is not selected by the lottery in the external advantageous game state (when the extension extension function is activated), the “open extension extension / low expected disappointment” As the “variation”, variation number 56 of “opening extension / normal variation” or variation number 57 of “opening extension / shortening variation” is executed according to the number of reserved special symbols. And in view of the fact that the lottery hold tends to increase in the external advantageous game state, if the number of held balls for each special symbol is large, a variation pattern with a very short variation time will be selected. This can suppress the decline in interest.

On the other hand, if the suspension of the special symbol is promoted in the external advantageous gaming state, the suspension of each special symbol is completely digested, resulting in a period in which the decorative symbol 1153 is not displayed in a variable manner, leading to a decrease in interest. There is a fear. Therefore, by increasing the rate at which “Extended Opening / Twice Fluctuation” is selected and executed, it is possible to make the decorative symbol 1153 easily changeable regardless of the number of lottery reservations. The decrease can be suppressed.

When the variation patterns with the variation numbers 59 to 96 are selected and executed, after the “special lighting effect”, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c stop at the same symbol and only the middle symbol row 1153b changes. In addition, the symbol variation is continuously executed in each of the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002. Then, as described below, reach effects based on various variation patterns are executed.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the external advantageous gaming state is being executed, it is an effect display mode in which “open extension extended / low expected deviation fluctuation” is executed in a pseudo manner twice. The description will be given with reference to FIG. 96 regarding “opening extension and deviation twice fluctuation” (variation number 58). FIG. 96 is a timing chart showing the control mode when the effect control related to the above-mentioned “during extended extension / displacement twice” is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), at the timing t1, the number of lottery processes in which the hold is released and put on hold is, for example, “4” to “3”. If it becomes, in the special symbol indicators 84 and 86, the variable display about a special symbol is started. The variation display of the special symbol is continuously performed until the timing t4 when 5000 ms has elapsed since the variation display was started. At this timing t4, the special symbol variation display is stopped so that it can be recognized that it is out of place.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 115, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), the variable display effect for a plurality of decorative symbols 1153 is started at the timing t1. However,
At the timing t2 when 2000 ms has elapsed since the start of this variable display effect,
The plurality of decorative symbols 1153 that have been subjected to the variable display effect are in a temporarily stopped state (display mode that makes it appear as if it has completely stopped) even though the special symbol variation display is continued (
The first variation display effect that is simulated). The temporary stop state (interval) is “10”.
At the timing t3 when only “00 ms” is maintained, the variable display effects of the plurality of temporarily stopped decorative symbols 1153 are resumed (second variable display effect) even though the hold is not released. Then, at a timing t4 when 2000 ms has elapsed since the restart of the variable display effect, the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are stopped (completely stopped) in such a manner that it is suggested to the player that they are out of place ( Second variation display effect simulated). As described above, both the simulated first and second variation display effects are performed for the same time as the time (2000 ms) required for “opening extension / shortening variation” (variation number 57). .

As described above, in the case of “open extension extended / off twice fluctuation” (variation number 58), the special symbol indicators 84 and 86 display the special symbol during the period from when the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. However, the effect control is performed so that the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are subjected to the variable display effect in the shortened variable display mode twice. Accordingly, for example, when the player is made aware that such a continuous effect is being performed by a notice effect such as the above-mentioned UFO effect, the “opening extension / normal” Time (5000 ms) shorter than the time required for “variation” (7000 ms)
ms), it is possible to indicate to the player that the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than “during opening extension / normal fluctuation”. And when a highly anticipated performance is performed in an external advantageous game state, this “extended extension, twice fluctuation deviation” (variation number 58) should be actively adopted with a probability (752/1000) exceeding 50%. Therefore, it is possible to greatly reduce the time required for the next lottery process from being performed after the lottery process is performed while performing highly anticipated performances at a high frequency. The above-described lottery efficiency in the gaming state can be appropriately improved. In other words, by proactively adopting such “during open extension / deviating twice fluctuation” (variation number 58), high-expected performances are played at the same frequency in the external advantageous game state and the external normal game state. Even if it becomes unfortunate in the external advantageous gaming state and many lottery processes have to be performed before the jackpot is won, the interest of the game is suitably maintained.

Further, the time (2000 ms) required for the first (and the second) fluctuating display effect to be simulated is actually performed when the number of holds is large, “opening extended / shortening fluctuation” (variation number 57).
) And the same amount of time. For this reason, for example, if the player does not appeal to the player that such a continuous effect is being performed, such as not performing the UFO effect, the player may perform a lottery process in a pending state. Even when the number of processes (the number of holdings) is small, the illusion is that a variable display effect is being executed in a situation where the number of holdings is large. In other words, even if there is a situation in which a game ball is not easily entered into the start opening 600, 602, 604 in spite of being in an external advantageous game state, such a continuous effect is performed. The player feels as if the game balls are successively inserted into the start ports 600, 602, and 604, and a decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed.

[Reach production when the open extension function is activated]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a music reach effect that is an effect display mode with reach when the external advantageous game state is executed will be described. This music reach effect is a mode in which a win or miss is derived as a lottery result after performing a reach effect using a part or all of a predetermined music.

After the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” (see FIG. 95 (F)), the reach is derived by the decorative symbol 1153, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 6 is performed is “ Equivalent to “Extended Opening / A Music Reach / Long”, and the effect display mode in which the same reach effect as the change number 7 is performed corresponds to “Open Extension Extended / A Song Reach / Long”, The effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to that of the variable number 8 is performed corresponds to the variable number 63 “opening extension / A music reach / extra-long out”, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 9 is performed. Corresponds to a variable number 64 “Opening extension, A music reach, per super long”.

In addition, the same reach effect as “Opening extension / A music reach / long” is performed, and after “decreased” is derived in a manner in which the symbol is shifted by one frame by the decorative symbol 1153, the frame is shifted by one frame. The symbol is scrolled backward by one frame to “big hit” (so-called return)
The effect display mode from which “” is derived corresponds to the variation number 61 “Opening extended, A music reach, per long return”. In addition, the same reach production as “Opening extension / A music reach / long” is performed, and after “decreased” is once derived by the decorative symbol 1153, the decorative symbol 1153 is re-varied, The so-called effect display mode from which “so-called per change” is derived corresponds to the change number 62 “opening extended, A music reach, per long change”. In addition, a reach production similar to “Opening extension / A music reach / Super long” is performed, and an effect display mode in which “Big hit” is derived in the form of re-variation is “Changed to open extension”.・ Equivalent to “A song reach / per-long change”.

In addition, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” is made, the reach is derived by the decorative design 1153, and the effect display device 115 displays the singing effect of the character unique to the E musical piece, and the speakers 144 and 341 provide the E The first half of the music may be output as audio. The effect display mode in which “off” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the E music is executed corresponds to “open extension extended, E music reach, short out” of the variation number 66. On the other hand, after the singing production using the first half of the E music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is the variation number 67 “Opening extension / E music reach / short hits” Is equivalent to. Furthermore, the singing effect using the first half of the E music is executed and the decorative design 1153 is performed.
After the temporary stop, the decoration pattern 1153 is resumed, and the effect display device 115 continues to perform the singing effect of the character and the speaker 14.
From 4,341, audio may be output so that the second half of the E music is continuous from the first half.
The effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the latter half of the E music is executed corresponds to the variation number 68 of “Open extension extended / E music reach / developed out”. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the latter half of this E music is performed, the effect display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is the variable number 69 “Opening extended, E music reach, per development” Is equivalent to.

Here, in the reach effect in which the singing effect using the above-described E music is executed, unlike the reach effect in which the singing effect using another music is executed, the symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1153 is “3”.
"And" 5 ". That is, the “big hit” derived after the reach effect is executed is limited to the first long open big hit. In other words, when the “big hit” is derived by the reach effect in which the singing effect using the E music is executed, the first long open jackpot that is most advantageous to the player is determined, and thus the reach effect is executed. And the player's expectations are greatly increased, and the interest is improved.

Further, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” is made, the reach is derived by the decorative pattern 1153, and the effect display device 115 displays the singing effect of the character unique to the F music, and from the speakers 144 and 341, F The first half of the music may be output as audio. The effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the F music is executed corresponds to “open extension extended, F music reach, normal out” of the variation number 70. On the other hand, after the singing production using the first half of this F music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is the variable number 71 “Opening extension / F music reach / normal win” Is equivalent to. In addition, while the reach effect similar to “Opening extension / F music reach / normal” is performed, the effect display mode in which “big hit” is derived in the form of re-variation,
Corresponds to the change number 72 “Opening extension / F music reach / normal re-variation”.

Further, after the singing effect using the first half of the F music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is resumed, and the effect display device 11
5, the singing performance of the character is continuously executed, and voices may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 so that the second half of the F music is continuous from the first half. After the singing production using the latter half of this F-music is performed, the production display mode from which “out” is derived is “various open 76, F music reach, development outage 2 (double only)” And variable number 7
Equivalent to “Open extension extended, F music reach, development failure 3”. On the other hand, after the singing production using the latter half of this F-music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is the variable number 73 “Opening extension, F-music reach, per development” 1 ”, variable number 75“ Opening extension, F music reach, 2 per development (only for triples) ”and variable number 77“
Equivalent to 3 "per extension / F music reach / development. In addition, while the reach production similar to “Opening extension / F music reach / development” is performed, the effect display mode in which “Big hit” is derived in the form of return is the variation number 74 “Opening extension / F Equivalent to 1 ”per song reach / return.

Here, in the reach effect in which the singing effect using the F music is executed, unlike the reach effect in which the singing effect using another music is executed, the reach arrangement by the decorative pattern 1153 (
Line) may be 2 lines (double) or 3 lines (triple). Thus, by arranging a plurality of reach arrangements (lines) based on the decorative symbols 1153, it is possible to give the player an impression that “big hit” is easily derived. In other words, in the reach production in which the singing production using the F music is executed, the player's expectation for the “big hit” is significantly higher than the reach production in which the singing production using the other music is executed. Will improve.

Further, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” has been made, the reach is derived by the decorative symbol 1153, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 49 is performed is “open extension extended / D music” The effect display mode corresponding to “Reach / Normal Out” and the same reach effect as the variation number 50 corresponds to the variation number 80 “During extension extended / D music reach / long” and the same as the variation number 51 The effect display mode in which the reach effect is performed is the variable number 8
Equivalent to “Open extension extended / D music reach / development” of No. 2, the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the change number 52 is performed is “No extension extension / D music reach / per development” Equivalent to. In addition, while the reach production similar to “During opening extension / D music reach / normal” is performed, the effect display mode in which “big hit” is derived in the form of re-variation,
Corresponds to a variable number 81 “During opening extension / D music reach / normal re-variation”. In addition, the same reach production as “Opening extension / D music reach / development” is performed, and the effect display mode in which “Big hit” is derived in the form of re-variation is the variation number 84 “Opening extension / D music reach / per-developed change.

Here, as described above, in the external normal gaming state (when the opening extension function is not activated)
Among D music pieces, the reach production in which the singing production using the D music piece is executed has the highest expectation for “big hit”. Therefore, even in the external advantageous gaming state (when the opening extension function is activated), when the reach effect is performed in which the singing effect using the D music is performed, the expectation to “big hit” is high, In the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, the player can give an impression that the D music is a music having a special value. Furthermore, the above-described “elevation mode” is also a game mode in which the D music is used as a motif, so that the D music can further have significance as a special music that improves a player's expectation.

In addition, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” has been made, the reach is derived by the decorative design 1153, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 22 is performed is the variable number 85 “Opening extended / G music” An effect display mode in which a reach effect similar to that of the variable number 23 is performed corresponds to “reach out of reach” and a variable number 86 “opening extension / G music reach / per full rotation”.

Here, there is “medley reach” that performs a singing effect using a plurality of music pieces as a special music reach effect when the opening extension function is activated. Hereinafter, “medley reach” will be described.

First, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” has been made, the effect display device 115 displays an introduction image to “medley reach”, and the reach is derived by the decorative symbol 1153. Further, in the effect display device 115, after the introductory image to the A song is displayed, the singing effect of the character unique to the A song is displayed, and the speakers 144 and 341 receive the A song.
The music introduction part or the first half part is output as audio. The effect display mode in which “winning” is derived after the singing effect using the introduction part or the first half of the A music piece is executed is “
Corresponding to “Opening extension / medley reach / short (A song)” or “88.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 115, the reach effect using the A musical piece is immediately interrupted, and A
While switching from the introduction image to the music to the introduction image to the B music, the speaker 14
In some cases, B music is output from 4,341 instead of A music. And in the production | presentation display apparatus 115, while showing the singing production | presentation of the character peculiar to B music, the speaker 1 is displayed.
From 44 and 341, the introduction part or the first half part of the B music is output as audio. The effect display mode in which “winning” is derived after the singing production using the introduction part or the first half of the B music is executed is “various opening 89, medley reach, short hit (B music) ”Or variable number 90“ Opening extension / medley reach / win (B music) ”.

In addition, in the effect display device 115, the reach effect using the B music is immediately interrupted.
The introductory image to the music is switched to the introductory image to the C music, and the speaker 14 is displayed.
From C.4,341, C music may be output instead of B music. And in the production | presentation display apparatus 115, while showing the singing production | presentation of the character intrinsic | native to C music, the speaker 1
From 44 and 341, the introduction part or the first half part of the C music is output as audio. The effect display mode in which “winning” is derived after the singing production using the introduction part or the first half part of the C music is executed is the variable number 91 “opening extended / medley reach / short (C music) ”Or the variable number 92“ Opening extension / medley reach / win (C music) ”.

In addition, in the effect display device 115, the reach effect using the C music is interrupted immediately,
While switching from the introduction image to the music to the introduction image to the D music, the speaker 14
In some cases, D music is output from 4,341 instead of C music. And in the production | presentation display apparatus 115, while showing the singing production | presentation of the character peculiar to D music, the speaker 1 is displayed.
From 44 and 341, the introduction part or the first half part of the D music is output as audio. The effect display mode in which “winning” is derived after the singing production using the introduction part or the first half part of the D music is executed is the variable number 93 “During opening extension / medley reach / short (D music) ”Or“ Opening extension, Medley reach, Winning (D music) ”with a variation number of 94.

It should be noted that after the above-mentioned “Medley Reach” has been performed, the effect display mode in which “Remove” is finally derived corresponds to “Opening extension / Medley Reach / Detach” of the variation number 95. Also,
After the above “Medley Reach” has been made, the effect display mode in which “Large Bonus” is derived in the form of re-variation is the change number 96 “Opening Extension, Medley Reach, Per Re-variation”
It corresponds to.

In this way, in the external advantageous gaming state, the reach effect is always displayed on the special symbol indicators 84 and 86 only once after the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. Nevertheless, the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are performed after the variable display effect is performed twice in the shortened variable display mode. In particular, the time required for the “change during opening / shortening change” (variation number 57) that is actually performed when the number of holdings is large (first change display effect before the second reach effect is simulated) (change number 57) 2000 ms) for the same amount of time. For this reason, for example, the UFO production is not performed,
When such a continuous effect is performed without appealing to the player, the player can perform two variable display effects separately based on one hold. I can see. Furthermore, when a highly variable display effect such as a reach effect is performed, based on one hold, the variable symbol 1153 is displayed in a pseudo and continuous manner several times.
At the time of the reach production, the variation time of the decorative symbol 1153 becomes longer, and the occurrence of a state where there is no lottery suspension can be suppressed.

By the way, in the external advantageous game state (when the opening extension function is activated), even if a specific condition is established in the lottery process of the special symbol, or the first short opening big hit or the second short opening big hit is won,
The gaming state after the opening / closing device 500 is opened / closed is maintained in the external advantageous gaming state (when the opening extension function is activated). Therefore, even if the specific condition is satisfied or the first short opening jackpot or the second short opening jackpot is won, a substantially similar effect display mode is derived without distinguishing the winning type. That is, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” is made, an effect screen showing that the specific condition is established in the effect display device 115, or that the first short-open big hit or the second short-open big win is won. In addition to being displayed, the effect display mode from which “displacement” is derived is the variable number 97 “opening extension / specific condition established / per normal fluctuation” or the fluctuation number 98 “opening extension / 2R big hit / per normal fluctuation” Is equivalent to.

In addition, the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the change number 55 is performed after the above-described “special light emission effect” is performed corresponds to the change number 99 “opening extended, 15R big hit, normal change per change” To do.

[Special lighting effects]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the details of the above-described “special light emission effect” executed as a part of the effect display mode based on a predetermined variation pattern will be described. this"
As described above, the “special light emission effect” is a part of the effect display mode when the effect display mode based on the change pattern (specifically, the change patterns 59 to 99) for performing the reach effect when the open extension function is operated is executed. Always be executed as. The “special light emission effect” is executed by the effect control means 962 included in the peripheral control board 810 described above, similarly to the effect display mode based on each variation pattern.

In this embodiment, in the external advantageous gaming state (when the opening extension function is activated), if this “special light emission effect” is executed during the special symbol variation display, the expectation for “big hit” is always high. It develops into a unique reach production (so-called super reach). In other words, since the “special lighting effect” functions as an effect for notifying that so-called super reach will be executed,
When the “special lighting effect” is executed, the player's interest in the lottery result is greatly increased.

Similarly, even in the external normal gaming state (when the opening extension function is not activated), when the effect display mode based on the variation pattern (specifically, the variation patterns 24 to 52) with the n-times continuous effect is executed, It may be executed as a part of the effect display mode. In this case, when this “special light emission effect” is executed during the special symbol variation display, it is preferable that the degree of expectation to develop into the above-described super reach increases. As a result, when the “special lighting effect” is executed, the interest of the game is increased, but even if the “special lighting effect” is executed, the “big hit” is derived so that it may not be developed into a super reach. There is no overshooting of reach production.

In the following, the “special light emission effect” executed using substantially the entire front of the game effect unit 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be concretely focused on the relationship with the structure of the pachinko machine 1 (particularly, the game effect unit 4). Explained. 97 and 98 are front views of the game effect unit when the “special light emission effect” is being executed.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, at a position that can be visually recognized from the front side of the game effect unit 4, an effect display device 115 that executes a “special light emission effect” and a plurality of illumination devices (that is,
An LED substrate 535) is disposed behind the game panel 409 so as to be able to produce effects. In detail, the effect display device 115 is provided so as to be displayed in the approximate center in a size that occupies almost the entire game area 20 when viewed from the player (that is, in front view). In addition, this effect display device 1
In addition to the plurality of LED substrates 535a to 535j, other electrical decoration devices, ornamental accessories, and the like are arranged on the outer peripheral side of 15.

Here, the LED boards 535a, 5 are counterclockwise from above the effect display device 115.
35k, 535b, 535c, and 535d are arranged at substantially equal intervals along the effect display device 115, and light-like decorative bodies 520a, 520b, 52 having LED boards (not shown).
0c, 520d, and 520e are arranged in this order. Behind the gaming panel 409,
As the blade-type decorative bodies 530 that cover the LED substrates 535a, 535b, 535c, and 535d, blade-type decorative bodies 530a, 530b, 530c, and 530d are provided, respectively. On the other hand, on the front side of the game panel 409, the feather-shaped decorative body 6 that covers the LED substrate 535k.
32 is provided.

In addition, the LED boards 535e and 535f are clockwise from above the effect display device 115.
, 535g, 535h, 535i, and 535j are arranged at substantially equal intervals along the effect display device 115, and light-like decorative bodies 520g and 520f having LED substrates (not shown) are sequentially arranged. In addition, on the front side of the game panel 409, each LED board 535e, 5
As the blade-type decorative bodies 630 that cover 35f, 535g, 535h, 535i, and 535j, blade-type decorative bodies 630a, 630b, 630c, 630d, 630e, and 630f are provided, respectively.

Further, on the front side of the game panel 409, a feather-shaped decorative body 630a and a feather-shaped decorative body 630 are provided.
A disk-shaped accessory 590, which is a large decorative accessory, is provided behind the game panel 409 so as to be displayed in the game area 20 from between b. This disk-shaped accessory 590 also includes various electric ornaments 592, 594, 596 having LED substrates (not shown). As described above, the game effect unit 4 of the present embodiment, when viewed from the player (that is, in a front view), includes various types of illumination devices and decorative functions so as to surround the periphery of the effect display device 115 occupying the center. A structure in which an object or the like is displayed in the game area 20 is formed, and the following “special light emission effect” is executed using the substantially entire front surface of the game effect unit 4.

First, in the “special light emission effect”, the display area of the display area of the effect display device 115 is in the non-display state (dark state) while the special symbol change display (design change of the decorative pattern 1153) is being performed. The display is controlled. At the same time, various illumination devices (that is, the LED board 535) provided in the game effect unit 4 are also controlled to be turned off. As a result, almost the entire front area (that is, the game area 20) of the game effect unit 4 is in a dark state, and the player is strongly impressed by the image as if the game area 20 is in outer space.

97 and 98, display control of a predetermined optical vortex image 1160 is performed in the darkened display area of the effect display device 115. This optical vortex image 1160 is an effect image in a form in which a plurality of light bands extend radially from the substantially central position of the display area of the effect display device 115 toward the outer edge. More specifically, in the optical vortex image 1160, a plurality of light bands extending from the center of the screen to the outer edge are sequentially displayed so as to appear to rotate counterclockwise. Then, the player can play the game area 20 based on the light vortex image 1160 in which a plurality of light bands rotate in a spiral shape.
You will get the impression that you are warping the outer space imitated.

Here, when the optical vortex image 1160 is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 115, at least the LED substrate 535 that can be visually recognized in front view of the game effect unit 4 in conjunction with the optical vortex image 1160. The LED substrate 535 that is substantially positioned in the direction in which the plurality of light bands in the optical vortex image 1160 extend is controlled to be turned on. In addition, the optical vortex image 116 of this embodiment.
At 0, a band of light that does not correspond to any of the plurality of LED substrates 535 is also displayed.

Specifically, when the optical vortex image 1160 shown in FIG. 97 is displayed, the effect display device 11
The LED substrates 535a, 535d, 535f, 535j, and 535k positioned in the extending direction of the light band are controlled to be lighted in correspondence with the plurality of light bands extending to the outer edge of the display area 5. And the lighting mode of each of these LED boards 535 becomes visible via the blade-type decorative bodies 530, 630, and 632 which are electric decoration covers that respectively cover the LED boards 535. That is, here, the feather-shaped decorative bodies 530a, 530d, 630b, 630f, 6
32 becomes a light emission mode by lighting control of each LED board 535.

In a state where the optical vortex image 1160 shown in FIG. 98 is displayed following FIG. 97, in the same manner as described above, corresponding to the plurality of light bands extending to the outer edge of the display area of the effect display device 115,
LED substrates 535b, 535c, 535e, 535g located in the extending direction of the light band,
Lighting control of 535h and 535i is performed. And the feather-shaped decorative bodies 530b and 530
c, 630a, 630c, 630d, and 630e become light emission modes by lighting control of the LED substrates 535.

In the present embodiment, a gaming window 101 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 and can visually recognize the gaming area 20.
A lens cover 140 and various reflectors 122, 130 a, 130 are formed on the door frame 5 on which is formed.
A door lens unit 120 consisting of b is provided around the gaming window 101. And "
When the “special light emission effect” is executed, the illumination control in the door lens unit 120 is executed in conjunction with the effect display device 115 and the plurality of LED substrates 535. For example, the effect display device 11
The light emission / extinction control of the door lens unit 120 is performed at the timing synchronized with the light vortex image 1160 of 5 or the blinking mode of the LED substrate 535.

As described above, the “special light emission effect” is obtained by continuously expressing the plurality of light bands expressed in the light vortex image 1160 beyond the display area of the effect display device 115 by the plurality of LED substrates 535. In addition, the entire front of the game effect unit 4 is assumed to be an integrated effect area, and one continuous effect is realized in the effect area. That is, in the “special light emission effect”, the LED board 535 corresponding to a plurality of light bands in the light vortex image 1160 is controlled to be turned on, so that the light band is viewed from the player (ie, in front view). L
Since the lighting mode of the ED board 535 provides a continuous and integrated effect display, the appearance is grasped so that the integrated effect display is executed beyond the display area of the effect display device 115. in this way,"
The “special light emission effect” is performed over almost the entire front surface of the game effect unit 4 beyond the display area of the effect display device 115, and it is possible to express a planar spread of the effect that could not be realized in the past. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by giving a strong impression to the visual sense.

By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, a main game effect is performed by a liquid crystal display provided in the approximate center of the game area. Even if a plurality of illumination lamps are provided in the game area, these illumination lamps only provide auxiliary illumination effects, and are directly related to the display effects on the liquid crystal display. In general, it was carried out in a non-sexual manner. On the other hand, in the “special light emission effect” in the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 115 and the plurality of LED boards 535 are interlocked, so that the entire front surface of the game effect unit 4 is simulated as an integrated effect region. The production is performed. Therefore, the “special light emission effect” is the game effect unit 4
Therefore, it is possible to express a two-dimensional spread of effects that could not be realized in the past, and to give a strong impression to the player's vision and to suppress a decrease in interest.

In particular, in the “special light emission effect”, the display area of the effect display device 115 is darkened and the light vortex image 11 is displayed.
Since 60 is displayed and the plurality of LED boards 535 are controlled to be turned on, the player has the illusion that he is warping the outer space. In addition, "special lighting effect"
If the effect images such as the background and characters displayed on the effect display device 115 are different from each other before and after the execution of the game, whether the player has moved to a different place after warping the player Such an impression can be given. In this way, by changing the display mode triggered by the “special lighting effect”, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation and achievement rather than simply switching the display mode as in conventional gaming machines. Can do.

When executing the “special light emission effect”, it is preferable that the LED board (not shown) covered with the light-like decorative bodies 520a to 520g is also subjected to the electric decoration control different from that during the normal special symbol variation. For example, during normal special symbol variations, each light-like decorative body 520a ~
While the 520 g red lens body and the blue lens body blink alternately at predetermined intervals,
When the “special light emission effect” is executed, the red lens body and the blue lens body of each light-like decorative body 520a to 520g are simultaneously blinked at very short intervals, or each light-like decorative body 520a to 520g For example, the decorative bodies 520a to 520g are sequentially made to emit light in the counterclockwise direction. In this way, each of the light-like decorative bodies 520a is executed when the “special light emission effect” is executed.
By changing the light emission mode at ˜520 g, it is possible to improve the interest by giving a stronger impact to the player's vision.

By the way, as described above, when the variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process (S150) includes the “special light emission effect”, it is executed as a part of the effect display mode based on the change pattern. Therefore, in order to execute the “special lighting effect”, the “special lighting effect”
Is not required to be transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810, and the processing load is reduced.

Further, if the command for executing the “special light emission effect” is a dedicated command different from the command corresponding to each variation pattern, the effect display mode based on the variation pattern is being executed (specifically, the decoration pattern 1153 When the “special lighting effect” is executed during the fluctuation), a command for executing the “special lighting effect” needs to be transmitted separately at a predetermined timing separately from the command based on the fluctuation pattern. It becomes complicated. In that respect, if “special light emission effect” is executed as part of the effect display mode based on the fluctuation pattern, both various effect display modes and “special light emission effect” can be executed with only commands based on the change pattern. In addition, it is easy to execute the “special light emission effect” during execution of the effect display mode, and the processing load can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern is accompanied by a “special lighting effect”,
After the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 is interrupted and the “special light emission effect” is executed, the lottery result is derived by the stop display of the decorative symbol 1153. That is, since the “special light emission effect” is executed before the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed, it is possible to surprise the player with “Ah!” And attract interest. In particular, if the super reach is performed after the “special lighting effect” is executed, the “special lighting effect” is a notice to the super reach, and the player's interest is further attracted. ”Is executed, the development of the production can be watched, and the decrease in interest is suppressed.

Further, the effect display device 11 compares the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern 1153 before the “special light emission effect” is executed with the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol 1153 after the “special light emission effect” is executed.
If the effect images such as the background and character displayed in FIG. 5 are made different, it is possible to give the player the impression of moving to a different place after warping,
The development of super reach can be expected, and the interest can be further improved.

Next, the physical structure of various effect devices (effect display device 115, LED board 535, etc.) used for the “special light emission effect” in the game effect unit 4 will be described in more detail. As shown in FIG. 51 to FIG. 55, the game effect unit 4 has almost the entire area relative to the game area 20 (preferably about 2/3 to 3/4 of the game area 20) in the substantially front center. An effect display device 115 having such a size as to occupy is provided, and a plurality of LED substrates 535 are provided along the outer edge of the effect display device 115 on the front surface thereof. The effect display device 115 and the LED board 535 are both arranged behind the game panel 409 so that a predetermined effect can be executed.

That is, when viewed from the player (that is, in front view), the visible range (display area) of the effect display device 115 that is visible in the game area 20 via the game panel 409 is the game area 2.
0 is at least 2/3 or more. In addition, a plurality of LED boards 535 are provided adjacent to the effect display device 115 and on the outer peripheral side when viewed from the effect display device 115, and when viewed from the player (that is, in front view), each LED substrate 535 is a game panel. Through 409, the game area 20 is displayed so as not to overlap with the effect display device 115.

With such a structure, the center accessory 620, a plurality of obstacle nails, a windmill, and a start port 6
Various parts (front arrangement members) to be arranged in the game area 20 including 00, 602, 604, the out port 471, the opening / closing device 500, etc. are provided with the effect display device 115 and the LED board 535 on the rear side of the game panel 409. Can be appropriately arranged in the game area 20. That is,
These front-arranged members are various members (effect display device 1) arranged on the back side of the game panel 409.
15 and the LED board 535), the game area 20 can be arranged at any position, shape, size, and the like. And, regardless of the arrangement mode of the front arrangement member in the game area 20, the “special light emission effect” using the substantially entire front of the game effect unit 4 can be executed. That is, it has a structure that does not affect the “special light emission effect” executed on the back side of the game panel 409 no matter what position, shape, size, etc., the front arrangement member is arranged in the game area 20.

By the way, there has been conventionally known a gaming machine in which a game effect unit is provided with a liquid crystal display and an electric lamp, and an effect in which these are linked is performed. However, in such a gaming machine, the game area is inevitably narrowed as it is provided with a large liquid crystal display and a large number of illumination lamps. And while providing other parts (equivalent to a front arrangement member), such as an obstruction nail and a windmill, in a game field is restricted, a field where a game ball can flow down is limited. As a result, free design of the game production unit (game area) is hindered, and there is a problem that a gaming machine with high designability and high gameability cannot be realized. On the other hand, when the liquid crystal display is made smaller or the number of installation points of the illumination lamp is reduced, not only the display effect in the liquid crystal display and the illumination effect in the illumination lamp, , The visual impression given to the player was weak, and there was a problem that interest was lowered.

In this pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 115 for executing the “special light emission effect” and the LED board 535 are arranged behind the game panel 409, so it is necessary to provide these effect devices directly in the game area 20. There is no. Therefore, even if the effect display device 115 is enlarged or many LED boards 535 are installed, the game area 20 on the front side of the game panel 409 is not narrowed. Then, other parts such as obstacle nails and windmills are attached to the game area 20.
The area where the game ball can flow down can be widened. As a result, it is possible to secure a free design of the game effect unit 4 (game area 20), to realize a gaming machine excellent in design and game characteristics, and to use the substantially entire front surface of the game effect unit 4. The player's interest can be further improved by the “special lighting effect”.

Conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which a large effect item (for example, a movable liquid crystal display or a doll imitating a character) is provided in a game effect unit, and various effects are performed using this accessory. Are known. However, in such a gaming machine, the game area becomes narrower as the size of an accessory increases, and not only a liquid crystal display and an electric lamp but also other parts such as obstacle nails and a windmill are arranged in the game area. Then, the size, position, quantity, etc. of each will be limited. On the other hand, there is a problem that the impact of the accessory on the player becomes weaker as the accessory becomes smaller.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 also has a disk-like accessory 590 in which the game effect unit 4 is a large accessory.
It has. However, in the game effect unit 4, while the effect display device 115 that executes the “special light emission effect” and the LED board 535 are arranged behind the game panel 409,
Since other parts such as obstacle nails and windmills are arranged on the front side of the game panel 409, various parts to be arranged on the surface of the game panel 409 are distributed before and after the game panel 409. Therefore, even if the disk-like accessory 590 is made as large as possible, the “special light effect” can be executed without narrowing the game area 20. As described above, a free design of the game effect unit 4 (game area 20) can be ensured, and a gaming machine excellent in design and game characteristics can be realized. The player's interest can be further improved by the “special light emission effect” using the whole. In particular, since the disc-shaped accessory 590 is disposed so as to be substantially flush with the effect display device 115 and the LED substrate 535 behind the game panel 409, the disc-shaped accessory 590 is provided with the effect display device 115 and the LED substrate. Without covering 535, even if the disk-shaped accessory 590 is large, the “special light emission effect” can be made visible to the player.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 115 is arranged behind the game effect unit 4, so the depth of the “special light emission effect” is emphasized by the display effect on the effect display device 115. At the same time, since a plurality of LED boards 535 are distributed around the effect display device 115 in the front view of the game effect unit 4, the “special light emission effect” is spread in a plane by the electric effect effects on each LED board 535. To be emphasized. The term “planar spread” as used herein refers to extending in a direction that easily enters the player's field of view, and more specifically, extending from the front to the outside as viewed from the player.

Then, by emphasizing the depth of the “special light emission effect”, the player can clearly grasp that the “special light emission effect” is being executed at a separated position. Further, by emphasizing the planar spread of the “special light emission effect”, the player can clearly grasp that the “special light emission effect” is executed over a wider range. More specifically, while the effect display device 115 provided substantially in the center of the game effect unit 4 in the front view is separated from the player, a plurality of L provided around the player is provided.
The ED board 535 is closer to the player than the effect display device 115, and each LED board 535 is disposed over substantially the entire front view of the game effect unit 4.

Under such a configuration, the “special light emission effect” is executed in such a manner as to wrap around the approximate center of the game area 20 as a whole. You will feel like you are wrapped up. In conventional gaming machines, only two-dimensional effects are performed, but in the “special light emission effects”, three-dimensional effects are realized by emphasizing the depth and spread of the effects. Then, the player can experience an unprecedented three-dimensional effect, and the interest is more attracted to the game and the interest is improved.

Furthermore, when performing the “special light emission effect”, not only effect control in the game effect unit 4 (display control in the effect display device 115 and lighting control in the plurality of LED boards 535) but also light emission control in the door frame 5 are linked. And executed. Thereby, the two-dimensional spread of the “special light emission effect” is expressed in the door frame 5 beyond the game effect unit 4.
More specifically, the door lens unit 120 provided around the gaming window 101 includes a plurality of LEs.
The D lens 535 is closer to the player, and the door lens unit 120 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the game panel 409.

Under such a configuration, if the door lens unit 120 is controlled to emit light when the “special light effect” is executed, the “special light effect” is expressed in the door frame 5 beyond the game effect unit 4. The two-dimensional spread of the “special light emission effect” will be further emphasized. Furthermore, it is symmetrical that the door lens unit 120 is disposed at a position close to the player.
Since 15 is far away from the player, the depth of the “special light emission effect” is further emphasized. As a result, the depth and spread of the “special light emission effect” can be further emphasized, and the player can be strongly experienced in the three-dimensional effect.

By the way, as described above, a plurality of LEDs arranged behind the game panel 409 in front view.
An electrical decoration cover (light-shaped decorative body 520, blade-shaped decorative body 530, and blade-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632) is provided on the substrate 535 in order to cover the lighting / flashing mode in a visible manner. Specifically, the light-shaped decorative body 520 and the feather-shaped decorative body 530 (rear electrical decoration cover) cover the LED boards 535 on the rear side of the game panel 409, while the blade-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632 are provided.
The (front illumination cover) covers each LED board 535 on the front side of the game panel 409.

Here, the LED board 535 covered with each electric decoration cover cannot be visually recognized by the player (that is, in front view), and only the lighting / flashing mode of the LED board 535 can be visually recognized. Therefore, for the player, it is understood that the LED board 535 is built in each electric decoration cover. In particular, the LED board 535 covered with the feather-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632 is actually disposed on the rear side of the game panel 409, but the feather-shaped decoration disposed on the front side of the game panel 409. It will be grasped as if they were built in the bodies 630 and 632.

With such a configuration, the player recognizes that the LED board 535 covered with the light decorative body 520 and the feather-shaped decorative body 530 is disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 409, while the blade LED substrate 53 covered with mold decorations 630 and 632
For 5, the illusion is that it is arranged on the front side of the game panel 409. in this way,
In practice, a plurality of LED boards 535 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 409 are grasped as being arranged in a distributed manner before and after the game panel 409. Therefore, the LED board 535 having an arbitrary shape or size can be arranged (or shown to be arranged) at various positions of the game effect unit 4 (game area 20). It is possible to design a game performance unit 4 (game area 20) having high characteristics.

By the way, if the LED board 535 is provided on the front side of the game panel 409 (that is, the game area 20), it is considered that the wiring structure to the LED board 535 becomes complicated. But,
In this pachinko machine 1, even if the LED board 535 is not actually arranged in the game area 20, the feather-shaped decorative body 630,
If 632 is provided, it can be seen that the LED board 535 is disposed in the game area 20, so that the structure of the game effect unit 4 can be simplified.

Note that the vane-shaped decorative body 632 positioned in the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area 20 has a slit-like window portion 632a for allowing the player to visually recognize the game ball passing behind it.
Is forming. Thereby, the player can prevent the situation where the behavior of the game ball cannot be seen by the feather-shaped decorative body 632, and can play the game without losing sight of the game ball. Furthermore, since the lighting / flashing mode of the LED board 535 can be visually recognized when the game ball does not pass behind the feather-shaped decorative body 632, the interest is maintained.

[About decorative designs]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the decorative design 1153 displayed on the effect display device 115 will be described in detail. FIG. 99A is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a decorative symbol in the external normal gaming state, and FIG. 99B is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a decorative symbol in the external advantageous gaming state.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the embodiment, the opportunity to shift to the external normal gaming state (such as the third long-opening jackpot), and the trigger to shift to the external advantageous gaming state (such as the first long-opening jackpot) In addition, in the external normal gaming state, it functions as a trigger for shifting to the external normal gaming state so that the per-share distribution rate that triggers the transition to the external normal gaming state is the highest per-share distribution rate. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned external advantageous gaming state, it functions as a trigger to shift to the above-mentioned external advantageous gaming state so that the per-share distribution rate that triggers the transition to the above-mentioned external advantageous gaming state becomes the highest per-share distribution rate Second to
We decided to prepare a long open jackpot as one of the winning types of jackpots. Therefore,
Also as a decorative symbol 1153 for suggesting the winning type of jackpot, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), blue decorative symbols (“4”, “8” indicating that the game is controlled to the external normal gaming state are shown.
”) 1153, and a red decorative pattern (“ 3 ”indicating that the game is controlled to an external advantageous gaming state.
”,“ 7 ”) In addition to 1153, while in the external normal gaming state, it is suggested that the external normal gaming state is controlled, while in the external advantageous gaming state, the external advantageous gaming state is controlled. Pink decorative patterns ("1", "2", "5", "6") 1
153 can be prepared without any sense of incongruity. That is, by performing a variable display effect using three types of decorative symbols 1153 including such a pink decorative symbol 1153, any of the game states of the external normal game state and the external advantageous game state Even if there is, the above-mentioned effect display indicates that the continuation rate (red decoration pattern and pink decoration pattern) is higher than the rate of entry into the external advantageous gaming state (red decoration pattern only) The player can be recognized through the device 115.

Moreover, the pink decoration pattern 1153 is different from the decoration pattern (blue decoration pattern, red decoration pattern) 1153 having the value alone as information indicating the gaming state after the jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot It has no value as information indicating That is, such a pink decorative pattern 1153 itself has a value as a mere presentation pattern used for the above-described variable display presentation to suggest whether or not the jackpot has been won. Only when combined with information capable of recognizing the gaming state (external normal gaming state or external advantageous gaming state), it has value as information (information indicating the winning type) indicating the gaming state after the jackpot. Therefore, if the pink decorative pattern 1153 is displayed when the jackpot is won, the player is forced to be aware of the current gaming state if he / she wants to know the jackpot winning type, As a result, the merit in the external advantageous gaming state can be felt with a higher probability. For example, when the pink decoration symbol 1153 is displayed while in the external normal gaming state, it becomes easier to feel “if the current gaming state was the external advantageous gaming state”, and the external advantageous gaming state is entered. When the above pink decorative pattern 1153 is displayed,
It becomes easy to feel that the current gaming state was good with the above-described external advantageous gaming state.

That is, since the blue decorative design 1153 has a value alone as information that suggests that it is not advantageous to the player, the player tends to dislike the blue decorative design 1153 itself. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, the blue decorative design 1
When 153 appears, the game's interest may decline despite winning the jackpot.
On the other hand, the pink decorative symbol 1153 is information (the winning type) indicating the gaming state after the big hit only when the current gaming state (external normal gaming state or external advantageous gaming state) is combined with information that can be recognized. Therefore, it can be said that the player is prevented from hating the pink decorative pattern 1153 itself. And, as will be described later, such a pink decorative pattern not only when winning the opportunity to enter the external advantageous gaming state is won, but also when winning the opportunity to enter the external normal gaming state is won 1153 is displayed on the effect display device 115. Thus, it is necessary to display the blue decorative design 1153 on the effect display device 115 by the amount that the pink decorative design 1153 is displayed when the win that triggers the transition to the external normal gaming state is won. Disappear. As a result, the total number of types of the blue decorative pattern 1153 having the value alone as information suggesting that it is not advantageous to the player is obtained as the total decorative pattern 115.
Even if the number is reduced to less than half of the total number of the three types, it is preferable to avoid that the player feels uncomfortable with such a symbol display mode. In this embodiment, eight decorative symbols 1153 to “8” are prepared as the decorative symbols 1153, whereas the blue decorative symbols 115 are provided.
Only two of “2” and “4” are prepared for 3.

In the external advantageous gaming state, the pink decorative pattern 1153 suggests that the external decorative gaming state is controlled in the external advantageous gaming state, but the second long opening is provided. The probability of being assigned to the winning type that triggers the transition to the external normal gaming state by the jackpot function is less than “50%” (in this embodiment, the probability “
1/3 "), the discomfort caused by the low display probability of the blue decorative pattern 1153 does not occur in the first place. Moreover, even if the continuation rate in the external advantageous gaming state is set so high by the above-mentioned function by the second long open jackpot, the winning probability of jackpot, the total amount of game balls to be paid out during the jackpot game, etc. The specs as a gaming machine are not greatly sacrificed.

By the way, such a pink decorative pattern 1153 is a decorative pattern that appears not only when controlled in the external normal gaming state but also when controlled in the external advantageous gaming state. By simply displaying 1153 on the effect display device 115, it is difficult to properly suggest the game state after the jackpot game is played to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the external advantageous gaming state, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), a predetermined decorative image 1153d (character image KG) is added to each of the three types of decorative symbols 1153. These display modes are made different with respect to the external normal game state. Thus, the player can recognize whether the game state is the external normal game state or the external advantageous game state only by looking at the decorative symbol 1153. In this way, after the decoration image 1153a capable of recognizing the current gaming state is added to the pink decoration pattern 1153, the pink decoration pattern 1153 is added to the effect display device 11.
5 so that the player can receive the above-mentioned jackpot game even though it is a pink decorative pattern 1153 that does not have value alone as information indicating the game state after the jackpot game is played. It will be possible to properly suggest the gaming state after the

In particular, in this embodiment, a decoration image 1153d common to the red decoration pattern 1153 and the pink decoration pattern 1153 of the three types of decoration patterns 1153, respectively.
By adding (character image KG), the red decorative pattern 1153, the pink decorative pattern 1153, and the blue decorative pattern 1153 are different from each other. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that the pink decorative symbol 1153 in the external advantageous gaming state is a symbol having the same advantage as the red decorative symbol 1153, and the jackpot game is given to the player. It becomes possible to suggest the gaming state after being performed more appropriately.

[Display control for reach production]
Next, the display control for the reach effect performed by the effect display device 115 will be described in detail.

As described above, if the variation pattern is determined in the process of step S1560 (FIG. 74), a command indicating the determined variation pattern is transmitted to the peripheral control board 810 (steps S260 and S270). . And this peripheral control board 81
The command transmitted to 0 is used for processing such as effect lottery by the effect lottery means 960 through the command receiving means 950 in the peripheral control board 810.

In other words, in the effect lottery means 960, effect information indicating various effect patterns related to the variable display effect of the decorative design 1153 is stored in association with the commands from the main control board 710, respectively. It has a storage means. Therefore, when a command indicating the variation pattern is received through the command receiving means 950, the effect lottery means 960 first determines the type of effect pattern corresponding to the command based on the effect pattern storage means. As a result, when the effect pattern corresponding to the command is a reach effect pattern, among the decorative symbols 1153 variably displayed in three rows on the effect display device 115, the “left Column "
, Decorative pattern 1 that will be finally stopped (until the jackpot game is played) in the two rows of the “right row”
Reach symbol determination processing in which the type (number) of 153 is determined is performed. In this reach symbol determination process, there are two types of decoration symbols 1153 that are finally stopped (before the big hit game is played) in the two columns “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115. When determined, as the next process (middle symbol determination process), the type of decorative symbols 1153 (finally before the big hit game is performed) at the “middle row” in the effect display device 115 ( Number). The effect pattern storage means is constituted by a backup RAM in the peripheral control board 810, for example.

Next, the processing procedure of the reach symbol determination process in which the type (number) of the decorative symbols 1153 of the “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 is determined will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 shows a table used for reach symbol determination processing (reach symbol determination table).
Is shown.

As shown in FIG. 100, in the reach symbol determination table, the types of reach effects are classified according to the result of the lottery process for the jackpot and the current game state. In this embodiment,
Loss of reach that is performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is a loss (losing) and the current gaming state is in the external normal gaming state.
Specific 1 reach performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is the first long open jackpot and the current gaming state is in the external normal gaming state.
Specific 2 reach that is performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is the second long open jackpot and the current gaming state is the external normal gaming state.
Non-specific reach performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is the third long open jackpot and the current gaming state is the external normal gaming state.
An open change lose reach that is performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is disapproval (losing) and the current gaming state is an external advantageous gaming state.
-Open change specific 1 reach performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is the first long open jackpot and the current gaming state is in the external advantageous gaming state.
-Open change specific 2 reach performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is the second long open jackpot and the current gaming state is in the external advantageous gaming state.
-Open change non-specific reach performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is the third long open jackpot and the current gaming state is in the external advantageous gaming state.
Are classified into eight types of reach production. And apart from those 8 types of reach production,
The total number of “100” reach design random numbers is “1 · 1”, “2 · 2”,.
”And“ 8 · 8 ”(corresponding to two numbers adopted in the“ left column ”and“ right column ”). That is, as is clear from FIG. 100, the reach design determination random numbers have different distribution modes according to the above eight types of reach production, and thereby the selection rate of the type of the decorative design 1153 is set to the above 8 types. Different types of reach production are used.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect lottery means 960 first receives the information indicating the result of the lottery process for the jackpot and the information indicating the current game state in the reach control determination process. Acquired from 710 side. Next, based on the acquired information, the type of the corresponding reach effect among the 8 types of reach effects is determined, and one of the total number “100” of reach design determining random numbers is acquired. Then, referring to the reach symbol determination table, by selecting one of the eight number combinations based on the determined reach effect type and the acquired reach symbol determination random number,
The types of decorative symbols 1153 of “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 are determined.

For example, when the type of reach effect determined is “losing reach”, the “left column” and “right column” decorative symbols 1153 in the effect display device 115 have a probability of 13/100. It is a number combination of “1 · 1”, a number combination of “2 · 2” with a probability of 14/100, and a number combination of “3 · 3” with a probability of 8/100, 15
With a probability of “4 · 4” respectively, with a probability of 13/100 “5.5”
”, With a probability of 14/100, a combination of numbers“ 6/6 ”, with a probability of 8/100, a combination of numbers“ 7/7 ”, with a probability of 15/100 "
The number combination is “8 · 8”.

Further, when the type of reach effect determined is “specific 1 reach”, the “left column” and “right column” decorative symbols 1153 in the effect display device 115 have a probability of 5/100. so"
The number combination is “1 · 1”, the number combination is “2 · 2” with a probability of 5/100, the number combination is “3 · 3” with the probability of 38/100, and 2/100 With a probability of “4 · 4”, a probability of 5/100 with a number of “5 · 5”, a probability of 5/100 with a number of “6 · 6”, A number combination of “7 · 7” is obtained with a probability of 38/100, and a number combination of “8.8” is obtained with a probability of 2/100.

That is, when the type of reach effect determined is “specific 1 reach”, the game after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot game is performed because the first long open jackpot is won. The state is controlled to the above-described external advantageous gaming state. Therefore, in order to suggest that the game is controlled to the above-described external advantageous gaming state, in the reach design determination table, the selection rate of “3.3” or “7/7”, which is a combination of the red decorative design 1153, It is set to be significantly higher than the selection rate of other number combinations.

However, in this embodiment, when the first long open jackpot is won in the external normal game state, the promotion effect during the so-called jackpot game is performed with a certain probability. That is, in the reach design determination table, the “specific 1 reach” includes “3.3” and “7.7” which are combinations of red decorative symbols 1153, and pink decorative symbols 1153. Combinations such as “1, 1”, “2, 2”, “5, 5”, “6, 6”, and combinations of blue decorative patterns 1153, “4, 4”, “8, 8”, etc. The reach design random numbers are also assigned to the number combinations. Therefore, when the combination of the pink and blue decorative symbols 1153 is selected, it is controlled to the external normal game state before the jackpot game corresponding to the first long open jackpot is performed. Display of pink and blue decorative symbols 1153 (“left column”, “middle column”, “right column” decorative symbols 11
First, it is falsely suggested by the display mode in which 53 numbers are stopped together. After that, during the period when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is performed, information indicating that such false information is corrected and is controlled to the external advantageous gaming state will be derived ( Promotional promotion during jackpot game).

In this embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 100, the blue decorative design 1
When the combination of the pink decorative pattern 1153 is selected (5/100) than when the combination of 153 is selected (2/100), the external Probability of deriving information that suggests that the game state will be controlled (
(Probability of promotion effect during jackpot game) is set to be high. Thereby, even in the external normal game state, the pink decorative pattern 1153 can be present as an advantageous pattern rather than blue.

When the determined reach effect type is “specific 2 reach”, the “left column” and “right column” decorative symbols 1153 in the effect display device 115 have a probability of 20/100. The number combination is “1 · 1”, the number combination is “2 · 2” with a probability of 20/100, the number combination is “3 · 3” with the probability of 0/100, and 100 minutes With a probability of 10 and a number combination of “4 · 4”, a probability of 20/100 with a number combination of “5 · 5”, a probability of 20/100 with a combination of numbers of “6 · 6” and The number combination of “7 · 7” is set to the probability of 0/100, and the number combination of “8 · 8” is set to the probability of 10/100.

That is, when the type of reach effect determined is “special 2 reach”, since the second long open jackpot is won when in the external normal gaming state, the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot The game state after the game is played is controlled to the above-described external normal game state. Therefore, in order to suggest that the game is controlled in the external normal gaming state, in the reach design determination table, “1.1”, which is a combination of pink decorative symbols 1153 out of the eight types of numeric combinations, It is possible to select only six types of combinations of “2, 2”, “5, 5”, “6, 6” and “4.4,” “8.8,” which is a combination of blue decorative design 1153. Yes.

However, in this embodiment, when the second long open jackpot is won in the external normal gaming state, the selection of the pink decorative pattern 1153 is more than the selection rate of the blue decorative pattern 1153 (20/100). The rate (80/100) is set to be several times higher. That is, for a predetermined period after winning the second long open jackpot, the winning probability B, which is higher than the winning probability A employed at the initial stage, is adopted as the winning probability for the jackpot. Therefore, according to such a selection ratio setting mode, the pink decorative symbol 1153 can be present as a symbol more advantageous to the player than the blue decorative symbol 1153.

When the determined reach effect type is “non-specific reach”, the “left column” and “right column” decorative symbols 1153 in the effect display device 115 have a probability of 15/100. The number combination is “1 · 1”, the number combination is “2 · 2” with a probability of 20/100, the number combination is “3 · 3” with the probability of 0/100, and 100 minutes With a probability of 15 and a number combination of “4 · 4”, a probability of 15/100 with a number combination of “5 · 5”, a probability of 20/100 with a combination of numbers of “6 · 6” and The number combination of “7 · 7” is set to the probability of 0/100, and the number combination of “8 · 8” is set to the probability of 15/100.

That is, when the determined type of reach performance is “non-specific reach”, the third long open jackpot is won when the player is in the normal outside gaming state, so the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot The game state after the game is played is controlled to the above-described external normal game state. Therefore, in this case as well, in order to suggest that it is controlled to the external normal game state, in the reach design determination table, among the 8 types of numeric combinations, the pink decoration design 1153 is a combination of “1 · 1 ”,“ 2 ・ 2 ”,“ 5 ・ 5 ”,“ 6 ・
6 ”, and the combination of blue decoration symbols 1153“ 4 · 4 ”and“ 8.8 ”can be selected only.

In addition, in this embodiment, even when the third long open jackpot is won in the external normal game state, the selection of the pink decorative pattern 1153 is more than the selection rate (30/100) of the blue decorative pattern 1153. The rate (70/100) is set to be more than doubled. As a result, the blue decorative pattern 115 suggesting that the game is controlled to the external normal gaming state.
The display rate of 3 can be lowered, and the decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed. In addition, since the selection rate of the pink decorative pattern 1153 is set to be lower than that in the case where the second long open jackpot is won in the external normal game state, the pink color for the blue decorative pattern 1153 is set. The superiority of the decorative design 1153 is suitably maintained.

Further, when the type of reach effect determined is “open change losing reach”, the decorative symbols 1153 of the “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 are 12/100. The probability is a number combination of “1 · 1”, the probability of 13/100 is the number combination of “2 · 2”, the probability of 15/100 is the number combination of “3 · 3”, and 100 The probability is a combination of numbers “4 and 4” with a probability of tenths of a minute.
・ The number combination is “5”, the number combination is “6.6” with the probability of 13/100, the number combination is “7.7” with the probability of 15/100, and the number is 10/100. The probability is a number combination of “8.8”.

That is, as described above, in this embodiment, the winning probability (1/3) at the time of rushing (transition) to the above-mentioned external advantageous gaming state by winning the jackpot in the external normal gaming state, This is very different from the continuation probability (3/5) at the time of shifting (continuing) again to the above-mentioned external advantageous gaming state by winning, and the merit in the external advantageous gaming state is extremely large. In this regard, in this embodiment, the “open change lose reach” when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot performed in the external advantageous game state is a loss (miss).
Is a combination of red decorative symbols 1153 rather than “open change lose reach” when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot performed in the external normal game state is a loss (disappearance). 3 ”,“ 7, 7 ”, and the blue decorative pattern 115
The selection rates of “4 · 4” and “8.8”, which are combinations of 3, are set to be low. As a result, when the game is in an external advantageous game state, even if the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is a loss, it is possible to actively appeal the high continuation rate to the player. , A decrease in the interest of the game in the chance game state is suppressed.

When the determined reach effect type is “open change specific 1 reach”, the “left row” and “right column” decorative symbols 1153 in the effect display device 115 are 5/100. With a probability of “1 · 1”, with a probability of 3/100 as a combination of numbers “2 · 2”, with a probability of 40/100 as a combination of numbers “3 · 3”, The number combination of “4 · 4” with a probability of 2/100, the number combination of “5 · 5” with a probability of 5/100, and the number of “6/6” with a probability of 3/100 A combination, 4/100
A number combination of “7 · 7” is set with a probability of 0, and a number combination of “8.8” is set with a probability of 2/100.

In addition, in this “open change specific 1 reach”, when any of “4 · 4” and “8 · 8”, which is a combination of numbers of the blue decorative pattern 1153, is selected, the first long open big hit Before the big hit game corresponding to the game is performed, the display of the blue decorative symbols 1153 and the like (the “left column”, “middle column”, “right column”) First, it is falsely suggested by the display mode in which the numbers of the decorative symbols 1153 are stopped together. After that, during the period when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is performed, information indicating that such false information is corrected and is controlled to the external advantageous gaming state will be derived ( Promotional promotion during jackpot game). However, on the other hand, the numbers “1 · 1”, “2 · 2”, “5 · 5”, and “6 · 6” are combinations of numbers of the pink decorative pattern 1153.
When any of “” is selected, the promotion effect during the jackpot game is not performed. As a result, in the external advantageous gaming state, it can be made clear that the pink decorative symbol 1153 has been upgraded to the same level of superiority as the red decorative symbol 1153.

When the type of reach effect determined is “open change specific 2 reach”, the decorative symbols 1153 of the “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 are 20/100. With a probability of “1 · 1”, a probability of 15/100 with a number of “2 · 2”, a probability of 0/100 with a number of “3 · 3”, One hundredth
It is a number combination of “4.4” with a probability of 5, a number combination of “5.5” with a probability of 20/100, and a number combination of “6.6” with a probability of 15/100 10
With a probability of 0/0, it will be a number combination of “7.7”, with a probability of 15/100, “8.8”
"Is a combination of numbers.

That is, as described above, when the second long open jackpot is won in the external advantageous gaming state, the gaming state after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is performed is also set to the external advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when the determined reach production type is “open change specific 2 reach”, not only the combination of the pink decorative pattern 1153 but also the combination of the red decorative pattern 1153 is selected. You may do it. However, in this embodiment, when the second long open jackpot is won in the external advantageous gaming state, “open change specification 2
In performing “reach”, it is suggested that the combination of the red decorative symbols 1153 is not selected (0/100), and that the combination of the pink decorative symbols 1153 is selected to control the game to the external advantageous gaming state. I did it. This makes it easier for the player to feel that “the game state when the pink decorative pattern 1153 appears was good in the external advantageous game state”
The advantage of being in the chance gaming state can be positively appealed to the player.

In addition, in this “open change specific 2 reach”, when any of “4 · 4” and “8 · 8”, which is a combination of numbers of the blue decorative design 1153, is selected, the second long open big hit Before the big hit game corresponding to the game is performed, the display of the blue decorative symbols 1153 and the like (the “left column”, “middle column”, “right column”) First, it is falsely suggested by the display mode in which the numbers of the decorative symbols 1153 are stopped together. After that, during the period when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is performed, information indicating that such false information is corrected and is controlled to the external advantageous gaming state will be derived ( Promotional promotion during jackpot game).

Further, when the type of reach effect determined is “open change non-specific reach”, the decorative symbols 1153 of “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 are 50/100. With a probability of “4 · 4” and a probability combination of “8.8” with a probability of 50/100.

Next, the middle symbol determination process in which the type of the “middle row” decorative symbol 1153 in the effect display device 115 is determined will be described in detail.

In the middle symbol determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the “middle row” in the effect display device 115 is the same symbol as the determined “left column” and “right column”. That is, in the above reach symbol determination process, “specific 1 reach”, “specific 2 reach”, “non-specific reach”, “
When it is determined that any one of “open change specific 1 reach”, “open change specific 2 reach”, and “open change non-specific reach” is to be performed, it is the same as the numerical combination determined in the processing The symbol (number) is used as the “middle row” symbol. Thereby, in the effect display device 115,
A display mode in which the numbers of the decorative symbols 1153 in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column” are stopped together appears, and it is suggested to the player that the jackpot has been won.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the above reach design determination process that either “hasle reach” or “open change husle reach” should be performed, how many symbols are determined from the symbols (number combinations) determined in the process? It is determined whether to display a pattern (number) that is shifted by a certain amount, and the pattern corresponding to the determination is adopted as the “middle row” symbol. That is, in this case, in the effect display device 115,
Of the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column” decorative symbols 1153, only the numbers of the “left column” and “right column” decorative symbols 1153 are aligned, and the “middle column” decorative symbols 1153 are arranged. Due to the unevenness of the numbers 1153, it is suggested to the player that the jackpot was not won.

By the way, in this embodiment, the type (number) of the decorative pattern 1153 of “middle row” is the above “
When the decorative pattern 1153 is the same as the “left column” and “right column”, the decorative display 1153 is displayed on the effect display device 115 in the display mode at the time of jackpot (determination stop)
It is determined whether or not to perform a re-lottery effect that temporarily displays (temporarily stops) the decorative symbol 1153 that is not necessarily the same as the determined decorative symbol 1153 on the effect display device 115. When it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be performed, the following re-lottery effect is performed. As for this re-lottery effect, when the type (number) of the “middle row” decorative symbol 1153 is the same decorative symbol 1153 as the “left column” and “right column”, the re-lottery effect is performed. You may make it surely perform without determining whether or not.

Next, processing relating to such a re-lottery effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 shows a table (re-lottery symbol determination table) used for processing related to the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b), the re-lottery symbol determination table is in a first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1 used in the external normal gaming state and in the external advantageous gaming state. It has a second re-lottery symbol determination table ST2 that is sometimes used. In these re-lottery symbol determination tables ST1 and ST2, the total number “100” for each type determined as the decorative symbol 1153 determined and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”.
The random numbers for determining the re-drawing symbols are “1 · 1 · 1”, “2 · 2 · 2”, “7 · 7 · 7”.
”And“ 8 · 8 · 8 ”.

For example, in the above-mentioned external normal game state, when “1 · 1 · 1” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be fixed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 115 temporarily displays a numerical combination of “1 · 1 · 1” with a probability of 70/100 (temporary stop). The number combination of “4/4/4” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 15/100 (temporary stop), and the number combination of “8/8/8” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 15/100 (temporary stop). Stop)
Is done. Of these, if the number combination of “1, 1, 1” is once displayed (temporarily stopped), the lottery is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination of “1, 1, 1” is maintained. Production will be performed. On the other hand, when the combination of numbers “4, 4, 4” and “8, 8, 8” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped), the above-mentioned “1.1” is changed from the displayed number combination. A re-lottery effect in which the number combination of “1” is displayed (determination is stopped) is performed. In this way, the pink decorative design 11 is changed from the blue decorative design 1153.
When 53 is displayed, the player may see the second long open jackpot as viewed from the player,
Since the possibility of promotion promotion during the jackpot game is increased, a decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed.

Further, in the above-mentioned external normal game state, when “2.2.2” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be fixed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 1
15, the number combination of “2, 2, 2” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 60/100 (temporary stop), and the number combination of “4, 4, 4” is displayed with a probability of 20/100 (Temporary stop)
Then, the number combination of “8 · 8 · 8” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped) with a probability of 20/100. Of these, if the number combination of “2, 2, 2” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped), the lottery is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination of “2, 2, 2” is maintained. Production will be performed. On the other hand, when the number combination of “4, 4, 4” or “8, 8, 8” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped), the above-described “2. 2” is changed from the displayed number combination. A re-lottery effect is displayed in which the number combination of “2” is displayed (determination stop).

Similarly, in the above-mentioned external normal game state, “3.3.3” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be confirmed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 115 temporarily displays the number combination of “1 · 1 · 1” with a probability of 5/100 (temporary stop). ), The number combination of “2, 2, 2” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 5/100 (temporary stop), and the number combination of “3, 3, 3” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 70/100 ( Temporary stop)
The number combination of “4 · 4 · 4” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 5/100 (temporary stop), and the number combination of “5 · 5 · 5” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 5/100 (temporary stop). 1)
The number combination “6/6/6” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped) with a probability of 5/00. Of these, if the number combination of “3, 3, 3” is once displayed (temporarily stopped), the lottery is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination of “3, 3, 3” is maintained. Production will be performed. On the other hand, “1 ・ 1 ・ 1”, “2 ・ 2 ・ 2”, “4 ・ 4 ・ 4” and “5 ・ 5 ・ 5”
”And“ 6, 6, 6 ”are temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped), the number combination of“ 3, 3, 3 ”is displayed in a manner that is changed from the displayed number combination. (
A re-lottery effect is performed.

In the above-mentioned external normal game state, when “4/4/4” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be fixed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 1
The number combination “4, 4, 4” is always displayed once in 15. Then, a re-lottery effect is performed in such a manner that the displayed number combination is maintained.

In the above-mentioned external normal game state, when “5, 5, 5” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be confirmed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 1
15, the number combination of “4/4/4” is displayed once (provisional stop) with a probability of 15/100, and the number combination of “5/5/5” is displayed once with a probability of 70/100 (Temporary stop)
Then, the number combination of “8 · 8 · 8” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped) with a probability of 15/100. Of these, if the number combination of “5, 5, 5” is once displayed (temporarily stopped), the lottery is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination of “5, 5, 5” is maintained. Production will be performed. On the other hand, when the combination of numbers “4, 4, 4” and “8, 8, 8” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped), the above-mentioned “5.5” is changed from the displayed combination of numbers. A re-lottery effect is displayed in which the number combination of “5” is displayed (determination is stopped).

Further, in the above-mentioned external normal gaming state, when “6, 6. 6” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be confirmed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 1
15, the number combination of “4/4/4” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 20/100 (temporary stop), and the number combination of “6/6/6” is displayed once with a probability of 60/100 (Temporary stop)
Then, the number combination of “8 · 8 · 8” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped) with a probability of 20/100. Of these, if the number combination of “6, 6, 6” is once displayed (temporarily stopped), the lottery is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination of “6, 6, 6” is maintained. Production will be performed. On the other hand, when the number combination of “4, 4, 4” or “8, 8, 8” is once displayed (temporarily stopped), the above described combination of numbers is changed from the displayed number combination. A re-lottery effect in which the number combination of “6” is displayed (determination is stopped) is performed.

In the above-mentioned external normal gaming state, when “7, 7, 7” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be confirmed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 1
15, the number combination of “4 ・ 4 ・ 4” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 5/100 (temporary stop)
The number combination of “7/7/7” is displayed once (provisional stop) with a probability of 90/100, and the number combination of “8/8/8” is displayed once (provisional) with a probability of 5/100 Is stopped). Of these, if the number combination of “7, 7, 7” is once displayed (temporarily stopped), the lottery is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination of “7, 7, 7” is maintained. Production will be performed. On the other hand, when the number combination of “4, 4, 4” or “8, 8, 8” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped), the above-mentioned “7. A re-lottery effect in which the number combination of “7” is displayed (determination is stopped) is performed.

In the above-mentioned external normal game state, when “8, 8, 8” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be confirmed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 1
The number combination “8, 8, 8” is always displayed once in 15. Then, a re-lottery effect is performed in such a manner that the displayed number combination is maintained.

On the other hand, the details of the re-lottery effect in the external advantageous game state are omitted, but basically the re-lottery effect in the external normal game state is performed in a form. However, in this external advantageous game state, as shown in the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST2, the blue symbols ("4 / 4.4", "8.8. 8 ”), the probability that a re-lottery effect in which the pink symbol is displayed (determination is stopped) is higher than that in the external normal gaming state. As a result, it is possible to positively appeal the advantages of the external advantageous gaming state to the player. Furthermore, in this external advantageous gaming state, the type of the decorative symbol 1153 that is fixedly stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column” is a red symbol (“3.3.3”). , “7 ・ 7 ・ 7
”), The pink symbol is not displayed once when the red symbol is displayed (determination stop). As a result, it can be made clear that the pink decorative design 1153 has been upgraded to the same level of superiority as the red decorative design 1153.

Hereinafter, a series of effect contents appearing on the effect display device 115 when the reach effect is performed with the pink decorative pattern 1153 will be described in order. 102 to 104 are effect images showing a series of effect contents appearing on the effect display device in the external normal gaming state, and FIG. 105 is an effect image showing a series of effect contents appearing on the effect display device in the external advantageous game state. It is.

As shown in FIG. 102 (A), during the variable display effect in the external normal gaming state, the same decorative symbol (here, the pink decorative symbol “here” is the “left column” and “right column”). 5
") If 1153 is stopped, a reach effect that is an effect until the decorative symbol 1153 variably displayed in the remaining column (middle column) is stopped and displayed is performed. As a result of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), when the same decorative design is not stopped in the “middle row” (when other decorative design is stopped). , "Left column", "Middle column"
When the decorative pattern 1153 in the “right column” is irregular and stopped (display mode at the time of losing), it is suggested that the result of the lottery processing related to the jackpot was losing.

On the other hand, as a result of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 102C, when the same decorative design is stopped in the “middle row”, the “left column”, “middle row” ”And“ right row ”decorative symbols 1153 are stopped together (display mode at the time of jackpot), it is suggested that the jackpot has been won. In particular, the pink decorative symbol 1153 is displayed in the display mode at the time of the jackpot together with the background image HG1 that suggests that the game is in the external normal game state. It is suggested that the game state after the big hit game is controlled is controlled to the external normal game state.

However, as described above, in the above FIG. 102C, the above “left column”, “middle column”, “right column”
The decorative pattern 1153 appearing on the screen may be temporarily stopped. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), the decorative symbol 1153 that is in a temporarily stopped state is variably displayed again (re-lottery effect). As a result, when the pink decorative pattern 1153 that appears in the temporarily stopped state appears again, as shown in FIG. 102 (E), the pink decorative pattern 1153 is displayed as a big hit display mode. Thus, it is suggested that the game state after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot win is controlled to the external normal game state. After that, FIG. 103 (A)
As shown in the figure, an effect image such as “big hit” is displayed on the effect display device 115. At this time, in the pachinko machine 1, a big hit game is started.

Here, during the execution of the jackpot game, as described above, a promotion effect during the jackpot game may be performed. As an example, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), in this embodiment, a plurality of predetermined songs (here, “3”) are displayed on the effect display device 115, and the plurality of songs are displayed. The promotion effect is performed by selecting one of them by the player.

That is, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), one of the plurality of pieces of music is not displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 103C and 104C, when this non-displayed music is selected by the player, a specific music (here, “D music”) is selected at the selected location. Appears, it suggests that it is controlled to the above-mentioned external advantageous gaming state "UF
An effect image such as “O mode” is displayed in the upper left of the screen of the effect display device 115 (promotion effect). Then, when the jackpot game is over while the effect image such as “UFO mode” is displayed, as shown in FIG. 104 (D), the “UFO mode” suggests that the game is controlled to the external advantageous game state. Is displayed in the effect display device 11.
Immediately after being displayed on the entire surface of 5, the player enters the above-described external advantageous game state.

However, when the non-displayed music is selected by the player, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), the music (here, “D music”) different from the specific music (here “D music”) is selected. Then, "F music") may appear. In this case, as shown in FIG. 103 (E), an effect image such as “UFO mode” suggesting that the game is controlled to the external advantageous gaming state is not displayed on the screen of the effect display device 115. The effect image during the jackpot game is displayed lightly. Then, when the jackpot game ends, FIG. 103 (F
) Immediately after an image such as “medley chance” indicating that it is controlled to the external normal gaming state is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display device 115, the state is shifted to the external normal gaming state. Become.

In this embodiment, the promotion effect described above may not be performed. In such a case, the effect image shown in FIG. 103 (D) appears directly from the effect image shown in FIG. 103 (A). That is, also in this case, after the effect images shown in FIGS. 103 (E) and 103 (F) appear, the state is shifted to the external normal gaming state.

Also, as a result of the re-drawing effect, as shown in FIG. 102 (F), the red decorative pattern 115 is changed from the pink decorative pattern 1153 that appears in the temporary stop state.
When 3 is displayed, the red decorative pattern 115 is confirmed and stopped in the display mode at the time of jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot winning is thereby performed It is suggested that the game is controlled to the external advantageous gaming state. After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), the previous FIG. 103 (A
An effect image that is more advantageous than the effect image shown in FIG. At this time, in the pachinko machine 1, a big hit game is started.

After that, the effect image during the jackpot game will appear, but the red decorative pattern 1
When 15 is confirmed and stopped in the display mode at the time of jackpot, so-called promotion effect during the jackpot game is not performed. That is, “U” indicating that the game is controlled to the above-described external advantageous gaming state.
An effect image such as “FO mode” is displayed on the upper left of the screen of the effect display device 115 from the beginning. In this state, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), a plurality of predetermined songs (here, “3”) are displayed on the effect display device 115, and the plurality of songs are displayed. A selection effect in which one is selected by the player is performed. As a result, when one of the songs is selected by the player, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), the music corresponding to the selected music is output through the speaker, and the music is associated with the music. An effect image to appear appears. Then, when the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 104 (D), it is suggested that the game is controlled to the external advantageous game state “UFO”
Immediately after an image such as “mode” is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display device 115, the player enters the external advantageous gaming state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), during the variable display effect in the external advantageous gaming state, the same decorative symbol (here, the pink decorative symbol “ 5
]) When 1153 is stopped, the decorative symbol 1 displayed in a variable manner in the remaining column (middle column)
A reach effect which is an effect until 153 is stopped and displayed is performed. As a result of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), when the same decorative design is not stopped in the “middle row” (when other decorative design is stopped). , "Left column", "Middle column", "
When the decorative symbols 1153 in the “right column” are irregular and stopped (display mode at the time of losing), it is suggested that the result of the lottery processing related to the jackpot is losing.

On the other hand, as a result of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 105C, when the same decorative design is stopped in the “middle row”, the “left column”, “middle row” ”And“ right row ”decorative symbols 1153 are stopped together (display mode at the time of jackpot), it is suggested that the jackpot has been won. In particular, the pink decorative symbol 1153 is displayed in the display mode at the time of the jackpot together with the background image HG2 that suggests that the game is in the external advantageous gaming state, so that the winning of the jackpot is met. It is suggested that the gaming state after the jackpot game is controlled to the external advantageous gaming state.

Moreover, in this embodiment, as described above, of the three types of decorative designs 1153, the character image (character body is a decorative image that is common to the red decorative design 1153 and the pink decorative design 1153, respectively. The drawn decorative image KG is added so that the red decorative pattern 1153, the pink decorative pattern 1153, and the blue decorative pattern 1153 have different decoration modes. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that the pink decorative symbol 1153 in the external advantageous gaming state is a symbol having the same advantage as the red decorative symbol 1153, and the jackpot game is given to the player. It becomes possible to suggest the gaming state after being performed more appropriately. In this embodiment,
Unlike the above-mentioned character image KG, “PINKLAD” is applied to the blue decorative pattern 1153.
A character image MG on which the character “Y” is drawn is added.

After that, in the external advantageous gaming state, as in the case where the red decorative pattern 1153 is displayed in the display mode of the big hit (FIG. 102 (F)), as shown in FIG. 104 (A), “ An effect image that is more advantageous than the effect image shown in FIG. 103A is displayed on the effect display device 115, such as “super jackpot”. An effect image during the jackpot game will appear, but when the pink decorative pattern 115 is confirmed and stopped in the display mode at the time of the jackpot in the external advantageous game state, a so-called promotion effect during the jackpot game is performed. Absent. That is, an effect image such as “UFO mode” indicating that the game is controlled to the above-described external advantageous game state is displayed on the upper left in the screen of the effect display device 115 from the beginning. In this state, the above-described selection effect shown in FIG. 104 (B) is performed. And then
As shown in FIG. 104 (C), music corresponding to the music selected in the selection process is acoustically output through a speaker, and an effect image reminiscent of the music appears. And
When the jackpot game is over, as shown in FIG. 104D, immediately after an image such as “UFO mode” indicating that the game is controlled to the external advantageous game state is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display device 115. Then, the player enters the above-described external advantageous gaming state.

Note that the above-described re-lottery effect may also be performed when the pink decorative pattern 1153 appears as a big hit display mode in this external advantageous gaming state. However, in this external advantageous gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 105 (D) and 105 (E), only the re-lottery effect is performed in such a manner that the pink decorative pattern 1153 is maintained.

[Protection circuit against inrush current]
By the way, as described above, in this embodiment, the game effect control unit 99 (the game effect unit 4 and various control boards attached thereto) is only stored in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3. The unit-side main drawer connector 2000a on the game effect control unit 99 side and the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b on the main body frame 3 side are electrically connected. However, in such a structure in which the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are easily connected, the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector with the power switch turned on. Drawer connector 2
000b may be erroneously connected.

That is, in the pachinko machine, the main control board 710 is usually provided on the upstream side of the power supply line with respect to the peripheral board and various sensors including the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment. Therefore, power is supplied to other electrical components. Also,
In a pachinko machine, an MPU that performs control related to effect display, an actuator such as a motor,
However, since the voltage value required for power supply differs depending on the type of the electrical component, the main control board 710 provided on the upstream side of the power supply line is mounted. For example, “+ 34V”, “+ 18V” is relatively large.
, “+ 9V” is supplied through the main drawer connector 2000. Accordingly, if the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected with the power switch turned on, the terminal 2001a in the main drawer connector 2000 may be connected. When a large current (inrush current described later) flows through the contact point between the contact point 2001b and the contact point 2001b, they may be welded to supply power to the main control board 710 and electric parts downstream from the main control board 710. Such reliability is significantly reduced.

In this respect, in this embodiment, as shown in the circuit diagram of the hot-wire failure prevention circuit in FIG. 106, the hot-wire failure prevention that protects various electrical components below the main control board 710 from such inrush current. A circuit 2100 is provided in the main control board 710. That is, in the main control board 710, although not shown in the figure, the operating voltage of the CPU 711 is “5”.
Power is supplied to the internal circuits such as a constant voltage generation circuit that generates “V” and a power failure monitoring circuit that determines whether or not a power failure occurs through monitoring of a voltage drop in the power supply line via the live line failure prevention circuit 2100. By doing this, the internal circuit including the CPU 711 is protected from the inrush current described above. Further, power is supplied from the main control board 710 to the electrical components downstream of the main control board 710 via the live line failure prevention circuit 2100.

Hereinafter, such a hot-wire failure prevention circuit 2100 will be described with reference to FIG.
As described above, in the main control board 710 according to this embodiment, the three types of DC power supplies “
First, “+ 34V”, “+ 18V”, and “+ 9V” are input to the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100 as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the live line failure prevention circuit 2100,
A “+ 34V” hot-line fault prevention circuit 2100a, a “+ 18V” hot-line fault prevention circuit 2100b, and a “+ 9V” hot-line fault prevention circuit 2100c are provided.
However, among these, in the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100b for “+ 18V”, the DC power source “+
The voltage input as “18V” is first smoothed by removing the ripple component (the AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the CR filter including the resistor R100 and the electrolytic capacitor C100. Then, the smoothed voltage of “+ 18V” is the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100a for “+ 34V”, the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100b for “+ 18V”, and “+
9V "live line failure prevention circuit 2100c is provided for on / off control in relay switch circuits RL1 to RL3 described later.

  Hereinafter, the configuration of these three types of hot-wire failure prevention circuits 2100 will be described separately.

[Hot-line failure prevention circuit for “+ 34V”]
The hot line failure prevention circuit 2100a for “+ 34V” includes a relay switch circuit RL1 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Fujitsu Takamizawa: JV-18S-KT), and a thermistor TH1 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ishizuka Electronics: 5D2-11LC). And an electrolytic capacitor C101 and a capacitor C102. The relay switch circuit RL1 includes a coil, an iron piece, a switch, and the like. When a voltage is applied between the coil side input pins and a current is passed through the coil, the iron piece moves and the switch is turned on (turned on). The circuit between the side input pins is connected. The first pin as the coil side input pin is grounded and the fourth pin as the coil side input pin is electrically connected to the above-mentioned smoothed “+ 18V”. As a result, a current flows through the coil and the switch is turned on. The 2nd and 3rd pins as the switch side input pins are electrically connected in parallel with the thermistor TH1, and + 34V from the payout control board 720 is electrically connected to one of these connected in parallel. The other side is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded electrolytic capacitor C101. By this electrolytic capacitor C101, ripples (AC components convolved with voltage) are removed and smoothed. Further, noise is removed by the capacitor C102 grounded to the ground.

Here, the game effect control unit 9 is placed in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3.
9 (the game effect unit 4 and various control boards attached thereto) is stored, the electrolytic capacitor C101 in the main control board 710 is already discharged.
According to such a configuration, even if the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected while the power switch is turned on, the inrush current described above is not affected by the thermistor TH1. And the electrolytic capacitor C1
Charged with 01. As a result, the unit side main drawer connector 2000a + 34V
Welding due to the inrush current between the voltage supply line and the + 34V voltage supply line of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is suppressed, and the main control board 710 and the electric power downstream of the main control board 710 are suppressed. The reliability concerning the power supply of components and the like is suitably maintained.

Moreover, the unit-side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame-side main drawer connector 20
In the state in which 00b is properly connected, the switch in the relay switch circuit RL1 is turned on, and the circuit structure is such that current flows so as to avoid the thermistor TH1, so the entry of the + 34V voltage supply line While suppressing welding due to electric current, the power consumption during normal use can be suitably suppressed. The characteristics of the thermistor TH1 in this embodiment are an initial resistance value of 5 ohms (Ω), a maximum capacity current of 4A, and a residual resistance value of 0.35Ω. When current flows through the thermistor TH1, The resistance value changes. As a result, even if the relay switch circuit RL1 does not operate, for example, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value decreases and the thermistor TH1 itself is prevented from generating heat, thereby preventing the thermistor TH1 from being damaged. be able to.

Incidentally, when a fixed resistance that does not change its resistance value, such as cement resistance, is used as a protective resistance against inrush current, it is necessary to use a large type of high power that can withstand heat generation. For this reason, it is difficult to arrange electronic components that malfunction due to the influence of heat in the vicinity of the fixed resistance, and it is necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710. On the other hand, when the thermistor TH1 whose resistance value changes with temperature is used as a protective resistance against the inrush current, when the inrush current flows through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH1 itself is suppressed. . For this reason, in the vicinity of the thermistor TH1,
Electronic components can be arranged, and it is not necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710 against the heat generated by the thermistor TH1. Note that the relay switch circuit RL1 in the present embodiment.
The on-off time is 13.5V and the off-voltage is 0.9V. The on / off time of the switch built in the relay switch circuit RL1 is the above-described resistance R100 and capacitor C100.
The relay switch circuit is set in advance from the time constant of the relay switch circuit RL1 and the inrush current is already lowered by the time the switch of the relay switch circuit RL1 is turned on, and the resistance value is extremely small compared to the thermistor TH1. It flows to the switch of RL1.

[Hot-line failure prevention circuit for “+ 18V”]
The hot line failure prevention circuit 2100b for "+ 18V" includes a relay switch circuit RL2 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Fujitsu Takamizawa: JV-18S-KT), and a thermistor TH2 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ishizuka Electronics: 5D2-11LC). And an electrolytic capacitor C103 and a capacitor C104. The relay switch circuit RL2 has the same configuration as the relay switch circuit RL1, and when a voltage is applied between the coil side input pins and a current flows through the coil, the iron piece moves and the switch is turned on (turned on), and the switch side A circuit between input pins is connected. The first pin as the coil side input pin is grounded and the fourth pin as the coil side input pin is electrically connected to the above-mentioned smoothed “+ 18V”. As a result, a current flows through the coil and the switch is turned on. The second and third pins as the switch side input pins are electrically connected in parallel with the thermistor TH2, and one of the parallel connections is electrically connected to “+ 18V” from the dispensing control board 720. The other is electrically connected to an electrolytic capacitor C103 grounded. The electrolytic capacitor C103 removes and smoothes ripples (alternating current component convolved with voltage). Further, noise is removed by the capacitor C104 grounded.

Here, the game effect control unit 9 is placed in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3.
9 (the game effect unit 4 and various control boards attached thereto) is stored, the electrolytic capacitor C103 in the main control board 710 is already discharged.
According to such a configuration, even if the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected in a state where the power switch is turned on, the inrush current described above is the thermistor TH2. And the electrolytic capacitor C1
03 is charged. Thereby, + 18V of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a.
The welding due to the inrush current between the voltage supply line and the + 18V voltage supply line of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is suppressed, and the main control board 710 and the electric power downstream of the main control board 710 are suppressed. The reliability concerning the power supply of components and the like is suitably maintained.

Moreover, the unit-side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame-side main drawer connector 20
In the state in which 00b is properly connected, since the circuit in the relay switch circuit RL2 is turned on and current flows so as to avoid the thermistor TH2, the above-described entry of the + 18V voltage supply line While suppressing welding due to electric current, the power consumption during normal use can be suitably suppressed. The characteristic of the thermistor TH2 in this embodiment is the same as the characteristic of the thermistor TH1 described above. When a current flows through the thermistor TH2, its resistance value changes as the thermistor TH2 generates heat. Thereby, for example, even if the relay switch circuit RL2 does not operate, the thermistor T
When an inrush current flows through H2, the resistance value decreases and heat generation of the thermistor TH2 itself is suppressed, so that the thermistor TH2 can be prevented from being damaged.

Incidentally, when a fixed resistance that does not change its resistance value, such as cement resistance, is used as a protective resistance against inrush current, it is necessary to use a large type of high power that can withstand heat generation. For this reason, it is difficult to arrange electronic components that malfunction due to the influence of heat in the vicinity of the fixed resistance, and it is necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710. On the other hand, when the thermistor TH2 whose resistance value changes with temperature is used as a protective resistance against the inrush current, when the inrush current flows through the thermistor TH2, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH2 itself is suppressed. . For this reason, in the vicinity of the thermistor TH2,
Electronic components can be arranged, and it is not necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710 against the heat generated by the thermistor TH2. Note that the relay switch circuit RL2 in the present embodiment.
The characteristics of are the same as the characteristics of the relay switch circuit RL1 described above, and when the switch of the relay switch circuit RL2 is turned on, the inrush current has already decreased, and the resistance value is smaller than that of the thermistor TH2. It flows to the switch of the extremely small relay switch circuit RL2.

[Hot-line failure prevention circuit for “+ 9V”]
The hot line failure prevention circuit 2100c for “+ 9V” includes a relay switch circuit RL3 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Fujitsu Takamizawa: JV-18S-KT), a thermistor TH3 (in this embodiment,
Ishizuka Electronics: 5D2-11LC), an electrolytic capacitor C1, and a capacitor C2. The relay switch circuit RL3 has the same configuration as the relay switch circuits RL1 and RL2, and when a voltage is applied between the coil side input pins and a current is passed through the coil, the iron piece moves and the switch is turned on (ON). A circuit between switch side input pins is connected.
The first pin as the coil side input pin is grounded and the fourth pin as the coil side input pin is electrically connected to the above-mentioned smoothed “+ 18V”. As a result, a current flows through the coil and the switch is turned on. The second and third pins as the switch side input pins are electrically connected in parallel with the thermistor TH3, and one of the parallel connections is electrically connected to “+ 9V” from the dispensing control board 715. The other side is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded electrolytic capacitor C1. The electrolytic capacitor C1 removes and smoothes the ripple (the AC component convolved with the voltage). Further, noise is removed by the capacitor C2 grounded.

Here, the game effect control unit 9 is placed in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3.
9 (the game effect unit 4 and various control boards attached thereto) is stored, the electrolytic capacitor C1 in the main control board 710 is already discharged. According to such a configuration, even if the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected while the power switch is turned on, the inrush current described above is not affected by the thermistor TH3. And is charged by the electrolytic capacitor C1. This suppresses welding due to the inrush current between the + 9V voltage supply line of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the + 9V voltage supply line of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b, and the main control board 710, And the main control board 710
The reliability concerning the power supply of the electrical components and the like on the downstream side is suitably maintained.

Moreover, the unit-side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame-side main drawer connector 20
In a state in which 00b is properly connected, since the circuit in the relay switch circuit RL2 is turned on and current flows so as to avoid the thermistor TH2, the entry of the + 9V voltage supply line is performed. While suppressing welding due to electric current, the power consumption during normal use can be suitably suppressed. The characteristics of the thermistor TH3 in the present embodiment are the same as the characteristics of the thermistors TH1 and TH2, and when a current flows through the thermistor TH3, the resistance value changes as the thermistor TH3 generates heat. As a result, even when the relay switch circuit RL3 does not operate, for example, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH3, the resistance value decreases and the thermistor TH3 itself is prevented from generating heat, thereby preventing the thermistor TH3 from being damaged. be able to.

Incidentally, when a fixed resistance that does not change its resistance value, such as cement resistance, is used as a protective resistance against inrush current, it is necessary to use a large type of high power that can withstand heat generation. For this reason, it is difficult to arrange electronic components that malfunction due to the influence of heat in the vicinity of the fixed resistance, and it is necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710. On the other hand, when the thermistor TH2 whose resistance value changes with temperature is used as a protective resistance against the inrush current, when the inrush current flows through the thermistor TH3, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH3 itself is suppressed. . For this reason, in the vicinity of the thermistor TH3,
Electronic components can be arranged, and it is not necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710 against the heat generated by the thermistor TH3. Note that the relay switch circuit RL3 in the present embodiment.
The characteristics of are the same as the characteristics of the relay switch circuits RL1 and RL2 described above, and when the switch of the relay switch circuit RL3 is turned on, the inrush current has already decreased, and the resistance is higher than that of the thermistor TH3. The value flows through the switch of the relay switch circuit RL3 having a very small value.

In the above embodiment, the unit-side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b are electrically connected only by housing the game effect control unit 99 in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3. The main control board 710 is provided with a hot-wire failure prevention circuit 2100 under the background that the power supply is supplied to the electrical components below the main control board 710. That is, in this case, the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b with the power switch turned on.
Since the hot-wire failure prevention circuit 2100 is provided on the power supply line immediately below which is mistakenly connected, it is possible to appropriately ensure the reliability related to the power supply of the electrical components below the main control board 710. It becomes like this. However, in terms of protection from the inrush current, the board provided upstream of the main control board 710 (which is inferior to the above embodiment) (
The hot-wire failure prevention circuit 2100 may be provided on the power supply line of the payout control board 720) or the board provided downstream of the main control board 710.

In the above embodiment, the thermistors TH1, TH are used as resistances for protection from inrush current.
2, TH3 is used, but an appropriate resistor may be used. That is, in this case, the electrolytic capacitors C1, C101, and C103 are electrically connected in series with the resistors and the relays RL1, RL2, and RL3, but when inrush current flows, the electrolytic capacitors C1, C101, C103,
It flows to C103. For this reason, electrolytic capacitor C1 is obtained by converting the inrush current into heat with a resistor.
, C101, C103 can be reduced. On the other hand, after the inrush current flows, the electrolytic capacitors C1, C2 are not connected through the relays RL1, RL2, RL3.
A current is passed through 101 and C103. Thereby, destruction of resistance can be prevented.

The gaming machine of the present embodiment described above has the following technical idea. The following technical ideas are provided alone or in appropriate combination.

[Technology 1]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 is
A game board provided with a game area;
A lower component portion that is disposed at a lower front portion than the game board and has an overhang portion that protrudes forward so as to face the player;
A launch instruction means provided in the lower component part and capable of advancing a game by instructing the launch of a game ball toward the game area from the outside;
Launch means capable of launching a game ball from a predetermined launch position toward the game area according to an instruction from the outside via the launch instruction means;
A receiving port provided in the gaming area and capable of receiving a game ball launched by the launching means;
An acceptance detection means for detecting acceptance of a game ball at the acceptance port;
An open / close prize opening that is displaceable between a rejected ball mode in which a winning of a game ball launched by the launching means is impossible and a permitted ball mode in which a winning of a game ball is allowed, provided in the gaming area;
Opening / closing winning detection means for detecting winning of a game ball in the opening / closing winning opening;
Storage guide means provided in the lower component part, capable of storing a game ball and capable of guiding the stored game ball to the launch position;
Payout control means for controlling payout of the game ball toward the storage guide means based on at least detection by the open / close prize detection means;
Lottery means capable of performing a winning lottery process based on detection of game balls received by the reception detection means at the entrance;
Result teaching display means for teaching and displaying the result of the lottery processing by the lottery means;
Only when the result of the lottery process by the lottery means is a win, the game ball as the first game value can be given by displacing the open / close winning opening from the rejected ball mode to the allowed ball mode. And a first game value giving means,
Second game value giving means capable of giving an item different from the game ball as a second game value according to the progress of the game;
Item storage means provided in a part of the lower component part and having a storage part capable of storing the product that can be given by the second game value giving means,
The item storage means includes:
The storage portion is provided in front of the firing instruction means and the storage guide means and in the vicinity of the foremost position of the overhanging portion closest to the player so that the player can visually recognize it. It is a gaming machine characterized by this.

In the above gaming machine, a lower component is disposed at the lower part of the front side of the game board, and this lower component is provided with at least firing instruction means and storage guide means. Based on the acceptance of the game ball at the entrance, a lottery process related to the payout of the game ball is performed with a predetermined winning probability, and the winning of the game ball to the open / close prize opening is allowed according to the result of the lottery process Is done.
This open / close prize opening is in a rejected ball mode (for example, the open / close prize opening is closed) in which game balls cannot always be won, and only when the result of the lottery process is a win, It shifts to a permitted ball mode (for example, a mode in which an open / close winning port is opened) in which a winning is permitted, and a game ball as a first game value can be given by the first game value giving means. Specifically, the game ball as the first game value is paid out toward the storage guide means in accordance with the winning of the game ball at the opening / closing prize opening. In addition, if the open / close winning opening is repeatedly displaced over a plurality of rounds between the reject ball mode and the permitted ball mode, or if the open / close winning port is held in the permitted ball mode to such an extent that a large amount of game balls can be won, the game area A large amount of game balls are paid out with respect to the number of game balls fired toward. Here, “only when the result of the lottery process is a win” means not only a win involving the operation of the condition device but also a win not involving the operation of the condition device (generally referred to as “small win”). ) Is also included.

In this way, when the open / close winning opening is displaced from the rejected ball mode to the permitted ball mode, the payout rate as a ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout control means to the number of game balls launched toward the game area Will temporarily improve (rise). “Temporary” means that, for example, when a jackpot game is being executed, the opening / closing winning opening is maintained in the rejecting ball only for a specific period in which the opening / closing winning opening is displaced from the rejecting ball mode to the permitting ball mode. This is because the payout rate increases as compared with a predetermined period when the player is in the game (for example, in the normal gaming state). Although not described in the above technical idea, the normal gaming state is a gaming state in which a lottery process is performed with a predetermined probability by the lottery means based on the detection of the reception of the game ball by the acceptance detecting means (a jackpot game is executed). The lottery process based on the detection of the reception of the game ball by the reception detection means is not performed). Note that there are a gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the lottery process by the lottery means is performed with a normal probability and a gaming state (probability variation gaming state) in which the lottery processing is performed with a higher probability of winning than the normal probability. Although there is a certain gaming machine, when the jackpot game is executed, the payout rate increases as compared with both the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state.

In the above technical idea, in such a gaming machine, the game machine further includes a second game value imparting unit capable of imparting an item different from the game ball, and an item accommodating unit having an accommodating unit capable of accommodating the item. It was. The second game value giving means is not able to give a game ball only when the result of the lottery process is a win like the first game value giving means, on the premise that a game has been performed,
A product can be given at a specific opportunity. In this way, by allowing a predetermined item different from the game ball to be given as the second game value, the predetermined item can be changed according to the progress of the game without affecting the payout rate. It can be granted at any time. In other words, even if a predetermined product is given, it does not affect the payout rate, so that the condition for giving the product can be arbitrarily set as necessary (that is, in a flexible manner). In other words, regardless of whether the lottery process was performed or not,
When you want to give an item, you can easily give a predetermined item. This makes it possible to acquire items with a higher possibility in addition to the gameability aimed only at acquiring game balls as in conventional gaming machines, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. A specific example of “as needed” is 30 minutes after the power is turned on (that is, when the hall has just been opened) or when a predetermined number of game balls are fired (that is, a predetermined amount of game) And the like are exemplified.

In recent years, there are many gaming machines with a low probability of winning in the lottery process, and in order to acquire a large amount of game balls, it takes a certain amount of time and investment, so a large amount of game balls can be acquired. The possibility of acquiring an item different from the game ball can be obtained at least, thereby suppressing a decrease in game motivation. Here, as goods, the numbered ticket which a hall issues, a coffee service ticket, a parking lot service ticket (a parking lot may be charged in a downtown area), etc. are illustrated.

Unlike the case where it is easy to acquire a game ball simply because an item that does not affect the payout rate can be given, the hole does not suffer a unilateral loss. Not only that, you can also enjoy the effect of increasing the effect of attracting customers.

By the way, the lower component part is formed with an overhanging portion that protrudes forward so as to face the player, and the article storage means is ahead of the firing instruction means and the storage guide means (that is, on the player side). More specifically, it is provided in the vicinity of the foremost position of the overhanging portion closest to the player so that the inside of the accommodating portion can be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, the player can grasp the state in which the item is stored in the item storing means, and the game motivation can be stimulated.

Here, the configuration of the product storage means will be described in detail. The product storage means is provided with respect to a main body having a mounting member formed with a recess having a predetermined depth capable of storing the product, and a recess of the mounting member. A door portion that opens and closes and a door opening and closing mechanism that can open and close the door portion. When the door is closed with respect to the recess of the mounting member, it is impossible to take in and out the product from the main body, and when the door is open with respect to the concave of the mounting member, the product is removed from the main body. It becomes possible. In addition, as an aspect in which the housing portion can be visually recognized from the player, the door portion is formed of, for example, a transparent resin, and the main body portion and thus the mounting member so that the bottom surface of the recess can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine Is inclined toward the front (that is, the player side). Moreover, it is preferable that the item storage means is disposed so as to be tilted so that the player can visually recognize the storage portion without facing the player in front of the gaming machine. The “accommodating portion” is exemplified by an area in which an article formed by the door portion and the placing member can be accommodated when the door portion is in the closed position.

[Technology 2]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2 is
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1,
The item storage means includes:
A main body having a placement member disposed in a part of the lower component and having a recess with a predetermined depth on which the article can be placed;
A closed position in which the article cannot be taken in and out from the main body by covering the concave part, and an open position in which the article can be taken in and out from the main body by opening the concave part. A door that can be displaced between,
A door opening and closing mechanism that is disposed within the main body portion and can operate the door portion between the closed position and the open position;
The door opening / closing mechanism is capable of displacing the door portion between the closed position and the open position by operating the door portion within the main body portion with a predetermined one axis as an operating shaft. Machine.

In the above technical idea, the main body portion and thus the article accommodating means are arranged in a part of the lower component portion. Here, the article storage means has a door opening / closing mechanism capable of opening / closing the door portion disposed in the main body portion, and the door portion operates between an open position and a closed position in the main body portion with a predetermined one axis as an operating shaft. By being configured as described above, a compact size is achieved. In other words, as long as the space for placing the article storage means in the lower component part is secured, the article storage means can be arranged in the lower component part without taking into account the securing of the door opening / closing space and the door opening / closing mechanism. It becomes possible. In addition, as a mode in which the door portion operates between the open position and the closed position in the main body portion with a predetermined single axis as an operating shaft, for example, a mode in which the door portion rotates with a predetermined single axis as a rotation axis, a door portion A mode in which a curtain-like body typified by a shutter is wound up with a predetermined axis as a winding shaft, and a mode in which the operation direction of the door portion is changed with a predetermined axis on the open position side as a starting point are conceivable. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the space in the front-rear direction necessary for opening and closing the door portion, and it is possible to provide a highly functional item such as an article accommodating means, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. The “predetermined one axis” may be not only an actual operating axis but also a virtual axis on which the door portion operates.

[Technology 3]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3 is
In the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2,
The door opening and closing mechanism is
When the door portion is operated with the predetermined one axis as an operating shaft, the door portion is operated along the outer surface of the mounting member.

In the above technical idea, the door portion is moved between the open position and the closed position by operating along the outer surface of the mounting member, so that the door portion opens and closes without using a wasteful space. As a result, the item storage means is made more compact, and it is possible to improve the function of the gaming machine and to suppress the decrease in interest. The “outer surface of the mounting member” is not the mounting surface on the side where the article is mounted, but the back surface of the mounting surface. Further, “activate the door portion along the outer surface of the mounting member” means that the door portion and the outer surface of the mounting member are arranged so that a gap is not generated between the door portion and the mounting member as much as possible. In this case, the door portion is operated while facing the surface.

[Technology 4]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4 is
In the gaming machine described in technical idea 3,
The mounting member is formed in a sector shape in which a cross section perpendicular to the predetermined one axis has a substantially constant curvature radius,
When the door portion operates between the closed position and the open position, a cross section orthogonal to the predetermined one axis is formed in a sector shape having a substantially constant curvature radius so as to follow the outer surface of the mounting member. It is a gaming machine characterized by

In the above technical idea, the cross section of the mounting member orthogonal to the predetermined one axis is formed in a sector shape having a substantially constant curvature radius. That is, when a section of the mounting member orthogonal to the predetermined one axis is viewed, the distance (curvature radius) from the predetermined one axis to an arbitrary position of the mounting member is substantially constant. In addition, the door portion is also formed in a sector shape having a substantially constant curvature radius in a cross section perpendicular to a predetermined axis. However, when the door portion operates between the closed position and the open position, it follows the outer surface of the mounting member, so that the curvature radius of the cross section of the door portion orthogonal to the predetermined one axis is orthogonal to the predetermined one axis. This is slightly larger than the radius of curvature of the cross section of the mounting member. With this configuration, the door portion and the outer surface of the mounting member can be located at any position from the open position to the closed position (or from the closed position to the open position). The gap between is substantially constant. As a result, only a minimum necessary space is used for opening and closing the door, so that the article storage means can be made even more compact.

[Technology 5]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 2 to 4,
The door opening and closing mechanism is
When the door portion is operated with the predetermined one axis as an operating shaft, the door portion is moved from the player side toward the gaming machine side to displace the door portion from the open position to the closed position. Is a gaming machine characterized by

In the above technical idea, when the door portion is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the door portion is operated from the player side toward the gaming machine side with a predetermined axis as an operation axis. As described in the technical idea 2, the article storage means is disposed in a part of the lower component. The game balls stored in the storage guide means provided in the lower component are guided to the launch position one by one. Therefore, in order to rectify the game balls stored in the storage guide means, the player may carry the hand to the storage guide means. In addition, in general, a part of the lower component part, for example,
Operation means such as a lending button for lending a game ball as a game medium, and a ball removal button for removing a game ball stored in the storage guidance means from the storage guidance means (so-called “ball removal”) Is arranged. The player often moves his hand to the lower component to operate these operating means. Therefore, if a concave portion or an opening is formed in the article accommodating means provided in the lower component, the hand may be pinched with the player's palm facing downward. In other words, if the player places his palm down on the lower component, his / her finger may enter the recess of the article storage means. As the finger is pushed upward along with the operation from the player side toward the gaming machine side, the fear of pinching the hand is suppressed.

[Technology 6]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 6 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 2 to 5,
The door part is
When in the closed position, at least both the end on the open position side and the end on the closed position side can be locked in a state where they overlap the mounting member, and
Even if an external load is applied when locked in the closed position, the surface of the door is configured to be a smooth surface so that displacement in the direction toward the open position is difficult. It is a featured gaming machine.

According to the above technical idea, the gap is formed when the operation of the door is locked in a state where the concave portion of the mounting member is covered so that the article cannot be taken in and out of the main body (that is, the door is in the closed position). In order not to occur, the door portion and the mounting member overlap each other. Here, it is preferable that end portions of the entire periphery of the door portion overlap the mounting member, but at least both end portions on the direction side where the door portion opens and closes (for example, the front side if the door portion opens and closes in the front-rear direction) If the end portion and the rear end portion) and the mounting member overlap, it is difficult to forcefully open the door portion.

Furthermore, when the operation is locked at the closed position of the door portion, the surface of the door portion is configured to be smooth so that it is difficult to apply an external load to the door portion to open the recess. Thereby, the situation where the goods accommodated in the goods accommodation means are stolen by the cheating which opens a door part compulsorily is suppressed.

Here, the surface of the door portion is a surface that can be visually recognized by the player when the door portion is in the closed position (ie, an exposed surface). In other words, it is the surface on the back side of the surface facing the placement member when the door portion is in the closed position. Moreover, what is comprised by the smooth surface is what is comprised by the plane and curved surface in which the uneven | corrugated | grooved part which can operate a door part from a closed position toward an open position is not formed. That is, if the wall is not formed in the direction in which the door can be opened and closed, it is difficult to operate the door from the closed position toward the open position. However, if it is difficult to apply an external load to the door portion to open the recess, some grooves may be formed along the direction in which the door portion can be opened and closed. Further, it is further preferable that wax or the like is applied to the surface of the door portion having a smooth surface so that it is more difficult to apply an external load to the door portion to open the concave portion.

The operation lock of the door portion is realized by using, for example, a motor with a brake as a door opening / closing mechanism or by connecting the door portion and the mounting member when the door portion covers the recess.

In this way, when the door portion is in the closed position, a gap is not generated between the door portion and the mounting member, and the surface of the door portion is configured to have a smooth surface, thereby opening the door portion relative to the door portion. As a result, it is difficult not to take out the goods illegally.For example, even when a motor with a brake is used as a door opening / closing mechanism, Can be suppressed.

[Technology 7]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 7 is
In the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 6,
The main body further includes a box-shaped box member provided in a part of the lower component and having an opening formed at an upper end thereof, and the mounting member is received from the opening of the box member. And
When the door portion is in the closed position, both the end portion on the open position side and the end portion on the closed position side are sandwiched and locked between the box member and the mounting member. It is a gaming machine characterized by this.

In the above technical idea, the main body portion further includes a box-like box member having an opening formed at the upper end, and this box member and thus the main body portion is provided in a part of the lower component. When the door portion operates from the open position to the closed position, the end on the closed position side enters between the box member and the mounting member without a gap. That is, a gap is formed between the box member and the placement member so that the door can enter (that is, approximately the same as or slightly larger than the thickness of the door). And if a door part enters between this box member and a mounting member and the recessed part of a mounting member is closed, the action | operation of a door part will be locked. At this time, the edge part of the door part by the side of an open position is also between a box member and a mounting member. Thereby, when there is a door part in a closed position, since there is no gap which helps open the door part, it becomes much more difficult to open the door part illegally.

The “game board” described in the above technical idea corresponds to the game panel 409 of the present embodiment. The “overhang portion” described in the technical idea corresponds to the upper surface cover portion 302 and the front surface cover portion 303 in the unit frame 301 of the present embodiment. "Lower component" described in the above technical idea
Corresponds to the dish unit 300 of the present embodiment. "Launching instruction means" described in the above technical idea
Corresponds to the handle unit 318 of this embodiment. “Launching means” described in the above technical idea corresponds to the launching device 57 of the present embodiment. The “accepting port” described in the technical idea corresponds to the start ports 600, 602, and 604 of the present embodiment. The “acceptance detection means” described in the technical idea corresponds to the start port sensors 780, 782, and 784 of the present embodiment. The “open / close prize opening” described in the above technical idea corresponds to the big prize opening 500a of the present embodiment. The “opening / closing winning detection means” described in the above technical idea corresponds to the opening / closing device count sensor 776 of the present embodiment.
The “storage guide means” described in the technical idea corresponds to the dish body 360 of the present embodiment. The “payout control means” described in the technical idea corresponds to the payout control board 720 of the present embodiment. The “lottery means” described in the technical idea corresponds to the special symbol lottery means 900 and 910 of the present embodiment. The “result teaching display means” described in the above technical idea is the special symbol display 84 of the present embodiment.
, 86. The “first game value giving means” described in the technical idea corresponds to the jackpot game execution means 715 of the present embodiment. “Second Game Value Providing Unit” described in the above technical idea
Corresponds to the article application control means 964 of the present embodiment. The “article accommodation means” described in the technical idea corresponds to the article accommodation unit 1200 of the present embodiment. As described in the above technical idea,
The “accommodating portion” refers to the opening / closing door portion 1203 when the opening / closing door portion 1203 of the present embodiment is in the closed position.
It corresponds to an area in which an article formed by the mounting portion 1202 can be accommodated. The “mounting member” described in the technical idea corresponds to the mounting portion 1202 of the present embodiment. The “main body part” described in the above technical idea corresponds to the main body part 1201 of the present embodiment. The “door part” described in the technical idea corresponds to the opening / closing door part 1203 of the present embodiment. "Door opening and closing mechanism" described in the above technical idea
Corresponds to the door drive mechanism 1204 of this embodiment. "Predetermined axis" described in the above technical idea
Corresponds to the shaft portion 1210 of the present embodiment. The “box member” described in the technical idea corresponds to a box-shaped body including the side wall portion 1208 and the bottom surface portion 1209 of the present embodiment.

Moreover, although this invention is described in said preferable embodiment, this invention is not restrict | limited only to it. Various embodiments are possible without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which obstruct | occluded the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. BB sectional view (A) in FIG. 8, CC sectional view (B) in FIG. 10 (A), DD sectional view (C) in FIG. 10 (A), E-in FIG. It is E sectional drawing (D). It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a side view of the main body frame before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back side. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a ball payout device, and a ball payout passage. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a ball payout device, and a ball payout passage. It is front sectional drawing of a ball path unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the ball dispensing apparatus. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a perspective view which shows the flow of the game ball | bowl in a ball | bowl discharge path. It is a top view for demonstrating an effect | action of a full tank rocking | fluctuation board. It is a front enlarged view centering on the junction part of a main part frame and a game production unit, (A) is a figure showing the injection mode of a game ball in a ball guide passage, and (B) is a figure of a game ball in a ball guide passage. It is a figure which shows a backflow aspect. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is a figure which shows the structure of the main drawer connector and the sub drawer connector. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the center of the vertical direction of a pachinko machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the 1st surrounding wall and 2nd surrounding wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding frame for the door frame and the sliding frame for the body frame that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device, (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding frame for door frames, and the sliding frame for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door lens unit attached to the front side of a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing the relationship between the lens cover of the door lens unit and the lens cover provided on the dish unit. It is a front view of a door frame at the time of removing the member irradiated to LED among the members which constitute a speaker cover and a decoration member. It is a front view of the dish unit provided in the front of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the plate unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back surface of the plate unit. (A) is a perspective view which shows the external appearance of an articles | goods accommodation unit, (b) is a top view of an article accommodation unit, (c) is the AA line schematic sectional drawing of (b). (A) is a front view at the time of closure of an article storage unit, (b) is a BB line schematic sectional view of (a). (A) is a front view at the time of open | release of an article | item storage unit, (b) is a BB schematic sectional drawing of (a). It is an exploded perspective view of an article storage unit. It is a perspective sectional view showing the dish unit with which the article storage unit was installed. It is sectional drawing of the dish unit with which the articles | goods accommodation unit was mounted | worn. It is a front view of a game production unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the game production unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a game production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back surface of the game production unit. It is a front perspective enlarged view of a game production unit excluding a center character and a back unit. It is a back perspective enlarged view of a game production unit except a center character and a back unit. It is a side cross-sectional enlarged view of the game effect unit excluding the center combination and the back unit. FIG. 58 is an enlarged exploded perspective view of the game effect unit shown in FIGS. 56 and 57 as viewed from the front. FIG. 58 is an enlarged exploded perspective view of the game effect unit shown in FIGS. 56 and 57 as viewed from the back. It is a plane sectional view of a pachinko machine. It is a plane sectional view of a pachinko machine, and is a figure where a main part frame opened to an outer frame, and a door frame opened to a main part frame. It is side surface sectional drawing of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a main substrate. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a peripheral substrate. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure at the time of article | item accommodation unit mounting | wearing, Comprising: It is the figure which mainly showed the structure of a periphery board | substrate periphery. It is a functional block diagram which shows roughly the functional structure of a main control board and a periphery control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main system process which CPU mounted in the main control board of a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st, 2nd, 3rd starting opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a hit fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the fluctuation pattern for every fluctuation pattern table set in a hit fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a high disappointment fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the variation pattern for every variation pattern table set in a high anticipation variation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a low expectation variation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the variation pattern for every variation pattern table set in a low expectation | forecast variation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of specific condition satisfaction. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory big hit control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a switchgear apparatus operation process. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus in an external normal game state (External normal game state A or external normal game state B). It is a figure which shows the image which shows the one aspect | mode of the production | presentation aspect which appears on an effect display apparatus when it exists in an external normal game state. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus in time limit mode. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus when it rushes into promotion mode after the long open jackpot game based on the 1st long open jackpot ends. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus when it rushes into promotion mode after the short open big hit game based on the 1st short open big hit ends. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus in "retraction mode." It is a figure which shows the production | presentation display aspect in the case of deriving the lottery result by the 1st special symbol lottery means or the lottery result by the 2nd special symbol lottery means to an effect display device in an external normal game state. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation display mode derived | led-out by the production | presentation display apparatus, when a specific condition is satisfied in an external normal game state, or when winning a short opening jackpot etc. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation display mode derived | led-out by the production | presentation display apparatus, when a specific condition is satisfied in an external normal game state, or when winning a short opening jackpot etc. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation display aspect in the case of deriving the lottery result by the 1st special symbol lottery means or the lottery result by the 2nd special symbol lottery means to an effect display device in an external advantageous game state. It is a timing chart which shows the said control mode when the production | presentation control concerning "extended extension | expansion and deviation deviation twice" is performed. It is a front view of the game effect unit when the “special light emission effect” is being executed. It is a front view of the game effect unit when the “special light emission effect” is being executed. (A) is a figure which shows the display mode of the decoration symbol in an external normal game state, (b) is a figure which shows the display mode of the decoration symbol in an external advantageous game state. It is a figure which shows the table (reach symbol determination table) used for reach symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the table (re-lottery symbol determination table) used for the process concerning a re-lottery effect. It is an effect image which shows a series of effect contents which appear on an effect display device in an external normal game state. It is an effect image which shows a series of effect contents which appear on an effect display device in an external normal game state. It is an effect image which shows a series of effect contents which appear on an effect display device in an external normal game state. It is an effect image which shows a series of effect contents which appear on an effect display device in an external advantageous game state. It is a circuit diagram which shows a hot wire failure prevention circuit.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game production | presentation unit 5 Door frame 6 Lower decoration board 6a Decoration cover board 6C Fixing protrusion 6D Fixing hole 6E Fixing screw 6F Guide board 7 Upper support metal fitting 7E Hanging piece part 8 Lower support Metal fitting 8C Mounting hole 10 Upper frame plate 10B Engagement notch 10C Insertion hole 11 Lower frame plate 11B Engagement notch 11C Insertion hole 12 Side frame plate 12a Outer wall portion 12b Thickness portion 12A Outer frame inner space 12B Installation hole 12C Installation hole 12D Mounting hole 12E Mounting hole 12F Groove portion 12G Space portion 12H Recess 13 Side frame plate 13a Outer wall portion 13b Thickness portion 13A Outer frame space 13B Mounting hole 13C Mounting hole 13D Mounting hole 13F Groove portion 13G Space portion 13H Recess 14 Connecting member 15 Connecting hole 15B Connecting screw 16 Connecting hole 16B Connecting screw 17 Mounting screw 18 Mounting screw 19 Supporting protruding piece 19A Supporting saddle hole 20 Game area 20a Image display area 20b Ball flow area 21 Support protrusion 22 Closing protrusion 22B Mounting screw 23 Closing protrusion 23B Mounting screw 24 Peripheral control board box 25 Main control board box 28 Sphere slot 29 Launch guide path 30 Game effect unit installation recess 32 Plate Section 33 Upper security double groove 34 Side security groove 35 Security recess 37 Projection rail 38 Launch rail 39 Prize ball paying stopper mechanism 40 Launcher mounting portion 40a Handle connection window 41 Fastening hole 42, 43 Engaging groove 44 Rail connection member 44b Upper surface Part 46 Game effect unit fixture 47 Upper shaft support bracket 48 Lower shaft support bracket 49 Shaft support side 50 Prize ball tank 51 Tank rail member 51a Order supply device 52 Ball passage unit 53 Ball delivery device 54 Board unit 55 Delivery control board box 56 Terminal board box 57 Launcher 57a Hitting ball 58 Back cover 59 Dispensing passage 60 Locking device 62 Power supply board box 63 Ball feed mechanism 64 Board tray 68 Door relay board 70 Rear opening 78 Guide rail 80 LED display area 82 Normal symbol display 84 First special symbol indicator 86 Second special symbol indicator 88 First special symbol hold indicator 90 Second special symbol hold indicator 92 Normal symbol hold indicator 99 Game effect control unit 100 Door frame main body 101 Game window 102 Speaker opening 103 Prize ball passing port 104 Opening 105 Lid opening 106 Lock Hole 107 Slide unit mounting recess 108 Lever 110 Mounting opening 111 Engaging projection 112 Door frame protruding piece 115 Production display device 116 Attaching projection 118 Attaching / detaching locking portion 119 Display device control board box 120 Door lens unit 121 Lens base body 122 Upper reflector 123 Cathode tube support piece 125 Electrode support part 1 27 Electrode cover 128a, 128b Speaker through hole 130a, 130b Side reflector 131a, 131b Electrode support 132 Upper cold cathode tube 133 Rubber sleeve 134a, 134b Side cold cathode tube 135a, 135b Rubber sleeve 136 Inverter substrate 137 LED substrate 138a, 138b LED board 140 Lens cover 141 Upper lens cover part 141c Front lens part 142a, 142b Side lens cover part 142c Front lens part 143a, 143b Speaker mounting holes 144a, 144b Speaker 145a Speaker cones 146a, 146b Speaker covers 147a, 147b Mesh cover 148a, 148b Decoration member attachment area 149a, 149b Decoration member 150 Red lens part 151 Cover base plate 152 LED substrate 154 Sp Frame 155 Decoration base plate 156 LED board 158 Decoration frame 159a, 159b Decoration plate 160 Reinforcement sheet metal 161 Upper reinforcement sheet metal 162 Shaft support side reinforcement sheet metal 163 Opening side reinforcement sheet metal 164 Lower reinforcement sheet metal 165 Upper bent protrusion 166 Lower bent protrusion Piece 167 Characteristic bent protrusion 172 Shaft support side short bent protrusion 173 Open side outer bent protrusion 174 Open side inner bent protrusion 175 Engagement opening 176 Hook cover 177 Prize ball passing port covering portion 178 Bending projection piece 179 Bending projection piece 180 Vertical folding projection piece 190 Glass unit 191 Unit frame 194 Stopping piece 195 Hooking projection piece 199 Security protrusion plate portion 200 Engaging groove 201 Glass plate 210 Security cover 211 Contact recess 212 Anti-crime protrusion 213 Mounting elastic piece 214 Anti-crimping protrusion 215 Anti-crime end edge protrusion 220 Mounting base 221 Prize ball passing opening 222 Mounting unit Portion 223 Lid opening 224 Standing wall 226 Unit 227 Ball flight guide surface 230 Slide unit 231 Slide engagement / disconnection piece 240 Frame decoration relay terminal plate 241 Relay board cover 280 Back cover support cylinder 290 First peripheral wall 290a Insertion hole 291 First Two peripheral wall 292 Third peripheral wall 293 Fourth peripheral wall 294 Open side rear wall 295 Upper rear wall 296 Pivot side rear wall 300 Dish unit 301 Unit frame 302 Upper surface cover portion 302a Vertical cover portion 303 Front cover portion 304 Front decorative plate 305 Dish body upper surface opening 306 Operation button unit concave space 307 Decoration space 310 Space portion forming member 310a Connector 310b Wiring storage opening 313 First ball removal button 313a First ball removal button opening 314 Sliding support member 315a, 315b Speaker openings 316a and 316b Cover 317 Handle mounting hole 318 Handle unit 318a Rotating operation member 319 Engagement cam 320 Second ball release button opening 322 Ball discharge port 323 Ball rental button unit opening 324 Ball rental unit 325 Fastener insertion hole 326 Operation button unit 327 Operation button 330 Lower speaker unit 331 Speaker box main body 337 Ball passage passage front 338 Guide rod 341a, 341b Speaker 350 Lock mounting hole 351 Lock locking hole 352 Door hook hole 353 Lock mounting hole 354 Cylinder lock through hole 360 Dish body 361 Storage portion 362 Guide passage portion 364 Ball extraction passage portion 365 Slide valve 366 Rotating member 367 Rotating shaft 369 Spring 375 Ball extraction valve 383 Side opening lid 388 Sphere extraction opening 395 Power supply board 400 Second ball extraction link unit 401 Second ball extraction Button 409 game 409a Fitting hole 409b Long hole 409c Engagement step portion 409d Inner rail fixing hole 409e Opening portion 409f Lower hole 410 Obstacle nail 414 First link 415 Ball removal connection passage 419 Second link 430 Dish cover body 431 Prize ball contact rod 432 Opening lid attachment window 433 Ball exit passage rear 樋 434 Upper guide 樋 435 Lower guide 樋 436 Guide hole 462 Inner rail unit 463 Backflow prevention member 464 Rail security groove 465 Security projection 466 Positioning recess 467 Game effect unit stop 468 Speaker cutout 469 Fastening portion 471 Out port 472 Outer rail unit 472a Rail surface 472b Lower end portion 473 Communication port 473a Foul ball guide passage 476 Stop portion 477 Connection passage portion 477a Upper surface 477b Stop wall portion 478 Passage notch portion 482 Guide rail 489 Foul port 500 Switchgear 500 a Large winning opening 500b Large winning opening opening / closing door 504 Panel back plate 504a Screw hole 504b Positioning hole 504c Locking claw 504d Recessed portion 504e Opening 505 Substrate holder 505a Game ball outlet 505b Bottom plate 505c Relief portion 505d Substrate support portion 505e Fixed boss 505f Through hole 505g Opening receiving portion 508 Lamp drive board box 510 Back unit 510G Production space 514 Back box 514a Opening portion 514b Fixing portion 514c Positioning projection 515 First screw 516 Removable groove 518 Removable mechanism 520 Light decorative body 521 Decoration plate 530 Blade type Decorative body 535 LED board 540 Panel holder 540a Fitting step 540b Through hole 540c Engaging protrusion 540d Engaging claw 540e Protruding pin 540f Boss insertion hole 540g Mounting support 540h Housing recess 540i Locking part 540j First mounting hole 540k Second mounting hole 540l Positioning hole 540m Thickening portion 540n Positioning portion 540o Communication hole 540p Communication hole 550 Second warp passage 554 Second warp outlet 560 Second stage 560a Front stage 560b Rear stage 562 Special receiving port 564 Normal receiving port 566 Second warp outlet side end 568 Second warp counter-exit side end 580 Rotating and distributing accessory 580a Magnetic attachment part 590 Disc-like accessory 591 Main body part 592 Lower electrical decoration body 594 Upper electrical decoration body 596 Medium Illuminated body 600 First start port 602 Second start port 604 Third start port 606 Movable piece 612 Pass gate 614 General winning port 620 Center accessory 621 Opening 621a Transparent plate 622 Frame-shaped decorative body 630 Feather-shaped decorative body 632 Feather Mold decorative body 632a Window portion 641 Substrate cover 642 Wiring opening 643 Mounting piece 644 Wiring retaining piece 645 Out ball passage 646 Fitting hole 648 Main drawer relay board 649 Sub drawer relay board 650 First warp passage 652 First warp inlet 654 First warp outlet 658 Warp guide piece 660 First stage 662 Mountain portion 664 Valley Portion 666 First warp outlet side end 668 First warp opposite outlet side end 680 Front component 680a Opening 680c Positioning fixing boss 680d Positioning protrusion 685 U-shaped base 685a Side surface 685b Side surface 700 Main board 702 First special symbol display control Means 704 Second special symbol display control means 710 Main control board 711 CPU
712 ROM
713 RAM
714 Opening / closing device operation processing means 715 Big hit game execution means 715a Long open big hit game execution means 715b Short open big hit game execution means 716 Normal symbol display control means 718 Normal symbol hold display control means 720 Discharge control board 722 CPU
724 ROM
726 RAM
730 Full switch 736 Inner frame opening switch 738 Door opening switch 750 Panel relay terminal plate 751 Fitting protrusion 753 External terminal plate 754 Opening and closing device relay terminal plate 760 Gate sensor 762 General winning opening sensor 768 Normal symbol / special symbol display board 774 Normal Electric accessory solenoid 776 Opening / closing device count sensor 778 Opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 780 First start port sensor 782 Second start port sensor 784 Third start port sensor 800 Peripheral board 810 Peripheral control board 811 CPU
812 ROM
813 RAM
816 Display Device Control Board 818 Sound Source IC
819 ROM
832 CPU
834 RAM
836 ROM
838 VDP
839 Image ROM
842 Frame decoration lamp 850 Lamp drive board 852 Panel decoration lamp 853 Center decoration lamp 854 Discharge port detection sensor 860 Hook through opening 861 Screw fixing portion 862 Locking protrusion 863 Insertion hole 864 Rivet 865 Fraud prevention notch 866 Lock attachment piece 867 Lock insertion Hole 868 Cylinder lock 869 Lock attachment board 870 Screw 871 Attachment hole 872 Lock shaft 873 Engagement cam 874 Engagement protrusion 875 Engagement protrusion 876 Screw 877 Insertion vertical opening 878 Insertion vertical opening 879 Spring locking piece 880 Horizontal hole 882 First Fraud prevention member 882a Inclined portion 883 Oscillating shaft hole 884 Projection piece insertion hole 885 Stopper piece portion 886 Guide pin 887 Pin hole 888 Connection hole 889 Restriction protrusion 890 Second fraud prevention member 892 Connection hole 893 Connection pin 894 Spring 896 Spring engagement Blind hole 897 abutment portion 898 Stop hole 900 First special symbol lottery means 902 First special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 903 First special symbol hold counter 904 First special symbol success / failure determination means 906 First normal special symbol determination table 907 Second normal special symbol Judgment table 908 First probability variation special symbol determination table 909 Second probability variation special symbol determination table 910 Second special symbol lottery means 912 Second special symbol validity determination random number acquisition means 913 Second special symbol hold counter 914 Second special symbol validity determination Means 920 Normal symbol lottery means 922 Normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 923 Normal symbol hold means 924 Normal symbol success / failure determination means 926 Normal common symbol determination table 927 Open extended normal symbol determination table 928 Movable piece opening / closing control means 930 First special symbol Hold display control means 932 Second special symbol hold display control means 934 Game state control Means 938 Opening / closing operation control means 940 Reservation order storage means 946 Command transmission means 950 Command reception means 960 Production lottery means 962 Production control means 964 Article application control means 971 Door frame sliding rod 973 Door frame hook portion 974 Rivet slot 976 Guide protrusion 978 Play hole 979 Lifting engagement hole 980 Spring hook portion 981 Contact elastic piece 982 Spring 983 Notch portion 984 Main body frame sliding rod 985 Upper hook member 986 Lower hook member 987 Connecting wire rod 988 Hook portion 989 Rivet Long hole 991 Protruding piece moving hole 993 Spring hook portion 994 Connecting hole 995 Connecting hole 996 Rivet long hole 997 Lowering engagement hole 998 Playing hole 999 Protruding piece moving hole 1000 First special symbol corresponding symbol 1002 Second special symbol corresponding symbol 1004 Timer 1014 Hook part 101 5 abutment portion 1016 abutment portion 1017 engagement notch portion 1150 hold display area 1151 first hold display area 1151a first hold storage display section 1151b second hold storage display section 1151c third hold storage display section 1151d 4 on-hold storage display section 1152 2nd on-hold display area 1152a 5th on-hold storage display section 1152b 6th on-hold storage display section 1152c 7th on-hold storage display section 1152d 8th on-hold storage display section 1153 Decorative design 1153a left Symbol row 1153b Middle symbol row 1153c Right symbol row 1153d Decoration image 1160 Optical vortex image 1200 Article storage unit 1201 Main body portion 1202 Placement portion 1203 Open / close door portion 1204 Door drive mechanism 1205 Light emitting diode 1206 for illumination Infrared distance measuring sensor 1207 Upper surface portion 1208 Side wall 1209 Bottom surface 1210 Axis Portion 1211 door housing portion 1212 motor 1213, 1214, 1215, 1216 gear 1217 motor opening 1404 discharge port 1412 passage 1413 ball leveling member 1414 ball retainer plate 1415 gear cover 1416 shaft gear 1417 shaft pin 1421 bending passage wall 1422 ball dropping passage 1422a Front and rear bent passage portion 1422b Left and right bent passage portion 1422c Vertical passage portion 1423 Cutout portion 1424 Detection piece 1425 Spindle 1426 Ball break switch 1427 Actuator 1428 Stopper projection 1429 Ball clogging insertion groove 1451 Unit base body 1452 Bent passage wall 1453 Distribution space 1456 Bearing cylinder 1457 Sprocket 1458 Rotating shaft 1459 Passage partition wall 1460 Prize ball passage 1461 Ball removal passage 1462 Discharge ball detection sensor 1464 Data storage space 1465 Discharge motor 1468 Motor shaft 1469 Guide protrusion 1472 Detachable button 1475 Unit sub-plate 1476 Relay board area 1480 Relay board 1481 Connector 1485 Board cover 1488 Button opening 1490 Gear opening 1490 Aluminum heat sink 1493 First Gear 1494 Second gear 1495 Shaft 1497 Third gear 1498 Shaft 1500 Detection disk 1501 Detection notch 1502 Gear portion 1504 Sensor board 1505 Sensor 1507 Board mounting portion 1510 Gear cover 1521 Box main body 1522 Side guidance passage 1523 Side guidance receiving portion 1524 Buffer member 1525 Reverse side guide passage 1526 Partition wall 1527 Inclined side wall 1528 Switch storage space 1529 Spindle pin 1530 Shaft spring 1531 Full swing plate 1532 Detection piece 1534 Stopper piece 1535 Front guide passage 1536 Ball exit 1537 Foul ball passage 1538 Foul ball entrance 1541 Lid 1542 Prize ball entrance 1543 Switch mounting portion 1547 Wire drawing recess 1549 Spring locking pin 2000 Main drawer connector 2000a Unit side main drawer connector 2000b Frame side main drawer connector 2001a Terminal 2001b Contact 2002 Sub drawer connector 2002a Unit side sub drawer connector 2002b Frame side sub drawer connector 2003a Terminal 2003b Contact 2010 Connector for discharge control board 2012 Door frame connector 2100 Active line failure prevention circuit 2100a Active line Failure prevention circuit 2100b Hot line failure prevention circuit 2100c Hot line failure prevention circuit 5131 2 processing area

Claims (1)

A game board provided with a game area;
A lower component portion that is disposed at a lower front portion than the game board and has an overhang portion that protrudes forward so as to face the player;
A launch instruction means provided in the lower component part and capable of advancing a game by instructing the launch of a game ball toward the game area from the outside;
Launch means capable of launching a game ball from a predetermined launch position toward the game area according to an instruction from the outside via the launch instruction means;
A receiving port provided in the gaming area and capable of receiving a game ball launched by the launching means;
An acceptance detection means for detecting acceptance of a game ball at the acceptance port;
An open / close prize opening that is displaceable between a rejected ball mode in which a winning of a game ball launched by the launching means is impossible and a permitted ball mode in which a winning of a game ball is allowed, provided in the gaming area;
Opening / closing winning detection means for detecting winning of a game ball in the opening / closing winning opening;
Storage guide means provided in the lower component part, capable of storing a game ball and capable of guiding the stored game ball to the launch position;
Payout control means for controlling payout of the game ball toward the storage guide means based on at least detection by the open / close prize detection means;
Lottery means capable of performing a winning lottery process based on detection of game balls received by the reception detection means at the entrance;
Result teaching display means for teaching and displaying the result of the lottery processing by the lottery means;
Only when the result of the lottery process by the lottery means is a win, the game ball as the first game value can be given by displacing the open / close winning opening from the rejected ball mode to the allowed ball mode. And a first game value giving means,
Second game value giving means capable of giving an item different from the game ball as a second game value according to the progress of the game;
Item storage means provided in a part of the lower component part and having a storage part capable of storing the product that can be given by the second game value giving means,
The item storage means includes:
The accommodating portion is provided in front of the firing instructing means and the storage guiding means and in the vicinity of the foremost position of the overhanging portion closest to the player so that the player can visually recognize it. A gaming machine characterized by that.